summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/texmf-dist/doc
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2018-09-13 10:28:30 +0900
committerNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2018-09-13 10:28:30 +0900
commit26f4947f509c2440ce28e625133a15f6a2446920 (patch)
tree8789ff207ced3a161133a246fca03446b24b3edc /texmf-dist/doc
parent6ec0713f46508d1e4aa5741e30152add5e10776f (diff)
update acrotex
Diffstat (limited to 'texmf-dist/doc')
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/README.md6
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb.js24
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.pdfbin1347425 -> 1347884 bytes
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.tex12349
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/eformman.pdfbin1113952 -> 1169604 bytes
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/eformman.tex3647
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/examples/webeqtst.pdfbin215958 -> 192229 bytes
7 files changed, 16025 insertions, 1 deletions
diff --git a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/README.md b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/README.md
index d071003e..b05e63eb 100644
--- a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/README.md
+++ b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/README.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
The AcroTeX eDucation Bundle
Author: D. P. Story
-Dated: 2018/03/22
+Dated: 2018/08/16
AeB contains the following:
@@ -19,6 +19,10 @@ AeB contains the following:
6) Documentation for AeB (AcroTeX eDucatation Bundle) and eForms
(including insdljs and dljslib).
+What's New (2018/08/16) Changes to eforms and insdljs: several keys (eforms) added to
+support aeb_mlink and annot_pro; switch add to insdljs to detect whether document JS
+has been included.
+
What's New (2018/03/22) Changes in eforms to support features of aeb_mlink. Minor bug fixes
What's New (2018/02/13) Added commands to optionally group each solution when the appear
diff --git a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb.js b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb.js
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..09310d2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb.js
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+/*
+ AEB Import FDF Methods
+
+ Copyright (C) 2006--2016 AcroTeX.Net
+ D. P. Story
+ http://www.acrotex.net
+
+ Version 1.0
+*/
+if ( typeof aebTrustedFunctions == "undefined") {
+ aebTrustedFunctions = app.trustedFunction( function ( doc, oFunction, oArgs )
+ {
+ app.beginPriv();
+ var retn = oFunction( oArgs, doc )
+ app.endPriv();
+ return retn;
+ });
+}
+aebImportAnFDF = app.trustPropagatorFunction( function ( oArgs, doc )
+{
+ app.beginPriv();
+ doc.importAnFDF(oArgs);
+ app.endPriv();
+});
diff --git a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.pdf b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.pdf
index 6d28abb5..a16c0c3b 100644
--- a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.pdf
+++ b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.tex b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8798115e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,12349 @@
+\RequirePackage[!use=preview,!use=usebw]{spdef}
+\documentclass{article}
+%\usepackage{makeidx,showidx}
+\usepackage[fleqn]{amsmath}
+\usepackage[%
+ web={centertitlepage,designv,
+ forcolorpaper,latextoc,pro},
+ exerquiz={nocorrections},aebxmp,
+ dljslib={ImplMulti,limitArith,nodec,satisfyEq}
+]{aeb_pro}
+%\usepackage{myriadpro}
+\usepackage[altbullet]{lucidbry}
+\usepackage{aeb_mlink}
+\usepackage{longtable,colortbl}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{multicol}
+\usepackage{collectbox}
+
+\usepackage{xbmks}
+\DeclareInitView{layoutmag={navitab:UseOutlines}}
+\xbmksetup{colors={int=red},styles={intbf}}
+
+
+
+\newbox\aebbox
+
+\usepackage{acroman}
+\usepackage[active]{srcltx}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{4}
+
+
+\def\AcroBlog{{Acro\!\TeX} Blog}
+
+\makeatletter
+\def\chgCurrLblName#1{\def\@currentlabelname{#1}}
+\let\gob\@gobble
+\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2em}{3.5em}}
+\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{4}{5.5em}{1.5em}}
+\renewcommand\@pnumwidth{2.55em}
+\renewcommand*\l@section[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\z@
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty
+ \addvspace{1.0em \@plus\p@}%
+ \setlength\@tempdima{2em}%{1.5em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \bfseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+\makeatother
+
+
+%\usepackage[usecmtt]{myriadpro}
+
+%\margins{.25in}{.25in}{24pt}{.25in} % left,right,top, bottom
+%\screensize{4.19in}{4.67in} % height, width
+
+%\margins{.5in}{.25in}{24pt}{.25in} % left,right,top, bottom
+%\screensize{4.19in}{4.92in} % height, width
+
+%\hoffset=20pt
+
+\setlongtables
+\LTpre=0pt %\medskipamount
+\LTpost=-2\medskipamount
+%\LTpost=0pt %\medskipamount
+\setlength{\mathindent}{20pt}
+
+\def\AEBBook{\textsl{{Acro\!\TeX} eDucation System Tools: {\LaTeX} for interactive PDF documents}}
+
+
+%\usepackage{makeidx}
+%\makeindex
+%\usepackage[active]{srcltx}
+
+%\DeclareFontFamily{U}{wi}{}
+%\DeclareFontShape{U}{wi}{m}{n}{<-> wingding}{}
+%\DeclareFontFamily{U}{webd}{}
+%\DeclareFontShape{U}{webd}{m}{n}{<-> webdings}{}
+
+%\font\zqacr=zqacr at 8pt
+
+\makeatletter
+
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{{\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformatwp{{\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+
+%\def\changelinkcolorto#1{\def\@linkcolor{#1}}
+%\useFullWidthForPaper
+\newdimen\totaltextwidth
+\totaltextwidth=\fullscreenwidth
+\advance\totaltextwidth\oddsidemargin
+\renewcommand{\webheadwrapper}[1]{%
+ \hspace{-\oddsidemargin}%
+ \makebox[\totaltextwidth][s]{#1}\hss
+}
+
+%\sectionLayout{indent=-62.5pt,fontsize=large}
+%\subsectionLayout{indent=-31.25pt}
+%\subsubsectionLayout{indent=0pt}
+
+\renewcommand\hproportionwebtitle{.75}
+\universityLayout{fontsize=Large,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\titleLayout{fontsize=LARGE,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\authorLayout{fontsize=Large,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\tocLayout{fontsize=Large,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\sectionLayout{indent=-62.5pt,fontsize=large,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\subsectionLayout{indent=-31.25pt,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\subsubsectionLayout{indent=0pt,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\subsubDefaultDing{\texorpdfstring{$\bullet$}{\textrm\textbullet}}
+%\renewcommand{\paragraph}
+% {\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{0pt}{12pt}{-3pt}{\bfseries}}
+\renewcommand{\paragraph}
+ {\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{0pt}{6pt}{-3pt}
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}
+\renewcommand{\subparagraph}
+ {\@startsection{subparagraph}{5}{\parindent}{6pt}{-3pt}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}
+\newcommand{\aebCng}{\@ifstar{\def\aeb@checked{*}\@aebCng}{\def\aeb@checked{x}\@aebCng}}%
+\newcommand\@aebCng[1][]{}
+%\newcommand{\aebCng}{\@ifstar{\def\aeb@checked{*}\@aebCng}{\def\aeb@checked{x}\@aebCng}}%
+%\newcommand{\@aebCng}[1][]{%
+% \if\aeb@checked*\def\aeb@marker{\textcolor{blue}{aeb}~\textcolor{red}{\ding{052}}\goodbreak}\else
+% \def\aeb@marker{\textcolor{red}{aeb}}\fi
+% \def\argi{#1}\ifx\argi\@empty
+% \marginpar{\scriptsize\aeb@marker}%
+% \else\marginpar{\scriptsize\aeb@marker\goodbreak\raggedright#1}\fi}
+
+%\makeindex
+
+%\widestNumber{00.00.}
+
+\hfuzz=1pt
+
+\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{\let\!\empty}
+
+%\setlongtables
+
+\def\AcroT{Acro\!\TeX}\def\cAcroT{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroT}}
+\def\AcroEB{\AcroT{} eDucation Bundle}\def\cAcroEB{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroEB}}
+\def\AcroB{\AcroT{} Bundle}\def\cAcroB{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroB}}
+\def\AcroFLeX{%
+ AcroF\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{L}\kern-.3eme\kern-.125emX}
+\def\APB{\textsf{APB}}
+\def\cAPB{\textcolor{blue}{\APB}}
+\def\AEB{\textsf{AeB}}
+\def\cAEB{\textcolor{blue}{\AEB}}
+\def\Web{\textsf{web}}
+\def\PDF{\textsf{PDF}}
+\def\bUrl{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory}
+\definePath{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{http://www.acrotex.net/blog}
+
+%\newlength{\aebdimen}
+\def\anglemeta#1{$\langle\textit{\texttt{#1}}\rangle$}
+\def\meta#1{\textit{\texttt{#1}}}
+\let\pkg\textsf
+\let\env\texttt
+\let\opt\texttt
+\let\app\textsf
+\def\AEB{\textsf{AeB}}
+\def\AcroTeX{Acro\!\TeX}
+\def\HTML{HTML}\def\FDF{FDF}
+\def\PDF{PDF}\def\URL{URL}
+\let\amtIndent\leftmargini
+\def\bNH{\begin{NoHyper}}\def\eNH{\end{NoHyper}}
+\def\nhnameref#1{\bNH\nameref{#1}\eNH}
+\def\nhNameref#1{\bNH\Nameref{#1}\eNH}
+\def\nhurl#1{\bNH\url{#1}\eNH}
+\def\grayV#1{\textcolor{gray}{#1}}
+\def\darg#1{\{#1\}}
+\def\parboxValign{t}
+\renewcommand*{\backrefalt}[4]{%
+ \ifcase #1\or
+ See page~#2.\else See pages~#2.\fi
+}
+\newenvironment{aebQuote}
+ {\list{}{\leftmargin\amtIndent}%
+ \item\relax}{\endlist}
+\newcommand{\FmtMP}[2][0pt]{\mbox{}\marginpar{%
+ \raisebox{.5\baselineskip+#1}{%
+ \expandafter\parbox\expandafter[\parboxValign]%
+ {\marginparwidth}{\aebbkFmtMp#2}}}}
+\def\aebbkFmtMp{\kern0pt\itshape\small
+ \ifusebw\color{gray}\else\color{blue}\fi
+ \raggedleft\hspace{0pt}}\newcommand{\BlogArticle}{%
+ \makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-1pt}\color{blue}\Pisymbol{webd}{254}%
+ }\raisebox{.5pt}{\ifusebw\color{black}\else
+ \color{red}\fi\ding{045}}}
+\def\dps{$\mbox{$\mathfrak D$\kern-.3em\mbox{$\mathfrak P$}%
+ \kern-.6em \hbox{$\mathcal S$}}$}
+\def\FitItIn{\eq@fititin}
+\def\endredpoint{\FitItIn{{\large\ifusebw\color{black}\else\color{red}\fi$\blacktriangleleft$}}}
+
+
+\hypersetup{linktocpage}
+
+\def\AmS{{\protect\usefont{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}%
+ A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}}
+
+\def\latex/{{\protect\LaTeX}}
+\def\amslatex/{{\protect\AmS-\protect\LaTeX}}
+\def\tex/{{\protect\TeX}}
+\def\amstex/{{\protect\AmS-\protect\TeX}}
+
+\definecolor{aeb}{rgb}{0.24,0.38,0.68}%bleu
+\universityColor{aeb}
+\tocColor{aeb}
+
+\makeatother
+
+\def\Y&Y{Y\kern-.2em{\footnotesize\&}\kern-.2emY}
+\def\dps{$\mbox{$\mathfrak D$\kern-.3em\mbox{$\mathfrak P$}%
+ \kern-.6em \hbox{$\mathcal S$}}$}
+
+\title{\texorpdfstring{\LARGE
+%---------------------------------%
+ The \AcroEB\space(AeB)%
+}{%-------------------------------%
+ The AcroTeX eDucation Bundle for LaTeX,
+ Manual of Usage%
+}}
+\author{D. P. Story}
+\subject{How to create on-line exercises and quizzes}
+%\keywords{LaTeX, hyperref, PDF, exercises, quizzes}
+\Keywords{LaTeX,hyperref,PDF,exercises,quizzes}
+\university{{\AcroT} Software Development Team}
+\email{dpstory@acrotex.net}
+\versionLabel{Dated:}
+\version{2018/08/16}
+\copyrightyears{1999-\the\year}
+\nocopyright
+\prepared{2018/08/16}
+\revisionLabel{Distribution Dated:}
+
+\copyrightStatus{True}
+\copyrightNotice{Copyright (C) 1999-\the\year, D. P. Story}
+\copyrightInfoURL{http://www.acrotex.net}
+\authorTitle{Head of AcroTeX Developer}
+\descriptionWriter{Senior Technical Writer of AcroTeX}
+
+%\noPartNumbers
+
+\DesignTitlePageTrailer
+{%
+ ul=Copyright \copyright\ \webcopyrightyears,
+ ur=\thewebemail,
+ lr=\url{http://www.acrotex.net},
+ raise=-25pt
+}
+\def\CMD#1{\textbackslash#1}
+%\newcommand{\exPDF}[2][\expath/]{\par\ifdim\lastskip>0pt\relax\vskip-\lastskip\fi
+\newcommand{\exPDF}[2][\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#]{\par\ifdim\lastskip>0pt\relax\vskip-\lastskip\fi
+\vskip\medskipamount\noindent\makebox[0pt][r]
+ {\raisebox{-2pt}{\color{red}\href{#1#2}{{\zqacr
+ b\hspace{9.5pt}}}}\enspace}\ignorespaces}
+
+\def\makeExBox#1{\href{run:\tutpathi/apb_#1.tex}{\scriptsize\fbox{#1}}}
+\renewcommand\expoint[1]{\par\ifdim\lastskip>0pt\relax\vskip-\lastskip\fi
+\vskip\medskipamount\noindent\makebox[0pt][r]{\makeExBox{#1}\enspace}\ignorespaces}
+
+\def\tutpath{doc/tutorial}
+\def\tutpathi{tutorial}
+\def\expath{../examples}
+
+\renewcommand{\theaebEx}{\arabic{aebEx}}
+\renewcommand{\theHaebEx}{\arabic{aebEx}}
+
+\def\insMargin{}
+\def\Ex{\par\medskip\noindent\refstepcounter{aebEx}\insMargin\gdef\insMargin{}\textbf{Example~\theaebEx:}}
+\def\CmdLoc{\par\medskip\noindent\textbf{Command Location: }}
+\def\EnvLoc{\par\medskip\noindent\textbf{Environment Location: }}
+\def\KVP{\par\goodbreak\medskip\noindent\textbf{Key-Value Pairs: }}
+\def\PD{\par\goodbreak\medskip\noindent\textbf{Parameter Description: }}
+\def\Important{\par\medskip\noindent\textbf{Important: }}
+\def\CmdDescription{\par\medskip\noindent\textbf{Command Description: }}
+
+\begin{insDLJS}[indefCompare]{compare}{Comparisons}
+function indefCompare(a,b,c,F,G) {
+ var C, eqx;
+ with(Math) {
+ eqx = a;
+ if(isNaN(C = eval(F)-eval(G))) return -1;
+ eqx = c;
+ F = eval(F);
+ if(isNaN(G = eval(G)));
+ return abs( F - G - C );
+ }
+}
+\end{insDLJS}
+
+\frenchspacing
+
+\definePath\bgPath{"C:/Users/Public/Documents/ManualBGs/Manual_BG_Print_AeB.pdf"}
+\begin{docassembly}
+\addWatermarkFromFile({
+ bOnTop: false,
+ cDIPath: \bgPath
+})
+\executeSave()
+\end{docassembly}
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\pdfbookmarkx[1]{Title Page}[action={\Named{FirstPage}}]{TitlePage}
+\pdfbookmarkx[1]{The eforms Manual}[action={\GoToR/F(eformman.pdf)/D[0 /Fit]},color=blue,style={bf}]{eForms}
+\pdfbookmarkx[1]{Links to AcroTeX.Net}[action={/S/GoTo/D(undefined)},%
+ color=magenta,style={bf}]{acrotex}
+\belowpdfbookmarkx{http://www.acrotex.net}[action={\URI{http://www.acrotex.net}},%
+ color=magenta,style={bf}]{home}
+\belowpdfbookmarkx{http://blog.acrotex.net}[action={\URI{http://blog.acrotex.net}},%
+ color=magenta,style={bf}]{blog}
+
+
+\newpage
+
+\changelinkcolorto{black}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\changelinkcolorto{webgreen}
+
+\part{Forward}
+
+\newtopic For the past several years (this year is \the\year), I've been writing a book
+titled,
+\begin{quote}
+\AEBBook.
+\end{quote}
+The book~\cite{book:AEBB} covers {\AEB} and {\AEBP} in \emph{great detail} and includes many
+examples to illustrate concepts and techniques. Numerous new examples are
+available on the CD-ROM that accompanies the book.
+
+During the time of the writing, each of the packages covered was examined,
+bugs were fixed, and many new and major features were created. Any new
+features developed in the course of writing the book are documented in the
+book; however, they are \emph{not included in this documentation}. You can
+either buy the yet-to-be-submitted book sometime in the future, or discover
+the features by studying the DTX documentation of the program files. Sorry,
+it took me three years to write the book, I don't want to spend another year
+on this documentation. \verb!:-{)!
+
+As noted in \textbf{\nhnameref{eq2db}} on page~\pageref{eq2db}, I've set up a
+website that highlights the server-side scripts developed for the book (and
+available on the accompanying CD-ROM). You are invited to visit them and
+comment on them, if the spirit moves.
+
+\begin{flushright}
+Dr. D. P. Story\\[3pt]
+\today
+\end{flushright}
+
+\part{Preface}
+
+%\section{Introduction}
+
+% ff, fi, fl, ffl
+
+The {\cAcroEB} (abbreviated {\cAEB} and read ``{\AcroT} Education
+Bundle'') is a collection of {\LaTeX} macro files (briefly described
+below) along with various support and sample files. The theme of {\cAEB}
+is \textit{ePublication} in the \textit{education} sector using {\LaTeX}
+as the authoring application and Adobe's Portable Document Format
+(\textsf{PDF}) as the file format of the output document. The \cAcroB{}
+should be useful to educators who want to post interactive materials for
+their students on the \textsf{WWW}.
+
+\newtopic Currently, there are seven components to the bundle:
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item The \hyperref[s:web]{\pkg{web} package} is used to create an
+ attractive, easy-on-the-eye page layout suitable for the \textsf{WWW}
+ (or classroom/conference presentations). There is support for
+ background graphics; a {\Web} document can be re-purposed for
+ paper.
+\item The \hyperref[s:exerquiz]{\pkg{exerquiz} package} makes
+ it very easy to create interactive exercises and quizzes. There are
+ numerous options, solutions at the end of the document, solutions
+ following the question, no solutions; quizzes are self marking, the
+ student can get immediate feedback, or get a final assessment after
+ the student finishes the quiz.
+\item The \href{eformman.pdf#eformsPkg}{\pkg{eforms} package} provides support for
+ PDF form fields, and links with arbitrary actions.
+\item The \href{eformman.pdf#insdljsPkg}{\pkg{insdljs} package} allows for the automatic
+ insertion of document level JavaScript. Document authors can use
+ \textsf{insdljs} to customize the processing of the
+ \textsf{exerquiz} quizzes. See the documentation that accompanies
+ the package (\texttt{insdljs.dtx}) and see also the sample file
+ \texttt{jqzspec.tex} for an extensive example of how to modify the
+ \textsf{exerquiz} macros. The \textsf{insdljs} package also has an
+ \texttt{execJS} environment which can be used to create executable
+ and ``discardable'' JavaScript; see the DTX file for
+ details.
+% and the demo file \texttt{execJStst.tex}, which features
+% an animation built completely from {\LaTeX} source lines.
+ Documentation for the \pkg{insdljs} package appears in the
+ \href{eformman.pdf#insdljsPkg}{\pkg{eforms}} reference manual
+ (on the Web, \href{\bUrl/eformman.pdf#insdljsPkg}{eformman.pdf}).
+\item The \href{eformman.pdf#taborderPkg}{\pkg{taborder} package} supports the creation of the order
+ of tabbing between Acrobat annotations (fields, links, and comments).
+ See the part \textbf{Setting the Tab Order} in \href{eformman.pdf#taborderPkg}{eforms}
+ reference manual (on the Web, \href{\bUrl/eformman.pdf#taborderPkg}{eformman.pdf}) for more details.
+\item The \hyperref[part:dljslib]{\pkg{dljslib} package} is used as a library of
+ JavaScript functions. Some types of question require special
+ processing. A JavaScript function written to process a
+ particular function can be stored in the library, then
+ retrieved as needed.
+
+% See the documentation contained in the
+% file \texttt{\href{\bUrl/dljslib.dtx}{dljslib.dtx}}.% and try
+% the test file for this package,
+% \texttt{\href{\bUrl/jslib_ex.tex}{jslib\_ex.tex}}.
+\item The \href{\bUrl/eqexam.html}{\pkg{eqexam} package} is a stand
+ alone {\LaTeX} package for creating exams, quizzes, homework
+ assignments. There are several options to re-purpose the source
+ document to produce a document with no solutions, solutions at end,
+ solutions after the questions, and solutions only. It can also be used
+ to create surveys, questionnaires, teacher evaluations, etc. The
+ package has an \texttt{email} mode and comes with a server-side script
+ that is used to send the data entered into the form fields to the
+ instructor.
+
+% See my \textsf{\href{\bUrl/eqexam/tex_survey.pdf}{\TeX/\LaTeX{} Survey}} for
+% a demo of this feature.
+\end{questions}
+\handpoint The \pkg{web}, \textsf{exerquiz}, \textsf{eforms}, and \textsf{insdljs}
+packages are stand alone packages, though they were designed to work
+together. The \textsf{dljslib} package is a companion package to
+\textsf{insdljs}. The \textsf{eqexam} package is stand alone, but uses
+some code from the \textsf{exerquiz} package; \textsf{exerquiz} need not
+be installed on your system to use \textsf{eqexam}, however.
+
+\begin{comment}
+To play it safe, you should use the most recent version of
+\pkg{hyperref} by Sebastian Rahtz and Heiko Oberdiek. The
+\textsf{exerquiz} package makes extensive use of forms; Adobe
+Reader 3.0 with Forms 3.5 at least is needed, Adobe Reader 4.0 or
+above is preferred.
+\end{comment}
+
+\handpoint Here is an important point that should be emphasized early in this
+manual. \cAcroT{} only supports three ways of producing a
+\textsf{PDF} file: (1) the \textcolor{blue}{Adobe Acrobat
+Distiller} (version~5.0 or higher \emph{required}); (2)
+\textsf{pdftex} (including \textsf{luatex}); or (3) \textsf{dvipdfm}
+(including \textsf{dvipdfmx} and \textsf{xetex}). In the case of (1), you
+probably use \texttt{dvips} to create a postscript file before
+distilling. Some users have tried to use
+\textcolor{blue}{Ghostscript} to produce a \textsf{PDF}
+from \cAcroT; this will not work! (You will get the \textsf{PDF}
+file, but not much functionality.)
+
+Please contact me at \url{dpstory@acrotex.net} should you encounter
+any problems, or have suggestions to make.
+
+\redpoint See Section~\ref{s:start} on `\nhnameref{s:start}' below for
+instructions on how to get up and running.
+
+\section{Getting Started}\label{s:start}
+
+The distribution for the {\cAcroB} comes in a single ZIP file
+ \texttt{acrotex.zip}. This ZIP file contains program files
+ (\pkg{web}, \pkg{exerquiz}, \pkg{eforms}, \pkg{insdljs},
+ \pkg{dljslib}, \pkg{taborder}, and \texttt{aeb.js}), this manual, and the
+ \href{eformman.pdf}{\pkg{eforms}} reference manual
+ (\texttt{\href{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}}).
+
+\subsection{Installing the Distribution}
+
+The following are the instructions for installing the \cAEB.
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item \textbf{Placement.} The ZIP file installs in a folder called
+ \texttt{acrotex}, so place the ZIP file in a directory in the search path
+ of your \LaTeX{} system where you want the \texttt{acrotex} folder to
+ reside. If you already have an \texttt{acrotex} folder, place the ZIP
+ files so that they unzip into this \texttt{acrotex} folder, \emph{unless
+ you are using MiK\TeX~2.8{} or later}.
+
+\item[] \textbf{MiK\TeX~2.8/2.9 Users.} {Mik\TeX}~2.8 (or later) provides
+ problems for {Acro\!\TeX} installations in that it is more particular
+ about where you install packages by hand. {MiK\TeX}~2.8, or later,
+ requires that you install the distribution in a local root TDS tree.
+ Review the {MiK\TeX} help page on this topic
+\begin{quote}
+%
+ \url{http://docs.miktex.org/manual/localadditions.html}
+%
+\end{quote}
+Create a new {MiK\TeX} root folder, in my case, I created
+\begin{quote}
+%
+ \verb!C:\Users\Public\Documents\My TeX Files!
+%
+\end{quote}
+Within the \texttt{My TeX Files} folder (you can name this folder anyway
+you wish), create a \texttt{tex} folder, within the \texttt{tex} folder,
+create a \texttt{latex} folder. Now copy the ZIP file to the
+\texttt{latex} folder, for example, copy them into
+\\[3pt]\hspace*{20pt}
+%
+ \verb!C:\Users\Public\Documents\My TeX Files\tex\latex!\\[3pt]
+%
+Finally, you need to register your new root folder with MiK\TeX. Open the
+{MiK\TeX} Options dialog box (accessible through the WinEdt toolbar, or
+through\\[\topsep]\hspace*{20pt}
+%
+\texttt{Start > All Programs > MiKTeX 2.8 > Maintenance > Settings}\\[3pt]\hspace*{20pt}
+\texttt{Start > All Programs > MiKTeX 2.9 > Maintenance > Settings}\\[\topsep]
+%
+Within this dialog box, select the \textbf{Roots} tab, then press
+\textbf{Add}, and browse for your newly create \texttt{My TeX Files}. When
+finished, the dialog should look like my own dialog box, as shown
+in \hyperref[fig:rootstab]{Figure~\ref*{fig:rootstab}}, page~\pageref*{fig:rootstab}.
+
+\begin{figure}[hbt]\centering
+\includegraphics[scale=.6]{figures/miktex_roots}
+\caption{Roots tab of MiK{\TeX} Options}\label{fig:rootstab}
+\end{figure}
+
+\item \textbf{Unzipping the Distribution.} Once you have found the
+location to unzip the ZIP file, unzip it!
+
+% C:\Users\Public\Documents\My TeX Files\tex\latex
+
+%\item Unpack the \textsf{exerquiz} package by latexing \texttt{exerquiz.ins}.
+%However, see \nameref{s:unpack} for important comments.
+
+\item \textbf{Unpacking the distribution.} The whole distribution can be
+unpacked by latexing \texttt{acrotex.ins}. (The other \texttt{*.ins} files
+are the installation files for the individual packages,
+\texttt{acrotex.ins} is the combined installation file.)
+
+\item[] {MiK\TeX} users should not forget to refresh the file name database.
+
+% \item Unpack \texttt{insdljs.dtx} by latexing \texttt{insdljs.ins}.
+
+\end{questions}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Installing \texttt{aeb.js}}
+
+
+The JavaScript file \texttt{aeb.js} is only needed if you use \textbf{Acrobat
+Pro 8.1} or later and \textbf{Adobe Distiller} as the PDF creator. Increased
+security in that version has made it necessary to install a folder JavaScript
+file. The JavaScript within \texttt{aeb.js} raises the ``trust'' of certain
+JavaScript methods used to import document JavaScript into the document just
+after the distillation process and the newly created PDF is opened in
+\textbf{Acrobat} for the first time. The installation of this file is not
+needed if you use \textsf{pdftex}, or \textsf{dvipdfm} (or any of their
+variations), or use a version of \textbf{Acrobat} prior to 8.1.
+
+The instructions for installing \texttt{aeb.js} are in the
+\texttt{\href{install_jsfiles.pdf}{install\_jsfiles.pdf}}, which resides in
+the \texttt{doc} folder of the \texttt{acrotex} installation. If you use
+\textbf{Distiller} as your PDF creator, please refer to that document.
+
+After you've installed the JavaScript files, as directed by the
+\texttt{\href{install_jsfiles.pdf}{install\_jsfiles.pdf}}, validate the
+installation of the JavaScript files by navigating to the \texttt{examples}
+subfolder and opening the file \texttt{test\_install.pdf} in \app{Acrobat};
+follow the directions contained on that one page document.
+
+
+\begin{comment}
+\paragraph*{Acrobat Pro~8.1 or later.}
+Start \textbf{Acrobat Pro~8.1}\footnote{The file will cause no harm if you
+install it in an earlier version of Acrobat, as early as version 7.} or
+later, and open the console window \textsf{Advanced \texttt> JavaScript
+\texttt> Debugger} (\texttt{Ctrl+J} for Windows or \texttt{Cmd+J} for Mac
+OS). Copy and paste the following code into the window.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+app.getPath("user","javascript");
+\end{Verbatim}
+Now, with the mouse cursor on the line containing this script, press
+the \texttt{Ctrl+Enter} key. This will execute this JavaScript. This
+JavaScript method returns the path to where \texttt{aeb.js} should
+be placed. For example, on my system, the return string is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+/C/Documents and Settings/story/
+ Application Data/Adobe/Acrobat/8.0/JavaScripts
+\end{Verbatim}
+Follow the path to this folder. If the \texttt{JavaScripts} folder
+does not exist, create it. Finally, copy \texttt{aeb.js}
+into this folder. The file is read each time Acrobat starts.
+
+\paragraph*{Acrobat Pro 10.1.1 for Windows only.} For this version of \textbf{Acrobat},
+things have tightened up even more. The user JavaScripts folder has moved to
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+%AppData%\Adobe\Acrobat\Privileged\10.0\JavaScripts
+\end{Verbatim}
+\exAeBBlogArticle{p=737}where \verb!%AppData%! is an environment variable defined by Acrobat. For details
+of how to install the folder JavaScripts in the new location, see my blog
+article \mlhref{http://www.acrotex.net/blog/?p=737}{Acrobat Security Changes in 10.1.1 and
+Acro\!\TeX}.
+\end{comment}
+
+\subsection{Language Localizations}
+
+Should you wish to customize {\cAEB} to a language other than the ones
+already supported, open the file \texttt{template.def} and add in your
+language customizations.
+
+%After reading the manual you are then ready to write your own set
+%of tutorials, exams, exercises and quizzes.\enspace\dps
+
+
+\subsection{Sample Files and Articles}\label{s:samplefiles}
+
+Test, example, and demo files have been moved to the \href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html}{Example Files for
+AeB} web page.\footnote{\url{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html}} References seen in this manual reside on this page; each
+sample file is a PDF with the source file attached to the PDF. Files on
+the \href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html}{Example Files for AeB} web page are
+referenced with the icon \raisebox{-1.5pt}{\color{red}\zqacr b\hspace{12pt}} is the margin.
+
+\paragraph*{{Acro\!\TeX} Blog.} The basic examples from the distribution are also available
+from the {Acro\!\TeX| Blog, accessible from the page
+\href{http://www.acrotex.net/blog/?cat=89}{AeB Demo Files}.\footnote{\url{http://www.acrotex.net/blog/?cat=89}}
+There is another more recent collection of examples on
+\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroTeX{} Blog}, these will be referenced in the margin using the icon %\exAeBBlogPDF
+\mbox{\makebox[0pt][l]{\textcolor{blue}{\Pisymbol{webd}{254}}}%
+ \raisebox{-2pt}{\color{red}{{\zqacr b\hspace{9.5pt}}}}}\,, whereas
+\mbox{\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-1pt}\textcolor{blue}{\Pisymbol{webd}{254}}}%
+\raisebox{.5pt}{\color{red}{\ding{045}}}} refers to a written blog
+article. In all cases, the source file and any dependent resources are attached to the
+PDF.
+
+%
+
+%\newcommand{\exAeBBlogArticle}[2][\urlAcroTeXBlog/]{\par\ifdim\lastskip>0pt\relax\vskip-\lastskip\fi
+%\vskip\medskipamount\noindent\makebox[0pt][r]{%
+% \makebox[0pt][l]{\textcolor{blue}{\Pisymbol{webd}{254}}}%
+% \raisebox{.5pt}{\color{red}\href{#1?#2}{\ding{045}\hspace{8.5pt}}}\enspace}\ignorespaces}
+
+%\exPDF{indexofex} There are numerous sample/demo files that illustrate various
+%features of the {\cAcroB}. View the \textsf{PDF} file
+%\texttt{\href{indexofex.pdf}{indexofex.pdf}}, which is an ``Index of
+%{\AcroT} Examples''. This document contains a list of all
+%examples, a short description of each, and links to the \textsf{PDF}
+%file and source file.
+
+\subsection{Package Requirements}
+
+If you use the Acrobat Distiller, as I do, to create a PDF document, the {\cAcroB}
+now requires the use of version 5.0 or later. I've given up on trying to support
+prior version of Acrobat.
+
+\newtopic In terms of \LaTeX, the following is a listing of package requirements:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item The \pkg{web} Package
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{color}: \texttt{color} is distributed with \LaTeX, but {\Web}
+ will use \texttt{xcolor}, if available, unless the
+ \texttt{noxcolor} global option is used.
+ \item \texttt{amssymb}: standard with \amslatex/
+ \item \texttt{hyperref}: available from CTAN, get newer version
+ \item \texttt{eso-pic} and \texttt{everyshi}: available from CTAN
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item The \textsf{Exerquiz} Package
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{color}: distributed with \LaTeX
+ \item \texttt{verbatim}: distributed with \LaTeX
+ \item \texttt{hyperref}: available from CTAN, get newer version
+ \item \texttt{insdljs}: distributed with \AcroT
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item The \textsf{insdljs} Package
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{hyperref}: available from CTAN, get newer version
+ \item \texttt{verbatim}: distributed with \LaTeX
+ \item \texttt{everyshi}: available from CTAN
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item The \textsf{dljslib} Package
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{insdljs}: distributed with \AcroT
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{\LaTeX ing Your First File}
+
+The functionality of the \texttt{shortquiz} and \texttt{quiz}
+environments depends on JavaScript code that is placed at the
+``document level'', to use Adobe's terminology. The applications
+\textsf{pdftex} and \textsf{dvipdfm} offer direct support for
+writing to this document level. For those who use the
+\textcolor{blue}{Adobe Distiller}, things aren't quite so easy.
+
+In this section, we describe how to insert document level
+Java\-Scripts into a \textsf{PDF} file, prepared from a
+\LaTeX{} source that uses the \texttt{exerquiz} package. Even
+though the handling and insertion of document level JavaScript is
+done with the package \textsf{insdljs}, a little care must be
+taken, at least in the Distiller case, when building your
+{\PDF} document.
+
+%http://www.acrotex.net/blog/?p=803
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} Download \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website. The source file \texttt{webeqtst.tex} is attached to the PDF, save
+it to your local hard drive. \gob{\exPDF{webeqtst}}Open
+\texttt{webeqtst.tex} in your favorite text editor. The top lines read:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[tight,designi]{web}
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{For Non-\textsf{dvips} Users}
+
+Edit the third line by inserting your driver; the choices are
+\texttt{pdftex}, \texttt{dvipdfm}, \texttt{dvipdfmx}, and \texttt{xetex}. For
+example, if you use \textsf{dvipdfm}, the lines should read:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[dvipdfm,tight,designi]{web}
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+For \textsf{dvipdfm}, you \LaTeX{} the document, then hit it with
+\textsf{dvipdfm}, and your ready to review your \textsf{PDF} file. The
+insertion of the document level JavaScript is automatic.
+
+For the \textsf{pdftex} and \textsf{xetex} applications, you simply
+compile with that application, and you have your nice \textsf{PDF} file, ready for
+review. The insertion of the document level JavaScript is automatic.
+
+\redpoint Both the \textsf{pdftex} and \textsf{xetex} applications are
+automatically detected so there is no need to specify them in the option list
+of \pkg{web}.\endredpoint
+
+
+\subsubsection{For Distiller Users}
+
+If you use the distiller, as I do, the sophisticated features of
+{\AcroB} require Acrobat 5.0 or higher.
+
+%I've discontinued my attempt at supporting Acrobat 4.0.
+
+Edit the optional parameters of the \pkg{web} package by inserting your driver; the choices are
+\texttt{dvips} and \texttt{dvipsone}.\footnote{The choice of driver can be placed in he \texttt{web.cfg} configuration
+file, in which
+case, you need not specify the driver. See \Nameref{sss:driver}.} For example, if you use \textsf{dvips}, the
+lines should read:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[dvips,tight,designi]{web}
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\begingroup\raggedright
+\noindent When you latex the source file, you create a DVI file and one or more FDF files.\footnote{The FDF files (for
+example, \texttt{exerquiz.fdf}) contain the document level JavaScript that needs to be imported into your document. They
+are imported when the newly
+created document is opened is Acrobat for the first time.}
+You then convert your \texttt{.dvi} to \texttt{.ps} using either
+\textsf{dvips} or \textsf{dvipsone}, and distill.
+\par\endgroup
+
+\newtopic\textcolor{red}{Important:} When you distill, \emph{save the
+\emph{\texttt{.pdf}} back to the same folder} in which your source file
+(\texttt{.tex}) resides as this is where the \texttt{.fdf} files
+reside too. Insertion of document level JavaScripts automatically
+takes place when you open your newly distilled document
+in the \textsf{Acrobat} application. (It is actually
+\textsf{Acrobat} that imports the scripts, not the
+\textsf{Distiller}.)
+
+\handpoint When your document is opened in \textsf{Acrobat} for
+the first time, the Java\-Script contained in the \texttt{.fdf} files
+(for example, \texttt{exerquiz.fdf}) is imported into the document
+and is stored at the document level.
+
+\redpoint \textcolor{red}{Important:} \emph{Save your document}. When you
+save, the JavaScripts you just imported are also saved with the
+document. At this point you can move your \textsf{PDF} to another
+folder, or to the web. The document does not need the
+\texttt{.fdf} files any more.
+
+\begin{comment}
+\redpoint \textbf{For Distiller~4.0--4.05 Users.} Versions prior
+to~5.0 of the Acrobat product cannot import document level
+JavaScript contained in a \texttt{.fdf} file. The JavaScript needs
+to be inserted ``by hand''.
+
+The procedure is as follows: Modify the preamble and insert the \texttt{acrobativ}
+option for the \textsf{exerquiz} package:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[dvips,tight,designi]{web}
+\usepackage[acrobativ]{exerquiz} %<- acrobativ option
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This suppresses all the JavaScript code generation that is used in the case
+of \textsf{pdftex}, \textsf{dvipdfm} or \textsf{Distiller~5.0$^+$}. After that
+change, \LaTeX{} the document, and convert
+the \texttt{.dvi} file to PostScript (using \texttt{dvips} or
+\texttt{dvipsone}), and distill. Now, open the new \textsf{PDF} file
+ in \textsf{Acrobat} (formerly known as
+\textsf{Exchange}). Click on \texttt{Document > Insert Pages},
+browse, and choose the \textsf{PDF} file \textsf{eq\_dljs.pdf},
+which comes with the \cAcroB. The file is now inserted. Next, click
+on \texttt{Document > Delete Pages} and delete the page you just
+inserted! \textcolor{red}{Important:} Do a ``\texttt{Save As}''; now you are done!
+
+The \textsf{PDF} file \textsf{eq\_dljs.pdf} contains all the
+standard JavaScript that goes in at the document level. In all
+the other situations discussed above, you can modify the
+JavaScript from the preamble, for example, in the \textsf{exerquiz}
+source code we have
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\checkColor{["RGB", 0, .6, 0]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+This command is expanded when the document level JavaScript is imported into the
+\textsf{PDF} file. If \cs{checkColor} has been redefined
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\checkColor{["RGB", 1, 0, 0]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+it is this definition that is used in the expansion. This
+convenience is lost for $\text{4.0} \le\text{\textsf{distiller}}\le\text{4.05}$.
+You can edit \textsf{eq\_dljs.pdf} and make whatever changes you
+please to the script, in terms of changing color.
+\end{comment}
+
+There are several ways the Distiller workflow can be accomplished:
+%\begin{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{Through the {\LaTeX} Editor.} Some editors, WinEdt, in particular, have toolbars that can distill
+% a PostScript file. (The default is to use Ghostscript, you'll have to change to Distiller.) From WinEdt, you
+% can latex, convert to Postscript, and distill with a few presses of toolbar buttons. Very smooth and easy.
+% \item \textbf{Do it yourself.} Some systems, most notably on Mac OS, do not have a convenient way of distilling.
+% A Mac user sent in the following steps.
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item Drop the \texttt{.ps} file on Distiller.
+% \item Drag the resulting .pdf file out of the folder it was
+% compiled in (for example, to the desktop)
+% \item Open the \texttt{.pdf} file in Acrobat.
+%
+% At this stage readers will be prompted for the location of the existing .fdf file for inclusion.
+%
+% Now, for contrast, try this:
+%
+% 1. Drop the .ps file on Distiller.
+% 2. Open the .pdf file in Acrobat.
+% 3. Save the .pdf file.
+% 4. Drag the .pdf file out of the folder it was compiled in (for example, to the desktop)
+% 5. Open the .pdf file.
+%
+% This will allow readers the opportunity to see what will happen if they fail to save the file before moving it
+to another location, like the web.
+%
+%
+% \end{enumerate}
+%\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic For distiller users, the
+\href{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/aeb_pro.html}{\AEB\ Pro package}
+has many exciting features, functionality requires the document author use
+Acrobat~7.0 or higher.
+
+
+
+\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace{\medskipamount}}
+\part{The Web Package}\label{s:web}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+The purpose of the \pkg{web} package is to create a page layout
+for documents meant for screen presentation, whether over the
+\textsf{WWW} or classroom/conference presentations, in
+\textsf{PDF}. Such documents are \emph{not \emph{(necessarily)}
+intended to be printed}; consequently, the page layout is, in some
+sense, optimized for screen viewing.
+
+\subsection{Overview}
+
+The \pkg{web} package redefines \cs{maketitle} and
+\cs{tableofcontents} in a more web friendly way; it colors the
+section headings, and inserts \cs{bullet}s ($\bullet$) at the
+\cs{subsubsection} level. This, to my eyes, is very attractive.
+Additionally, certain navigation devices (a navigation bar and
+some direction icons) are included in the package.
+
+There are options for a small collection of drivers:
+\texttt{dvipsone}, \texttt{dvips}. \texttt{dvipdfm} and \texttt{pdftex}. The language
+option redefines certain language dependent elements of the package
+to other languages. Currently, the following options are supported:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+\texttt{dutch} & \texttt{french} & \texttt{german}\\
+\texttt{italian} & \texttt{norsk} & \texttt{russian}\\
+\texttt{spanish} & \texttt{dansk} & \texttt{polish}\\
+\texttt{finnish} & \texttt{czech} & \texttt{catalan}\\
+\texttt{brazil} & \texttt{turkish}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{quote}
+
+There is even an option for reformatting the \texttt{web}
+style to a print format!
+
+The capabilities of the \pkg{web} package and its options are
+discussed below. Any comments and suggested improvements (new
+features) would be greatly appreciated.
+
+\subsection{Package Requirements}
+
+The \pkg{web} package was designed for screen presentations
+tutorials, such as classroom or conference lectures, short technical
+articles, etc.; consequently, the \texttt{article} class of \LaTeX{}
+seems to be sufficient for these purposes. Though you can use
+\pkg{web} with any of the standard classes that define the
+\cs{section}, \cs{subsection} and \cs{subsubsection} commands, the
+package is really meant to be used with the \texttt{article}
+class. It is \textbf{strongly} suggested!
+
+The package heavily depends on Sebastian Rahtz' \pkg{hyperref}
+package (now maintained and developed by Heiko Oberdiek). The
+\pkg{web} package was developed using version 6.56 of
+\pkg{hyperref}. Using prior versions of \pkg{hyperref}
+\emph{may} lead to successful compilation, no guarantees offered.
+It is best to work with the most recent version of
+\pkg{hyperref}.
+
+The \textsf{color} and \textsf{amssymb} packages are also
+required. The former is for obvious reasons, the later is to
+provide certain navigation symbols when the \texttt{navibar}
+option is invoked.
+
+Finally, to create quality PDF documents, type~1 fonts \emph{must}
+be used. Fortunately, type~1 fonts in the Computer Modern font set
+are freely available, and come with all the major
+freeware, shareware and commercial \TeX{} systems. If you haven't
+done so already, learn how to use the type~1 fonts.
+
+In this regard, I have written an article that may be of interest
+to you entitled ``\textit{Using \LaTeX{} to Create Quality PDF Documents
+for the WWW}'', see reference \cite{article:Story:LaTeX}.
+
+\section{Basic Package Options}
+
+To use the \pkg{web} package, insert into the preamble of
+your document the following:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(other_options)]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Replace \meta{other\_options} with any of the options recognized by
+\pkg{web}; see \hyperref[s:ListofOpts]{Section~\ref*{s:ListofOpts}}
+for a complete list of options. The first and optional argument
+\meta{driver} above defines the driver to be used; for
+example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[dvips]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Driver options.}\label{para:webdrivers} Below is a list of \meta{driver} options
+for the \pkg{web} package.
+\bgroup\def\rf#1{{\normalfont#1}}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+dvips dvipsone textures % !rf((DVI)-to-(PS))
+pdftex % !rf(includes the !app(lualatex) application)
+dvipdfm dvipdfmx xetex % !rf((DVI)-to-(PDF))
+\end{Verbatim}
+\egroup\noindent
+Currently, the \pkg{web} package supports five drivers:
+\texttt{dvipsone}, the dvi-to-ps converter by \Y&Y, Inc.; \texttt{dvips},
+the freeware dvi-to-ps converter; \texttt{pdftex}, the
+\texttt{tex}-to-\texttt{pdf} application; \texttt{dvipdfm},
+\texttt{dvipdfmx}, and \texttt{xetex} the \texttt{dvi}-to-\texttt{pdf}
+applications by Mark Wicks and subsequent
+developers;\footnote{\url{http://odo.kettering.edu/dvipdfm/}}${}^{\text{\scriptsize,}}$\footnote{\url{http://scripts.sil.org/xetex}}
+and the
+commercial {\TeX} system for the Mac, \texttt{textures} and
+\href{http://www.uoregon.edu/~koch/texshop/texshop.html}{{\TeX}shop}.
+
+\handpoint\textbf{Automatic driver detection.} {\AEB} now has automatic driver detection for
+\textsf{pdftex} (including \textsf{luatex}) and \textsf{xetex}. Specification of these options
+is no longer needed.
+
+\newtopic {\AEB} is better at passing the driver between its components.
+When the driver is specified in the \pkg{web} package, the driver is passed to
+its components (\textsf{exerquiz}, \textsf{eforms}, \textsf{insdljs}). Similarly, if \pkg{web} is not used,
+exerquiz passes the driver specified to \textsf{eforms} and \textsf{insdljs}. Finally, \textsf{eforms} passes the driver
+specified to \textsf{insdljs}.
+
+\paragraph*{A note on \app{xetex}.}
+The \app{xetex} application may be set to strip out named destinations that
+are not referenced within the document as a target of a `hard-wired' actions.
+\app{AeB} (in particular, \pkg{exerquiz}) sets a lot of destinations (or
+targets) but, in many instances, `dynamic' links are employed using the
+JavaScript method \texttt{\textsl{Doc}.gotoNamedDest(\anglemeta{target})}. In
+such instances, \app{xetex} may strip out these targets; the link or button
+action may not perform the jump to the destination because the destination
+does not exist. If this becomes an issue for your \app{xetex} installation,
+the \textbf{\app{Dvipdfmx} Compatibility Flags} need to be modified. Search
+for the configuration file \texttt{dvipdfmx.cfg}, open the file. Scroll down
+to the line `\texttt{\%C 0x0000}', beneath it insert `\texttt{C 0x0010}',
+save and close the file.\footnote{MiK\TeX{} discourages the direct editing of
+the file \texttt{dvipdfmx.cfg}, instead, on the command-line prompt type and
+execute `\texttt{initexmf -{}-edit-config-file dvipdfmx}' enabling you to
+edit a local version of the configuration file as described above;
+just enter the line `\texttt{C 0x0010}', save and close.} The documentation
+for this bit field is just above the referenced line and an explanation of
+the `\texttt{C 0x0010}' setting is given.
+
+\redpoint The package has been tested using
+\verb+\documentclass{article}+ and it is \emph{strongly}
+recommended that this class be used; however, {\Web} does support the
+\texttt{book} class as well.\endredpoint
+
+%\begin{comment}
+%
+%\redpoint The default paper setting for \textsf{dvips} is
+%\texttt{A4}, but the cropping parameters assumes \texttt{letter}
+%paper size. To get the cropping of the page correct, there are
+%several procedures you can follow.
+%
+%\begin{questions}
+%\item Use the command line switch \texttt{-t letter}.
+%For example,
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%dvips.exe -j0 -Pcm -Pams -t letter -o <foo>.ps <foo>.dvi
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\item Change the default paper setting of \textsf{dvips} to
+%\texttt{letter} by placing the paper size for \texttt{letter}
+%first in the \texttt{config.ps} file of \textsf{dvips}:
+%
+%\smallskip
+%\leavevmode\begin{minipage}{.45\linewidth}
+%Change these lines \dots
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%@ A4size 210mm 297mm
+%@+ %%PaperSize: A4
+%
+%@ letterSize 8.5in 11in
+%
+%@ letter 8.5in 11in
+%@+ %%BeginPaperSize: Letter
+%@+ letter
+%@+ %%EndPaperSize
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\end{minipage}
+%\hfil
+%\begin{minipage}{.45\linewidth}
+%\dots to these.
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%@ letter 8.5in 11in
+%@+ %%BeginPaperSize: Letter
+%@+ letter
+%@+ %%EndPaperSize
+%
+%@ A4size 210mm 297mm
+%@+ %%PaperSize: A4
+%
+%@ letterSize 8.5in 11in
+%
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\end{minipage}
+%
+%\end{questions}
+%
+% If you find changing the command line inconvenient, you can
+%include the command
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+% \hypersetup{pdfpagescrop=53 486 389 754}
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%in the preamble of your document.
+%
+%\end{comment}
+
+%\makeatletter\hy@bookmarksnumberedfalse\makeatother
+%\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{}{\textbullet\space}Setting the Driver Option}
+%\makeatletter\hy@bookmarksnumberedtrue\makeatother
+
+\subsection{Setting the Driver Option}\label{sss:driver}
+
+You can set your driver option in one of three ways:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Pass as a local option: %\\ %[3pt]
+ \cs{usepackage[\meta{driver}]\darg{web}}
+ \item Pass as a global option: %\\ %[3pt]
+ \cs{documentclass[\meta{driver}]\darg{article}}
+ \item Create the file \texttt{web.cfg} with the single command
+ in it:%\\ %[3pt]
+\begin{quote}
+ \cs{ExecuteOptions\darg{\meta{driver}}}
+\end{quote}
+ Place the file \texttt{web.cfg} in any folder where \LaTeX\
+ looks for input files. Then, you need only type
+ \verb+\usepackage{web}+.
+\end{itemize}
+Where \meta{driver} is any of the following options listed in
+the paragraph \textbf{\nameref{para:webdrivers}} on page~\pageref{para:webdrivers}.
+
+The macros of the \pkg{web} package have been extensively
+tested using the \Y&Y\ \TeX\ System for the
+\texttt{dvipsone} option and a MiK\TeX\ System
+(\url{www.miktex.org}) for the \texttt{dvips}, \texttt{pdftex} (which includes lua(la)tex),
+\texttt{dvipdfm}, \texttt{dvipdfmx}, and \texttt{xetex}
+
+%\subsubsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{pdftex}}{pdftex} Option}
+%
+%
+%The \texttt{pdftex} option requires \pkg{hyperref} version 6.60
+%or greater. (The most recent version is preferred.) The
+%\pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} packages will probably run
+%correctly with slightly earlier versions, but you may see
+%`underfull hbox' error messages.
+%
+%The \pkg{web} package uses the AMS Font set for the
+%black triangle that appears in the navigation bar, see
+%\hyperref[ss:naviaids]{Section~\ref*{ss:naviaids}}.
+%
+%The AMS Font sets comes with Mik\TeX, if you don't have
+%\textsf{pdftex} configured the use them, here are some
+%instructions that work for the Mik\TeX{} system.
+%\begin{questions}
+%\item Copy the file \texttt{amsfonts.map} from the folder
+%\texttt{texmf/dvips/ams} to the folder \texttt{texmf/pdftex/base}.
+%(Mik\TeX{} may have restructured the directory tree since the time
+%of this documentation.)
+%\item Edit the file \texttt{pdftex.cfg} to include the lines:
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%map +amsfonts.map % to get AMSFonts
+%map standard.map % to get dings
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%
+%\item The \texttt{pdftex.cfg} file now looks like this:
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%output_format 1
+%compress_level 9
+%decimal_digits 2
+%page_width 210mm
+%page_height 297mm
+%horigin 1in % <-- important, see 4.
+%vorigin 1in % <-- important, see 4.
+%map standard.map
+%map +cm.map
+%map +amsfonts.map
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\item Take note of the settings of \texttt{horigin} and
+%\texttt{vorigin}. Set these two to 1\,in\@. This will align the
+%text on the page where the cropping numbers expects the text to
+%be; the result will be a properly cropped page.
+%\end{questions}
+
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{tight} Option}\label{sss:webtight}
+
+In an effort to compact more material per page, I've introduced a
+\texttt{tight} option. When this option is used, many of the list
+parameters are redefined so that there is not so much space around these
+environments, and between items.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),tight,!meta(other_options)]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{usesf} Option}\label{usesf}
+
+For presentations, some people like a sans serif font. Using this option
+make san serif the default font style.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{draft} Option}\label{draft}
+
+When you take this option, graphic overlays are not allowed. This
+is useful when you rely heavily on graphic overlays, but during the
+development phase, don't need to read and re-read your overlays. The
+defined background colors will be used instead. Remove this option
+to build the final version of your document.
+
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{nobullets} Option}\label{nobullets}
+
+Traditionally, the subsubsections have been denoted by a bullet, by
+using this option, you can force the use of numbers for the
+subsubsections, This option automatically executes the
+\texttt{latextoc} option.
+
+There is another option \texttt{forceSubSubNumbers}, which does the same thing
+as nobullets. This option is included for compatibility with the {\AcroT}
+Presentation Bundle (\textsf{APB}).
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{unicode} Option}\label{web:unicode}
+
+This option is passed to \pkg{hyperref}, and is placed in {\Web} as a
+convenience. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded, \textsf{eforms} (and
+\textsf{exerquiz}) will accept {\LaTeX} markup in the optional argument
+of the form fields. See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual}
+for details.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{useui} Option}\label{web:useui}
+
+This option is passed to \textsf{eforms}, and is placed in {\Web} as
+a convenience. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded,
+\textsf{eforms} loads the \textsf{xkeyval} package, and key-value pairs are
+defined for use in the optional argument of form and link commands.
+See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{xhyperref} Option}\label{web:xhyperref}
+
+The \pkg{web} package requires \pkg{hyperref} and calls it with a particular
+set of options, given below.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\RequirePackage[%
+ !ameta(driver),
+ bookmarks,bookmarksnumbered,bookmarksopen,%
+ colorlinks,\aeb@useunicode,linkcolor=webgreen,%
+ filecolor=webbrown,citecolor=webgreen,%
+ urlcolor=webbrown,pagebackref,pdfpagemode=UseNone,%
+ pdfstartview=Fit,pdfpagelayout=SinglePage,%
+ !ameta(addtoHyOpts)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+These option choices may be overridden using the \opt{addtoHyOpts} or
+\opt{addtoHyOpts*} option, described in Section~\ref*{web:addtoHyOpts} below.
+
+Now, if this \opt{xhyperref} option is used, the \pkg{hyperref} package is
+\emph{not automatically} included by the \pkg{web} package. It is assumed
+that \pkg{hyperref} will be included in the document prior to \pkg{web}. Use
+the \opt{xhyperref} option if you want to completely revamp the look of a
+\pkg{web} document by custom choices of the \pkg{hyperref} options.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!ameta(Hy-options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[xhyperref,!ameta(web-options)]{web}
+...
+\end{Verbatim}
+This avoids possible ``option clashes'' when your choices conflict with those of \pkg{web}.
+
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{addtoHyOpts} and \texttt{addtoHyOpts*} Options}\label{web:addtoHyOpts}
+
+To maximize the convenience of passing options to \pkg{hyperref}, the \pkg{web} package
+provides the \opt{addtoHyOpts} option.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\usepackage[\meta{web-options},addtoHyOpts=\darg{\meta{Hy-options}}]\darg{web}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!meta(web-options),addtoHyOpts={!meta(Hy-options)}]{web}
+...
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb The value of \opt{addtoHyOpts} is any combination of key-values that
+\pkg{hyperref} offers as package options. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!meta(web-options),addtoHyOpts={pdfencoding=auto}]{web}
+...
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \texttt{pdfencoding=auto} is useful for authors writing in the latin1 character set. The
+value of \texttt{pdfencoding}, by the way, overrides the \opt{unicode} option.
+
+There is another option that passes its value to the \cs{hypersetup} command.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\usepackage[\meta{web-options},addtoHyOpts*=\darg{\meta{Hy-options}}]\darg{web}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!meta(web-options),addtoHyOpts*={!meta(Hy-options)}]{web}
+...
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb The value of \opt{addtoHyOpts*} is any combination of key-values that
+\pkg{hyperref} offers as package options. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!meta(web-options),addtoHyOpts={pdfencoding=auto}]{web}
+...
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+The \opt{addtoHyOpts} adds its value to the option list of \pkg{hyperref}, as
+built by \pkg{web}, whereas \opt{addtoHyOpts*} passes its value to the
+\cs{hypersetup} command. Both options \opt{addtoHyOpts} and
+\opt{addtoHyOpts*} may appear in the option list of \pkg{web} at the same
+time.
+
+\section{Setting Screen Size}\label{s:setscreensize}
+
+Beginning with version 2.0, the screen size can be set by the
+author. There are two ways to do this: (1) use the macros
+\cs{screensize} and \cs{margins} (These are the same
+macros, slightly redefined, for setting the screen size used by
+Radhakrishnan in his fine screen package \textsf{pdfscreen}.); or (2) use
+a screen design option. The next two sections address each of
+these in turn.
+
+\subsection{Custom Design}\label{cusDesign}
+
+There are six dimensions that need to be specified. As with
+\textsf{pdfscreen}, the two commands \cs{screensize} and
+\cs{margins} are used for doing so.
+
+The command \cs{screensize} takes two length parameters:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\screensize{!ameta(height)}{!ameta(width)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The \ameta{width} and \ameta{height} parameters are the desired
+screen size of the page. The screen version of this manual uses
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\screensize{3.72in}{4.67in}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The other command, \cs{margins}, which determines the desired
+margins, takes four length parameters:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\margins[!ameta(panel_width)]{!ameta(left)}{!ameta(right)}{!ameta(top)}{!ameta(bottom)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic The values of \cs{textheight} and \cs{textwidth} are computed
+based on the screen size and the margins. The margin settings for
+this document are given below:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\margins{.25in}{.25in}{30pt}{.25in}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic The optional first parameter \ameta{panel\_width} is used to set
+the width of the panel, if there is one. The default is \texttt{1in}.
+
+\begin{redpoint}\space\ignorespaces
+An important comment about the third parameter
+\ameta{top} is the following: as with \textsf{pdfscreen}, we put
+\cs{@Topmargin=\ameta{top}}. The running header fits within the top
+margin (this varies from standard \LaTeX{} practice). The
+\pkg{web} package dimension \cs{web@Topmargin} is the distance
+from the top of the screen down to the top of the running header. Thus,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\@Topmargin = \web@Topmargin + \headheight + \headsep
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Also, \cs{web@Topmargin} can be used to adjust the
+positioning of a running header, which is specified in the
+\cs{margins} command. The default value of \cs{headheight} is
+\texttt{8pt}, so the value of \cs{headsep} is determined by the
+above equation. See the \textsf{web.dtx} file for more details.
+\end{redpoint}
+
+\subsection{Screen Design Options}\label{sss:designoptions}
+
+For your convenience, I've included nine options, \texttt{designi},
+\texttt{designii},\dots \texttt{designix}. The first one roughly
+corresponds to the original screen dimensions of \pkg{web}. The
+dimensions of these designs options are\medskip
+\begingroup\par\noindent\hfuzz=3pt\small
+\begin{tabular*}{\linewidth}{>{\ttfamily}l>{\ttfamily}lc|>{\ttfamily}l>{\ttfamily}lc}
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{Design Option}&\multicolumn{1}{c}{width $\times$ height}&\multicolumn{1}{c|}{AR}&%
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{Design Option}&\multicolumn{1}{c}{width $\times$ height}&\multicolumn{1}{c}{AR}\\\hline
+designi & {4.67in} $\times$ {3.736in}&5:4&designv &{6in} $\times$ {4.5in}&4:3\\
+designii &{5in} $\times$ {4.5in}&10:9&designvi &{4.67in} $\times$ {4.17in}&28:25\\
+designiii &{6in} $\times$ {5in}&6:5&designvii &{10in} $\times$ {7.5in}&4:3\\
+designiv &{5in} $\times$ {4in}&5:4&designviii&{6.67in} $\times$ {3.75in}&16:9\\
+&&&designix&3.75in $\times$ 6in&16:10
+\end{tabular*}
+\endgroup
+\newtopic Most of these design values were chosen for their visual appeal, or for some particular need.
+The designs \texttt{designv} and \texttt{designvii} have an aspect ratio of 4:3, this is a standard for video displays,
+while \texttt{designviii} is another one with a standard aspect ratio for wide screen computer monitors.
+
+\newtopic To select a particular design for your document, simply include its name amongst the option
+list for the \pkg{web} package; for example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[designv]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+creates a document with dimensions of \texttt{designv}, $6\,\text{in} \times 4.5\,\text{in}$.
+
+\redpoint When you specify a screen design, the macros
+\cs{screensize} and \cs{margins} are redefined to gobble up
+their parameters. To define a custom screen size, therefore, do
+not specify a screen design option for \pkg{web}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{setScreensizeFromGraphic}}{\CMD{setScreensizeFromGraphic}}}\label{setScreensizeFromGraphic}
+
+If a design is \emph{not specified} in the option list of \Web, you
+can use a graphic to set the screen size with
+\Com{setScreensizeFromGraphic}. The command takes two parameters
+that correspond to the parameters of \cs{includegraphics}, and are
+just passed to \cs{includegraphics}. This is useful if you have a
+graphic to be used for a template but cannot be deformed to fit one
+of the standard designs. The solution is to create a screen size
+matching the graphic, then using that graphic as a template. Example
+usage,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\margins{1in}{1in}{24pt}{.25in}
+\setScreensizeFromGraphic{acro_30}
+\template{acro_30}
+\end{Verbatim}
+It may become necessary with some graphics to use the
+\texttt{hiresbb} option for the command \cs{includegraphics}, both in
+\cs{setScreensizeFromGraphic} and \cs{template} like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\margins{1in}{1in}{24pt}{.25in}
+\setScreensizeFromGraphic[hiresbb]{acro_30}
+\template[hiresbb]{acro_30}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic This command should not be used with a panel option for the text screen
+size will be adjusted for the panel, and the graphic will be
+re-scaled appropriately.
+
+\subsection{Using \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{addtoWebHeight} and \protect\cs{addtoWebWidth}}
+{\CMD{addtoWebHeight} and \CMD{addtoWebWidth}}}
+
+There may be an occasion when you've chosen your design dimensions
+(\texttt{designi}, \texttt{designii}, etc.), but you have determined the
+dimensions provided by the selected design are not quite \emph{wide} or \emph{high} enough.
+You can make adjustments to the width and height without explicitly specifying
+the commands \cs{margins} and \cs{screensize} by using \cs{addtoWebHeight} and/or
+\cs{addtoWebWidth}. The syntax for each is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\addtoWebHeight{!ameta(length)}
+\addtoWebWidth{!ameta(length)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+These two can only be executed in the preamble, and they add (or subtract)
+the specified \ameta{length} to the height and width of the page. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\addtoWebHeight{1in}
+\end{Verbatim}
+adds one inch to the height of the page. This
+command is roughly equivalent to executing,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\screensize{!ameta(current_height)+1in}{!ameta(current_width)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Using a panel option}
+
+When the \texttt{rightpanel} or \texttt{leftpanel} option is used
+the page is divided into the text screen and a panel (either on the
+left or right of the page). The default width of the panel is 1in
+and the minimum width of the panel is 1in.
+
+When designing the screen using \cs{screensize} and \cs{margins},
+the panel width of the panel can be set by the first optional
+parameter of \cs{screensize}, as described in
+section~\ref{cusDesign}, page~\pageref*{cusDesign}. When using one
+of the standard design options, the panel width is set to the
+default value of 1in. To set the panel width to another value, use
+\cs{panelwidth} in the preamble. \verb!\panelwidth{1.25in}! sets the
+panel width to 1.25 inches.
+
+If you set the panel width to a length less than the minimal panel
+width, the minimal panel width (1in) will be used. You can reset the
+minimal panel width using \Com{minPanelWidth}. See
+section~\ref{panelscreentemplate},
+page~\pageref*{panelscreentemplate}, for more details on this command.
+
+\section{Hyperref Options}
+
+The \pkg{web} package loads \pkg{hyperref} into the document
+and sets some selected options of that package; therefore,
+including the \pkg{hyperref} package is not needed in the
+preamble of your own document.
+
+Any additional \pkg{hyperref} options that are needed can be
+introduced into the package using \pkg{hyperref}'s
+\cs{hypersetup} macro, for example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!ameta(options)]{web}
+% Declare additional hyperref options using \hypersetup
+\hypersetup{pdfpagemode=UseNone,bookmarksopen=false}
+\end{Verbatim}
+An alternate approach is to use the \opt{addtoHyOpts} option of \pkg{web}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!ameta(options),addtoHyOpts={pdfpagemode=UseNone,
+ bookmarksopen=false}]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \opt{addtoHyOpts*} option of \pkg{web} may also be used:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!ameta(options),addtoHyOpts*={pdfpagemode=UseNone,
+ bookmarksopen=false}]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \opt{addtoHyOpts} option adds its value to the \pkg{hyperref} option of
+as built by \pkg{web}, whereas, \opt{addtoHyOpts*} passes its value to the
+argument of a \cs{hypersetup} command.
+
+
+\noindent Documentation of the options that \pkg{hyperref}
+recognizes can be had by either \LaTeX ing the file
+\texttt{hyperref.dtx}, or by getting a copy of the \textsl{The
+\LaTeX\ Web Companion} \cite{book:Goossens3} by Michel Goossens,
+{\textsl{et al}}.
+
+\redpoint The \pkg{web} option \texttt{xhyperref} bypasses the inclusion
+of the \pkg{hyperref} package. It is expected that the document author inputs
+\pkg{hyperref} prior to \pkg{web}.
+
+\section{Running Headers and Footers}
+
+There are convenience commands setting the running headers and
+footers; they are \cs{lheader}, \cs{cheader}, \cs{rheader},
+\cs{lfooter}, \cs{cfooter}, and \cs{rfooter}. Each of these takes a
+single argument, which is the text for the header or footer in the
+position desired. In the standard setup for {\Web}, \cs{lheader},
+\cs{rheader} and \cs{cfooter} are used for, respectively, the
+current section title, the current page and the navigation bar (if
+activated).
+
+You can set some basic formatting styles for the header and footer using
+\Com{header\-format} and \cs{footerformat}. For example, executing
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\headerformat{\bfseries\color{red}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+causes the running header to appear in bold red color.
+
+There are a couple of hooks for the header and footers, these are
+\Com{webheadwrapper} and \Com{webfootwrapper}. These commands can be
+use to stylize the entire header or footer. They can be defined to have
+one argument. The argument is the content of the header or footer. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\headerformat{\bfseries\color{red}}
+\footerformat{\bfseries\color{red}}
+\renewcommand{\webheadwrapper}[1]{\fcolorbox{red}{yellow}{%
+ \makebox[\linewidth-2\fboxsep-2\fboxrule][s]{#1}}}
+\renewcommand{\webfootwrapper}[1]{\fcolorbox{red}{yellow}{%
+ \makebox[\linewidth-2\fboxsep-2\fboxrule][s]{#1}}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic Lines~(1) and~(2) makes declares bold font for the header and footer.
+Lines~(3) and~(4) defines a \cs{fcolorbox} with hideous red and yellow colors;
+lines~(5) and~(6). Note that adjustment in the width to account for the \cs{fcolorbox}
+rule width and the space surrounding the text in the \cs{fcolorbox}.
+
+\newtopic On occasion you may want to have no running headers at all, this can
+be accomplished by saying in the preamble, or anywhere,
+\verb!\lheader{}!, \verb!\cheader{}!, and/or \verb!\rheader{}!.
+Another solution is to use the commands \cs{clearHeaders} and
+\cs{restoreHeaders}. The command \cs{clearHeaders} first saves the current
+definitions of the headers then sets the headers to the empty
+header. The command \cs{restoreHeaders} restores the definitions that were in
+effect when the last \cs{clearHeaders} was executed.
+
+\newtopic\textbf{No running headers on section pages.}
+One user did not like a running header that includes a section title
+on the same page where the section begins. The default behavior is
+to create a running header where the section title does not appear
+in the header on the same page as the section is inserted, on
+subsequent pages, the section head appears, I hope.
+
+The two commands control this behavior, the default is \emph{to not
+show} the section heading (\cs{lheader}) on the page where the
+section begins. Use \Com{headersOnSectionPage} to place headers on
+the same page as the beginning of a section. You can also change back to
+the default behavior using \Com{noHeadersOnSectionPage} (the default).
+
+
+\section{The Title Page and TOC}
+
+The title page is constructed from the values of the macros:
+\cs{title}, \cs{author}, \cs{uni\-ver\-sity}, \cs{email}, and
+\cs{version}. The values of some of the macros \cs{title} and
+\cs{author} are also transferred to the PDFDocInfo section of the
+Acrobat/Adobe Reader. (Press \texttt{Ctrl+D} while viewing a \PDF{} document
+to see this information.)
+
+Additionally, the values of \cs{subject} and \cs{keywords}---which
+do not appear on the title page---are inserted into the PDFDocInfo
+section.
+
+\newtopic The colors of the text corresponding to \cs{title}, \cs{author} and \cs{university} on the title
+page can be set by using \cs{titleColor}, \cs{authorColor} and \cs{universityColor}.
+Each takes a single argument, a named color. The defaults are
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\universityColor{blue}
+\titleColor{black}
+\authorColor{black}
+\end{Verbatim}
+For more information on defining named \textsf{colors}, see the documentation
+of the color or \textsf{xcolor} packages. A simple example would be
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\definecolor{MyOwnColor}{rgb}{0.945,0.87,0.518}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint When the \texttt{extended} option is used, all colors can be
+specified with \cs{selectColors}, see
+\Nameref{designColor}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{Basic Information Commands}\label{ss:BIM}
+
+The basic information commands allows you a convenient way to enter the title and author
+of the document, as well as other information. To enter this basic information,
+just fill in the values of all the basic macros briefly described below.
+
+For example, the following is a copy of the title information for this document:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+% \title,\author,\subject,\keywords are sent to DocInfo
+\title{The Web and Exerquiz Packages Manual of Usage}
+\author{D. P. Story}
+\subject{How to create on-line exercises and quizzes}
+\keywords{LaTeX,hyperref,PDF,exercises,quizzes}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+% \university,\email,\version are used only on title page
+\university{Northwest Florida State College\\
+ Department of Mathematics}
+\email{dpstory@acrotex.net}
+\version{1.0}
+\copyrightyears{1999-2010}
+\end{Verbatim}
+You can optionally specify the \cs{date}. The web packages uses the value of \cs{date}
+at the bottom of the title page. There is says, ``Last Revision Date: \ameta{date}''. If
+the \cs{date} command is not used, the current date is used.
+
+\redpoint The \cs{title}, \cs{author}, \cs{subject}, \cs{keywords}
+are a convenient way of entering information in the Document
+Information fields---see
+\begin{equation*}
+\texttt{File > Document Info > General... (Ctrl+D)}
+\end{equation*}
+in the Acrobat/Adobe Reader.\endredpoint
+
+\newtopic\indent If \cs{title} contains control sequences that do not expand to the
+Standard PDFDocEncoding character set, Distiller will be thrown
+into a tailspin; \pkg{hyperref} defines the \cs{texorpdfstring}
+macro\footnote{The code for handling PDFDocEncoding for
+\pkg{hyperref} is due to Heiko Oberdiek} to avoid these kinds
+of problems. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\title{The \texorpdfstring{$e^x$}{EXP} Function}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The first argument is the one that is typeset (on the title page,
+the title of the document will be `The $e^x$ Function'); the
+second argument is the one that is sent to the title field of
+DocInfo in the Adobe Reader (and will read `The EXP Function').
+
+Of all the \nameref{ss:BIM}, as listed on page~\pageref*{ss:BIM},
+use \cs{texorpdfstring} only with the \cs{title} and \cs{author};
+these are the only two that are both typeset and placed in the
+DocInfo field of the Adobe Reader.
+
+\redpoint \cs{texorpdfstring} works for \cs{section},
+\cs{subsection}, etc\@. as well.\par\medskip
+
+\newtopic Having entered the values of the basic information
+commands, you can now type the standard sort of \LaTeX\ commands of
+\cs{maketitle} and \cs{tableofcontents}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+...
+...
+\end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803}\gob{\exPDF{webeqtst}} Use the source file for
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} as a prototype or
+template for your own document.
+
+\redpoint When the \texttt{extended} option is in effect, the basic document
+information just described can be entered through the
+\cs{DeclareDocInfo} command, see page~\pageref{docinfo}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{Title Page Structure}
+
+The title page is divided into three parts: top, middle and bottom.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Title Top:} The content of the top is determined by the \Com{top\-Titl\-ePage}
+command. (This command can be redefined, but it is not recommended.) The
+\cs{topTitlePage} command expands to three elements: the university (affiliation), the title,
+and the author(s), in that order vertically. These are the values of the commands \cs{university},
+\cs{title} and \cs{author} discussed in the previous section.
+
+\item \textbf{Title Middle:} The \Com{optionalPageMatter} command
+is used to enter content into this part of the title page. This
+middle part is optional; if \cs{optionalPageMatter} does
+not appear in the preamble, this part of the title page is
+empty. Here is an example of usage:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\optionalPageMatter{%
+ \begin{center}
+ \fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{
+ \begin{minipage}{.67\linewidth}
+ \noindent\textcolor{red}{\textbf{Abstract:}} This
+ file attempts to teach you how to create a simple
+ \LaTeX\ document.
+ \end{minipage}}
+ \end{center}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The above definition will create the framed box seen below.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{
+ \begin{minipage}{.67\linewidth}
+ \noindent\textcolor{red}{\textbf{Abstract:}} This file
+ attempts to teach you how to create a simple \LaTeX\ document.
+ \end{minipage}}
+ \end{center}
+
+The \cs{optionalPageMatter} appears just below the \cs{webauthor}
+and above the directory listing if there is any.
+
+The syntax \cs{optionalPageMatter} is\dots
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\cs{optionalPageMatter[\ameta{vspace}]\darg{\ameta{content}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\optionalPageMatter[!ameta(vspace)]{!ameta(content)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb where \ameta{content} content to be displayed in middle title region, and
+\texttt{[\ameta{vspace}]} consists of one (or more) \cs{vspace} commands. The default
+is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\minimumskip\vspace{\stretch{1}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The command \cs{minimumskip} expands to \cs{medskip}.
+
+\item \textbf{Title Bottom:} Bottom of the title page is controlled
+by the contents of the command \cs{titlepageTrailer} and consists of
+the values of the commands \cs{email}, \cs{version}, \texttt{copyrightyears}
+Below is a rough figure depicting the location of the elements found
+in the title page trailer.
+
+{\setlength{\tabcolsep}{0pt}
+\begin{tabular*}{\linewidth}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}lr}
+\anglemeta{copyright notice} & \cs{thewebemail}\\
+\anglemeta{revision} & \cs{webversion}
+\end{tabular*}}
+\newtopic The definition of these elements are as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\def\maketitle@trailer@ul{\web@copyright\ \web@copyright@symbol\
+ \webcopyrightyears}
+\def\maketitle@trailer@ll{\web@revision\ \@date}
+\def\maketitle@trailer@ur{\thewebemail}
+\def\maketitle@trailer@lr{\webversion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\begin{description}
+%
+% ?? The ul corner not accurate, need to address this.
+%
+\item The \texttt{ul} corner: The macro \cs{web@copyright} expands to `Copyright', it can be redefined, or removed by
+ executing \Com{nocopyright}. \cs{webcopyrightyears} expands to the argument of \cs{copyrightyears}.
+
+%the final element in the upper left is the email address.
+%To make everything go away except for the email address, executed \Com{nocopyrightNotice}.
+
+\item The \texttt{ll} corner: The \anglemeta{revision} expands to
+\cs{web@revision} followed by \cs{@date}. The \cs{web@revision} expands to
+``Last Revision Date:'', and can be changed by using \cs{revisionLabel}
+(for example \verb!\revisionLabel{Published:}!). The \cs{@date} expands to
+the argument of the \cs{date} command, or if this was not used, expands
+to the current date.
+
+\item The \texttt{ur} corner: The upper-right corner goes the email address, as enter through
+the \cs{email} command.
+
+\item The \texttt{lr} corner: The \cs{webversion} command goes into the
+ lower-right corner. It expands to
+ \cs{web@versionlabel\;\anglemeta{version\_number}}, while, in turn,
+ the command \cs{web@versionlabel} expands to ``Version''. This label can be
+ changed by using \Com{versionLabel} (for example,
+ \verb!versionLabel{Attempt}!). Finally, the variable
+ \anglemeta{version\_number} is the number entered through the
+ \cs{version} command.
+\end{description}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic The font size of the title page trailer
+ is set by the command \cs{trailerFontSize}, the default is
+\cs{footnotesize}. This command must be re-defined in the usual
+way: for example, \verb!\renewcommand{\trailerFontSize}{\small}!.
+
+
+\redpoint When using the pro option, the elements of the title page trailer
+can be entered by using \Com{DesignTitlePageTrailer}, see
+\Nameref{trailer}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{Redefining
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{maketitle}}{\textbackslash maketitle}}
+
+The arguments of the \Nameref{ss:BIM} macros, as just discussed,
+are used to define text macros with no parameters; for example,
+when you type \verb+\title{Web Package}+, the macro \cs{title}
+takes its argument and defines a macro \cs{webtitle} that expands
+to `Web Package'.
+
+You can redesign the title page to suit your needs simply by
+redefining \cs{maketitle}: rearrange the macros listed in the
+second column of \hyperref[table:BIM]{Table~\ref*{table:BIM}} on
+the page, or include a graphic, or change the background color.
+To redefine \cs{maketitle}, use the commands:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\maketitle{...your design...}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent See the definition of \cs{maketitle} in the \texttt{web.sty} file
+for an example.
+
+\begin{table}[hbt]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+\hline
+\multicolumn1{|l|}{This macro} &
+\multicolumn1{l|}{defines this macro} \\
+\hline
+\cs{title} & \cs{webtitle} \\
+\cs{author} & \cs{webauthor} \\
+\cs{subject} & \cs{websubject} \\
+\cs{keywords} & \cs{webkeywords}\\
+\cs{university} & \cs{webuniversity} \\
+\cs{email} & \cs{webemail} \\
+\cs{version} & \cs{webversion} \\
+\cs{copyrightyears} & \cs{webcopyrightyears} \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{The Basic Information Macros}\label{table:BIM}
+\end{center}
+\vspace{-\baselineskip}
+\end{table}
+
+When making the design, it is useful to know that the {\Web}
+package uses the command \cs{hypertarget} to create a named destination,
+`\texttt{webtoc}', in the table of contents. Use this
+\texttt{webtoc} to jump to the table of contents using
+the macro \cs{hyperlink}.
+
+\redpoint When the \texttt{extended} option is in effect, a slight redefinition
+of \cs{maketitle} occurs. See the details in section~\ref{maketitlepro},
+\Nameref{maketitlepro}.
+
+\subsection{The Title Page Directory}\label{titlepagedir}
+
+When the \texttt{usedirectory} option is taken, a directory listing
+appears on the title page. The default structure of the directory is
+
+\makeatletter
+ \vbox{\begin{flushleft}{\web@formatWordDirectory\web@directory}%
+ \vspace{-3pt}%
+ \begin{itemize}\setlength{\itemsep}{-3pt}\web@formatDirectoryItems
+ \if\web@removeDirTOC y\else\item\relax\dirTOCItem\fi
+ \if\web@removeDirArticle y\else\item\relax\dirArticleItem\fi
+ \web@addtoDirList
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{flushleft}}
+\makeatother
+There are several commands that can be used to modify the directory.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{dirContentLink\darg{Begin \string\hyperlink\darg{\string\web@Start.1}\darg{Article}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\directoryName{Directory}
+\tocName{Table of Contents}
+\dirContentLink{Begin \hyperlink{\web@Start.1}{Article}}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic These three define the default text strings
+that appear. In the case of \cs{dirContentLink},
+there is a built-in \cs{hyperlink} to the start of
+the article.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{formatWordDirectory\darg{\string\bfseries\string\large}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\formatWordDirectory{\bfseries\large}
+\formatDirectoryItems{\bfseries}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic The formatting of the \cs{directoryName} can be set by \cs{formatWordDirectory},
+the default definition is given above. The (global) formatting for the listing of the
+items can be set using \cs{formatDirectoryItems}, the default is shown above.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{removeDirTOC\quad\string\removeDirArticle}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\removeDirTOC!quad\removeDirArticle
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic These two commands remove the ``Table of Contents'' and
+the ``Begin Article'' items from the list, respectively.
+
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{addtoDirList\darg{\meta{new\_item}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\addtoDirList{!meta(new_item)}
+\dirTOCItem
+\dirArticleItem
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic To add a new item to the end of the directory list, use \cs{addtoDirList}, the argument
+is the new item. The other two commands \cs{dirTOCItem} and \cs{dirArticleItem} are commands
+representing the first two default items. For example, typing
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\addtoDirList{My home page is \url{www.example.com}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+in the preamble, adds this item to the end of the list. Should you want your home page listed first, you could do the
+following
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\removeDirTOC
+\removeDirArticle
+\addtoDirList{My home page is \url{www.example.com}}
+\addtoDirList{\dirTOCItem}
+\addtoDirList{\dirArticleItem}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The following are for creating some special effects around the directory,
+such as putting the directory into a multicolumn format.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{priorDirMatter\darg{\meta{text/commands}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\priorDirMatter{!meta(text/commands)}
+\afterDirMatter{!meta(text/commands)}
+\priorDirList{!meta(text/commands)}
+\afterDirList{!meta(text/commands)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+Below is a partial listing of the definition of \cs{webdirectory}, the internal name
+for the directory. We present the code so you can see where the prior/after commands
+write to.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\web@priorDirMatter
+\begin{flushleft}{\web@formatWordDirectory\web@directory}%
+\web@priorDirList
+\vspace{\vspaceAfterDirName}%
+\begin{itemize}
+ !anglemeta(directory listing)
+\end{itemize}
+\web@afterDirList
+\end{flushleft}
+\web@afterDirMatter
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic Contained within the code is another command, \Com{vspaceAfterDirName}, not mentioned before.
+It is used to adjust vertical spacing after the directory name and
+the beginning of the itemize list.
+
+A final command that may be useful is \Com{directoryhook}. It is used for manipulating
+the directory as a whole.
+
+\bgroup\obeyspaces %
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily{ \anglemeta{code that manipulates \#1}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\directoryhook{
+ !anglemeta(code that manipulates #1)
+}
+\end{dCmd}
+\egroup
+\newtopic The argument of \cs{directoryhook} is some \LaTeX{} code that manipulates \texttt{\#1}, within
+the argument \texttt{\#1} refers to \cs{webdirectory}, the internal name of the directory.
+The following example places a colored box around the directory, and centers it on the title page.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\directoryhook{%
+ \begin{center}
+ \setlength{\topsep}{0pt}%
+ \fcolorbox{red}{webyellow}{%
+ \parbox{.4\linewidth}{#1}}%
+ \end{center}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=283} See the file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=283}{multicol\_dir.pdf}}
+for examples of many of these commands. This file is posted on the
+\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroBlog}.
+
+
+%\directoryhook
+
+
+\subsection{The TOC for Web}
+
+The \pkg{web} style comes with its own table of contents format,
+as seen in the table of contents for the screen version of this document.
+The amount of indentation can be adjusted using \cs{tocindent}. The default is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\tocindent{20pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+There is another relevant parameter, \cs{widestNumber}. The value of the
+argument of this command declaration sets the amount of indentation for the
+subsection numbers. The default is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\widestNumber{0.0.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+This is a template for the subsection numbers, the default is a one digit
+section number and a one digit subsection number. In the preamble of this
+document, I've set \cs{widestNumber\darg{0.00.}}, since some subsection
+numbers have two digits.
+
+\newtopic The color of the heading of the table of contents is set through
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{tocColor\darg{\meta{named\_color}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\tocColor{!meta(named_color)}
+\end{dCmd}
+Specifying a color through this command at any time before the creation of the table of contents
+will change the color of the heading. The default is blue.
+
+
+\redpoint If you prefer the standard {\LaTeX}, the
+\texttt{\hyperref[sss:latextoc]{latextoc}} option can be used.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{usedirectory}}{usedirectory}
+Option}\label{sss:nodir}
+
+When the \texttt{usedirectory} option is specified, a short
+directory appears on the first page, see \Nameref{titlepagedir} for
+more details.
+
+\redpoint \textbf{\textcolor{red}{Important Note:}} In previous versions
+of {\Web}, the directory automatically appeared, and there was a
+\texttt{nodirectory} option to make it go away. Now, the directory
+does not appear by default, and the option \texttt{usedirectory}
+makes it appear. The \texttt{nodirectory} option is still defined,
+but does nothing.\endredpoint
+
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{latextoc}}{latextoc}
+Option}\label{sss:latextoc}
+
+If you don't like the default design for the table of contents,
+you can always recover the standard \LaTeX\ table of contents by
+using the \texttt{latextoc} option with the \pkg{web}
+package:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[latextoc]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Should you want to go with this option, you might consider
+including
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\hypersetup{linktocpage}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Look at the table of contents with and without this
+\pkg{hyperref} option to decide which you prefer.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{centertitlepage} Option}\label{centertitle}
+
+Beginning with version 5.0, there is a \texttt{centertitlepage} option
+that attempts to center the title page better when the \texttt{forpaper} option
+is taken. The \cs{textwidth} of the document is preserved.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{centertitlepagefull} Option}\label{centertitlefull}
+
+When the \texttt{centertitlepagefull} option is used, the content of the title
+page is centered on the page when the \texttt{forpaper} option
+is taken. The \cs{textwidth} is \cs{paperwidth} minus \texttt{2\cs{coverpagemargin}}.
+The default value of the \emph{command} \cs{coverpagemargin} is \texttt{1\,in}.
+
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{makeinlinetitle}}{\CMD{makeinlinetitle}} Command}\label{inlinetitle}
+ \aebCng[makeinlinetitle]
+
+For some short documents,\footnote{Short documents such as white
+papers, homework assignments, for example.} a formal title page may
+not be needed or desirable. In this case, use \cs{makeinlinetitle},
+the ``in-line'' title.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{makeinlinetitle}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\makeinlinetitle
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic The command, which can be redefined to your needs, has the following design:
+\begin{center}\setlength{\tabcolsep}{0pt}
+\begin{tabular*}{\linewidth}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}lcr}
+ & \cs{webtitle} &\\
+\cs{webuniversity} & \cs{webauthor} & \cs{webemail}\\
+\texttt{date} & & \cs{webversion}
+\end{tabular*}
+\end{center}
+The table above extends the entire \cs{linewidth}. The values of \cs{webtitle},
+\cs{web\-uni\-ver\-sity}, \cs{webauthor}, \cs{webmail} and \cs{web\-ver\-sion}
+are populated by their command counterparts, see \hyperref[table:BIM]
+{Table~\ref*{table:BIM}}, page~\pageref*{table:BIM}. The \texttt{date},
+as appears in the lower left row, will expand to the current date,
+or the value specified by the \cs{date} command.
+
+\newtopic Below are notes in the case the \texttt{extended} option is in effect:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The basic information above can be entered through
+ \cs{DeclareDocInfo} command as described in
+ section~\ref*{docinfo}, entitled \Nameref{docinfo}.
+ \item If the value of the \texttt{prepared} key is not specified, then
+ \texttt{date} is the current date, otherwise, \texttt{date} is the one specified
+ as the value of the \texttt{prepared} key.
+ \item If the value of the \texttt{talksite} key is not specified, then
+ \cs{webversion} is used; but if \texttt{talksite} is specified, the value of this
+ key is used instead of \cs{webversion}.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Template Options}\label{ss:templates}
+
+The \pkg{web} Package has three options (and supporting
+commands) for creating colored backgrounds, graphics backgrounds,
+and various overlays.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{usetemplates} Option}
+
+The \texttt{usetemplates} option activates the mechanism for
+creating colored backgrounds and graphic overlays. A complete
+discussion of the commands related to this option can be found
+in the section entitled \Nameref{ss:templagemagement}.
+
+\redpoint See the demo file \texttt{bgtest.tex} for examples.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{leftpanel} and \texttt{right\-panel} Options}\label{ss:lrpanel}
+
+When either of these two options is specified, a vertical panel
+is created. See the section entitled \Nameref{ss:templagemagement}
+for a complete discussion of the commands related to these options.
+
+\redpoint See the demo file \texttt{bgtest.tex} for examples.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{leftpanelprt} and \texttt{right\-panelprt} Options}\label{ss:lrpanelprt}
+
+These two options are the same as \texttt{leftpanel} and
+\texttt{right\-panel} \emph{when there is no paper option} (\texttt{forpaper},
+\texttt{forcolorpaper}). When a paper option is taken, these options do
+nothing. The options are useful for creating a paneled PDF for the
+screen, but the paper version that has no panel.
+
+\section{Navigation Aids}\label{ss:naviaids}
+
+The \pkg{web} package offers a couple of navigation aids to
+help you move around: the \texttt{navibar} Option, and some
+\hyperref[sss:diricons]{direction icons}.
+
+\subsection{A Navigation Bar}\label{sss:navibar}
+
+Use the \texttt{navibar} option of \pkg{web} to add a
+navigation toolbar, as seen at the bottom of this page.
+Usage:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),navibar]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The result is the navigation bar you see at the bottom of the
+page.
+
+\NaviBarOn\AddToShipoutPicture*{\NaviBarOff}
+
+\begin{comment}
+\redpoint Here is (almost) the preamble of this document.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[dvipsone,navibar]{web} % <- navibar option
+
+\hypersetup{pdfpagemode=None,bookmarksopen=false}
+
+\title{The Web and Exerquiz Packages Manual of Usage}
+\author{D. P. Story}
+\subject{How to create on-line exercises and quizzes}
+\keywords{LaTeX, hyperref, PDF, exercises, quizzes}
+\version{1.30}\copyrightyears{1999-2000}
+\email{dpstory@uakron.edu}
+\university{THE UNIVERSITY OF AKRON\\
+ Mathematics and Computer Science}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{comment}
+
+\redpoint The toolbar can be turned on or off by the following
+commands: \cs{Navi\-Bar\-On}\sCom{NaviBarOn} and
+\cs{Navi\-Bar\-Off}\sCom{NaviBarOff}. The navigation toolbar at
+the bottom of the page was generated by the \cs{NaviBarOn}.
+\cs{NaviBarOff} was placed on the next page to turn off the bar. The
+exact code used on this page is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\NaviBarOn\AddToShipoutPicture*{\NaviBarOff}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The colors for the navigation bar can be set with commands
+\Com{navibarTextColor} and \Com{navibarBgColor}. Each take a single
+argument, a named color. The default colors are \texttt{webblue} and
+\texttt{webgray}, respectively.
+
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{newNaviIcon}}
+ {\textbackslash newNaviIcon}}\label{ss:newnaviicon}
+
+The \cs{newNaviIcon} can be used to define a navigation icon.
+The action of the icon can be to execute a menu item, perform a
+hyper-jump, or execute the JavaScript code. It takes six
+parameters:
+
+\medskip\noindent Parameters
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+#1 = m, j, or l
+#2 = command name of the new navigation icon
+#3 = width of icon
+#4 = height of icon
+#5 = text to appear in the center of the icon.
+#6 = if m: named menu action, e.g., NextPage, PrevPage, etc.
+ if j: execute JavaScript
+ if l: \hyperlink{arg} or \href{arg}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Once the \cs{newNaviIcon} command is executed, a new icon is
+defined. The name of this new icon is the value of parameter \#2.
+
+\redpoint \textcolor{blue}{Example:}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newNaviIcon[m]{\myNext}{34pt}{10pt}{Next}{NextPage}
+\newNaviIcon[j]{\jsWarning}{34pt}{10pt}{Hi}{app.alert("Hi there")}
+\newNaviIcon[l]{\linkJump}{34pt}{10pt}{Go}{\hyperlink{page.1}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newNaviIcon[m]{\myNext}{34pt}{10pt}{Next}{NextPage}
+\newNaviIcon[j]{\jsWarning}{34pt}{10pt}{Hi}{app.alert("Hi there")}
+\newNaviIcon[l]{\linkJump}{34pt}{10pt}{Go}{\hyperlink{page.1}}
+
+\noindent By typing \verb+\myNext\ \jsWarning\ \linkJump+, we get
+\[
+ \myNext\ \jsWarning\ \linkJump
+\]
+The colors for the navigation bar can be set with commands
+\cs{navibarTextColor} and \cs{navibarBgColor}.
+
+\subsection{Direction Icons}\label{sss:diricons}
+
+The up arrow you see in the upper right-hand corner was
+constructed using colored rules and the AMS symbol font,
+\texttt{amssymb}. The uparrow icon was produced by the command:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\insertnaviiconhere{\ArrowUp{\hyperlink{webtoc}}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The definition of \cs{ArrowUp}, which be found in the \textsf{web.dtx} file is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\ArrowUp[1]
+{%
+ \setlength{\fboxsep}{6pt}\normalsize
+ \raisebox{-\depth}[0pt][0pt]{%
+ #1{\web@colorbox@w@transparency{\web@directionIconBgColor}%
+ {\textcolor{\web@directionIconTextColor}{$\bigl\Uparrow$}}}}%
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent Or, more generally,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\insertnaviiconhere{\ArrowUp{link_command}}
+\insertnaviiconhere{\ArrowDown{link_command}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This will insert direction icons on the current page (I
+hope).
+
+\insertnaviiconhere{\ArrowUp{\hyperlink{toc.1}}}
+
+\medskip
+
+If you want a running direction icon you can use
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\insertnaviiconhereafter{\ArrowUp{link_command}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent or
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\insertnaviiconhereafter{\ArrowDown{link_command}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\redpoint To discontinue a running arrow icon type
+\begin{equation*}
+\cs{defaultpageheader}
+\end{equation*}
+on the page you want the arrow(s) to disappear.
+
+\newtopic The colors of the direction icons by using
+the commands \Com{directionIconTextColor} and
+\Com{directionIconBgColor}. Each command takes a named color as its argument;
+the default values are \texttt{webblue} and \texttt{webgray}, respectively.
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{panelNaviGroup}}
+ {\textbackslash panelNaviGroup}}\label{ss:panelnavigroup}
+
+When the \texttt{\hyperref[ss:lrpanel]{leftpanel}} or
+\texttt{\hyperref[ss:lrpanel]{rightpanel}} options are chosen, a
+(navigation) panel is created. The command \cs{panelNaviGroup}
+can be used to create the standard navigation panel.
+
+%\exPDF{bgtest} See the sample file \texttt{bgtest.tex} for an example of usage.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=877} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=877}{bgtest.pdf}}.
+The source file \texttt{bgtest.tex}, attached to the PDF, offers an example
+of \cs{panelNaviGroup}. This article is posted on the
+\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroBlog}.
+
+
+\section{The Language Options}\label{web:langopts}
+
+The language options redefine all of the language dependent text
+macros that appear on the title page, in the table of contents, and
+in the running headers. Invoke these options in the usual
+way:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(lang_opt)]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Here, \texttt{\meta{lang\_opt}} is one of the following values:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+\texttt{dutch} & \texttt{french} & \texttt{german}\\
+\texttt{italian} & \texttt{norsk} & \texttt{russian}\\
+\texttt{spanish} & \texttt{dansk} & \texttt{polish}\\
+\texttt{finnish} & \texttt{czech} & \texttt{catalan}\\
+\texttt{brazil} & \texttt{turkish}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{quote}
+
+The \pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} packages seem to be
+compatible with the \textsf{babel} package; you can use
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[french]{babel}
+\usepackage[dvips,french]{web}
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+subject to the usual restrictions on these language packages.
+(Don't use characters declared active by these languages within a
+\cs{label}, or as a field name for a quiz.)
+
+\section{Paper Related Options and Commands}\label{paperoptions}
+
+In this section, several paper options are discussed, and one command.
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{forpaper}}{forpaper}
+Option}\label{sss:webforpaper}
+
+Some people may want to create exercises using the
+\texttt{exercise} environment for a paper document. The
+\texttt{forpaper} option can be used to remove the color from the
+document, and to restore the standard \cs{textheight} of a standard
+\texttt{article} class \LaTeX{} document.
+
+The \cs{textwidth} is determined from the \cs{screensize} and
+\cs{margins} parameters or by the design option (see
+\nameref{sss:designoptions}), \emph{if any are given}; consequently,
+the line breaks are the same for the ``web'' version and the
+``print'' version. If the screen dimensions are not set (by a design
+option or by the \cs{screensize} and \cs{margins} commands) when
+using the \texttt{forpaper} option, the standard {\LaTeX} page
+layout dimensions are used for the class.
+
+Using the \texttt{forpaper} option with the \texttt{latexlayout}
+option will give you the standard \LaTeX{} \cs{textwidth}.
+
+The \texttt{forpaper} option also changes the \cs{newpage} command
+to \cs{par}\cs{medskip} at the end of each solution---we don't
+want to waste paper now, do we?
+
+Finally, there is a Boolean switch \verb+\ifeqforpaper+, which you
+are free to use to refine the look your \texttt{forpaper} version.
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{forcolorpaper}}{forcolorpaper}
+Option}\label{forcolorpaper}
+
+Same as the \hyperref[sss:webforpaper]{\texttt{forpaper}} option,
+but the color operators are not turned off.
+
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{latexlayout}}{latexlayout}
+Option}\label{sss:weblatexlayout}
+
+For those who want to go ``totally native,'' use the
+\texttt{latexlayout} and \texttt{forpaper} options together. When the
+\texttt{latexlayout} option is used, the page layout redefinitions of
+\pkg{web} are bypassed, leaving the original layout values of the
+\texttt{article} class of \LaTeX.
+
+\redpoint If the \texttt{latexlayout} option is taken, all templates
+are turned off, and the \texttt{for\-color\-option} is executed. To remove
+color, you need to explicitly take the \texttt{forpaper} option.
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{uselatexparts}}{uselatexparts}
+and \texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{uselatexchapters}}{uselatexchapters}
+Options}
+
+As described in \hyperref[partsChaptersDots]{section~\ref*{partsChaptersDots}},
+page~\pageref*{partsChaptersDots}, the {\Web} package redefines the \cs{part}
+and \cs{chapter} commands for the purpose of allowing easier access to redefining
+how these section elements are to appear in the document and in the table of contents.
+You can bypass these definitions by using \texttt{uselatexparts} and
+the \texttt{uselatexchapters} options. This may be useful if you want to use AeB
+to create a paper document and you want to use that standard definitions, or perhaps
+want to use another package to define the look of the table of contents or
+of the \cs{part} and \cs{chapter} commands. (The other sectioning comments can be overridden
+as well, but any controls provided by the \texttt{extended} option will be lost.)
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{useFullWidthForPaper}}
+ {\CMD{useFullWidthForPaper}} Command}
+
+We introduce a command of resetting the page layout paper \emph{when
+the \emph{\texttt{forpaper}} option is in effect}. The primary use
+is to create standard documents for academics such as homeworks,
+syllabuses or any handout to the student.
+
+This command is used to set the page layout to its maximum width, given
+a 1 inch margin. The height is maximized after taking into account
+other page parameters that effect it. The parameters \cs{marginparwidth}
+and \cs{marginparsep} are set to zero; for this layout, there are no
+marginal comments. The command may be redefined as desired.
+
+\newtopic The command should be used in the preamble, otherwise, it
+has no effect.
+
+\section{Formatting for screen and paper}
+
+As we learned in \hyperref[paperoptions]
+{Section~\ref*{paperoptions}}, {\Web} can format a document in a for
+screen or for paper. The {\Web} package provides several commands and
+environments for changing content as needed.
+
+When the \texttt{forpaper} option is used, the switch
+\cs{ifeqforpaper}\sCom{ifeqforpaper} is set to true. You can use
+this switch, to get different content for the printed page or the
+screen page, or you can use the convenience command \cs{prtscr}:
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{prtscr\darg{\meta{print\_text}}\darg{\meta{screen\_text}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\prtscr{!meta(print_text)}{!meta(screen_text)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription This command expands to \meta{print\_text} if the \texttt{forpaper} option
+is taken and to \meta{screen\_text} if not.
+
+The \cs{prtscr} command is useful for small changes in content, not
+involving verbatim text or paragraph breaks. {\Web} defines two additional environments,
+\texttt{forpaper} and \texttt{forscreen}.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{begin\darg{forscreen}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\begin{forscreen}
+....
+....
+....
+\end{forscreen}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\EnvLoc Anywhere.
+
+\newtopic Use the \texttt{forscreen} environment to insert commands or content meant only for
+the screen.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{begin\darg{forpaper}}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\begin{forpaper}
+....
+....
+....
+\end{forpaper}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\EnvLoc Anywhere.
+
+\newtopic Use the \texttt{forpaper} environment to insert commands
+or content meant only for the paper document.
+
+\newtopic Another command, \cs{NewPage}, is useful for formatting
+the same document for print as well as screen
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{NewPage}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\NewPage
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc Anywhere.
+
+\CmdDescription This command expands to \cs{newpage} if the
+\texttt{forpaper} option is \emph{not taken}, and does nothing,
+otherwise. Useful for inserting page breaks in the screen version
+that are not needed in the paper version.
+
+\section{Template Building and Management}\label{ss:templagemagement}
+
+The {\Web} package has a template building capability.
+You can conveniently create backgrounds for your page, insert an
+arbitrary number of graphic overlays, create a left or right
+(navigation) side panel, define your own navigation icons that
+appear in the panel, and write material that will appear in a
+panel.
+
+%\exPDF{bgtest} The demo file for the template feature is \texttt{bgtest.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=877} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=877}{bgtest.pdf}}.
+The source file \texttt{bgtest.tex}, attached to the PDF,
+is demo file for the template feature. This article
+is posted on the \href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroBlog}.
+
+
+\subsection{Template options}
+
+As with pdfscreen by Radhakrishnan C. V., we shall have the two
+options, \texttt{leftpanel} and \texttt{rightpanel}. In addition to
+these two, there is the \texttt{usetemplates} option. Use the
+option \texttt{usetemplates} if you want to use colored backgrounds
+or overlays without a left or right panel.
+
+The template, or overlay, capability of the \textsf{Web Package}
+requires the use of two \LaTeX{} Packages: \texttt{everyshi.dtx},
+by Martin Schr\"oder, and \texttt{eso-pic.dtx}, by Rolf
+Niepraschk. If any of the three template options
+(\texttt{usetemplates}, \texttt{leftpanel} or
+\texttt{rightpanel}) are used, the \textsf{eso-pic package} is
+automatically included by \pkg{web}. The \textsf{eso-pic
+package}, in turn, inputs the \textsf{everyshi} package. These two
+packages need to be present on your system, unpacked, and in the
+search path of \LaTeX.
+
+Templates, or overlays, are available for the all driver options.
+
+\subsection{Text Screen Template}
+
+You can specify a graphic that will be overlaid onto the text
+screen, that portion of the screen to which {\LaTeX} content is
+written. If a panel option has not been specified, this is the
+whole screen; otherwise, it is that portion of the screen outside
+the panel.
+
+If one of the options \texttt{usetemplates}, \texttt{leftpanel} or
+\texttt{rightpanel} is specified, the commands
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\template{!meta(graphics_file_name)}
+\textBgColor{!meta(named_color)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+insert a background graphic and a background color,
+respectively, onto the text screen region. The \cs{template} command
+will rescale the graphic to cover the entire text screen region.
+
+Additional graphics can be overlayed with the \cs{AddToTemplate}
+command.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\AddToTemplate{!meta(template_name)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The command takes one argument, the \meta{template\_name}.
+Define an overlay,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\newcommand\myTemplate
+{%
+ !anglemeta(commands to insert an overlay)
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent the \meta{template\_name} for this template is \texttt{myTemplate}. (Note that there
+is no backslash.) To add this template to the list graphics to be overlayed onto the page,
+we would type
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\AddToTemplate{myTemplate}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint \textcolor{blue}{Example:} Insert the ``\AcroT'' logo in lower-left corner, offset by~36pt
+in the $x$ and $y$ directions.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\AEBLogo
+{%
+ \put(36,36){\includegraphics{acrotexlogo}}%
+}
+\AddToTemplate{AEBLogo}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Because the \textsf{Web Package} uses \textsf{eso-pic}, the
+commands will be executed within a \texttt{picture} environment.
+Within the \texttt{picture} environment, the reference point of the text
+screen is the lower-left corner. The above code puts the
+``\AcroT'' logo at coordinates of \texttt{(36,36)} relative to the
+lower-left corner. The units are measured in (\TeX) points.
+
+\redpoint \textcolor{blue}{Example:} Center the logo within the text screen region.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\AEBLogoCenter
+{%
+ \ifnum\arabic{page}>1\relax
+ \parbox[b][\paperheight][c]{\textscreenwidth}
+ {\centering\includegraphics{acrotexlogo}}%
+ \fi
+}
+\AddToTemplate{AEBLogoCenter}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent
+See the section titled \Nameref{sss:templatemanage} for details of
+how to manage your templates.
+
+\subsection{Panel Screen Template}\label{panelscreentemplate}
+
+When the \texttt{leftpanel} or \texttt{rightpanel}
+option is specified, a (navigation/logo) panel is created. The commands
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\paneltemplate{!meta(graphics_file_name)}
+\panelBgColor{!meta(named_color)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent set the overlay graphic and the background color, respectively.
+The graphic is rescaled to fit the panel region.
+
+Once the panel and its background have been defined, contents and
+form elements can be placed on top of the panel. The command \cs{buildpanel} can
+be used for this purpose. For example, from the sample file
+\texttt{bgtest.tex},
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\buildpanel
+{%
+ \href{http://www.math.uakron.edu/}
+ {\includegraphics[scale=.4]{uakron}}
+ \par\vspace{\stretch{1}}
+ \href{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex.html}
+ {\rotatebox{-90}{\aebLogo}}
+ \par\vspace{\stretch{1}}
+ \panelNaviGroup % defined in web
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The content of the panel is stacked from top to bottom.\footnote{The command \cs{aebLogo}
+is defined in the file, \texttt{bgtest.tex}.}
+
+\redpoint Additional overlays can be added with
+\cs{AddToPanelTemplate}. The command may not be as useful as the panel overlay can
+always be rebuilt using \cs{buildpanel}.\endredpoint
+
+\newtopic The minimal width for the panel is set through the \aebCng[minPanelWidth]
+\Com{minPanelWidth} command, the default size is 1in; that is,
+\verb!\minPanelWidth{1in}! is executed by the package at start up.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{minPanelWidth\darg{\meta{length}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\minPanelWidth{!meta(length)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc You can reset the minimal width by executing the
+command in the preamble before the \cs{screenwidth} and \cs{margins}
+commands. Or, place it in the \texttt{web.cfg}.
+
+\subsection{Template Management}\label{sss:templatemanage}
+
+In order to change backgrounds or templates, on any page, re-issue
+any one of the commands \cs{template} or \cs{textBgColor} (for the
+screen text region), or \cs{paneltemplate} or \cs{textBgColor}
+(for the panel region).
+
+The panel overlay can be redesigned with \cs{buildpanel}, or some of the
+command components that make up the panel overlay can be redefined.
+
+Templates that are inserted into the output stream using
+either \cs{AddToTemplate} or \cs{AddToPanelTemplate} can also be
+redefined on any page.
+
+Templates, created by either \cs{AddToTemplate} or
+\cs{AddTo\-Panel\-Template}, can also be \emph{disabled} or \emph{enabled}
+individually. For example, if the \texttt{AEBLogoCenter} template
+has been overlayed using the command
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\AddToTemplate{AEBLogoCenter}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent the template can be disabled (turned off) by typing
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\disableTemplate{AEBLogoCenter}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent on any page. (\textcolor{red}{Note:} The effects of this command
+may be not be seen until the following page.) Turn the template
+on by typing
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\enableTemplate{AEBLogoCenter}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent on any page.
+
+For the panel region, there are commands for \emph{disabling}
+(\cs{disablePanelTemplate}) and \emph{enabling} (\cs{enablePanelTemplate}) as
+well. Each of these takes a \meta{template\_name} as an argument.
+
+There are a number of commands for \emph{clearing} backgrounds and
+templates.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ClearTextTemplate
+\ClearPanelTemplate
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent These two clear background colors and background graphics.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ClearBuildPanel
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This command will clear the build panel as well as the graphics
+and field elements that lay on top of the panel created by the
+\cs{buildpanel} command.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ClearAllTemplates
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The command \cs{ClearAllTemplates} is equivalent to executing \cs{ClearTextTemplate} and
+\cs{ClearPanelTemplate}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ClearTextTemplateBuffer
+\ClearPanelTemplateBuffer
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The commands will clear all overlays, including overlays created by
+\cs{Add\-To\-Template} and \cs{Add\-To\-Panel\-Template}.
+
+\redpoint See the documentation file, \texttt{web.dtx}, for exact definitions of the
+commands in this section.
+
+% \subsubsection{Parameters used in Template Building}\label{sss:partemp}
+
+\section{The \texttt{extended} or \texttt{pro} Option}\label{webpro}
+
+Version 5.0 of {\Web} introduces the \texttt{pro}, which encompasses many new
+features. The \opt{pro} option has a preferred alias of \opt{extended}. The
+\opt{extended} option uses the very fine package \texttt{xkeyval} by
+Hendri Adriaens, which enables developers to create commands with key-value
+pairs.
+
+\newtopic The following new features are provided by the \texttt{extended} option:
+\begin{questions}
+ \item \cs{DeclareDocInfo}: A data structure for setting various document properties.
+ \item A slightly re-designed \cs{maketitle}. Also, increased control over
+ the placement of the elements of the title page.
+ \item Extensive control over the display of \cs{section}, \cs{subsection},
+ \cs{subsubsection} headings. Now color, fonts, size and so on can easily
+ be set.
+ \item A choice of using section numbers (the default) or no sections, or dings.
+ \item A single data structure to set virtually all colors.
+\end{questions}
+Details provided in subsequent sections.
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{DeclareDocInfo}}{\CMD{DeclareDocInfo}}}\label{docinfo}
+
+The preamble of your document should contain a number of keys that
+identify the document, including the title and author of the
+document. Some of this information is used to construct the
+title page, some is placed in the {\PDF}, to be displayed in the
+`Description' tab of the \textbf{Document Properties} dialog box, which
+is accessed through the \texttt{Ctrl+D} accelerator key, or through
+the menu system \texttt{File > Document Properties...} (for version 8,
+this is \texttt{File > Properties...}).
+
+Information is passed through the \cs{DeclareDocInfo} command which
+takes a number of key-value pairs. This is a simple \textsf{xkeyval}
+interface to many of the text macros that are defined in \Web.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{DeclareDocInfo\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\DeclareDocInfo{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc Place in the preamble.
+
+\KVP The following is a description of the key value pairs.
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \texttt{title}: The title of the document.
+ \item \texttt{author}: The author or authors of the document.
+ \item \texttt{subject}: The subject of the presentation. Optional, this appears only in the
+ `Description' tab of the \textbf{Document Properties}.
+ \item \texttt{keywords}: A list of keywords that describe your document. Optional, this appears only in the
+ `Description' tab of the \textbf{Document Properties}. Some search engines use this field.
+ \item \texttt{university}: The university or company the author represents.
+ \item \texttt{email}: The email address of the author. This appears on the title page, and becomes
+ an email link.
+ \item \texttt{version}: The version number of the document.
+ \item \texttt{versionLabel}: Text that precedes the version number. The default is \texttt{Version}.
+ \item \texttt{talkdate}: Date of the presentation.
+
+ The fields \texttt{version} and \texttt{talkdate} occupy the
+ same position on the title page. If the \texttt{talkdate} is
+ specified, then the talk date will appear on the title page, if
+ \texttt{talkdate} is not specified, then \texttt{version} will
+ appear. Both \texttt{version} and \texttt{talkdate} can be
+ specified, but in this case, it is \texttt{talkdate} that will
+ appear. The \texttt{version} can be used for version
+ management.
+
+ \item \texttt{talkdateLabel}: Text that precedes the date of the document. The default text for the talkdate label
+ is \texttt{Presented:}.
+ \item \texttt{talksite}: Site of the presentation. This field can be used for generally anything, for
+ example, you could specify your web site.
+ \item \texttt{copyrightyears}: Year(s) of the copyright of this publication, defaults to this year.
+ \item \texttt{prepared}: The date of preparation of the
+ document, defaults to the day the file was compiled (\LaTeX ed).
+ This was formerly the last revision date.
+ \item \texttt{preparedLabel}: The label that precedes the date \texttt{prepared}. The default string
+ value is \texttt{Prepared:}. The old default was \texttt{Last Revision Date:}, and will remain so
+ if the \texttt{extended} option is not taken.
+ \item \texttt{copyrightStatus}: If the \textsf{aebxmp} package is loaded for advanced metadata,
+ this key allows you to set the copyright status. Possible
+ values \texttt{True}, \texttt{False}, or blank (no value, or the key not listed at all)
+ corresponding to \textsf{Copyrighted}, \textsf{Public Domain} and
+ \textsf{Unknown}, respectively. The values of this key are case sensitive, so you must enter
+ \texttt{True} and \texttt{False}, with the first letter capitalized. If \textsf{aebxmp} is
+ not loaded, specifying this key does nothing.
+ \item \texttt{copyrightNotice}: If the \textsf{aebxmp} package is loaded for advanced metadata,
+ this key allows you to set copyright notice, short text describing the copyright, perhaps,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+copyrightNotice={Copyright D. P. Story, 2009--2012}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ If \textsf{aebxmp} is not loaded, specifying this key does nothing.
+ \item \texttt{copyrightInfoURL}: If the \textsf{aebxmp} package is loaded for advanced metadata,
+ this key allows you to set the copyright info url, a url to
+ a page on the web containing a more detailed description of the copyright. If \textsf{aebxmp} is
+ not loaded, specifying this key does nothing.
+ \item \texttt{authors}: A list of authors, \emph{each enclosed in braces}.
+ Names of individual authors can be accessed using the JavaScript \texttt{info.Authors}
+ property: the first author is \texttt{info.Authors[0]}; the second
+ author is \texttt{info.Authors[1]}, etc.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+authors={D. P. Story}{J\u00FCrgen Gilg}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Notice the use of unicode to create a u-umlaut (\"{u}).
+ \item \texttt{Keywords}: Similar to keywords, but note the capital `K'. Then
+ \texttt{Keywords} is used to list the keywords, they are inserted into the
+ metadata as an array. The individual keywords can be accessed through a special
+ JS function, \texttt{aKeywords()}, defined by the \textsf{aebxmp} package. The syntax
+ is the same as \texttt{keywords}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+Keywords={AcroTeX.Net,XMP,E4X,Adobe Acrobat,JavaScript}
+\end{Verbatim}
+If you execute \texttt{aKeywords(0)}, the string \texttt{"AcroTeX.Net"} is returned.
+Executing \texttt{aKeywords(4)} returns \texttt{"JavaScript"}, while executing
+\texttt{aKeywords(5)} returns \texttt{undefined}.
+ \item \texttt{authortitle}: The \texttt{authortitle} is a field that appears
+ on the \textsf{Additional Metadata} dialog box. It can be used for whatever purpose you wish.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+authortitle={Programming and Development, AcroTeX.Net}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \texttt{descriptionwriter}: This key fills a field on the
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+descriptionwriter={A good, well-liked guy}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \textsf{Additional Metadata} dialog box. For example
+ \item \texttt{customProperties}: Acrobat allows for the creation of
+ custom properties which are accessible through the \texttt{info}
+ object. The value of this key consists of one or more property
+ definition(s) enclosed in braces. Each property definition has two
+ required key-value pairs, \texttt{name} and \texttt{value}. The
+ \texttt{name} needs to be a simple name consisting of letters and
+ numbers (not starting with a number). The \texttt{value} string
+ can be any string. See the example following:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+customProperties={name=Developer,value={D. P. Story, Esq.}}
+ {name=Motivator,value=J\u00FCrgen Gilg}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Executing \texttt{this.info.Developer} returns the value of
+\texttt{"D. P. Story, Esq."}, while, \texttt{this.info.Motivator} returns
+\texttt{"J\"{u}rgen Gilg"}.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\Ex\label{exDeclareDocInfo} Example of usage of \Com{DeclareDocInfo} can
+be found in
+\hyperref[fig:declaredocinfo]{Figure~\ref*{fig:declaredocinfo}},
+page~\pageref*{fig:declaredocinfo}.
+\paragraph*{Discussion of \texttt{keywords} versus \texttt{Keywords}.} \texttt{Keywords} will overwrite
+\texttt{keywords}; the value of \texttt{keywords} is passed to
+\pkg{hyperref} which enters them as a single string, while
+\texttt{Keywords} enters the keywords. as an array. There is no need to
+have both \texttt{keywords} and \texttt{Keywords}.
+\paragraph*{Discussion of \texttt{author} versus \texttt{authors}.} Similarly,
+\texttt{authors} overwrites \texttt{author}, individual authors names can
+be accessed; however, unlike \texttt{keywords}/\texttt{Keywords}, it may
+make sense to use both \texttt{author} and \texttt{authors}. The
+\pkg{web} package takes a copy of the value of \texttt{author} and uses
+it in the title page. It is possible to have two versions of the author's
+names, one for presentation and one for the PDF info.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+author={Dr. D. P. Story, Herr J. Gilg},
+authors={D. Story,J. Gilg},
+\end{Verbatim}
+You can do the same thing, with the \texttt{author} key only by using
+the \cs{texorpdfstring} command of \texttt{hyperref}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+author={\texorpdfstring{Dr. D. P. Story, Herr J. Gilg}
+ {D. Story,J. Gilg}},
+\end{Verbatim}
+The difference is that with \texttt{authors}, individual authors are accessible
+through the JavaScript command \texttt{this.info.Authors}.
+\begin{figure}[ht]
+\footnotesize\centering
+\begin{dCmd*}{.9\linewidth}
+\DeclareDocInfo
+{
+ title=My First Presentation,
+ author=D. P. Speaker,
+ university=My University,
+ email=dpspeaker@myu.edu,
+ talkdate={Dec.\ 17, \the\year},
+ talksite=The Talking University,
+ subject=On the Theory of AcroTeX,
+ keywords={AcroTeX.Net,XMP,E4X,Adobe Acrobat,JavaScript},
+ copyrightStatus=False,
+ copyrightNotice={Copyright D. P. Story, 2009--\the\year},
+ copyrightInfoURL=http://www.acrotex.net,
+ authors={D. P. Story}{J\u00FCrgen Gilg},
+ Keywords={AcroTeX.Net,XMP,E4X,Adobe Acrobat,JavaScript},
+ authortitle={Programming and Development, AcroTeX.Net},
+ descriptionwriter={A good, well-liked guy},
+ customProperties={name=Developer,value={D. P. Story, Esq.}}
+ {name=Motivator,value=J\u00FCrgen Gilg}
+}
+\end{dCmd*}
+\caption{The \protect\cs{DeclareDocInfo} Command}\label{fig:declaredocinfo}
+\end{figure}
+
+\handpoint \textbf{Two tricks of importance:} When the value contains a
+comma, then the whole value should be delimited by matching braces,
+as in the \texttt{talkdate} key-value in the
+\textbf{Example~\ref*{exDeclareDocInfo}} above. The \pkg{hyperref}
+command \Com{texorpdfstring} is handy for giving alternate wording, when
+some of the {\LaTeX} commands do not transfer to the {\PDF}'s \textbf{Document Properties}.
+For example, the title might have been ``A Discussion of $e^x$''; this title should appear
+in \cs{DeclareDocInfo} as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+title=A Discussion of \texorpdfstring{$e^x$}{exp(x)},
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Now the phrase, ``A Discussion of exp(x)'' will appear in
+the `Title' field of the \textbf{Document Properties}.
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates this command.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1112} Download \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1112}{web\_pro.pdf}}
+from the {\AcroBlog} website. The source file \texttt{web\_pro.tex} is
+attached to the PDF, illustrates this command.
+
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{DeclarePageLayout}}{\CMD{DeclarePageLayout}}}\label{pagelayout}
+
+The \Com{DeclarePageLayout} command gathers together many page
+layout parameters, both for {\LaTeX} and for {\Web}, into one
+convenient package of key-value pairs.
+
+\CmdLoc Place in the preamble.
+
+\KVP The following is a description of the key value pairs.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \texttt{design}: This key sets the \texttt{screensize}
+ according to preset dimensions, permissible values are
+ \texttt{designi}, \texttt{designii}, \texttt{designiii},
+ \texttt{designiv}, \texttt{designv}, \texttt{designvi},
+ \texttt{designvii}, \texttt{designviii}, and \texttt{designix}. These correspond to the
+ package options of the same names. This key is ignored if one of the
+ design options was taken as a {\Web} option. This key sets both the
+ \cs{screensize} and \cs{margins} commands.
+\item \texttt{screensizeOf}: This key sets the \texttt{screensize}
+ only (does not change the margins), possible values are
+ \texttt{designi}, \texttt{designii}, \texttt{designiii},
+ \texttt{designiv}, \texttt{designv}, \texttt{designvi},
+ \texttt{designvii}, \texttt{designviii}, and \texttt{designix}. Use this key, in
+ combination with the \texttt{margins} key, to use a standard design
+ \texttt{screensize}, but with different margins.
+\item \texttt{screensize}: Sets the \texttt{screensize} by executing
+ the \cs{screensize} command. The key takes two dimensions as
+ parameters:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+screensize={!meta(height)}{!meta(width)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \texttt{screensize} key sets the screen to a height of
+\meta{height} and a width of \meta{width}. This key is
+ignored if a design option has been taken in the {\Web} option list,
+or if the \cs{screensize} command has already been executed.
+\item \texttt{margins}: Sets the dimensions of the margins of the
+ screen page. The key takes four dimensions as parameters:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+margins={!meta(left)}{!meta(right)}{!meta(top)}{!meta(bottom)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Here \meta{left}, \meta{right}, \meta{top}, and
+\meta{bottom} are the dimensions of the margins of the screen
+page. These are the same arguments as the \cs{margins} command. This
+key is ignored if a design option has been taken in the {\Web}
+option list, or if the \cs{margins} command has already been
+executed.
+\item \texttt{headheight}: Sets the standard page layout parameter
+ \cs{headheight}. The default is \texttt{8pt}.
+\item \texttt{topmargin}: Sets the position of the running header.
+ The default is 8pt for screen sizes, and the {\LaTeX} default is the
+ \texttt{forpaper} option is taken. You can say
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+topmargin=\prtscr{!meta(paper_dim)}{!meta(screen_dim)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+To get a \texttt{topmargin} value that works for paper and screen.
+(Perhaps you have a border running around the page, and you need to
+reposition the header below the border.) This repositioning differs
+depending on whether you compile with the \texttt{forpaper} option,
+or not.
+
+\item \texttt{additionalheadsep}: Additional separation between the
+ running header and the beginning of the text. This parameter
+ modifies \cs{headsep}, which is computed automatically by the
+ \pkg{web} package. Use \texttt{additionalheadsep} to add in a
+ little bit more, if the calculation does not yield good results. The default
+ value is 0pt.
+
+\item \texttt{marginparsep}: The horizontal distance between body and
+ marginal notes. The default is 11pt. When the page size is designed for
+ viewing on a computer, the margins are often times quite small, and
+ marginal notes are typically not used. You can use a conditional to give
+ two values one for screen and one for paper. See the \texttt{topmargin}
+ key.
+
+\item \texttt{marginparwidth}: The width of marginal notes. The default is .25in.
+ When the page size is designed for viewing on a computer,
+ the margins are often times quite small, and marginal notes are typically not used.
+ You can use a conditional to give two values one for screen and one for paper.
+ See the \texttt{topmargin} key.
+
+\item \texttt{marginparpush}: The minimal vertical space between
+ successive marginal notes. The default is 5pt.
+
+\item \texttt{footskip}: Vertical distance separating the baseline
+ of the last line and the baseline of the footer. The default is
+ 30pt.
+
+\item \texttt{webfootskip}: Same as \texttt{footskip}, but the
+ \texttt{webfootskip} is measured up from the bottom edge of the
+ document. The default is 4pt.
+
+\item \texttt{panelwidth}: Sets the panel width. If not specified,
+ the minimal panel width of 1in is used. Panels appear when either
+ \texttt{leftpanel} or \texttt{rightpanel} is taken in the option
+ list of \Web. This key executes the \cs{panelwidth} command.
+
+\item \texttt{panelsep}: Sets the separation between the text screen
+ and the panel. The default is 10pt.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{The Title Page:
+ \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{maketitle}}{\CMD{maketitle}}}\label{maketitlepro}
+
+In this section, we described the enhanced features for controlling the title page.
+
+\subsubsection{The Title Page Structure}
+
+The title page is divided into three parts: top, middle and bottom.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Title Top:} The content of the top is determined by the \Com{top\-Titl\-ePage}
+command. (This command can be redefined, but it is not recommended.) The
+\cs{topTitlePage} command expands to three elements: the university (affiliation), the title,
+and the author(s), in that order vertically. These are the values of the keys \texttt{university},
+\texttt{title} and \texttt{author} that appear in the \cs{Declare\-Doc\-Info} command.
+
+\item \textbf{Title Middle:} The \Com{optionalPageMatter} command
+is used to enter content into this part of the title page. This middle
+part is optional; if \cs{optionalPageMatter} does not
+appear in the preamble, then this part of the title page is empty.
+
+\item \textbf{Title Bottom:} Bottom of the title page is controlled by the contents
+of the command \cs{titlepageTrailer} and consists of some of the
+document information entered in the \cs{Declare\-DocInfo} command.
+By default, \cs{titlepageTrailer} lists the values of the
+\cs{DeclareDocInfo} keys \texttt{email}, \texttt{talkdate},
+\texttt{talksite}, and \texttt{copy\-right\-years}, as described above. The
+font size of this bottom part is set by the command \cs{trailerFontSize}, the
+default is \cs{footnotesize}. This command can be re-defined in the
+usual way, for example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\trailerFontSize}{\scriptsize}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic \hyperref[fig:titlepage]{Figure~\ref*{fig:titlepage}}, page~\pageref*{fig:titlepage}, shows the basic
+composition of the title page of an {\AEB} document. The title page elements are described as they relate to the
+key-values of \nameref{docinfo}, described on page~\pageref{docinfo}.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item At the very top is the value of the \Indextt{university} key. The color of this
+ element can be set using the \Indextt{universityColor} key of \hyperref[designColor]{\Com{selectColors}},
+ page~\pageref{designColor}.
+ \item Next comes the value of \Indextt{title}, its color is controlled using the \Indextt{titleColor}
+ key of \hyperref[designColor]{\cs{selectColors}}.
+
+ \item The author follows, which is the value of \Indextt{author}. The color is set by
+ \Indextt{authorColor} of \hyperref[designColor]{\cs{selectColors}}.
+ \item The {\AEB} logo is inserted using \Com{optionalPageMatter}. Normally,
+ this macro does nothing unless it is defined. In this example, we have
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\optionalPageMatter
+{%
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{.67\linewidth}
+ \centering\includegraphics[scale=.5]{AeB_Logo}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item Finally comes the \Com{titlepageTrailer}, a macro that can
+ be redefined (see the package file \texttt{web.dtx} for its definition. This
+ macro places the other elements at the bottom of the page:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item The copyright year and email address, as given by
+ \Com{email}. The color of the email address is set by
+ \Indextt{urlColor} through the command
+ \hyperref[designColor]{\cs{selectColors}}. This color
+ actually sets the color of all external \textsf{URL}s.
+ \item To the right, on the first line of the title page trailer is the value of \Com{talksite}.
+ The color is the default color for text.
+ \item In the lower left is the date of the last revision of the document. The color is the default color for
+ text.
+ \item In the lower right is the date the talk was given. The color is the default color for text.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+Not shown in Figure~\ref*{fig:titlepage} is the title page directory, which is turned off by default.
+
+\begin{figure}[ht]
+\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+\centering\fbox{\includegraphics[width=.5\linewidth]{figures/titlepage1}}
+\caption{The Title Page}\label{fig:titlepage}
+\end{figure}
+
+\newtopic The title page layout is, of course, defined by the standard
+\Com{maketitle} command, which has been redefined by the \texttt{extended} option.
+In {\Web}, the \cs{maketitle} has different behaviors, one for screen and one for paper.
+
+\subsubsection{Greater Control of the Top Title Page}\label{top}
+
+The three elements of the top title page are the values of the keys
+\texttt{university}, \texttt{title} and \texttt{author}. Values of these keys
+are declared in the command \cs{DeclareDocInfo}. The \texttt{extended} option
+defines three commands \cs{universityLayout}, \cs{titleLayout}, and
+\cs{authorLayout}, to format these three keys in a variety of ways.
+
+%\handpoint A working example of the commands that follow can be found in \texttt{aebpro\_ex2.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1242} See the file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1242}{aebpro\_ex2.pdf}}. The source file
+\texttt{aebpro\_ex2.tex}, attached to the PDF, is a working example of the
+commands that follow.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{universityLayout\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\universityLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\titleLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\authorLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc Place these optional commands in the preamble.
+
+\KVP Each of these commands have a number of key-value pairs. The
+first thirteen are the same that appear in the description of
+\cs{sectionLayout}, \mlNameref{secHead}. The rest are unique to
+these three commands. In the descriptions below, the word `element'
+refers to the values of the keys \texttt{university},
+\texttt{title} and \texttt{author}.
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \texttt{fontfamily}: Font family to use with this element,
+ permitted values are \texttt{rmfamily}, \texttt{sffamily}, \texttt{ttfamily}.
+
+\item \texttt{fontseries}: Font series to use, possible values are \texttt{bfseries} and \texttt{mdseries}.
+
+\item \texttt{fontshape}: Font shape to use: \texttt{upshape}, \texttt{itshape}, \texttt{scshape}, \texttt{slshape}.
+
+\item \texttt{fontsize}: Font size to use with this element, recognized values are \texttt{tiny},
+ \texttt{script\-size},
+\texttt{footnotesize}, \texttt{small}, \texttt{normalsize},
+ \texttt{large}, \texttt{Large}, \texttt{LARGE}, \texttt{huge}, \texttt{Huge}.
+
+\item \texttt{halign}: Alignment of this element within its enclosing \cs{parbox}, permissible
+ values are \texttt{l} (left aligned), \texttt{c} (centered), \texttt{r} (right aligned). See \hyperref[tutex17]
+ {Example~\ref*{tutex17}} for a visualization of the effects of the \texttt{halign} key.
+
+\item \texttt{color}: The color of the section title, this can be any named color. The default is blue
+for \texttt{title}, and black otherwise.
+
+\item \texttt{special}: Through this key, you can a specify predefined layout for the title elements. Permissible
+ values are \texttt{shadow}, \texttt{framebox}, \texttt{colorbox}, \texttt{fcolorbox},
+ \texttt{frame\-box\-fit}, \texttt{color\-box\-fit}, \texttt{fcolor\-box\-fit}, \texttt{custom}, \texttt{default}.
+
+\item[] Custom titles can be created by specifying a value of
+ \texttt{custom}. In this case, {\Web} uses
+ \Com{customUniversity}, \Com{customTitle} and \Com{customAuthor}.
+ These are macros that take one argument, the code for designing the
+ title. The title is referred to as \texttt{\#1}. Depending on how
+ these custom titles are defined, the other keys may not be
+ obeyed.
+
+\item \texttt{framecolor}: The color of the frame surrounding the subject when the \texttt{special}
+ key has a value of \texttt{framebox}, \texttt{fcolorbox} \texttt{frameboxfit} or \texttt{fcolorboxfit}.
+
+\item \texttt{bgcolor}: The background (fill color) of the box enclosing this element, when
+ \texttt{special} has a value of \texttt{colorbox}, \texttt{fcolorbox}, \texttt{colorboxfit}
+ or \texttt{fcolorboxfit}.
+
+\item \texttt{shadowcolor}: The color of the shadow, when \texttt{special} has a value of \texttt{shadow}.
+
+\item \texttt{beforeskip}: The amount of skip before the title element.
+
+\item \texttt{afterskip}: The amount of skip after the title element.
+
+\item \texttt{usefont}: Through this key it is possible to specify
+an arbitrary font and font size. The key takes five parameters, for
+example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+usefont={OT1}{cmdh}{m}{n}{{16}{16pt}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first four are the arguments of the {\LaTeX}'s \cs{usefont}, encoding, family, series and shape. The last argument
+are the arguments of the {\LaTeX}'s \cs{fontsize}, size and baselineskip.
+
+\item[] If the fifth parameter is empty, no font size is specified, the current default sizes are used.
+
+
+%\item \texttt{reset}: This key attempts to reset changes to their defaults. Permissible values are
+% \texttt{font} (to reset the font changes only), or \texttt{all} (to reset all the keys).
+
+\item \texttt{hproportion}: Each of the three elements (university, title, author) lie in their own
+\cs{parbox}, the width of this box is determined by the value of this key, as a proportion of the
+total \cs{linewidth}. The default for all three is .7. This value can be set to get more or less
+``natural'' line breaks, without having to insert a new line with a `\verb!\\!'. See \hyperref[tutex17]
+{Example~\ref*{tutex17}} for a visualization of the effects of the \texttt{hproportion} key.
+
+\item \texttt{xhalign}: The \cs{parbox} of each of the three elements are also placed in a \cs{makebox}, additional
+control over positioning can be had by setting this key, which sets the positioning parameter of \cs{makebox}.
+The default value for \texttt{xhalign} is \texttt{c}, the element is centered. See \hyperref[tutex17]
+{Example~\ref*{tutex17}} for a visualization of the effects of the \texttt{xhalign} key.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates this command.
+
+%\exPDF{webpro_titlepg} The file \texttt{webpro\_titlepg} shows the structure of the title page.
+
+\newtopic Just above the \textbf{Title Top} is a skip that can be \aebCng[aboveTopTitleSkip]
+used to push the top down. The default value of this skip is
+\texttt{0pt}, but this can be changed through
+\cs{aboveTopTitleSkip}.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{aboveTopTitleSkip\darg{\meta{skip}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\aboveTopTitleSkip{!meta(skip)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic There is one other title page parameter that effects the layout.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{topTitlePageProportion\darg{0..1}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\topTitlePageProportion{0..1}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc Place this (optional) command in the preamble.
+
+\PD The top part of the title page is enclosed in a big \cs{parbox}
+with depth set to a proportion of \cs{textheight}.
+\cs{topTitlePageProportion} is used to set this proportion. The
+argument of this command should be a number between 0 and 1,
+obviously a value of 0 makes no sense. The default value is set by
+the {\Web} package to .33, i.e., the default is
+\verb!\topTitlePageProportion{.33}!.
+
+\begin{figure}[ht]
+\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+\centering\fbox{\includegraphics[width=.5\linewidth]{figures/titlepage}}
+\caption{The Title Page Layout Structure}\label{fig:titlepage1}
+\end{figure}
+
+\Ex\label{tutex17} \hyperref[fig:titlepage1]{Figure~\ref*{fig:titlepage1}}
+gives a representation of the page layout of the title page. The
+big \cs{parbox} of depth equal to the proportion of
+\cs{textheight} set by \cs{topTitlePage\-Proportion} is
+shown as a blue box. Each of the three top title elements are
+enclosed in a \cs{makebox}, shown in yellow. Inside this
+\cs{makebox}, the top title elements are placed in a \cs{parbox},
+shown in gray. The image shown in
+\hyperref[fig:titlepage1]{Figure~\ref*{fig:titlepage1}} came about
+as a result of the following commands in the preamble:
+\begin{pCmd*}{fontsize=\small}{254pt}
+\topTitlePageProportion{.5}
+\universityLayout{halign=l,color=red}
+\titleLayout{halign=r,xhalign=r,hproportion=.4}
+\authorLayout{color=webbrown}
+\end{pCmd*}
+
+\medskip
+In \hyperref[fig:titlepage1]
+{Figure~\ref*{fig:titlepage1}}, notice that the
+\texttt{university} is left aligned within its \cs{parbox}. For
+\texttt{title}, the proportion is changed from the default of .7
+to .4, this is manifested by the shorter gray box (which
+represents the underlying \cs{parbox}); \texttt{halign} and
+\texttt{xhalign} are both set to \texttt{r}, so the title appears
+right aligned within its \cs{parbox}, and the \cs{parbox} is right
+aligned within its \cs{makebox}, understand? Finally, for the
+\texttt{author} key, we change only the color. Swave!
+
+\subsubsection{Greater Control over Title Page Trailer}\label{trailer} \aebCng[trailer]
+
+The pro option defines the command \Com{DesignTitlePageTrailer} that takes a
+number of key-value pairs to describe the title page trailer. The use of this
+command is not needed unless you want something in the trailer other than the default
+information.\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{DesignTitlePageTrailer\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\DesignTitlePageTrailer{KV-pairs}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\KVP The key-value pairs are described below:
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \texttt{ul}: The text in the upper left corner of the trailer, the default is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\web@copyright\ \web@copyright@symbol\
+ \webcopyrightyears\ \thewebemail
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \texttt{ur}: The text in the upper right corner of the trailer,
+ the default is \cs{aeb@talksite}, as defined by the \cs{talksite}
+ command or the \texttt{talksite} key of the \cs{DeclareDoc\-Info}
+ command.
+ \item \texttt{ll}: The text in the lower left corner of the trailer,
+ the default is \cs{aeb@Prepared}, as defined by the \cs{prepared}
+ command or the \texttt{prepared} key of the \cs{De\-clare\-Doc\-Info}
+ command.
+ \item \texttt{lr}: The text in the lower right corner of the trailer,
+ the default is \cs{webversion}, as defined by the \cs{version}
+ command, by the \texttt{version} key, or by the \texttt{talkdate} key.
+ If \texttt{version} and \texttt{talkdate} both have values,
+ \texttt{talkdate} is used.
+ \item \texttt{textColor}: The default color of the text. The default is black.
+ \item \texttt{bgColor}: The background of the trailer. This is a named color. The default is there is no color.
+ \item \texttt{borderColor}: The border color of the trailer. This is a named color. If specified, then
+ \texttt{bgColor} must have a named color too, otherwise, this
+ key does nothing. The default is that there is no border color.
+ \item \texttt{fboxsep}: The previous two keys use \cs{colorbox} and \cs{fcolorbox}. You can adjust
+ the parameters \cs{fboxsep} through this key. The default is 3pt.
+ \item \texttt{fboxrule}: The width of the rule created when there are values for
+ \texttt{bgColor} and for \texttt{borderColor}. This key sets the value of \cs{fboxrule}. The default
+ is .4pt.
+ \item \texttt{graphic}: The value of this key is the base name of a graphic to be used as the background
+ of the trailer. The graphic is rescaled to the width and the height of the trailer. It also reduces
+ \cs{linewidth} so that the text is \cs{fboxsep} from the borders. The default is no graphic.
+ If the key graphic is specified, then \texttt{bgColor} and \texttt{borderColor} are ignored.
+
+ \item[] If the \textsf{graphicxbox} package is loaded, AeB uses this package to place the graphic.
+ In this case, the \texttt{borderColor} key is obeyed; whereas, it is not obeyed without the
+ \textsf{graphicxbox} package.
+
+ \item \texttt{namedgraphic}: This key requires the use of \textsf{graphicxsp}, and Acrobat Distiller.
+ Use \textsf{graphicxsp} to embed a graphic and give it a symbolic name \anglemeta{mygraphic}.
+ If you then say \texttt{namedgraphic=\anglemeta{mygraphic}}, the graphic is used without re-embedding the graphic.
+ The advantage of this method is that the graphic can be used and re-used in the document, without
+ significantly increasing file size.
+
+ \item[] If the \textsf{graphicxbox} package is loaded, AeB uses this package to place the named graphic.
+ In this case, the \texttt{borderColor} key is obeyed; whereas, it is not obeyed without the
+ \textsf{graphicxbox} package.
+
+ \item \texttt{raise}: A key that takes a dimension as its value. The trailer will be raised or
+ lowered by the amount specified. For example, \texttt{raise=-10pt} lowers the trailer 10pt from its natural
+ position.
+
+ \item \texttt{fontSize}: Set the font size of the text, the default is \cs{footnotesize}. This key
+ simply redefines \cs{trailerFontSize}.
+
+ \item \texttt{formatting}: Any additional formatting you wish
+ that does not cause trouble; for example,
+ \verb!formatting=\bfseries!.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates this command.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1112} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1112}{web\_pro.pdf}}
+illustrates this command.
+
+
+\subsection{The Table of Contents}
+
+The pro option also defines \Com{tocLayout} for controlling the
+title of the table of contents.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{tocLayout\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\tocLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic The key-value pairs are the same as layout commands for the section titles, see
+\mlNameref{secHead}.
+
+\CmdLoc Place this command in the preamble.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{selectTocDings\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\selectTocDings{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic When the \cs{noSectionNumbers} command is used (\Nameref{secHead}), the entries in the table of
+contents have no section number. You can define a ding for each of the three
+levels of the table of contents with this command. The key-value entries in the
+\cs{selectTocDings} command are ignored if \cs{noSectionNumbers} is not in effect.
+
+\CmdLoc Place this (optional) command in the preamble.
+
+\KVP The following are the recognized key-value pairs:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \texttt{dDing}: The ding for the first (section) level entry.\\Example,
+\verb!dDing=\ding{072}!.
+\item \texttt{ddDing}: The ding for the second (subsection) level entry.
+\item \texttt{dddDing}: The ding for the third (subsubsection) level entry.
+\item \texttt{dDingColor}: The (named) color for the ding of the first level entry. The default is red.
+\item \texttt{ddDingColor}: The (named) color for the ding of the first level entry. The default is blue.
+\item \texttt{dddDingColor}: The (named) color for the ding of the first level entry. The default is webgreen.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates this command.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1112} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1112}{web\_pro.pdf}}
+illustrates this command.
+
+
+\subsection{Selecting Colors}\label{designColor}
+
+The \cs{selectColors} command can be used to set the color of most all elements of
+the document that have a color attribute.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{selectColors\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\selectColors{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc There are no restrictions on this command. In the preamble,
+it will set the defaults for the entire document.
+
+\KVP Each of the following keys take a named color. Many of these keys have a
+command interface as well, these are also noted.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \texttt{universityColor}: The color of the value of the \cs{university}
+ declaration (refer to page~\pageref{docinfo}). The value of
+ \cs{university} appears on the title page. The default is blue.
+\item \texttt{titleColor}: The color of the value of the \cs{title} declaration
+ (see page~\pageref{docinfo}).
+ The value of \cs{title} appears on the title page. The default is black.
+\item \texttt{authorColor}: The color of the value of the \cs{author} declaration
+ (see page~\pageref{docinfo}).
+ The value of \cs{author} appears on the title page. The default is black.
+\item \texttt{textBgColor}: The background color of the text screen. The default is white.
+\item \texttt{panelBgColor}: The background color of the navigation panel. The default is white.
+\item \texttt{urlColor}: The color of an \textsf{URL} link. The default is webbrown.
+\item \texttt{linkColor}: The color of a link. The default is webgreen.
+\item \texttt{fileColor}: The color of a link to a local file. The default is webbrown.
+\end{enumerate}
+There are several other colors as well, these can be set through their interface, see
+\hyperref[secHead]{Section~\ref*{secHead}}, page~\pageref*{secHead}, for a discussion of
+the commands \cs{sectionLayout}, \cs{sub\-sec\-iion\-Layout} and \cs{sub\-sub\-sec\-tion\-Layout}.
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates this command.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1112} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1112}{web\_pro.pdf}}
+illustrates this command.
+
+
+\subsection{Section Headings}\label{secHead}
+
+The {\Web} package uses the section heading commands \cs{section}, \cs{subsection}, and \cs{sub\-sub\-section}, but the
+\texttt{extended} option modifies their definitions so that the document author can easily design how the section titles
+look.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{noSectionNumbers}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\noSectionNumbers
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic The command \Com{noSectionNumbers} causes {\Web} to remove the usual
+numbering system for a {\LaTeX} document. This may be useful when
+preparing a document for presentation, and a numbering system is not
+needed. The default is to use section numbers.
+
+\CmdLoc The use of this command is restricted to the preamble. The
+decision must be made for the whole document at the beginning of the
+document.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{subsubsectionLayout\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\sectionLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\subsectionLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\subsubsectionLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc No restriction on the use of this command. In the preamble, you set the layout
+for sections for the whole document. In the body of the document, changes occur immediately
+starting with the next relevant section.
+
+\KVP Each of these takes the same key-value pairs.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \texttt{fontfamily}: Font family to use for section titles,
+ permitted values are \texttt{rmfamily}, \texttt{sffamily}, \texttt{ttfamily}.
+\item \texttt{fontseries}: Font series to use for the section title, values are \texttt{bfseries} and
+ \texttt{mdseries}.
+\item \texttt{fontshape}: Font shapes to use for the section title, values are \texttt{upshape}, \texttt{itshape},
+ \texttt{scshape}, \texttt{slshape}.
+\item \texttt{fontsize}: Font size of the section title, permissible values are \texttt{tiny}, \texttt{scriptsize},
+\texttt{foot\-note\-size}, \texttt{small}, \texttt{normalsize}.
+ \texttt{large}, \texttt{Large}, \texttt{LARGE}, \texttt{huge}, \texttt{Huge}.
+\item \texttt{halign}: Alignment of the section title, permissible
+ values are \texttt{l} (left aligned), \texttt{c} (centered), \texttt{r} (right aligned).
+\item \texttt{ding}: You can specify a ding to display where the section number is usually placed; e.g.,
+ \verb+ding=\ding{066}+.
+
+\item \texttt{color}: The color of the section title, this can be any named color. The default is blue.
+
+\item \texttt{special}: Through this key, you can a specify predefined layout for the section titles. Permissible
+ values are \texttt{shadow}, \texttt{framebox}, \texttt{colorbox}, \texttt{fcolorbox},
+ \texttt{frame\-box\-fit}, \texttt{color\-box\-fit}, \texttt{fcolorbox\-fit}, \texttt{custom}, \texttt{default}.
+
+\item[] Custom section heads can be used by specifying a value of \texttt{custom}. In this
+ case, {\Web} uses the values of \Com{customSecHead}, \Com{custom\-Sub\-sec\-Head} and
+ \Com{custom\-Sub\-sub\-sec\-Head}. Each of these macros take one argument, the code for designing
+ the title. The title is referred to as \texttt{\#1}. Depending on how these custom section titles
+ are defined, the other keys may not be obeyed.
+
+% See an \hyperref[customHeadEx]
+% {Example~\ref*{customHeadEx}} below; there are other examples in the demo files.
+
+\item \texttt{framecolor}: The color of the frame surrounding the subject when the \texttt{special}
+ key has a value of \texttt{framebox}, \texttt{fcolorbox} \texttt{frameboxfit} or \texttt{fcolorboxfit}.
+
+\item \texttt{bgcolor}: The background (fill color) of the box enclosing the section title, when
+ \texttt{special} has a value of \texttt{colorbox}, \texttt{fcolorbox}, \texttt{colorboxfit}
+ or \texttt{fcolorboxfit}.
+
+\item \texttt{shadowcolor}: The color of the shadow, when \texttt{special} has a value of \texttt{shadow}.
+
+\item \texttt{beforeskip}: The amount of skip before the section title.
+
+\item \texttt{afterskip}: The amount of skip after the section title.
+
+\item \texttt{usefont}: Through this key it is possible to specify
+an arbitrary font and font size. The key takes five parameters, for
+example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+usefont={OT1}{cmdh}{m}{n}{{16}{16pt}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first
+four are the arguments of the {\LaTeX}'s \cs{usefont}, encoding,
+family, series and shape. The last argument are the arguments of the
+{\LaTeX}'s \cs{fontsize}, size and baselineskip.
+
+\item[] If the fifth parameter is empty, no font size is specified, the current default sizes are used.
+
+\item \texttt{numdingcolor}: The color of the section number or ding, if defined. The default is blue.
+
+\item \texttt{reset}: This key attempts to reset changes to their defaults. Permissible values are
+ \texttt{font} (to reset the font changes only), or \texttt{all} (to reset all the keys).
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\Ex\label{tutex7} The following example sets the section
+title with shadows: text is red and shadow is blue. We center the
+title horizontally, and specify an after skip of \texttt{12pt}.
+\begin{dCmd*}{.5\linewidth}
+\sectionLayout{%
+ afterskip=12pt,
+ halign=c,
+ color=red,
+ shadowcolor=blue,
+ special=shadow
+}
+\end{dCmd*}
+\noindent Similarly for \Com{subsectionLayout} and \Com{subsubsectionLayout}.
+
+% \expoint{ex7} Use \texttt{apb\_ex7.tex} to explore the section layout commands.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{subsubsectionLayout\darg{\meta{length}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\shadowhoffset{!meta(length)}
+\shadowvoffset{!meta(length)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic When \texttt{$\text{special} = \text{shadow}$}, shadowing is
+obtained by typesetting the text twice with different colors. The
+amount of horizontal and vertical offset are controlled by these two
+commands. The defaults are \verb!\shadowhoffset{.2ex}! and
+\verb!\shadowvoffset{-.2ex}!.
+
+\newtopic The interface for writing custom section layouts are the following three
+commands.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{customSubsubsecHead\darg{\anglemeta{tex\_code}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\customSecHead{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\customSubsecHead{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\customSubsubsecHead{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdLoc Use in the preamble or before a section head.
+
+\PD These three commands are used to write custom section,
+subsection and subsubsection layouts. Here, the parameter \anglemeta{tex\_code} is
+{\TeX} code for laying out the section titles, and should use
+\texttt{\#1} to represent the section title.
+
+\Ex\label{customHeadEx} The following definitions can appear
+anywhere, they are global unless appearing in a group.
+This puts a colored box around the section title, which
+is assumed to appear in one line. We use the internal color names
+for the \texttt{color} (\cs{aeb@sectioncolor}) and \texttt{bgcolor}
+(\cs{aeb@sectionbgcolor}) keys, in this way, the title will obey the
+values of these keys. This particular custom head obeys the
+\texttt{halign} key as well.
+\begin{dCmd*}{\linewidth}
+\makeatletter
+\customSecHead{\vbox{\colorbox{\aeb@sectionbgcolor}
+ {\color{\aeb@sectioncolor}#1}}}
+\sectionLayout{%
+ special=custom,
+ halign=l,
+ bgcolor=red,
+ color=white
+}
+\makeatother
+\end{dCmd*}
+\noindent The above code is a simplified version of the \texttt{colorboxfit},
+a value of the \texttt{special} key.
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates these commands.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1112} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1112}{web\_pro.pdf}}
+illustrates these commands.
+
+%\expoint{ex7} See \texttt{apb\_ex7.tex} for a working example of custom section
+%head layout.
+
+%\Important It is important to remark that between slides \texttt{@}
+%is made into a `letter', and reset to `other' at the beginning of
+%the next slide. This makes it convenient to make these definitions
+%between slides. In the preamble, however, such a definition must be
+%between \cs{makeatletter} and \cs{makeatother}.
+
+\section{On Parts, Chapters, and Final Dots}\label{partsChaptersDots}
+
+The {\Web} package has several commands for customizing the \cs{part} and
+\cs{chapter} commands.
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{part}}{\CMD{part}} command}
+
+The appearance of the part title can be controlled by \cs{formatPartTitle}.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{customSubsubsecHead\darg{\anglemeta{tex\_code}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\formatPartTitle{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\noPartNumbers
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic The argument of \anglemeta{tex\_code} consists of formatting commands; within the
+argument \texttt{\#1} represents the title. The command \cs{noPartNumbers}
+is a convenience macro to turn off all part number, if you want to create
+a document that has no part numbers, such as this document.
+
+The default argument for \cs{formatPartTitle}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\large\bfseries
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \partname~\thepart:\space
+\fi#1
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic This typesets as {\large\bfseries Part I: The Web Package}, for example. You can
+modify the basic definition to introduce colors, fonts, sizes of your choice, and
+even special effects; for example, the declaration
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\formatPartTitle{\fbox{\large\bfseries
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \partname~\thepart:\space
+\fi#1}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+gives a part title like this, {\large\bfseries\fbox{Part I: The Web Package}}
+
+\newtopic
+A companion comment for changing the format of a part title, is \cs{tocPartTitle},
+which modifies how the part title appears in the table of contents.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{tocPartTitle\darg{\cs{thepart}\cs{hspace\darg{1em}\#1}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\tocPartTitle{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\tocPartTitle{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic Again, within the argument of \cs{tocPartTitle}, \texttt{\#1} refers to the
+text of the part title. The default definition is given above also.
+
+\redpoint Finer control over the formatting of the \cs{part} command can be obtained by redefining
+\cs{web@makeparthead} or \cs{web@makesparthead}, the latter one for \cs{part*}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{chapter}}{\CMD{chapter}} command}
+
+The \cs{chapter} command is available in the \texttt{book} and \texttt{report} classes.
+There are several defined in the {\Web} package for getting a little control over these.
+
+
+\long\def\formatChapterNumber#1{\def\web@formatChapterNumber{#1}}
+\formatChapterNumber{\large\bfseries
+ \@chapapp\space\thechapter\par\nobreak}
+\long\def\formatChapterTitle#1{\def\web@formatChapterTitle##1{#1}}
+\formatChapterTitle{%
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \noindent\hspace{1em}\large\bfseries#1\par\nobreak
+}
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{formatChapterNumber\darg{\anglemeta{tex\_code}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\formatChapterNumber{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\formatChapterTitle{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic The argument of \ameta{tex\_code} consists of formatting commands; within the
+argument \texttt{\#1} represents the title.
+
+The default definitions for these are
+
+\begin{dCmd*}{.85\linewidth}
+\formatChapterNumber{\large\bfseries
+ \@chapapp\space\thechapter\par\nobreak}
+\formatChapterTitle{%
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \noindent\hspace{1em}\large\bfseries#1\par\nobreak
+}
+\end{dCmd*}
+\newtopic These are slighly modified versions of what is found in \texttt{book.cls}.
+
+\redpoint A finer control can be obtained over the \cs{chapter} command
+formatting by redefining \cs{web@makechapterhead} or
+\cs{web@makeschapterhead}, the latter one is used for \cs{chapter*}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{noFinalDot}}{\CMD{noFinalDot}} Command}\label{nofinaldot}
+
+The default behavior for the {\Web} package is to place a dot (.) at the end of the section
+number in both the body of the document and in the table of contents. Thus,
+this section is numbered as \textcolor{blue}{\ref*{nofinaldot}.} (note the final dot following
+the section number). This section will appear in the table of contents the same way. The default
+behavior of all (that I know of) standard {\LaTeX} classes is not to place this final
+dot (.) at the end of the section number. To revert to this behavior, use the
+\Com{noFinalDot} command in the preamble.
+
+%---------------------- Exerquiz -----------------------------------%
+
+\addtocontents{toc}{%
+ \par\vskip6pt\vskip0pt plus .25\vsize\penalty-1000 \vskip0pt plus-.25\vsize}
+
+%\addtocontents{toc}{\par\protect\vspace{\bigskipamount}\kern0pt\vspace{-\medskipamount}}
+\part{The Exerquiz Package}\label{s:exerquiz}
+
+%The \textsf{exerquiz} package contains a series of macros for
+%creating on-line exercises, short quizzes (with or without
+%solutions), and longer quizzes that are graded using JavaScript.
+
+%\section{Overview}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package provides environments for creating
+the following interactive elements in a \textsf{PDF} file.
+
+\begingroup
+\def\mylabel#1{\hfil\hyperref[#1]{\large$\bullet$}\ }
+\begin{list}{}
+{\usecounter{questionno}\setlength{\parsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\makelabel}{\mylabel}
+\settowidth{\labelwidth}{\normalfont\bfseries00.\ }%
+\setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{0pt}}%
+
+\item[ss:online] \begin{NoHyper}\nameref{ss:online}\end{NoHyper}:
+Macros for creating on-line exercises.
+
+\item[ss:QuizIR] \begin{NoHyper}\nameref{ss:QuizIR}\end{NoHyper}:
+Macros for creating interactive quizzes with immediate feedback.
+
+
+%\item[ss:QuizS] \begin{NoHyper}\nameref{ss:QuizS}\end{NoHyper}:
+%Macros for creating quizzes with immediate feedback
+%and a link to the solutions to the quizzes.
+
+\item[ss:GradedQuizzes]
+\begin{NoHyper}\nameref{ss:GradedQuizzes}\end{NoHyper}:
+Macros for creating quizzes graded by Java\-Script, with an option
+to have the quizzes corrected using JavaScript.
+
+\end{list}
+\endgroup
+
+\noindent In each of the quiz environments, you can pose multiple
+choice, math fill-in, or text fill-in questions.
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} provides the above listed environments for
+the \texttt{dvips\-one}, \texttt{dvips}, \texttt{textures}, \texttt{pdftex} (including
+lua(la)tex), \texttt{dvipdfm}, \texttt{dvipdfmx}, and \texttt{xetex} options. The package
+automatically detects \textsf{pdftex} and \textsf{xetex}, and passes the driver name to
+all subordinate packages, \textsf{eforms} and \textsf{insdljs}.
+
+There are options for reformatting the exercises to a print
+format, for excluding the solutions to the exercises, for writing
+the solutions to the exercises so they follow the question, and
+for different languages, and much more.
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} also allows you to rearrange the order and
+location of the solutions to the exercises and quizzes, to
+redefine many running headers, to customize the exercises and
+quizzes, and to use the \texttt{exercise} environment to create
+a new environment with its own counter, or with no counter at all.
+
+All the above mentioned macros and the options of the package are
+discussed in this section.
+
+\section{\protect\textsf{Exerquiz} and Acrobat JavaScript}
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} now uses the \textsf{insdljs} Package to insert
+Document level Java\-Scripts into the \textsf{PDF} file. The quizzes
+created using the \texttt{shortquiz} or \texttt{quiz} environment are
+graded, marked and scored using these inserted JavaScript functions.
+
+Because the package \textsf{insdljs} is already loaded, it is easy
+for the document author to develop JavaScripts that can be called
+from the standard \textsf{Exerquiz} commands. The ability to write
+JavaScript, therefore, right in the \LaTeX{} document gives a
+unique programming flair to \textsf{Exerquiz}.
+
+\section{Package Requirements}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package is independent of the \pkg{web}
+package; however, \textsf{exerquiz} utilizes \pkg{hyperref}
+just as \pkg{web} does. Use the latest version of
+\pkg{hyperref}. In addition to the \textsf{color} package,
+also used by \pkg{web}, \textsf{exerquiz} also uses the
+\textsf{verbatim} package. This is used to write verbatim
+solutions to exercises and quizzes to certain auxiliary files.
+
+Results from the quizzes created by the \texttt{shortquiz} and
+\texttt{quiz} environments are evaluated using document level
+JavaScripts. These JavaScripts are inserted into the final
+\textsf{PDF} file using the \textsf{insdljs} package. This package
+makes it easy for the package writer or document author to write
+JavaScripts.
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package uses \emph{form features} of
+\textsf{PDF} that \pkg{web} does not use. For the interactive
+features to properly work, use \textcolor{blue}{Adobe Reader
+5.0} or higher.
+
+\section{Basic Package Options}\label{ss:exbasicusage}
+
+Place in the preamble of your document
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint to use \textsf{exerquiz} with the \pkg{web} package, specify,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(web_options)]{web}
+\usepackage[!meta(eq_options)]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+A complete list of the options recognized by \textsf{exerquiz} can be
+found in \hyperref[s:ListofOpts]{Section~\ref*{s:ListofOpts}}, page~\pageref*{s:ListofOpts}; they are
+also discussed below.
+
+The driver options for the \pkg{web} package are \texttt{dvipsone},
+\texttt{dvips}, \texttt{pdftex}, \texttt{dvipdfm} and \texttt{textures}.
+No driver option with \textsf{exerquiz} is needed if you are using the
+\pkg{web} package, \textsf{exerquiz} inherits the driver option from
+the \pkg{web} package.
+
+For the \texttt{dvipdfm} option to work properly you
+will need \textsf{dvipdfm}, version 0.12.7b or later, and
+\pkg{hyperref}, version 6.68a or later.
+
+\redpoint To use \pkg{hyperref} and \textsf{exerquiz} with
+\texttt{dvips}, specify,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[dvips,!meta(hy_options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[dvips,!meta(eq_options)]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint To use \pkg{hyperref} and \textsf{exerquiz} with
+\texttt{pdftex} or \texttt{xetex}, specify,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(hy_options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[!meta(eq_options)]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Both \pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{exerquiz} automatically detect the \app{pdflatex}
+and \app{xelatex} applications so specification of the driver is not required.
+
+\redpoint To use \pkg{hyperref} and \textsf{exerquiz} with
+any other driver, specify,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(hy_options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(eq_options)]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+the \meta{driver} for both \pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{exerquiz}.
+
+\redpoint To use \pkg{hyperref} and \textsf{exerquiz}, specify,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[!meta(pdfs_options)]{pdfscreen}
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\makebox[0pt][r]{\raisebox{-2pt}{\color{red}\href{{\bUrl/tutorial/webeq/eq_pdfs.zip}}{{\zqacr
+ b\hspace{9.5pt}}}}\enspace}\ignorespaces
+See the sample file \texttt{eq\_pdfs.tex} already set up for use
+with \textsf{pdfscreen}, obtained by downloading the zipped file
+\texttt{\href{\bUrl/tutorial/webeq/eq_pdfs.zip}{eq\_pdfs.zip}}.
+
+
+\paragraph*{Some \app{xetex} issues.}
+In recent versions of \app{xetex}, the application may be set to strip out
+named destinations that are not referenced within the document as a target of
+a `hard-wired' link; this is an optimization feature. The \pkg{exerquiz}
+package sets a lot of destinations (or targets) but, in some instances,
+`dynamic' links are employed using the JavaScript method
+\texttt{\textsl{Doc}.gotoNamedDest(\anglemeta{target})}. In such instances,
+\app{xetex} may strip out these targets; the link or button action may not
+perform the jump to the destination because the destination does not exist.
+If this becomes an issue for your \app{xetex} installation, the
+\textbf{\app{Dvipdfmx} Compatibility Flags} needs to be modified. Search for
+the configuration file \texttt{dvipdfmx.cfg} and open the file. Scroll down
+to the line `\texttt{\%C 0x0000}', beneath it insert `\texttt{C 0x0010}',
+save and close the file.\footnote{MiK\TeX{} discourages the direct editing of
+the file \texttt{dvipdfmx.cfg}, instead, execute the line of code
+`\texttt{initexmf -{}-edit-config-file dvipdfmx}' at the \app{Windows}
+command-line prompt, and edit a local version of the configuration file as
+described above.} The documentation for this bit field is just above the
+referenced line and an explanation of the `\texttt{C 0x0010}' setting is
+given.
+
+
+\begin{comment}
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{pdftex}}{pdftex}
+Option}\label{ss:pdftexerquiz}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package is independent of the \pkg{web}
+package. Therefore, you can create your own page layout package
+and use \textsf{exerquiz} to help you create exercises and
+quizzes. Of course, \pkg{hyperref} must be used.
+
+%\redpoint Using \textsf{exerquiz} with \pkg{hyperref} or
+%\textsf{pdfscreen}
+
+Should you want to use the \textsf{exerquiz} package using
+\textsf{pdftex} without the \pkg{web} package, use the
+\texttt{pdftex} option:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[pdftex,<more options>]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[pdftex]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent In particular,
+\textsf{pdfscreen}\footnote{CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/supported/pdfscreen},
+a screen design package written for \textsf{pdftex} by C. V.
+Radhakrishnan, has been tested and works correctly with
+\textsf{exerquiz}. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[screen,article,sidebar]{pdfscreen}
+\usepackage[pdftex]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent See the sample file \texttt{eq\_pdfs.tex} already set up for use
+with \textsf{pdfscreen}, obtained by downloading the zipped file
+\texttt{\href{\bUrl/tutorial/webeq/eq_pdfs.zip}{eq\_pdfs.zip}}.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{dvipdfm} Option}\label{ss:dvipdfm}
+
+Should you want to use the \textsf{exerquiz} package without
+the \pkg{web} package, in this case, the usage is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[dvipdfm,<more_options>]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[dvipdfm]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\subsection{The \texttt{dvi\-windo} Option}\label{ss:dviwindo}
+%
+%Beginning with version 1.3 of \pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz},
+%\textsf{dviwindo} (the \texttt{.dvi} previewer by
+%\href{http://www.yandy.com/}{\Y&Y, Inc.}) is supported. This
+%means that hypertext links will be active from within the
+%\textsf{dviwindo} previewer---as well as from within the Adobe
+%Reader after the file has been converted to \textsf{pdf}.
+%
+%Should you want to use the \textsf{exerquiz} package without
+%the \pkg{web} package, in this case, the usage is
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+% \usepackage[dviwindo,<more_options>]{hyperref}
+% \usepackage[dviwindo]{exerquiz}
+%\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\redpoint \textbf{\textcolor{red}{Important Note:}} \emph{Only}
+the \texttt{exercise} environment (this is the material described in
+\hyperref[ss:online]{Section~\ref*{ss:online}}) is supported by
+these two options. None of the quiz environments can be used with
+these two options at this time. \Y&Y{} users need to use the
+\texttt{dvipsone} option if the quiz environment is needed.
+\end{comment}
+
+\subsection{The Language Option}\label{sss:exerquizlangopts}
+
+The \hyperref[web:langopts]{language option}, available in the
+\pkg{web} package, can be invoked even when the \pkg{web} package is
+not used.\footnote{Otherwise, the language option is introduced as an
+option of the \pkg{web} package.} Currently, language options supported are
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+\texttt{dutch} & \texttt{french} & \texttt{german}\\
+\texttt{italian} & \texttt{norsk} & \texttt{russian}\\
+\texttt{spanish} & \texttt{dansk} & \texttt{polish}\\
+\texttt{finnish} & \texttt{czech} & \texttt{catalan}\\
+\texttt{brazil} & \texttt{turkish}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{quote}
+For example, with \pkg{hyperref}, you could use:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(hy_options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),french]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\meta{driver} is any of the supported drivers.
+
+\redpoint\textbf{\textcolor{red}{Unicode required for \texttt{turkish} and \texttt{russian} options:}} When using the
+\texttt{turkish} or the \texttt{russian} option, without using the \pkg{web}
+package, use the \texttt{unicode} option for \pkg{hyperref}, like so,\footnote{The
+\pkg{web} package passes the \texttt{unicode} option to
+\pkg{hyperref} when using the \texttt{turkish} or \texttt{russian} option through the \pkg{web}
+option list so there is no need to explicitly use the \texttt{unicode}
+option.}\def\1{\hspace*{-\amtIndent}}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(hy_options),unicode]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),turkish]{exerquiz}
+!1or
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),russian]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+%\noindent This is because the word for ``Table of Contents'' is ``{\.I}{\c
+%c}indekiler'' in Turkish. For {\.I}\c{c}indekiler to appear
+%correctly in the bookmarks, hyperref needs the \texttt{unicode}
+%option.\footnote{The glyph {\.I} (latin capital letter I with dot above) is in the Latin Extended-A group,
+%unicode \texttt{U+0130}.}
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{forpaper{\protect\normalfont\protect\space and }forcolorpaper}}{forpaper and
+forcolorpaper}
+ Options}\label{sss:exquizforpaper}
+
+The \texttt{forpaper} or \texttt{forcolorpaper} option, also available in the
+\textsf{\hyperref[sss:webforpaper]{web}} package, is needed in the
+\textsf{exerquiz} package if you are are using \textsf{exerquiz}
+without \pkg{web}. The option is invoked in the usual way.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(hy_options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),forpaper]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent See the discussion of the \texttt{\hyperref[sss:webforpaper]{forpaper}} on
+page~\pageref{sss:webforpaper} given earlier.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{preview} Option}\label{sss:preview}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package can generate a large number of form
+fields: buttons, check boxes, radio buttons, and text fields. These
+are PDF objects and cannot be seen in a dvi previewer. By using
+the \texttt{preview} option, the bounding rectangles of the form
+objects are surrounded with rules, which outline the form fields
+and make their positions visible.
+
+This option may help you to fine tune the positions of the form
+fields. The option is for developmental use only. When you are
+satisfied with the positioning and are ready to publish, remove
+this option.
+
+\redpoint This option is not useful with the \texttt{pdftex} option, as
+\textsf{pdftex} does not (normally) produce a dvi file.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{nodljs} Option}\label{sss:nodljs}
+
+If you are creating a document that is meant to be printed or your
+document only has exercises and solutions in it (which do not
+require JavaScript), the size of the document can be reduced
+significantly by using the \texttt{nodljs} option. This option is
+just passed on to the \textsf{insdljs} package.
+
+% \subsubsection{The \texttt{acrobativ} Option}\label{sss:acrobativ}
+%
+% If the document author is using the \texttt{dvips} or the \texttt{dvipsone} option
+% but has only Acrobat~4.0 or~4.05, then the document level JavaScripts need
+% to be inserted manually. Therefore, we need to turn off the automatic inclusion of JavaScript.
+% This option does exactly that; it is equivalent to the \texttt{nodljs} option.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{exercisesonly} Option}\label{sss:noquizzes}
+
+If the document author only uses the \texttt{exercise} environment, then all
+the document level JavaScripts of \texttt{exerquiz} are not needed. Use either
+one of these two equivalent options to exclude the insertion of the JavaScripts.
+
+This is a convenience option that simply calls the \texttt{nodljs} option described above.
+
+\begin{comment}
+\subsection{The \texttt{de\-bug} Option}\label{sss:debug}
+
+Developing JavaScript functions can be tricky. Quite often, it is
+useful to insert some code lines that will help you in debugging a
+particular function or a set of functions. For example, you might
+want to verify that the parameters being passed to a function are
+the correct ones, or that the return value is correct. You can
+have Acrobat write the values to its console like so:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+console.println("Function myFunc");
+console.println("Parameters: x = " x + ", y = " + y );
+console.println("Return Value: retnValue = " + retnValue);
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent In the above code, I have used the
+\texttt{console.println()} method, which is only available in the
+Acrobat application, not the Reader. For the Reader, one could
+use \texttt{app.alert()}, but this method is not well-suited for
+monitoring values of a large number variables as the script
+executes. If you don't have the full Acrobat, the \texttt{debug}
+option will not be useful.
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} just passes this option on to the
+\textsf{insdljs} package. Additional details on the debug option
+can be found there. Within the \texttt{insDLJS} environment, you
+can place debugging code lines as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+function myFunc(x,y)
+{
+ retnValue = x + y;
+\db console.println("Function myFunc");\db%
+\db console.println("Parameters: x = " x + ", y = " + y );\db%
+\db console.println("Return Value: retnValue = " + retnValue);\db%
+ return retnValue;
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Any line that begins with \cs{db} and ends with \cs{db} is a
+debugging line. These lines will be included if the \texttt{debug} option
+is taken; otherwise they are removed. The `\texttt{\%}', is
+the comment character within the \texttt{insDLJS} environment, and prevents,
+in this case, the introduction of a carriage return.
+\end{comment}
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{allowrandomize} Option}\label{ss:allowrandomize}
+
+Use this option to load in the macros to randomize the choices
+of a multiple choice question. See \hyperref[s:random]{Section~\ref*{s:random}},
+\Nameref{s:random} for details.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{unicode} Option}\label{eq:unicode}
+
+This option is passed to \pkg{hyperref}, and is placed in {\Web} as a
+convenience. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded, \textsf{eforms} (and
+\textsf{exerquiz}) will accept {\LaTeX} markup in the optional argument
+of the form fields. See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual}
+for details.\footnote{eforms manual on Web: \url{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}}\edef\fnEForms{\thefootnote}
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{useui} Option}\label{eq:useui}
+
+This option is passed to \textsf{eforms}, and is placed in {\Web} as
+a convenience. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded,
+\textsf{eforms} loads the \pkg{xkeyval} package, and key-value pairs are
+defined for use in the optional argument of form and link commands.
+See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.${}^\text{\fnEForms}$
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{usesumrytbls} Option}\label{eq:usesumrytbls}
+
+When this option is taken, the code for creating quiz summary tables is input.
+See \hyperref[s:sumrytbl]{Section~\ref*{s:sumrytbl}}, page~\pageref*{s:sumrytbl} for details.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{contsolns} Option}\label{eq:contsolns}
+
+When this option is taken, a message appears in the right running footer
+that a solution has crossed the page boundary and that the solution
+continues on the next page. Further documentation can be found in
+\texttt{contsolns.pdf} in the \texttt{doc} folder, the demo file for this
+feature is \texttt{contsolns\_ex.tex}, found in the \texttt{examples}
+folder.
+
+\section{The \texttt{exercise} Environment}\label{ss:online}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package defines \texttt{exercise} and
+\texttt{solution} environments, the latter being nested inside the
+former. With these environments, you can create questions
+(exercises) with solutions. Solutions are written
+\texttt{verbatim} to the auxiliary file \cs{jobname.sol}, then
+input back in near the end of the document. A hypertext link is
+created to connect the exercise with the solution.
+
+An exercise with \hyperref[sss:exwparts]{multiple parts} can also
+be defined, with hypertext links to the solutions of the
+individual parts of the exercise.
+
+The \texttt{exercise} environment has its own counter
+(\texttt{eqexno}), but there is an \hyperref[sss:eqexno]{option}
+for using another counter, or no counter at all. This may be
+useful for creating a numbered example environment.
+
+There is an option for placing the
+\hyperref[sss:solutionsafter]{solutions immediately after} the
+statement of the problem. This, again, may be useful for an
+example environment where you want the solution to the example to
+follow the statement, rather than being hypertext-linked to the
+solution.
+
+Finally, there is an option for \hyperref[sss:hide]{hiding
+solutions}, in the following sense: When the hidden option is
+used, the solutions are commented out rather then being written to
+the \verb+\jobname.sol+ file. Additionally, there is a global
+option, \texttt{nohiddensolutions}; in this case, when you
+re-\LaTeX, the solutions are written to \verb+\jobname.sol+, and
+input back into the document.
+
+\subsection{Basic Usage}\label{ss:basicexer}
+
+The syntax for the \texttt{exercise} and \texttt{solution}
+environments is as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}
+Your Question.
+\begin{solution}
+The Solution to Your Question
+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Here is an example of the usage.
+
+\begin{exercise}\label{ex:int}%
+Evaluate the integral \(\displaystyle\int x^2 e^{2x}\,dx\).
+\begin{solution}
+We evaluate by \textit{integration by parts}:
+\begin{alignat*}{2}
+ \int x^2 e^{2x}\,dx &
+ = \frac12 x^2 e^{2x} - \int x e^{2x}\,dx &&\quad
+ \text{$u=x^2$, $dv=e^{2x}\,dx$}\\&
+ = \frac12 x^2 e^{2x} -
+ \left[\frac12 x e^{2x}-\int \frac12 e^{2x}\,dx\right] &&\quad
+ \text{integration by parts}\\&
+ = \frac12 x^2 e^{2x} - \frac12 x e^{2x} + \frac12\int e^{2x}\,dx &&\quad
+ \text{$u=x^2$, $dv=e^{2x}\,dx$}\\&
+ = \frac12 x^2 e^{2x} - \frac12 x e^{2x} + \frac14 e^{2x} &&\quad
+ \text{integration by parts}\\&
+ = \frac14(2x^2-2x+1)e^{2x} &&\quad
+ \text{simplify!}
+\end{alignat*}
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+
+The code for this is
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}\label{ex:int}%
+Evaluate the integral \(\displaystyle\int x^2 e^{2x}\,dx\).
+\begin{solution}
+We evaluate by \texttt{integration by parts}:
+\begin{alignat*}{2}
+ \int x^2 e^{2x}\,dx &
+ = \frac12 x^2 e^{2x} - \int x e^{2x}\,dx &&\quad
+ \text{$u=x^2$, $dv=e^{2x}\,dx$}\\&
+... lines removed ...
+ = \frac14(2x^2-2x+1)e^{2x} &&\quad
+ \text{simplify!}
+\end{alignat*}
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} See the source file for the PDF
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} for a complete
+listing of this exercise.
+
+
+%\noindent See the demo file \textsf{webeqtst.tex} for a complete listing of this exercise.
+
+
+\redpoint Questions and solutions are kept together \textit{\`a la
+Knuth}. The solutions are written to the file
+\cs{jobname.sol} verbatim then input back using
+\cs{includeexersolutions}.
+
+
+\redpoint You can redefine the counter to include the section
+number. For example, the code
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\theeqexno}{\thesection.\arabic{eqexno}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent can be placed in the preamble of your document. In this
+case, the above exercise would appear as
+\textsf{Exercise~\thesection.\ref*{ex:int}}.
+
+\redpoint The usual cross-referencing mechanisms for \LaTeX, i.e.,
+using \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref}, work as expected.
+
+\medskip\noindent
+For example, the label `\verb+\label{ex:int}+' was placed
+just after the \verb+\begin{exercise}+ on the previous page. Let us now
+reference Exercise~\ref{ex:int}, on page~\pageref{ex:int}.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+let us now reference Exercise~\ref{ex:int},
+on~\pageref{ex:int}.
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+\noindent Of course, the nicer looking variations can be done as well.
+For example, see \hyperref[ex:int]{\textsf{Exercise~\ref*{ex:int}}}.
+\begin{center}
+\verb+\hyperref[ex:int]{\textsf{Exercise~\ref*{ex:int}}}+
+\end{center}
+\noindent The \texttt*-form of \cs{ref} was used to turn off the
+redundant link creation. (\pkg{hyperref} would normally make
+the \cs{ref} macro into a link.)
+
+\redpoint An `\textsf{Exercise}' that is also a hypertext link
+appears in the default color \textcolor{webgreen}{green}; if an
+`\textsf{Exercise}' is not a link, it appears in \textcolor{blue}
+{blue}. (The word `\textsf{Exercise}' is not a link if it is an
+\hyperref[sss:exwparts]{exercise with parts}, or if the
+\texttt{\hyperref[sss:nosolutions]{nosolutions}} option is used.
+Finally, if the \texttt{web} option
+\texttt{\hyperref[sss:webforpaper]{forpaper}} is used, color is
+turned off and `\textsf{Exercise}' appears in black.
+
+\redpoint\textbf{\textcolor{red}{Caveat:}} There is one problem
+you might watch for. There is an optional argument to the
+\texttt{solution} environment. When \LaTeX{} searches the source
+looking for the optional parameter, which may not exist, it expands
+macros looking for a `\texttt['. This causes problem when you have
+a solution that begins with a math display environment and \LaTeX{}
+prematurely expands such an environment.
+
+\begin{exercise}
+Write an equation of a line that crosses the $x$- and $y$-axes at 1.
+\begin{solution}[]
+\begin{equation*}
+\boxed{x+y=1}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+
+\noindent To prevent \LaTeX{} errors that will stop the compilation,
+just place the empty optional argument `\texttt{[]}' prior to the math environment. The code for
+the previous exercise is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}
+Write an equation of a line that crosses
+the $x$- and $y$-axes at 1.
+\begin{solution}[]
+\begin{equation*}
+\boxed{x+y=1}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\noindent This is only necessary if the solution \textbf{does not} begin with text.
+
+\subsubsection{Exercises with Parts: The \texttt{exercise*} Environment}\label{sss:exwparts}
+
+Beginning with version 6.07, the \texttt{exercise*} environment is used to create exercises with multiple
+parts.\footnote{For users of exerquiz, this is equivalent
+to the \texttt*-option with the \texttt{exercise} environment. The \texttt{exercise*} environment is the preferred form
+but the \texttt*-option works as before.}
+
+A companion environment to \texttt{exercise*} is the
+\texttt{parts} environment, used to enclose the multiple parts of
+the question. The \texttt{parts} environment takes one optional
+argument, the number of columns to be used. The argument must be a
+positive integer greater than 1, in this case, a tabular
+environment is used, with the number of columns equal to the
+specified argument. If no optional parameter is given, then a list
+environment is used.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise*}
+Preamble for your multi-parted question.
+\begin{parts} % begin listing of the parts
+\item First question.
+\begin{solution}
+Solution to first question.
+\end{solution}
+...
+...
+\item Final question.
+\begin{solution}
+Solution to the final question.
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts} % end listing of parts
+\end{exercise*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} The following exercise illustrates this option.
+This example appears in \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}}.
+
+
+%\noindent The following exercise illustrates this option. \texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst}{webeqtst.tex}}.
+
+\begin{exercise*}
+Suppose a particle is moving along the $s$-axis, and that its position
+at any time $t$ is given by $s=t^2 - 5t + 1$.
+\begin{parts}
+\item Find the velocity, $v$, of the particle at any time
+$t$.\label{item:part}
+\begin{solution}
+Velocity is the rate of change of position with respect to time. In
+symbols:
+\[
+ v = \frac{ds}{dt}
+\]
+For our problem, we have
+\[
+ v = \frac{ds}{dt} =\frac d{dt}(t^2 - 5t + 1) = 2t-5.
+\]
+The velocity at time $t$ is given by $\boxed{v=2t-5}$.
+\end{solution}
+\item Find the acceleration, $a$, of the particle at any time $t$.
+\begin{solution}
+Acceleration is the rate of change of velocity with respect to time.
+Thus,
+\[
+ a = \frac{dv}{dt}
+\]
+For our problem, we have
+\[
+ a = \frac{dv}{dt} =\frac d{dt}(2t-5)=2.
+\]
+The acceleration at time $t$ is constant: $\boxed{a=2}$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts}
+\end{exercise*}
+
+\noindent There is also an option for listing multi-parts questions in tabular form.
+
+%\makeatletter
+%\@ifundefined{@xtabularcr}{\let\save@@xtabularcr\@xarraycr}
+% {\let\save@@xtabularcr\@xtabularcr}
+%\def\eq@xtabularcr{\@ifnextchar[{\save@@xtabularcr}
+% {\eqe@tab@parts@rowsep}}%
+%\def\eqe@tab@parts@rowsep{\save@@xtabularcr[\eqparts@tabrowsep]}%
+%\def\eqe@tab@parts@rowsep{\save@@xtabularcr
+% \noalign{\expandafter\kern\eqparts@tabrowsep}}%
+%
+%\makeatother
+
+\begin{exercise*}\relax\label{ex:tabular}
+Simplify each of the following expressions in the complex number system.
+\textit{Note}: $\bar z$ is the conjugate of $z$; $\operatorname{Re} z$ is the real
+part of $z$ and $\operatorname{Im} z$ is the imaginary part of $z$.
+
+\begin{parts}[2]
+\item $i^2$
+\begin{solution}
+$i^2 = -1$
+\end{solution}
+&
+\item $i^3$
+\begin{solution}
+$i^3 = i i^2 = -i$
+\end{solution}
+\\
+\item $z+\bar z$
+\begin{solution}
+$z+\bar z=\operatorname{Re} z$
+\end{solution}
+&
+\item $1/z$
+\begin{solution}
+$\displaystyle\frac{1}{z}=\frac{1}{z}\frac{\bar{z}}{\bar{z}}
+ =\frac{\bar{z}}{z\bar{z}}=\frac{\bar{z}}{|z|^2}$
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts}
+\end{exercise*}
+
+\noindent The syntax is the same as an exercise with multiparts.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise*} % <- star indicates multipart
+Simplify each...
+\begin{parts}[2] % <- optional argument indicates tabular
+\item $i^2$
+\begin{solution}[] $i^2 = -1$ \end{solution}
+&
+\item $i^3$ \begin{solution}[] $i^3 = i i^2 = -i$\end{solution}
+\\
+\item $z+\bar z$
+\begin{solution}[] $z+\bar z=\operatorname{Re} z$\end{solution}
+&
+...
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts}
+\end{exercise*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint This problem style does not obey the
+\texttt{solutionsafter} option. (See the section entitled
+\Nameref{sss:solutionsafter}).
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} The demo PDF
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}}
+contains this particular example.
+
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} The sample file
+%\texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst.tex}{webeqtst.tex}}
+%contains this particular example.
+
+\subsection{Options of the \texttt{exercise} Environment}
+
+\subsubsection{Leaving Vertical Space instead of a
+Solution}\label{sss:leavevspace}
+
+The \texttt{exercise} environment can be used for test
+construction. Initially, you may want to pose a questions and
+leave space beneath for the student to write in an answer.
+
+\newtopic The \texttt{solutions} environment has an optional parameter for
+inserting a vertical space.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}
+This is the question.
+\begin{solution}[1in] % <-- optional vertical skip
+This is the solution.
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent This vertical space only appears when the
+\texttt{\hyperref[sss:nosolutions] {nosolutions}} option is in
+effect.
+
+Within the context of test construction, write the test (including
+the solutions), then publish it with the \texttt{nosolutions}
+option (leaving vertical spaces as appropriate), then publish the
+key with the \texttt{\hyperref[sss:solutionsafter]
+{solutionsafter}} option.\footnote{If \texttt{solutionsafter} and
+\texttt{nosolutions} both appear in the option list,
+\texttt{solutionsafter} overrides \texttt{nosolutions}.}
+
+\redpoint The optional parameter for the solution is ignored for
+exercises with parts having a tabular format
+(\hyperref[ex:tabular]{Example~\ref{ex:tabular}} is an example of
+a tabular multipart exercise).
+
+
+\subsubsection{Hiding some Solutions}\label{sss:hide}
+
+A subset of the solutions can be hidden by using the `\texttt{h}'
+option. This option is an option of the \texttt{exercise}
+environment, as well as an option of \cs{item}, when there is an
+exercise with parts. For example, the following code
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}[h] % <- hide solution
+Give an example of a set that is \textit{clopen}.
+\begin{solution}
+The real number line is both closed and open in the
+usual topology of the real line.
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent
+yields the following exercise.
+
+\begin{exercise}[h] % <- hide solution
+Give an example of a set that is \textit{clopen}.
+\begin{solution}
+The real number line is both closed and open in the
+usual topology of the real line.
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+
+Notice that there is no hypertext link to the solution; indeed,
+the solution was not even written to the \cs{jobname.sol} file.
+
+The `\texttt{h}' option works with exercises with parts as well.
+Just apply the `\texttt{h}' option to the \cs{item}:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise*}
+A particle has position $s=t^2 - 5t + 1$ at time $t$.
+\begin{parts}
+
+\item Find the velocity, $v$, at time $t$.
+\begin{solution}
+$v = 2t-5$.
+\end{solution}
+
+% This solution will not be included in the solutions
+% section at the end of the document.
+\item[h] Find the acceleration, $a$, at time $t$.
+\begin{solution}
+$a = 2$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts}
+\end{exercise*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The results of this code follow:
+
+\begin{exercise*}
+A particle has position $s=t^2 - 5t + 1$ at time $t$.
+\begin{parts}
+
+\item Find the velocity, $v$, at time $t$.
+\begin{solution}
+$v = 2t-5$.
+\end{solution}
+
+\item[h] Find the acceleration, $a$, at time $t$.
+\begin{solution}
+$a = 2$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts}
+\end{exercise*}
+
+Part (a) is hypertext linked to its solution, whereas part (b) is
+blue, indicating there is no link there.
+
+\redpoint Multipart exercises in the tabular format behave the same way; use
+\cs{item[h]} to ``hide'' a solution.
+
+\redpoint There is also an `\texttt{H}' option as well. Specifying
+`\texttt{H}' also hides the solutions. See the next two sections for a discussion
+of revealing the solutions marked by either `\texttt{h}' or `\texttt{H}' to understand
+the distinction between the two.
+
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{nohiddensolutions} Option}\label{sss:nohideopt}
+
+Hidden solutions can be included in the document by either
+removing the `\texttt{h}' option everywhere and re-\LaTeX ing, or
+by simply using the \texttt{nohiddensolutions} of
+\textsf{exerquiz}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[nohiddensolutions]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent This option overrides the local `\texttt{h}' option throughout the
+document.
+
+\redpoint When the \texttt{solutionsafter} option of \textsf{exerquiz} is invoked,
+the hidden solutions are also revealed. To keep the solutions hidden, in this case,
+you should use `\texttt{H}' option instead of `\texttt{h}'. See the next section.
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{noHiddensolutions} Option}\label{sss:noHideopt}
+
+In addition to the `\texttt{h}', you can also use the `\texttt{H}'
+option with exercises. The solution will be hidden with
+`\texttt{H}', but will not be revealed when either the
+\texttt{nohiddensolutions} or the \texttt{solutionsafter}
+options are used.
+
+The `\texttt{H}' option can be overridden by using the
+\texttt{noHiddensolutions} of \textsf{exerquiz}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[noHiddensolutions]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+This option overrides the `\texttt{H}' and `\texttt{h}' options throughout
+the document.
+
+\subsubsection{The \protect\texttt{exercise} environment Counter}\label{sss:eqexno}
+
+The counter for the \texttt{exercise} environment is \texttt{eqexno},
+and will number your exercises consecutively throughout the
+document. Should you want the counter to be reset after each
+\texttt{section}, place in the preamble of your document
+the following lines:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\makeatletter
+\@addtoreset{eqexno}{section}
+\makeatother
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{nosolutions}}{nosolutions}
+Option}\label{sss:nosolutions}
+
+Some educators may initially want to post a series of exercises on the
+Web without the solutions. Then, at a later date, repost the
+exercises with the solutions included. For this application there
+is the \texttt{nosolutions} option for the \textsf{exerquiz}
+package.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[pdftex]{web} % dvipsone, dvips or dvipdfm
+\usepackage[nosolutions]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent For this kind of application, it might make sense to publish the exercises
+with the \texttt{forpaper} option.
+
+
+\subsubsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\texttt{solutions\-after}}{solutionsafter}
+Option}\label{sss:solutionsafter}
+
+For additional flexibility with how you want the solutions to the
+exercises presented, there is a \texttt{sol\-u\-tions\-af\-ter} option
+with \textsf{exerquiz}. Should you invoke this option,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[dvipsone]{web} % dvips or pdftex
+\usepackage[solutionsafter]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent the solutions to the exercises appear just \emph{after} the
+exercise question. For example,
+
+\SolutionsAfter
+\begin{exercise}
+Let $V$ be a vector space, show that the zero vector, $\mathbf 0$, is
+unique.
+\begin{solution}
+Let $\mathbf 0'$ be a vector that satisfies the axiom of being a
+zero of the vector space $V$. We want to show $\mathbf 0=\mathbf
+0'$. Since $\mathbf 0$ is a zero, we have $\mathbf 0 + \mathbf 0'=\mathbf
+0'$. But we are assuming $\mathbf 0'$ is a zero vector as well,
+hence, $\mathbf 0' + \mathbf 0=\mathbf 0$. Finally,
+\[
+ \mathbf0' = \mathbf0 + \mathbf0' = \mathbf0' + \mathbf0 = \mathbf0
+\]
+and this completes the proof.
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\SolutionsAtEnd
+
+As you can see in the above example, the word \textit{Solution:} is typeset
+at the beginning of the solutions. The command \Com{renameSolnAfterTo} can be used
+for conveniently changing the solution after label, for example,
+\verb!\renameSolnAfterTo{\textbf{Proof:}}! changes the label to \textbf{Proof:},
+and \verb!\renameSolnAfterTo{}! produces no label. These changes will be local
+to the group in which they are made, or global of there they are not made in a group.
+
+The command \cs{resetSolnAfterToDefault} sets the label text back to
+the default. The default label is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{Solution}:}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\newtopic The option \texttt{solutionsafter} is global; all exercises are
+typeset this way---unless you change it within the document using
+the macros \cs{SolutionsAfter} and \cs{Solutions\-At\-End}. This
+manual was typeset without the \texttt{solutionsafter} option. The
+above example was typeset as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\SolutionsAfter % show solution following exercise
+\begin{exercise}
+Let $V$ be a vector space, show ...
+\begin{solution}
+............
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\SolutionsAtEnd % turn back on solutions at end of document
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent Normally, a typical document might have all solutions at the end
+of the document (the default behavior), or all solutions following
+each exercise (\texttt{solutionsafter} option). Mixtures of these two
+types can be obtained by using the two commands
+\cs{Solutions\-After} and \cs{Solutions\-At\-End}.
+
+\newtopic This feature might be an easy way of typsetting examples. See the example
+in the section entitled \Nameref{sss:redesignex}.
+
+\redpoint The \texttt{solutionsafter} option has no effect on
+multipart exercises in \textit{tabular form}; I haven't been
+able to find a convenient way of displaying the solutions after
+the questions when the questions are in tabular form.\endredpoint
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} See the file \texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst}{webeqtst.pdf}} for examples.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website for examples.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Moving the Solution Set}
+
+The solution set, by default, comes last in the file. You can
+move its positioning by including the command
+\cs{includeexersolutions} at any point \emph{after} the last
+exercise. You'll note that I have moved the solutions in this
+file \emph{before} the \nameref{references} section, as indicated, for
+example, by its position in the table of contents.
+
+\subsubsection{Grouping the solutions at end}\label{ss:grpEx}
+
+Historically, solutions to exercises appearing at the end of the file
+\emph{are not grouped}. This means that a color change or a definition made
+in one solution, for example, may affect all subsequent solutions.
+
+You can now declare \cs{makeExSolnsLocalOn} or \cs{makeExSolnsLocalOff}
+anywhere in the document to turn on grouping for all exercises that follow,
+or to turn off this feature again. The default is \cs{makeExSolnsLocalOff}.
+
+
+\subsection{Redesigning the
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{exercise}}{exercise}
+Environment}\label{sss:redesignex}
+
+You can customize the \texttt{exercise} environment to suit your
+own needs. To customize, you need to change some or all of the
+following six commands. In the listing below, the \LaTeX{} definition
+of each follows a short description.
+\begin{questions}
+ \item \cs{exlabel}: This command expands to the name of the exercise label,
+ the default string is `Exercise'.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exlabel{Exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \cs{exlabelformat}: Typesets the exercise
+ label; use it to introduce additional type style such as
+ boldface, italic, small caps, etc.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exlabelformat{%
+ {\scshape\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \cs{exlabelsol}: Expands to the name of the exercise
+ label in the solutions section. Usually its value is the same
+ as \cs{exlabel}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exlabelsol{\exlabel}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \cs{exsllabelformat}: The format of the solutions label,
+ \verb+\bfseries\exlabel+ is the default.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exsllabelformat
+ {\noexpand\textbf{\exlabelsol\ \theeqexno.}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \cs{exrtnlabelformat}: This is the label you click on to
+ return from the solution of the exercise.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exrtnlabelformat{\exlabelsol\ \theeqexno}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \cs{exsectitle}: The section title of the solutions to
+ the exercises.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exsectitle{Solutions to \exlabel s}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \cs{exsecrunhead}: The running header for the solution
+ section for the exercises.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{questions}
+
+\redpoint The counter \texttt{eqexno} is used to count exercises.
+When an \texttt{exercise} environment starts, this counter is
+incremented. The value of this counter is used in
+the definitions of \cs{exlabelformat}, \cs{exsllabelformat} and
+\cs{exrtnlabelformat}. Still, the use of \texttt{eqexno} is
+optional; for example, you might want to state a problem just as `Special
+Exercise', without an associated exercise number.
+
+Below is an example of redefining the \texttt{exercise}
+environment. We define a \texttt{problem} environment based on
+the \texttt{exercise} environment.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newenvironment{problem}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Problem}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+\renewcommand\exsllabelformat
+ {\noexpand\textbf{\exlabel\ \theeqexno}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\blacktriangleleft$}
+\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle}
+\begin{exercise}}{\end{exercise}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newenvironment{problem}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Problem}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+\renewcommand\exsllabelformat
+ {\noexpand\textbf{\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\blacktriangleleft$}
+\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{Solutions to Problems}
+\begin{exercise}}%
+{\end{exercise}}
+
+\noindent See any standard \LaTeX{} reference on how to define a new
+environment, for example \cite{book:Goossens1}.
+
+\newtopic Here is an example of the new \texttt{problem} environment:\medskip
+
+\begin{problem}
+This is a question.
+\begin{solution}
+This is the solution.
+\end{solution}
+\end{problem}
+
+\noindent
+The code for this problem was simply:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{problem}
+This is a question.
+\begin{solution}
+This is the solution.
+\end{solution}
+\end{problem}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Two of these commands, \cs{exsllabelformat} and
+\cs{exrtnlabelformat}, must be handled with special care. Formatting such
+as \cs{textbf} or \cs{scseries} must be preceded by a \cs{noexpand}. These
+commands are written to a file, and must be prevented from expanding.
+
+When you use the \texttt{exercise} environment, the counter
+\texttt{eqexno} is automatically incremented by default. The
+\texttt{exercise} does have an optional argument for inserting
+your own counter.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{exercise}[!ameta(ctr)]
+.......................
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Where \ameta{ctr} is a counter already defined. This option is
+useful if you want to use the \texttt{exercise} environment to
+create a new environment with its own numbering scheme, as the
+following example illustrates.
+
+This example demonstrates how to define an \texttt{example}
+environment with its own counter. For examples, we don't want the
+solutions to appear at the end of the file, so we'll use
+the commands \cs{SolutionsAfter} and \cs{SolutionsAtEnd}. All changes are
+local.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+% put a counter in preamble
+\newcounter{exampleno}
+\newenvironment{example}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Example}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat
+ {\textbf{\exlabel\ \theexampleno.}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\square$}
+\SolutionsAfter
+\begin{exercise}[exampleno]}%
+{\end{exercise}
+\SolutionsAtEnd}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\newcounter{exampleno}
+\newenvironment{example}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Example}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel\ \theexampleno.}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\square$}
+\SolutionsAfter
+\begin{exercise}[exampleno]}%
+{\end{exercise}
+\SolutionsAtEnd}
+
+\noindent Now we simply type
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{example}
+What is $2+2$?
+\begin{solution}
+It is well known that $2+2=4$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{example}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic to obtain
+
+\begin{example}
+What is $2+2$?
+\begin{solution}
+It is well known that $2+2=4$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{example}
+
+\noindent The changes are local to the new \texttt{example} environment. If
+we have another exercise, we get a correctly numbered exercise.
+
+
+\begin{exercise}
+What is $2+2$?
+\begin{solution}
+It is well known that $2+2=4$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+
+\redpoint The command \cs{exsolafter} typesets the solution label
+to the exercise in the case the \texttt{solutionsafter} option is in effect.
+The default definition of \cs{exsolafter} is `\verb+\textit{Solution}:+'.
+You can redefine it as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\exsolafter{\textit{L\"osung}:}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The command \cs{renameSolnAfterTo} is a convenience macro for changing this label.
+We can redefine the label above like so:
+This redefinition yields:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renameSolnAfterTo{\textit{L\"osung}:}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\renewenvironment{example}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Example}
+\renewcommand\exsolafter{\textit{L\"osung}:}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel\ \theexampleno. }}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\square$}
+\SolutionsAfter
+\begin{exercise}[exampleno]}%
+{\end{exercise}
+\SolutionsAtEnd}
+
+\begin{example}
+What is $2+2$?
+\begin{solution}
+It is well known that $2+2=4$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{example}
+
+\redpoint There is a special option to the \texttt{exercise}
+environment as well,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}[0]
+.......................
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+When the optional argument is \texttt{0} rather than a counter. In
+this case, no counter is associated with the environment. For
+example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newenvironment{project}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Project}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel. }}
+\renewcommand\exsllabelformat
+ {\noexpand\textbf{\exlabel\ Hint:}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\blacktriangleleft$}
+\begin{exercise}[0]}%
+{\end{exercise}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newenvironment{project}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Project}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel. }}
+\renewcommand\exsllabelformat
+ {\noexpand\textbf{\exlabel\ Hint:}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\blacktriangleleft$}
+\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{Hints to Projects}
+\begin{exercise}[0]}%
+{\end{exercise}}
+
+\noindent Thus, we obtain,
+
+\begin{project}
+Find a shorter proof of \textsf{Fermat's Last Theorem}. Do not
+look at the project hints until you have finished the
+project.
+\begin{solution}
+There, you didn't need my help after all.
+\end{solution}
+\end{project}
+
+\noindent The code:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{project}
+Find a shorter proof of \textsf{Fermat's Last Theorem}. Do not
+look at the project hints until you have finished the project.
+\begin{solution}
+There, you didn't need my help after all.
+\end{solution}
+\end{project}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent Note that the solutions are typeset at the end of the file in the
+`Solutions to Exercises' section. At this time, there is no
+feature for sorting out these different types of environments;
+they are all \texttt{exercise} environments, which is what they are.
+
+\section{The \texttt{shortquiz} Environment}\label{ss:QuizIR}
+
+The \texttt{shortquiz} environment is used to create multiple
+choice question and math/text fill-in questions with immediate
+response. The discussion of math and text fill-in questions is
+post-phoned to \hyperref[s:oQ]{Section~\ref*{s:oQ}}, entitled
+\nameref{s:oQ}. The environment allows redefinition to customize
+the look of your quizzes. (See
+\mlNameref{sss:redefinesq}.)
+
+% The presentation of the answers will either be in a \texttt{list}
+% or a \texttt{tabular} environment, depending on the parameter
+% \texttt{num\_cols}. (A \texttt{list} is used if \texttt{num\_col}
+% is set to~1.)
+
+\subsection{Basic Usage}\label{BasicUsage}
+
+The syntax for the environment (\texttt{tabular} version) is as
+follows:
+
+\def\T#1{\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace*{200pt}\% #1}}
+\def\1{\T{begin shortquiz}}
+\def\2{\T{begin proposed answers}}
+\def\3{\T{a wrong answer}}
+\def\4{\T{the right answer}}
+\def\5{\T{end listing of answers}}
+\def\6{\T{end shortquiz}}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+!1\begin{shortquiz}[!meta(base_name)]
+...Question goes here...
+!2\begin{answers}{!meta(num_cols)}
+...
+!3\Ans0 !anglemeta(an incorrect answer) &
+...
+!4\Ans1 !anglemeta(a correct answer) &
+...
+!5\end{answers}
+!6\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The optional \meta{base\_name} is used to build names of the form fields associated with
+this quiz; if one is not provided, a \meta{base\_name} is automatically created. The name
+must be unique to the entire document.
+
+The parameter \meta{num\_cols} is the number of
+columns you want to typeset for your multiple choice responses. The
+environment sets up a \texttt{tabular} environment if
+\meta{num\_cols} is greater than~1, and a \texttt{list}
+environment if \texttt{num\_cols} is~1.
+
+This type of quiz is suitable for asking a short series of
+question of the reader, perhaps after explaining some concept.
+Quizzes can be used to direct the reader's attention to an
+important point.
+
+\redpoint Here is an example of the \texttt{shortquiz}
+environment. Responses are graded without comment using
+JavaScript.
+
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Which of the following is the $\dfrac{d}{dx}{\sin(x^3)}$?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 $\sin(3x^2)$ & \Ans0 $\cos(x^3)$ & \Ans1 $3x^2\cos(x^3)$ &
+\Ans0 $3x^2\cos(3x^2)$ \\
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\noindent The verbatim listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{shortquiz} % begin shortquiz environment
+Which of the following is the $\dfrac{d}{dx}{\sin(x^3)}$?
+\begin{answers}{4} % 4 columns of answers
+ \Ans0 $\sin(3x^2)$ & % \Ans0 is a false answer
+ \Ans0 $\cos(x^3)$ &
+ \Ans1 $3x^2\cos(x^3)$ & % \Ans1 is the correct answer
+ \Ans0 $3x^2\cos(3x^2)$
+\end{answers} % end answers environment
+\end{shortquiz} % end shortquiz environment
+\end{Verbatim}
+If \texttt{num\_cols} is greater than 1, the
+\texttt{answers} sets up a \texttt{tabular} environment,
+\texttt{p\darg{\meta{width}}} to sets up the column widths. The \cs{parbox}es are
+typeset ragged right.
+
+
+\redpoint Below is a two-column example in which the posed
+alternatives are rather long. The \texttt{answers} environment
+produces is a nicely aligned set of paragraphs.
+
+\goodbreak
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Which of the following best describes Augustin Cauchy?
+\begin{answers}{2}
+\Ans0 He developed the Calculus while his University was closed
+for the plague. & % Newton
+\Ans0 Given credit for first using the functional notation
+$f(x)$.\\ % Euler
+\Ans0 He created the ``bell-shaped curve'' and first used the
+method of
+least squares. & % Guass
+\Ans1 He first formulated a precise
+definition of the limit and continuity of a function. \\ % Cauchy
+\Ans0 Gave a rigorous definition of the definite integral---an
+integral
+that now bears his name. & % Riemann
+\Ans0 His notation for the derivative and the integral is used
+even to this day. % Leibniz
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\noindent Here is the same example in which the \texttt{num\_cols} is set
+to~1; in this case, a \texttt{list} environment is used.
+
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Which of the following best describes Augustin Cauchy?
+\begin{answers}{1}
+\Ans0 He developed the Calculus while his University was closed
+for the plague. % Newton
+\Ans0 Given credit for first using the functional notation
+$f(x)$. % Euler
+\Ans0 He created the ``bell-shaped curve'' and first used the
+method of
+least squares. % Guass
+\Ans1 He first formulated a precise
+definition of the limit and continuity of a function. % Cauchy
+\Ans0 Gave a rigorous definition of the definite integral---an
+integral
+that now bears his name. % Riemann
+\Ans0 His notation for the derivative and the integral is used
+even to this day. % Leibniz
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} See the sample file
+%\texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst} {webeqtst.tex}} for
+%examples.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website for examples.
+
+
+\newtopic\indent The space between the label and the text of a multiple
+choice question change be adjusted using two commands,
+\Com{setMClabelsep} and \Com{resetMClabelsep}. The default
+horizontal space between the label and text is a hard space `\verb!\ !'.
+The first command takes as its argument
+anything that creates a horizontal white space, for example,
+\verb!\setMClabelsep{\quad}! or \verb!\setMClabelsep{\kern20pt}!. If
+\cs{setMClabelsep} is set in a group, its value will revert to the
+default on exit from the group. The second command
+\cs{resetMClabelsep} resets the space back to its default `\verb!\ !'.
+
+The space above the beginning of the \texttt{answer} environment can be
+adjusted using the length \Com{aboveanswersSkip}. The default value for
+this is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\setlength\aboveanswersSkip{3pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+and this can be reset to any desired vertical skip.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{shortquiz} with Radio Buttons}\label{sqwRadio}
+
+The short quizzes (with multiple choices) can also be laid out using
+radio buttons rather than typeset lettering. Use a
+\texttt{shortquiz*} environment, with an optional argument the value
+of which is a unique name (which will be used to construct the
+titles of the radio buttons).\footnote{In previous versions of \textsf{exerquiz}, there was a
+\texttt*-option that was use to signal the use of radio buttons. This option is still
+available, but the shortquiz* environment is preferred.} If you do not provide an optional
+argument name, one will programmatically be provided for you.
+
+\newtopic For example, the following code
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{shortquiz*}[KublaKhan1]
+Was it in Xanadu did Kubla Kahn a stately pleasure dome decree?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent yields the following question:
+
+\begin{shortquiz*}[KublaKhan2]
+Was it in Xanadu did Kubla Kahn a stately pleasure dome decree?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+\noindent Check the functionality of this question, and contrast it with
+the same question.
+
+\sqTurnOffAlerts \sqCorrections
+
+\begin{shortquiz*}[KublaKhan3]
+Was it in Xanadu did Kubla Kahn a stately pleasure dome decree?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+\noindent We have inserted two new commands prior to this last
+short quiz \cs{sqTurnOffAlerts} and \cs{sqCorrections} to change
+response feedback. The former turns off the alerts and the latter
+turns on the corrections: check for a correct answer and an cross
+for an incorrect answer. (It doesn't make sense to
+\cs{sqTurnOffAlerts} without \cs{sqCorrections};
+\cs{sqCorrections} can be used without turning off the alerts.)
+
+\redpoint These two commands only apply to a short quiz that uses radio buttons.
+You can reverse these two commands with \cs{sqTurnOnAlerts} and
+\cs{sqNoCorrections}, respectively. These settings are the
+defaults of the \texttt{shortquiz} with check boxes.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{shortquiz} with Solutions}\label{ss:QuizS}
+
+Another type of quiz that is easy to implement in PDF is the
+multiple choice quiz with immediate response with solution given.
+This too is a \texttt{shortquiz} environment:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{shortquiz}
+...Question goes here...
+\begin{answers}!anglemeta(dest){!meta(num_cols)}
+...
+\Ans0 !anglemeta(an incorrect answer) &
+...
+\Ans1 !anglemeta(a correct answer) &
+...
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+ !anglemeta(solution to correct answer)
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The \anglemeta{name} takes on two forms, in either case, it is used to create a hypertext jump to
+the solution. The first form of \anglemeta{name} is an explicit named
+definition `\texttt{[\meta{named\_dest}]}', where \meta{named\_dest} is a
+word selected by the document author for a ``named destination.'' The other
+form is the star-form `\texttt{*}', when the star-form is used,
+\textsf{exerquiz} automatically generates the name. Use the
+`[\meta{named\_dest}]' form when you want to refer to a solution in another
+part of the document; otherwise, use `\texttt{*}' for convenience.
+
+\newtopic As before, \meta{num\_cols} is the number of columns to
+typeset the answers in.
+
+\newtopic The following example illustrates the quiz with
+solution.
+
+%\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\string\raisebox{1pt}{$\blacktriangleleft$}Return to Quiz}
+
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Define a function $f(s)=4s^3$ and another function
+$F(t)=t^4$. Is $F$ an antiderivative of $f$?
+\begin{answers}[quiz:anti]{4}
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+The answer is `Yes'. The definition requires that
+\[
+ F'(x) = f(x) \quad\text{for all $x$,}
+\]
+well, let's check it out.
+
+The definition of $f$ is $f(s)=4s^3$ and so $f(x)=4x^3$.
+The definition of $F$ is $F(t)=t^4$ and so, by the rules of
+differentiation, $F'(t)=4t^3$. Thus, $F'(x)=4x^3$. Therefore,
+\[
+ F'(x) = 4x^3 = f(x)\quad\text{for all $x$,}
+\]
+as required by the definition.
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\newtopic The verbatim listing that uses the explicit form of the destination, shown
+in bold font.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Define a function $f(s)=4s^3$ and another
+function $F(t)=t^4$. Is $F$ an antiderivative of $f$?
+\begin{answers}!textbf([quiz:anti]){4}
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+...solution not shown...
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Here is a listing of the same quiz using the \texttt{*} to
+automatically assign a destination label.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Define a function $f(s)=4s^3$ and another
+function $F(t)=t^4$. Is $F$ an antiderivative of $f$?
+\begin{answers}!textbf(*){4}
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+...solution not shown...
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+
+\subsubsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{bChoices}/\-\protect\cs{eChoices}}
+ {\textbackslash bChoices/\textbackslash eChoices} Commands}\label{bChoices}
+
+
+Beginning with \textsf{exerquiz} version~6.03, the command pair
+\cs{bChoices} and \cs{eChoices} are defined to help lay out
+the list of choices for a multiple choice question. This pair of
+macros is not really an environment, the \cs{eChoices} really
+does nothing other than to act as an ending marker. The idea
+behind this pair of macros is twofold:
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item To provide a convenient way of listing alternate choices for
+a multiple choice questions, the ``environment'' makes it easy to
+change the number of columns, or to change from tabular to list
+(or visa-versa);
+
+\item To lay out the alternatives in a uniform manner, which will
+make it easy to develop techniques of randomizing the
+alternatives.
+
+\end{questions}
+Here is an example of usage:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{answers}{4} %<- 4 columns
+\bChoices[2] %<- use only first 2 columns
+ \Ans0 a choice\eAns %<- choices delimited by
+ \Ans1 another choice\eAns % \Ans...\eAns
+ \Ans0 still another choice\eAns
+ \Ans0 another\eAns
+ \Ans0 incoming\eAns
+ \Ans0 more choices\eAns
+ \Ans0 another still\eAns
+ \Ans0 too many\eAns
+ \Ans0 choices\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Note that the choices begin with the \cs{Ans} macro
+followed by a 0 or 1, as described in the previous pages. The
+end of the choice is delimited by the \cs{eAns} command (which is
+undefined, but is used as a argument delimiter). Note that it is
+not necessary (and would be a mistake) to place the column
+delimiter~`\texttt\&', or the end of line
+command~`\texttt{\string\\}', this is done by the \cs{bChoices}
+command.
+
+The commands \cs{bChoices} and \cs{eChoices} can be used within
+the \texttt{answers} environment as part of a \texttt{shortquiz} or a
+\texttt{\hyperref[ss:GradedQuizzes]{quiz}} environment.
+
+Concerning the example above, the argument of the \texttt{answers}
+environment is 4 which means we are going to use the tabular
+environment with 4 columns. Now within those 4 columns we are
+going to only use the first 2 columns (this is the optional
+argument of \cs{bChoices}). If the optional argument is removed
+from \cs{bChoices}, the choices are typeset in the with 4
+columns.
+
+If the argument of \texttt{answers} or \texttt{manswers} is changed to 1, the
+optional argument of \cs{bChoices} is ignored, and the
+alternatives are typeset in a one column list environment.
+
+By changing the two parameters (the one for \cs{answers} and the
+one for \cs{bChoices}) you can easily modify how the
+alternatives are typeset.
+
+\redpoint \cs{rowsep}: Space between rows (or items in list environment)
+can be adjusted with the \cs{rowsep} command. If you
+say \verb+\rowsep{3pt}+, an additional \texttt{3pt} space is added
+between rows or items in a list environment. The default is \texttt{0pt}. The default is
+controlled through the command \cs{rowsepDefault}, like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\rowsepDefault{0pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\rowsep{3pt}
+\bChoices[2]
+ \Ans0 a choice\eAns
+ \Ans1 another choice\eAns
+ \Ans0 still another choice\eAns
+ \Ans0 another\eAns
+ \Ans0 incoming\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Do not place this command inside the
+\cs{bChoices}/\cs{eChoices} pair, the above example shows
+the optimal placement, just before \cs{bChoices}. This
+separation {\cs{rowsep}} is reset to the default at the end of the
+listing. To get a uniform separation between rows across the
+document, redefine \cs{rowsepDefault} in the preamble, like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\rowsepDefault{3pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\redpoint No commands should appear \textit{between} the pair
+\cs{bChoices} and \cs{eChoices} and \textit{outside} an
+\cs{Ans} and \cs{eAns} pair. All such tokens are gobbled up.
+
+\newtopic\textcolor{red}{Limitations:} The command \cs{eAns} acts as
+a macro parameter delimiter: Everything between \cs{Ans} and \cs{eAns}
+is taken in as the argument of a macro; therefore, verbatim content
+generated by \cs{verb} is not permitted by {\LaTeX}. If you want
+your choices to contain verbatim text, use the style as described in
+\Nameref{BasicUsage}.
+
+\subsubsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{questions}}{questions} Environment}
+
+The \texttt{questions} environment was designed to work with the
+\texttt{quiz} environment---taken up in
+\hyperref[ss:GradedQuizzes]{Section~\ref*{ss:GradedQuizzes}}
+below---but it works equally well with \texttt{shortquiz}.
+
+Using the \texttt{questions} environment, quizzes defined by
+\texttt{shortquiz}, with/without solutions, can be
+mixed together and combined to make a ``mini-quiz''. For example,
+
+\begin{shortquiz} Determine the LCD for each of the following.
+\begin{questions}
+\item $\dfrac{3x}{2y^2z^3}-\dfrac2{xy^3 z^2}$.
+\begin{answers}{2}
+\bChoices
+ \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=2xy^5z^5$\eAns
+ \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=2y^3 z^3$\eAns
+ \Ans1 $\text{LCD}=2x y^3 z^3$\eAns
+ \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=2 x y^3 z^5$\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\item $\dfrac{x+y}{3 x^{3/2}y^2}-\dfrac{x^2+y^2}{6 x y^4}$.
+\begin{answers}[quiz:LCB]{2}
+\bChoices
+ \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=18 x^{3/2}y^4$\eAns
+ \Ans1 $\text{LCD}=6x^{3/2}y^4$\eAns
+ \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=18 x y^4$\eAns
+ \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=6 x y^4$\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+If you erred on this one, more than likely it was on the
+appropriate multiplicative constant: 6 not 18. At least
+that's what I'm betting on.
+
+The instructions of the LCD Algorithm said to \textit{completely
+factor the denominator}. Here's a list of the factors
+\[\def\us#1#2{\underbrace{#2}_{\text{#1 term}}}
+ \us{first}{3, x^{3/2}, y^2}\,,\,\us{second}{2, 3, x, y^4}
+\]
+Let's rearrange them
+\[
+ 2, 3, 3, x, x^{3/2}, y^2, y^4
+\]
+Now drop duplicate factors---that's the 3. Oops! I did mention
+dropping identical factors, didn't I?
+\[
+ 2, 3, x, x^{3/2}, y^2, y^4
+\]
+Now, group together all terms which have the same base, then drop,
+from each of these groups all terms but the one with the highest
+power. We obtain then,
+\[
+ 2, 3, x^{3/2}, y^4
+\]
+The LCD is the product of same:
+\[
+ \text{LCD}=(2)(3) x^{3/2} y^4 = 6 x^{3/2} y^4.
+\]
+{\it Solution Notes\/}: Alternative (a) will work as a common
+denominator, but it is not the least common denominator. If you
+use (a), you will be working with larger numbers than is really
+necessary.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\noindent The first question is given without a solution, the second has a
+solution attached to it. An abbreviated verbatim listing follows.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Determine the LCD for each of the following.
+\begin{questions}
+\item $\dfrac{3x}{2y^2z^3}-\dfrac2{xy^3 z^2}$.
+\begin{answers}{2}
+...
+\end{answers}
+\item $\dfrac{x+y}{3 x^{3/2}y^2}
+ -\dfrac{x^2+y^2}{6 x y^4}$.
+\begin{answers}[quiz:LCB]{2}
+...
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+If you erred on this one, ... ...
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\Important The questions environment can be nested three deep.
+
+\newtopic Between items, you can say \Com{pushquestions}, make a comment, to continue
+with more questions, type \Com{popquestions}. Here is an example without using \texttt{shortquiz} environment.
+
+\begin{questions}
+ \item This is my first question.
+ \item This is my second question.
+\pushquestions
+We now begin a multipart question.
+\popquestions
+ \item Answer each of the following:
+ \begin{questions}
+ \item First part of the question.
+\pushquestions
+Be sure to concentrate on this next question, its a hard one; recall that $1+1=2$.
+\popquestions
+ \item Second part of the question.
+ \begin{questions}
+ \item This is a subpart of this part.
+\pushquestions
+The questions environment can be nested up to three deep.
+\popquestions
+ \item This is a second subpart of this part.
+ \end{questions}
+ \end{questions}
+ \item This is the fourth question.
+\end{questions}
+The color of the item labels is set by the command \cs{quesNumColor}. The command take one
+argument, a named color. The default is \verb!\quesNumColor{blue}!.
+
+
+\newtopic A partial listing of the above environment is presented below.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{questions}
+ \item This is my first question.
+ \item This is my second question.
+\pushquestions
+We now begin a multipart question.
+\popquestions
+ \item Answer each of the following:
+...
+\end{questions}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Options of the \texttt{shortquiz} Environment}\label{sq:opts}
+
+\subsubsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{forpaper}}{forpaper} Option}
+
+The \texttt{forpaper} option has already been described. The
+solutions to \texttt{short\-quiz} questions are not typeset on
+separate pages, but are separated by a \cs{medskip}.
+
+Following up on the pre-test angle discussed in
+``\mlnameref{sss:redefinesq}'', page~\pageref*{sss:redefinesq}, a single
+document can be constructed that can be published on-line, or
+published for paper distribution. This feature may be useful to
+some educators.
+
+
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{solutionsafter} Option}
+
+The \texttt{solutionsafter} option works as described for the
+\texttt{exercise} environment. The option just sets a Boolean
+switch. This switch can be controlled with
+\cs{Solutions\-After} and \cs{SolutionsAtEnd}. Here is a simple
+example.
+
+\SolutionsAfter
+\begin{shortquiz}
+In what year did Columbus sail the ocean blue?
+\begin{answers}[qz:columbus2]{4}
+\Ans0 1490 &\Ans0 1491 &\Ans1 1492 &\Ans0 1493
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+Columbus sailed the ocean blue in 1492. Some say he discovered
+San Salvatore, others say he first sited Cat Island in the
+Bahamas.
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\SolutionsAtEnd
+In the example above, \cs{SolutionsAfter} was placed before the \texttt{shortquiz} environment and
+the \cs{SolutionsAtEnd} was placed just after.
+
+This option may be useful in publishing an answer key to a multiple
+choice quiz. The quiz and solutions can be created together. The
+quiz can be published, then later, the quiz with complete
+solutions.
+
+
+\subsubsection{The \texorpdfstring{\texttt{proof\-ing}}{proofing}
+Option}\label{sss:proofing}
+
+For proofreading, use the \texttt{proofing} option of
+\textsf{exerquiz}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[proofing]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent When used, a symbol, defined by the command \cs{proofingsymbol},
+will mark the correct answers, as defined in your source file. The
+command \cs{proofingsymbol} may be redefined, its definition is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\proofingsymbol{\textcolor{webgreen}{$\bullet$}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent
+This option works for the
+\texttt{\hyperref[ss:GradedQuizzes]{quiz}} environment defined
+below
+(\hyperref[ss:GradedQuizzes]{page~\pageref*{ss:GradedQuizzes}}),
+as well.
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{showgrayletters} Option}\label{showgraylettersOpt} \aebCng[showgrayletters]
+
+When \texttt{showgrayletters} is used, the form field check boxes
+that appear in a \texttt{quiz} or in a \texttt{shortquiz} will have a gray capital letter
+\texttt{A}, \texttt{B}, \texttt{C}, etc. underneath it. This letter
+can then be referred to in the text or the solution.
+
+This option is global and is controlled by a switch, \cs{ifaebshowgrayletters}. The gray letter feature can be turned on
+and off locally: To turn on this feature, insert the command \Com{graylettersOn} at some appropriately chosen point in
+the document; to turn off the gray letter feature insert \Com{graylettersOff}.
+
+\newtopic In support of the \texttt{showgrayletters} option is a new command \Com{REF}.
+\cs{REF} acts like the {\LaTeX} command \cs{ref} with the hyperref modifications, but it converts
+the reference to uppercase. When \cs{ref} would typeset the letter `a', for example, \cs{REF}
+would typeset the letter `A'. \cs{REF}, like \cs{ref}, typesets a hyperref link. Hyperref defines a
+\texttt{*} version of \cs{ref}; \cs{ref*} typesets the reference, but does not create a link;
+\cs{REF*} does the same. When \cs{aebshowgraylettersfalse} is in effect, \cs{REF} does not capitalize
+the reference.
+
+The \texttt{showgrayletters} feature and the \cs{REF} command work equally
+well for the \texttt{quiz} environment.
+
+\redpoint Below is an example of this.
+
+\graylettersOn
+
+\begin{shortquiz*}[TestSQ]
+Answer this if you can!
+\begin{answers}{2}
+\bChoices
+ \Ans0\label{testsqFirst} This is a possible answer.\eAns
+
+ \Ans1\label{testsqSecond} Try this one (the correct one)\eAns
+
+ \Ans0 This is an answer.\eAns
+
+ \Ans0 Another alternative.\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+
+\noindent Reference both (\REF{testsqFirst}) and (\REF*{testsqSecond}).
+
+\graylettersOff
+
+\newtopic The code is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\graylettersOn
+\begin{shortquiz*}[TestSQ]
+Answer this if you can!
+\begin{answers}{2}
+\bChoices
+ \Ans0\label{testsqFirst} This is a possible answer.\eAns
+ \Ans1\label{testsqSecond} Try this one (the correct one).\eAns
+ \Ans0 This is an answer.\eAns
+ \Ans0 Another alternative.\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+\noindent Reference both (\REF{testsqFirst}) and (\REF*{testsqSecond}).
+\graylettersOff
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic Notice that the gray letters was not turned to off
+until after the usage of \cs{REF}.
+
+\textcolor{red}{\Important} The gray letters are typeset into the document. Do not
+use a background color for the checkboxes as this color will cover
+up the gray letters. The default background color checkboxes is
+transparent, keep it that way.
+
+\newtopic The command \Com{insertGrayLetters} is used to insert the gray letters;
+this command can be redefined as desired. See the source file \texttt{exerquiz.dtx}.
+Also see the definition of \Com{bottomOfAnsfStack}.
+
+\subsubsection{Moving the Solution Set}
+
+The solution set, by default, comes last in the file. You can move
+its positioning by including the command \cs{includequizsolutions}
+at any point \emph{after} the last quiz (created by the \texttt{shortquiz} and \texttt{quiz} environments). You'll note
+that I
+have moved the solutions in this file before the
+\nameref{references} section, as indicated, for example, by its
+position in the table of contents.
+
+\subsubsection{Grouping the solutions at end}\label{ss:grpQzs}
+
+Historically, solutions to quizzes (created by the \env{shortquiz} and
+\env{quiz} environments) appearing at the end of the file \emph{are not
+grouped}. This means that a color change or a definition made in one solution
+may affect all subsequent solutions.
+
+You can now declare \cs{makeQzSolnsLocalOn} or \cs{makeQzSolnsLocalOff}
+anywhere in the document to turn on grouping for all quizzes that follow, or
+to turn off this feature again. The default is \cs{makeQzSolnsLocalOff}.
+
+\subsection{Redesigning the
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{shortquiz}}{shortquiz}
+Environment}\label{sss:redefinesq}
+
+The \texttt{shortquiz} environment can be redesigned to better suit
+your needs. In the paragraphs below, we describe how you can change
+titles and form elements.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Changing Titles}
+
+You can temporarily change the title for the \texttt{shortquiz}
+environment by redefining the macro \cs{sqlabel}; for example, the
+default definition of this macro is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Quiz.}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The syntax for redefining \cs{sqlabel} is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\sqlabel{...new code goes here...}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent You can redefine the \textit{default} label as well; the
+default label is the title label that \texttt{short\-quiz} uses when
+\cs{sqlabel} is \textit{not present}. The default label is
+\verb+\eq@sqlabel+ and must be redefined using the macro
+\cs{renewcommand}. The best place for this to be done is the
+preamble. The syntax:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\makeatletter % make `at'=@ a normal letter
+\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{...new code goes here...}
+\makeatother % make `at'=@ something special(other)
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent To change the entire document to use `Exam' instead of `Quiz',
+make the following changes in the preamble:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\makeatletter
+% change default quiz title to 'Exam'
+\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Exam.}}
+% change quiz solutions return label
+\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{End Soln}
+% change solutions label
+\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
+ \string\textbf{Solution to Exam:}}
+\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Solutions to Exams}
+% change default running header for solutions
+\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Solutions to Exams}
+\makeatother
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+% ?? Did not document \sqsolafter
+
+\redpoint The above commands are `global'---they are in effect
+throughout the entire document. You can temporarily change these
+labels using the \cs{sqlabel}, \cs{sqslrtnlabel}, \cs{sqsllabel} and
+\cs{sqslsectitle}. Note that you cannot temporarily change the running label
+\cs{eq@qslsecrunhead}, this should be set in the
+preamble.
+
+Should you want to make a series of multiple choice questions
+(using the \texttt{questions} environment) and combine them into a
+sort of review or pretest, a useful idea would be to number the
+solutions. The counter that maintains the question number is
+called \texttt{questionno}. You can then, for example, define
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
+ \string\textbf{Solution to Question \thequestionno:}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} See the sample file
+%\texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst}{webeqtst.tex}}
+%for examples.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website for examples.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Modifying Form Elements}\label{sqMFE1}
+
+For quizzes that use radio buttons (see page~\pageref{sqwRadio}
+above), the appearance of the radio buttons can be controlled
+using the ``every'' mechanism as described in the document
+\href{eformman.pdf}{eFormMan.pdf} on
+\textit{\href{eformman.pdf}{eForm Support}} for the \cAcroB.
+The radio buttons can be modified using the command \cs{everysqRadioButton}.
+
+Prior to the short quiz below, the following command was executed
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\everysqRadioButton{\BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\sqTurnOffAlerts \sqCorrections
+\everysqRadioButton{\BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}}
+
+\begin{shortquiz*}[KublaKhan3]
+Was it in Xanadu did Kubla Kahn a stately pleasure dome decree?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+
+\everysqRadioButton{}
+\sqTurnOnAlerts\sqNoCorrections
+
+\noindent Return to the defaults, if desired, by then emitting
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\everysqRadioButton{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint The short quiz can also have fill-in questions and
+various other controls, these are described in
+Section~\ref{s:oQsq}, \nameref{s:oQsq}. There too, methods of
+modifying the appearance of the form elements are discussed.
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{titleQuiz}}{\CMD{titleQuiz}}
+ and \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{fancyQuizHeaders}}{\CMD{fancyQuizHeaders}}}\label{titleQuizSQ}
+
+%\exPDF{title_quiz}The demo file for these features is \texttt{title\_quiz.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=908} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=908}{title\_quiz.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website for examples.
+
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{titleQuiz}}{\CMD{titleQuiz}}}
+
+To assign a title to your short quiz use \Com{titleQuiz}. This title
+appears just after the typeset word ``Quiz''.
+
+\fancyQuizHeaders
+\titleQuiz{Two Question MC}
+\begin{shortquiz}\label{myCoolSQ}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Math is fun.
+\begin{answers}*{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+ The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Statistics is fun.
+\begin{answers}*{4}
+\Ans0 True & \Ans1 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+ The answer is false, statistics is interesting but not fun.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\noindent The partial verbatim code for the above quiz follows:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\titleQuiz{Two Question MC}
+\begin{shortquiz}\label{myCoolSQ}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+...
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\restoreDefaultQuizHeaders
+
+\noindent The format of the title is controlled by the command \Com{titleQuizfmt},
+the default definition is \verb!\newcommand\titleQuizfmt{\bfseries}!. The value
+of the \cs{titleQuiz} command can act as an argument for \cs{titleQuizfmt} if you redefine
+\cs{titleQuizfmt} to have an argument. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\titleQuizfmt[1]{\bfseries(#1)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Now, the title will appear in a set of parentheses. The title and formatting are enclosed
+in a \cs{mbox}, so font and style changes are localized to that \cs{mbox}.
+
+\newtopic If a quiz does not have a title, as defined by \cs{titleQuiz}, the title defaults to
+an empty title.
+
+\newtopic The definition of \cs{titleQuiz} is such that the command \cs{makeatletter} is executed
+before the argument for \cs{titleQuiz} is read. This means that the special character
+`\texttt{@}' can be used within the argument of \cs{titleQuiz}. For example, the \texttt{shortquiz}
+environment maintains a text macro \cs{@shortquizCnt} which contains the current short quiz
+count number. Thus you can say \verb!\titleQuiz{Short Quiz \@shortquizCnt}!, the title of
+the short quiz will include a short quiz number as well.
+
+The \cs{titleQuiz} is used for quizzes as well as with short quizzes. It is possible to have
+different formatting for each of these two environments by using the \Com{ifQuizType}
+command. The command takes two arguments:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\ifQuizType{!anglemeta(quiz_code)}{!anglemeta(shortquiz_code)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+For example, we could define \cs{titleQuizfmt} as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\titleQuizfmt{\ifQuizType{\bfseries}{\slshape}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+or with an argument, as mentioned above, you could define \cs{titleQuizfmt} with an argument,
+like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\titleQuizfmt}[1]{%
+ \ifQuizType{\bfseries(#1)}{\slshape[#1]}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{titleQuiz*}}{\CMD{titleQuiz*}}}
+
+For \texttt{shortquiz} environment---not for the \texttt{quiz}
+environment---there is a `\texttt*' optional first parameter. When
+the `\texttt*' option is taken, the quiz label (\cs{sqlabel}) is
+redefined to be the title of the quiz text.
+
+%\exPDF{title_quiz} The \texttt{title\_quiz.tex} demo file illustrates the `\texttt{*}' option.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=908} See
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=908}{title\_quiz.pdf}} demo file illustrates
+the `\texttt{*}' option.
+
+
+\newtopic Thus, if we title a quiz with the `\texttt{*}', we get
+
+\titleQuiz*{My Cool Quiz}
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Math is fun.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\item Statistics is fun.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 True & \Ans1 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+The formatting is that defined by the \cs{titleQuizfmt}, which is \cs{bfseries}. In addition
+to the \Com{ifQuizType} command, there is also the \cs{ifstaroption} command. It takes two
+parameters
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\ifstaroption{!ameta(code if \titleQuiz*)}{!ameta(otherwise)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+This allows us to not only format for quizzes, but for short quizzes, with or without
+the `\texttt*' option. If we redefine \cs{titleQuizfmt} to be
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\titleQuizfmt}{\ifQuizType{\bfseries}%
+ {\ifstaroption{\color{red}}{\bfseries}}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+we format the quiz title as \cs{bfseries} is either a quiz or a
+short quiz without `\texttt*' option, and as \verb!\color{red}! with
+a short quiz with the `\texttt*' option. The results are seen in the next quiz,
+with this redefinition:
+
+\renewcommand{\titleQuizfmt}{\ifQuizType{\bfseries}%
+ {\ifstaroption{\color{red}}{\bfseries}}}
+
+\titleQuiz*{My Swave Quiz}
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Math is fun.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\item Statistics is fun.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 True & \Ans1 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\subsubsection{Cross-Referencing}
+
+Quizzes and shortquizzes conform to the cross-referencing system of
+{\LaTeX}. For example, we used the label \verb!\label{myCoolSQ}! in the
+last quiz, the one on page~\pageref{myCoolSQ}. The title of the quiz is
+\nameref{myCoolSQ}. The code for the past two sentences is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+For example, we used the label \verb!\label{myCoolSQ}! in the
+last quiz, the one on page~\pageref{myCoolSQ}. The title of
+the quiz is \nameref{myCoolSQ}.
+\end{Verbatim}
+%\noindent If the shortquiz does not have a title, as defined by the \cs{titleQuiz} command, a generic label of
+%`Quiz' is generated. The default label name is
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+% \newcommand\eq@defaultShortQuizLableName{Quiz}
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\noindent This definition can be change using \cs{renewcommand}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{fancyQuizHeaders}}{\CMD{fancyQuizHeaders}}}
+
+The \Com{fancyQuizHeaders} command, a companion feature to \Com{titleQuiz}, enhances
+the labeling of the quiz in the solutions section of the document. If
+\cs{fancyQuizHeaders} is executed in the preamble, or prior to a quiz, the solution header has the
+following default format:
+
+\newtopic{\color{blue}Two Question MC: Question 1.} The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+
+\newtopic The above assumes the title of the quiz is the one given in the previous section.
+
+\newtopic When a quiz has no title, the header reverts to
+\textcolor{blue}{Solution to Quiz:} followed by the question number.
+
+\redpoint You can turn off fancy quiz headers by using
+\Com{restoreDefaultQuizHeaders}.
+
+\newtopic You can modify the fancy headers with a combination of setting \Com{setsolnspace}
+and/or redefining the command \Com{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt}. First
+\cs{setsolnspace}: This is a hook into the space immediately
+following the header. To insert a \cs{medskip} after the header, for example, you
+can say \verb!\setsolnspace{\par\medskip\noindent}! a
+\cs{medskip} is created after the solution header and the solution
+above appears as
+
+\newtopic{\color{blue}Two Question MC: Question 1.}\par\medskip\noindent The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+
+\newtopic The definition of \cs{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt} is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\def\eq@fancyShrtQuizHeadersfmt{\eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \Com{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt} is the \texttt{quiz} counterpart to
+this \texttt{shortquiz} construct. The fancy short quiz solutions header
+defaults to the same header used for a quiz. You can copy
+and paste the definition of \cs{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt} into the definition
+of the command \cs{eq@fancyShrtQuizHeadersfmt}, then modify as described in
+\Nameref{fancyQuizHeadersQ}.
+
+%See the section \Nameref{fancyQuizHeadersQ} for a full discussion of this topic.
+
+% \subsection{Graded Quizzes using JavaScript}
+\section{The \texttt{quiz} Environment}\label{ss:GradedQuizzes}
+
+Use the \texttt{quiz} environment to create graded quizzes. In
+this case, several (many) questions are bundled together. The
+student takes the quiz and responses are recorded by
+JavaScript. Upon completion of the quiz, the total score is
+reported to the student.
+
+The \texttt{quiz} environment can generate multiple choice
+questions and math/text fill-in questions. The discussion of math
+and text fill-in questions is postponed to \hyperref[s:oQ]
+{Section~\ref*{s:oQ}} on page~\pageref*{s:oQ}
+
+
+There are two types of quizzes, the
+\hyperref[sss:QuizwLinks]{link-style} and
+\hyperref[sss:QuizwChecks]{form-style}.
+In \hyperref[ss:correct]{Section~\ref*{ss:correct}}, we see that
+the \texttt{quiz} environment can also correct the quizzes.
+
+The quiz environment takes one required parameter, the
+\meta{base\_name}, which is a string.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{quiz}{!meta(base_name)}
+...
+\end{quiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\textcolor{red}{\Important} The \pkg{exerquiz} package uses the
+\meta{base\_name} to build Acrobat form fields, and also JavaScript
+variables; therefore, there are restrictions on the choice of the
+name. The name must be a (JavaScript) \emph{identifier}, the rules to
+be an identifier are these.
+\begin{quote}
+The first character shall be a letter, an underscore (\texttt{\_}),
+or a dollar sign (\texttt{\$}); subsequent characters may be any
+letter or digit, or an underscore or a dollar sign.
+\end{quote}
+Do not use other symbols, like a colon (\texttt{\:}) or a period as part of the field name,
+these will confuse the JavaScript interpreter, and may cause the quiz not to function as
+designed.
+
+
+The \texttt{quiz} environment consists of a series of nested
+environments. Inside the \texttt{quiz} environment is the
+\texttt{questions} environment (an enumerated list), and within
+that environment is the \texttt{answers} environment.
+Symbolically, we can express this as
+\[
+ \mbox{\texttt{quiz}} \supseteq
+ \mbox{\texttt{questions}} \supseteq
+ \mbox{\texttt{answers}}
+\]
+The term `answers' is, perhaps, not sufficiently descriptive;
+`alternatives' would be more appropriate, but it requires more
+typing. \verb!{:-{)!
+
+\redpoint The \texttt{answers} environment requires one parameter,
+the \texttt{num\_cols}. If \texttt{num\_cols} is~1, a
+\texttt{list} environment is created; otherwise, a
+\texttt{tabular} environment is used.
+
+This (\texttt{tabular}) environment has the following syntax:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{quiz}{!meta(base_name)}
+The preamble to the questions goes here.
+\begin{questions}
+\item State first question....
+\begin{answers}{4} % <- num_cols = 4
+\Ans0 ... &\Ans1 ... &\Ans0 ... &\Ans0 ...
+\end{answers}
+...
+\item n th question....
+\begin{answers}{4} % <- 4 column format
+\Ans0 ... &\Ans1 ... &\Ans0 ... &\Ans0 ...
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Following the quiz, or anywhere in the document, place
+the macro \cs{ScoreField}, defined in \textsf{exerquiz}, to
+display the results of the quiz:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\ScoreField{!meta(base_name)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent\textcolor{red}{\bfseries Important.} The value of the parameter of
+the macro \cs{ScoreField} must match the \meta{base\_name}
+defined in the argument of the \texttt{quiz} environment.
+
+\redpoint There is a convenience macro, \cs{currQuiz}, that holds the name
+of the current quiz. Thus, we could have instead typed:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ScoreField\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent Read the paragraph entitled \Nameref{sss:scorefield} for more
+details on this macro.
+
+%An alternative to \cs{ScoreField} is to use \cs{TextField}.
+%a macro defined by \pkg{hyperref}. See more details later. %??
+
+\begin{comment}
+The \textsf{exerquiz} macro \cs{eqScore} is a text macro that
+expands to the phrase `Score:'. (It expands to `Punkte:' with the
+\texttt{german} language option and `Score :' with the
+\texttt{french}.)
+
+
+The \cs{TextField} macro takes two arguments, we need only the
+first---the second is left empty. This \cs{TextField} can be
+modified by changing the options; the layout of the field can be
+changed as well using the \cs{LayoutTextField}. For more
+information see the paragraphs on \nameref{ss:modoutputfield}
+beginning on page~\pageref{ss:modoutputfield}. There are
+extensive examples on how to set up the \cs{TextField} in the
+paragraph \nameref{sss:modtextfield} on
+page~\pageref{sss:modtextfield}, with examples following on
+page~\pageref{sss:exampltextfield}.
+\end{comment}
+
+\subsection{Options of the \texttt{quiz} Environment}
+
+In addition to the options listed in the section \ref{sq:opts}, page \pageref*{sq:opts}, the following is
+designed for quizzes.
+
+\subsubsection{The option
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{noquiz\-solutions}}{noquizsolutions}}\label{sss:noquizsolutions}
+
+For online quizzing, where results are stored in some way (database,
+e-mail, text file) the presence of the solutions in the same file as the
+questions is a breach in security of the quiz. Using the
+\texttt{noquizsolutions} removes the solutions to a \texttt{quiz} and
+\texttt{shortquiz} from the document under construction.
+
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{answers} Environment}\label{answersQuiz}
+
+The simplest type of question that can be posed is the multiple choice question.
+For this question type, the \texttt{answers} environment is used. The basic syntax
+is
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\item A question
+\begin{answers}!anglemeta(dest){!meta(num_cols)}
+\Ans[!meta(partial_pts)]{0|1}....
+\end{answers}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The \anglemeta{dest}, an optional argument, is a name used to create a hypertext jump to
+the solution; it has two forms: \texttt{[\meta{named\_dest}]}, an explicit
+``named destination.''; and the \texttt{*}-form, \textsf{exerquiz} automatically
+generates the name. Use \meta{named\_dest} when you want to refer to a solution
+in another part of the document; otherwise, use \texttt{*}, for convenience.
+
+If either the \texttt{[\meta{named\_dest}]} or \texttt{*} is used, a
+\texttt{solution} environment should follow.
+
+\newtopic The \meta{num\_cols} is the number of columns to
+typeset the answers in. When \meta{num\_cols} is 1, the answers are set
+in a list environment; otherwise, a tabular environment is used. In the latter case,
+the usual table syntax is used. (Use \texttt{\&} to separate columns, and \verb!\\! to
+terminate a row.)
+
+\newtopic The \cs{Ans} command has one required argument, a 1 to mark that this
+answer is a correct answer, and a 0 to mark that this answer is not true. \cs{Ans}
+also has an optional argument to pass partial points rewarded for a wrong answer.
+
+\newtopic This environment is illustrated extensively in this section. See also the
+\texttt{manswers} environment, \Nameref{manswersQuiz}, for posting questions with multiple
+correct answers.
+
+\subsection{Basic Usage}
+
+In this section we discuss the two \texttt{quiz} styles:
+\nameref{sss:QuizwLinks} and \nameref{sss:QuizwChecks}.
+
+A paragraph is devoted to some modifications that can be made at
+the beginning and end of the quiz. In addition, a
+\texttt{\hyperref[sss:proofing]{proofing}} option is also
+described.
+
+\subsubsection{Link-Style Quiz}\label{sss:QuizwLinks}
+
+%\renewcommand\bqlabel{Begin Exam}
+%\renewcommand\eqlabel{End Exam}
+
+%There are actually two variations on this type of quiz, one uses
+%links, the other uses radio button fields.
+
+This style uses links to record the choices to the alternatives.
+The link method takes up less space in the pdf file than does the
+form-style.
+
+Below is an example of a link-style quiz. Instructions should be
+given to guide the student in operating the quiz correctly.
+
+\medskip\noindent\textcolor{red}{Instructions.} You must click on
+`Begin Quiz' to initialize the quiz. Not doing so brings forth
+an error message. When finished, click on `End Quiz'.
+
+\begin{quiz}{qzdiscrl}
+Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$, respond to each of the
+following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $x^2-4x + 3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 Yes &\Ans1 No
+\end{answers}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $2x^2 - 4x + 3 $ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\item How many solutions does the equation $2x^2 - 3x - 2= 0$ have?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 none &\Ans0 one &\Ans1 two
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\par
+\ScoreField\currQuiz
+%\TextField[name=qz:discr,width=3in,default=\eqScore]{}
+
+\redpoint While you are taking the test, and before you click on
+`End Quiz', you can change your answers.
+
+%A message box comes out,
+%gives you your original choice, and asks you whether you really
+%want to change your answer.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz}{qzdiscrl} % qzdiscrl=base_name
+Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$, respond to each of the
+following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $x^2-4x + 3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 Yes &\Ans1 No
+\end{answers}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $2x^2-4x+3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\item How many solutions does the equation $2x^2-3x-2=0$ have?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 none &\Ans0 one &\Ans1 two
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\par
+\ScoreField\currQuiz % matching quiz field name
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint The convenience text macro, \cs{currQuiz}, contains the name
+of the current quiz. This macro can be used as the argument of
+\cs{ScoreField}.
+
+\subsubsection{Form-Style Quiz}\label{sss:QuizwChecks}
+
+You may be thinking that such a quiz format---one in which the
+student cannot see the choices made---is not very good. It is
+perhaps adequate for two or three quick questions. For a longer
+quiz format, one would like to see a ``checkbox'' format.
+A quiz with a checkbox format can be obtained using the
+\texttt{quiz*} environment:\footnote{In previous versions of \textsf{exerquiz}, there was a \texttt*-option
+for this purpose. The \texttt{quiz*} has replaced the \texttt*-option and is the preferred method, though
+the \texttt*-option is still defined so as not to break previous code.}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{quiz*}{!meta(base_name)}
+...
+...same format as before...
+...
+\end{quiz*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent Here is the same sample quiz with the form-style option. The only
+change in the code is the insertion of the \texttt*-option.
+
+\medskip\noindent\textcolor{red}{Instructions.} You must click on
+`Begin Quiz' to initialize the quiz. Not doing so, brings forth
+an error message. When finished, click on `End Quiz'.
+
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzdiscrf}
+Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$, respond to each of the
+following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $x^2-4x + 3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Yes &\Ans1 No
+\end{answers}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $2x^2 - 4x + 3 $ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\item How many solutions does the equation $2x^2 - 3x - 2= 0$ have?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 none &\Ans0 one &\Ans1 two
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}
+
+\ScoreField{qzdiscrf}
+
+\redpoint Before completing the quiz, a student can easily change
+alternatives.
+
+\redpoint This type is more suitable for longer quizzes. The
+choices the student makes are visually recorded for the student to
+review and change before clicking on `End Quiz'. A partial
+verbatim listing:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz*}{qzdiscrf}
+Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$, respond to each of the
+following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+.............
+.............
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\par
+\ScoreField{qzdiscrf}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} See the sample file
+%\texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst} {webeqtst.tex}}
+%and for examples.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website for examples.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Using Circular Radio Buttons with MC Questions}
+
+As seen with the examples of the previous section, the form-type quizzes
+have a rectangular check box for the user to make his selection. Acrobat also
+offers a circular radio button that can be used to make a multiple choice.
+
+To create circular radio buttons for a MC question execute \Com{useMCCircles} before
+the quiz, or, perhaps, in the preamble of your document.
+
+To return to the default rectangular choice boxes, execute \Com{useMCCRects}. This
+setting is the default, there is no need to executed it unless
+\cs{useMCCircles} has already been executed.
+
+Executing \cs{useMCCircles} does not affect the \texttt{manswers}
+environment, page~\pageref*{manswersQuiz}), so you can have circular radio
+buttons for multiple choice, and rectangular choice boxes for multiple
+selection problems.
+
+%\exPDF{quiz_w_circ} The sample file \texttt{quiz\_w\_circ.tex} illustrates these two commands.
+
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=914} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=914}{quiz\_w\_circ.pdf}}
+illustrates these two commands.
+
+
+
+\subsubsection{Overriding the `quiztype' Parameter}
+
+You can globally declare that all quizzes to be a link-type or
+form-type by using the command \Com{quiztype}. Placing
+\verb+\quiztype{f}+ in the preamble (or prior to any quiz) will
+cause all quizzes following that command to be form-type quizzes.
+Similarly, executing \verb+\quiztype{l}+ will produce all link-type quizzes.
+
+You can make the environments revert back to their normal behavior by using
+the command \Com{defaultquiztype}, which cancels out the \cs{quiztype} command.
+
+%\exPDF{quizpts} The sample file \texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#quizpts}
+%{quizpts.tex}} illustrates these collections of commands.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1054} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1054}{quizpts.pdf}}
+illustrates these collections of commands.
+
+
+
+\newtopic \emph{Within a quiz}, you can say \Com{useForms}, to change the style to a visible checkbox
+for multiple choice or multiple selection questions; use \Com{useLinks} to change
+the style to links with alphabetized alternatives. Using \cs{restoreFLTypeDefault}
+restores the next multiple choice/selection question back to the default determined
+by the quiz environment (\texttt{quiz} versus \texttt{quiz*}), or as set by the
+\cs{quiztype} command.
+
+\subsubsection{The BeginQuiz and EndQuiz Form Buttons}\label{sss:FormButton}
+
+The default setup the \texttt{quiz} environment is to have
+hypertext links for the `Begin Quiz' and `End Quiz'. You can also
+redefine this linking and use a form button instead
+Prior to your quiz, use the following code, if desired.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\useBeginQuizButton
+\useEndQuizButton
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\useBeginQuizButton\useEndQuizButton
+%\makeatletter
+%\renewcommand\eq@beginQuiz{\eq@BeginQuizButton}
+%\renewcommand\eq@endQuiz{\eq@EndQuizButton}
+%\makeatother
+
+
+\begin{quiz}{qzTeXf} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Who created \TeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Knuth &\Ans0 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\item Who originally wrote \LaTeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Knuth &\Ans1 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\quad\ScoreField{qzTeXf}
+
+\medskip
+\noindent Revert back to link-style as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\useBeginQuizLink
+\useEndQuizLink
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\useBeginQuizLink\useEndQuizLink
+
+\noindent The commands \cs{useBeginQuizButton} and \cs{useEndQuizButton} each
+have an optional argument that can be used to modify the appearance
+of the buttons.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\useBeginQuizButton[\textColor{0 0 1}]
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent would create a `Begin Quiz' button with blue text for the button label.
+
+\subsubsection{The \texorpdfstring{\texttt{proof\-ing}}{proofing}
+Option}\label{ss:proofing}
+
+For proofreading, use the \texttt{proofing} option of
+\textsf{exerquiz}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[proofing]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent When used, a symbol, defined by the command \cs{proofingsymbol},
+will mark the correct answers, as defined in your source file. The
+command \cs{proofingsymbol} can be redefined, its definition is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\proofingsymbol{\textcolor{webgreen}{$\bullet$}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent
+This option works for the \texttt{\hyperref[ss:QuizIR]{shortquiz}}
+environments defined above
+(\hyperref[ss:QuizIR]{page~\pageref*{ss:QuizIR}}), as well.
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{showgrayletters} Option} \aebCng[showgrayletters]
+
+The showgrayletters option is valid for the \texttt{quiz} and \texttt{shortquiz} environments.
+See the section entitled \Nameref{showgraylettersOpt} for a detailed explanation
+of this option.
+
+\subsubsection{Setting the Threshold}\label{threshold}
+
+The default behavior of the \texttt{quiz} environment is that a
+student can begin the quiz and finish the quiz without answering
+any or all of the questions. This is called a \texttt{lowThreshold}
+and is the default behavior.
+
+The document author can set a \texttt{highThreshold} by re-defining
+the \cs{minQuizResp} macro. The default definition is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\minQuizResp{lowThreshold}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent However, if you make the definition
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\minQuizResp{highThreshold}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent the student is required to answer all the questions of a
+quiz.
+
+Actually, \texttt{lowThreshold} and \texttt{highThreshold} are
+JavaScript functions that are called when the ``End
+Quiz'' button is clicked. If the threshold is not met, an alert box
+appears informing the user of this.
+
+The document author can write a custom threshold function and place
+its name in the \cs{minQuizResp} macro. See the \textsf{exerquiz}
+source code---in either \textsf{exerquiz.dtx} or
+\textsf{exerquiz.sty}---for the \texttt{highThreshold()} function
+for an example of how to do this.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{manswers} Environment}\label{manswersQuiz}
+
+Beginning with \textsf{Exerquiz} v.6.2, the \texttt{manswers}
+environment is defined to support multiple selection questions.
+(\texttt{manswers} stands for multiple answers). This is in contrast
+with the \texttt{answers} environment in which there is only one
+correct answer; for \texttt{manswers}, there are several correct
+answers.
+
+%\exPDF{manswers} See the example file for this feature is \texttt{manswers.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=903} See the example file for this feature is \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=903}{manswers.pdf}}.
+
+\newtopic\indent The syntax is the same as that of the \texttt{answers} environment,
+\mlNameref{answersQuiz}. Below is example fragment, taken from \texttt{manswers.tex}
+
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\item\PTs{5} Select which people were the President
+ of the United States.
+\begin{manswers}{4}
+ \bChoices[2]
+ \Ans[-1]{0} Henry Clay\eAns
+ \Ans[-1]{0} Ben Franklin\eAns
+ \Ans[1.5]{1} Andrew Jackson\eAns
+ \Ans[1.5]{1} Ronald Reagan\eAns
+ \Ans[-1]{0} George Meade\eAns
+ \Ans[2]{1} Grover Cleveland\eAns
+ \Ans[-1]{0} John Jay\eAns
+ \Ans[-1]{0} Paul Revere\eAns
+ \eChoices
+\end{manswers}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The arguments of the \cs{Ans} command is the same as
+those of \cs{Ans} in the \texttt{answers} environment.
+
+\newtopic When the \cs{ScoreField} is used to display results, a manswers
+question is correct if and only if all correct answers are checked, and none
+of the incorrect answers are checked.
+
+When the \cs{PointsField} is used (see \Nameref{sss:asignPts}), and
+points are assigned, as in the above code fragment, the optional
+argument of \cs{Ans} is used to assign points for each response (if
+there is no optional argument, it defaults to 0). When a student
+selects a choice, the point value in the optional argument is added
+to the point score. In the case of choosing \texttt{Ronald Reagan},
+1.5 points are added to the point score, while -1 point is added to
+the point score for choosing \texttt{John Jay}. The minimal point
+score for each question is zero, unless \cs{negPointsAllowed} command
+is executed in the preamble, see \Nameref{negPtsAllowed}.
+
+
+\subsection{Correcting the Quizzes with JavaScript}\label{ss:correct}
+
+%\makeatletter\eq@nocorrectionsfalse\makeatother
+\CorrectionsOn
+
+Beginning with \textsf{exerquiz}, version 1.2, you can now correct
+quizzes created by the \texttt{quiz} environment. To correct the
+quizzes, simply include an additional element into your quiz, a
+correction button. The correction button with
+\cs{CorrButton}.
+
+\redpoint The following is a link-style quiz.
+
+% \begin{center}
+% \noindent\fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{%
+% \begin{minipage}{.965\linewidth}%
+% \noindent\textcolor{red}{\textbf{Instructions:}} Click on
+% `\textcolor{webgreen}{Begin Quiz}' to initialize the quiz.
+% When finished, click on `\textcolor{webgreen}{End Quiz}'.
+% Then, click on the `Correct' button.
+% % To grade your quiz, press the `Correct' button.
+% \end{minipage}
+% }%
+% \end{center}
+
+\begin{quiz}{qzdiscr1l} Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$,
+respond to each of the following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $x^2-4x + 3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Yes &\Ans1 No
+\end{answers}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $2x^2 - 4x + 3 $ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\item How many solutions does the equation $2x^2 - 3x - 2= 0$ have?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 none &\Ans0 one &\Ans1 two
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\par
+\ScoreField{qzdiscr1l}\CorrButton{qzdiscr1l}%
+
+\medskip
+%\fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{%
+% \begin{minipage}{.975\linewidth}%
+ \noindent\textcolor{red}{\textbf{Legend:}}
+ A \textcolor{webgreen}{\ding{52}} indicates a
+ correct response; a \textcolor{red}{\ding{56}}, indicates an
+ incorrect response, in this case, the correct answer is marked
+ with a \textcolor{webgreen} {\ding{108}}.
+% \end{minipage}}
+
+\begin{comment}
+ \begin{center}
+ \fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{%
+ \begin{minipage}{.95\linewidth}
+ \noindent\textcolor{red}{\textbf{Legend:}}
+ A \textcolor{red}{\ding{52}} indicates that the student gave the
+ correct response; a \textcolor{red}{\ding{56}}, indicates an
+ incorrect response, in this case, the correct answer is marked
+ with a \textcolor{webgreen} {\ding{108}}.
+ \end{minipage}}
+ \end{center}
+\end{comment}
+
+\medskip
+A partial verbatim listing of this quiz follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz}{qzdiscr1l} Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$,
+respond to each of the following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+............................
+............................
+............................
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}
+
+\ScoreField{qzdiscr1l}\CorrButton{qzdiscr1l}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\redpoint The macro \cs{CorrButton} is used to create a nice
+``correction'' button. JavaScript is used to correct the quiz.
+The only required argument is the field label that uniquely
+defines the field in which the total score is placed. See the
+section entitled \mlNameref{sss:CorrButton} for more details on how
+to use this macro.
+
+\redpoint The \cs{CorrButton} will not work until the user has
+clicked on `End Quiz'. The user can re-take the quiz simply by
+clicking on `Begin Quiz', the form fields and JavaScript variables
+will be cleared.
+
+\redpoint It is possible to take this form data and submit it to a
+CGI script for processing. (The data can be saved to a database,
+for example.) However, there is no built-in capability for this
+in the \textsf{exerquiz} package.
+
+\symbolchoice{check}
+
+\medskip
+
+\noindent The same quiz can be written in form-style simply by inserting the
+\texttt*-option.
+
+\medskip\noindent\textcolor{red}{Instructions.} You must click on
+`Begin Quiz' to initialize the quiz. Not doing so, brings forth
+an error message. When finished, click on `End Quiz'.
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzdiscr1f} Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$,
+respond to each of the following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $x^2-4x + 3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Yes &\Ans1 No
+\end{answers}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $2x^2 - 4x + 3 $ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\item How many solutions does the equation $2x^2 - 3x - 2= 0$ have?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 none &\Ans0 one &\Ans1 two
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\redpoint In the partial verbatim listing that follows, notice the field
+name has been changed from \texttt{qzdiscr1l}, which is the name of the
+quiz previous to his one, to \texttt{qzdiscr1f}. Different quizzes must
+have unique field names.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz*}{qzdiscr1f} Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$,
+respond to each of the following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+............................
+............................
+............................
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Notice that in this example, the \cs{ScoreField} and the
+\cs{CorrButton} are positioned following the `End Quiz'; this makes
+the design more compact and nicer looking.
+
+\subsubsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{nocorrections}}{nocorrections}
+Option}\label{sss:nocorrections}
+
+Including the corrections adds quite a bit more JavaScript code to
+the \texttt{.pdf} document, this feature is `on' by default. If
+you have a document in which you do not want to have the option of
+offering corrected quizzes, then just specify
+\texttt{nocorrections} in the option list of \textsf{exerquiz}.
+
+There are also a couple of macros you can use to override the option switch, they are
+\cs{CorrectionsOn} and \cs{CorrectionsOff}. Each remains in
+effect until the other is invoked.
+
+\redpoint If the \texttt{nocorrections} option is taken, then the \cs{CorrButton}
+does not appear for a quiz.
+
+\subsubsection{Showing Partial Credit Markup}\label{showcreditmarkup}
+
+When a quiz is corrected, it is possible to show how much credit was given.
+
+%\exPDF{pc_test} The demo file for this feature is \texttt{pc\_test.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=881} The demo file for this feature is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=881}{pc\_test.pdf}}.
+
+
+%\exPDF{pc_test1} The example file \texttt{pc\_test1.tex} illustrates
+%how to have a multiple selection problem and a grouped problem with
+%no partial credit. The student must get all parts correct to get
+%full credit for that problem, otherwise, no credit is assigned.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=884} The example file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=884}{pc\_test1.pdf}} illustrates
+how to have a multiple selection problem and a grouped problem with
+no partial credit. The student must get all parts correct to get
+full credit for that problem, otherwise, no credit is assigned.
+
+
+\newtopic Place the command \Com{showCreditMarkup} before a quiz you want the
+partial credit markup. The command \Com{hideCreditMarkup} hides this
+markup (it switches off the previous \cs{show\-Credit\-Mark\-up}); place
+this command before a quiz for which you don't want the markup. The
+default is not to show any partial credit markup.
+
+When a question item introduces a series of question, but poses no question itself,
+place \Com{multipartquestion} prior to that item, for example
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\multipartquestion
+\item\PTs{6} Answer each of these questions
+\begin{question}
+ \item\PTs{3} Answer this
+ \item\PTs{3} Answer that
+\end{question}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Other relevant commands are \cs{aeb@creditmarkup} and
+\cs{aeb@creditmarkupfmt}; the first one defines a little text field to
+hold the partial-credit data and the second one sets the placement of the
+text field. These can be redefined if the default definitions are not to
+your liking. The markup in red that appears in the left margin shows the
+number of points the student received for that problem, for example
+\texttt{\textcolor{red}{3\,pts}}. The string \texttt{pts} (and its singular
+counterpart, \texttt{pt}) is language dependent, in English it refers to
+``points'' (or ``point''). You can change this string to an abbreviation
+of points (point) using the commands commands \Com{ptsLabel} and
+\Com{ptLabel}. The default definitions are \verb!\ptsLabel{pts}! and
+\verb!\ptLabel{pt}!, respectively.
+
+\newtopic\textbf{\textcolor{red}{Important:}} Adobe Reader 5.0 or
+later is required for this feature.
+
+\subsection{Quizzes with Solutions}
+
+In addition to scoring and marking the quizzes, you can also
+(optionally) provide solutions as well. To enter a solution to a
+multiple choice question, use a \texttt{solution} environment, and
+attach a named destination to the \texttt{answers} environment.
+A partial verbatim listing follows the next example.
+
+%\ifeqforpaper\else\NoPeeking\fi
+
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzTeXl} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+\hfuzz=2pt
+
+\item Who created \TeX?
+\begin{answers}[knuth]{4}%
+\Ans1 Knuth &\Ans0 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Donald Knuth was the creator of \TeX.
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Who originally wrote \LaTeX?
+\begin{answers}[lamport]{4}
+\Ans0 Knuth &\Ans1 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Leslie Lamport was the creator of \LaTeX.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\AllowPeeking
+
+After the quiz is completed and the corrections button is pressed,
+the corrections appear. The correct answer has a green filled
+circle or a green check; this circle is now outlined by a green
+rectangle to indicate that this is a link to the solution. Click on
+the green dot and jump to the solution!
+
+Solutions do not have to appear. Some problems can have solutions,
+while others do not. The ones with the solutions have the green
+boundary to indicate a link to the solution.
+
+Here is a partial listing of the above example.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz*}{qzTeXl} Answer each of the following.
+Passing is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Who created \TeX?
+\begin{answers}[knuth]4
+\Ans1 Knuth &\Ans0 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Donald Knuth was the creator of \TeX.
+\end{solution}
+....
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Notice that in the \texttt{answers} environment, an
+optional parameter \texttt{[knuth]} appears. The value of this
+parameter is a unique name for the solution to the quiz. Notice as well that
+the \texttt{solution} environment follows, and is not nested
+within the \texttt{answers} environment.
+
+
+\subsection{How to Modify the \texttt{quiz} Environment}
+
+There are four ways the appearance of the quizzes can change:
+
+\begingroup
+\def\mylabel#1{\hfil\hyperref[#1]{\large$\bullet$}\ }
+\begin{list}{}
+%{\normalfont\bfseries\arabic{questionno}.\ }%
+{\usecounter{questionno}\setlength{\parsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\makelabel}{\mylabel}
+\settowidth{\labelwidth}{\normalfont\bfseries00.\ }%
+\setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{0pt}}%
+\item[sss:quiztitles] change the titles
+\item[sss:ckappear] change the `check' appearance
+\item[sss:scorefield] change the text field in which the score appears,
+\item[sss:CorrButton] change the appearance of the `Correction' button.
+\end{list}
+\par\endgroup
+
+\noindent This section discusses each of these four in turn.
+
+\subsubsection{The Quiz Titles}\label{sss:quiztitles}
+
+It is possible to redefine the quiz titles and other labels if
+desired.
+
+\redpoint Locally:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\bqlabel{Begin Exam}
+\renewcommand\eqlabel{End Exam}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Globally:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Begin Exam}
+\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{End Exam}
+\makeatother
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{The check appearance}\label{sss:ckappear}
+
+The appearance of the `check' can be chosen using the
+\cs{symbolchoice} macro of the \textsf{exerquiz} package. The
+permissible values for the argument of \cs{symbolchoice} are
+\texttt{check} (the default), \texttt{circle}, \texttt{cross},
+\texttt{diamond}, \texttt{square}, and \texttt{star}.
+
+This quiz was generated by inserting
+\verb+\symbolchoice{diamond}+ before the quiz. The multiple choice field
+is actually a radio button field. The appearance of these radio buttons can
+be modified using the command \cs{everyqRadioButton}.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\symbolchoice{diamond}
+\everyqRadioButton{\textColor{0 0 1}
+ \BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\symbolchoice{diamond}
+\everyqRadioButton{\symbolchoice{diamond}\textColor{0 0 1}\BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}}
+
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzTeX} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Who created \TeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Knuth &\Ans0 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\item Who originally wrote \LaTeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Knuth &\Ans1 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField{qzTeX}\CorrButton{qzTeX}
+
+\noindent If desired, we can return to the defaults:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\symbolchoice{check} % restore the default
+\everyqRadioButton{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\symbolchoice{check} % restore the default
+\everyqRadioButton{}
+
+\redpoint The \cs{symbolchoice} can also be introduced into the flow of the code through
+the \cs{every\-qRadio\-Button}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\everyqRadioButton{\symbolchoice{diamond}\textColor{0 0 1}
+ \BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent After the quiz, we could return to the defaults by
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\everyqRadioButton{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint See the document \texttt{\href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}} for complete
+documentation on how to modify a field using the optional first argument, and
+how to use the ``every'' command.\footnote{eforms manual on Web:
+\url{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}}\xdef\fnEFormi{\thefootnote}
+
+\subsubsection{Change color of Correction Marks}
+
+The colors used to mark the quiz can be changed by redefining the
+commands \cs{check\-Color}, \cs{crossColor} and \cs{correctColor} in
+the \textit{preamble} or before. Below are the
+defaults:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\checkColor{["RGB", 0, .6, 0]}
+\renewcommand\crossColor{color.red}
+\renewcommand\correctColor{["RGB", 0, .6, 0]} % webgreen
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The colors are inserted into the field using JavaScript, so the color definitions
+are in the color space of the JavaScript object model.
+
+
+\subsubsection{The `Correction' Button}\label{sss:CorrButton}
+
+The `Correction' button is defined by the \cs{CorrButton} has two
+parameters.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\CorrButton[mod_appear]{field_name}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The second parameter is the field name that contains the total score for the
+quiz (see the above examples). It also has one optional argument that can be
+used to modify the appearance of the button.
+
+Also defined is the \cs{eqButton} command, which performs the same function as
+\cs{CorrButton}; use of \cs{eqButton} is discouraged in favor of \cs{CorrButton}.
+
+In addition to the optional parameter to modify the appearance of
+\cs{CorrButton}, there is also a ``global'' mechanism for modifying the
+appearance of the button field. These are
+
+\paragraph*{Global Modification:} \cs{everyButtonField} and \cs{everyCorrButton}
+
+\newtopic The first one modifies the appearance of every quiz button field, the second can be used
+to modify all \cs{CorrButton}s.
+
+\redpoint See the document \texttt{\href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}} for complete
+documentation on how to modify a field using the optional first argument, and
+how to use the ``every'' command.${}^{\text{\fnEFormi}}$\def\fnEFormi{\thefootnote}
+
+
+
+% \begin{table}[hbt]
+% \setlength{\extrarowheight}{1mm}
+% \setlength{\tabcolsep}{2mm}
+% \begin{center}
+% \makeatletter
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn1{|l|}{Local} &
+% \multicolumn1{l|}{Global} &
+% \multicolumn1{l|}{Default} &
+% \multicolumn1{l|}{Description}\\
+% \hline
+% \cs{BC} &\cs{eq@BC} & 1 0 0 & border color\\
+% \cs{BG} &\cs{eq@BG} & .7529 .7529 .7529 & face color\\
+% \cs{CA} &\cs{eq@CA} & Correct & button text\\
+% \cs{RC} &\cs{eq@RC} & My Answers! & rollover\\
+% \cs{AC} &\cs{eq@AC} & Please! & pushed text \\
+% \cs{DA} &\cs{eq@DA} & /Helv 10 Tf 0 g & text format\\
+% \cs{BS} &\cs{eq@BS} & /W 1 /S /B & button spec\\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \caption{\protect\cs{CorrButton} Parameters}\label{table:CorrButton}
+% \end{center}
+% \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+% \end{table}
+%
+%
+% The macros listed in the first column of \autoref{table:CorrButton}
+% are permitted in the optional parameter field of
+% \cs{CorrButton}---there is not parameter checking, \TeX\ or
+% Distiller/Reader will find the errors.
+%
+% The meaning of these values is beyond the scope of this manual.
+% Refer to the internet article ``Pdfmarks: Links and Forms'',
+% \cite{article:Story:Pdfmarks}, for details; in particular, see the
+% ``Forms'' article.
+
+\subsubsection{The Score Field}\label{sss:scorefield}
+
+The score field is the text field to which the quiz (and its
+underlying JavaScript) reports the score. This field can be
+constructed using the \cs{ScoreField} macro
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ScoreField[mod_appear]{field_name}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent In the simplest case, \cs{ScoreField} takes one argument, as above,
+the \texttt{field\_name} of the associated quiz. The expansion of \cs{ScoreField}
+produces a \texttt{read-only} text field that is 1.5 inches in
+width with a red border. The initial text that appears in the
+field is the expansion of the macro \cs{eqScore}. The expansion of
+\cs{eqScore} depends on the language option: \cs{eqScore} expands
+to `Score:' by default, to `Punkte:' for the \texttt{german}
+option and to `Score :' for the \texttt{french} option.
+
+The macro \cs{ScoreField} also has an optional parameter that can
+be used to modify the appearance of the text field. Should the
+document author want to change the basic look of the text field produced
+by \cs{ScoreField}, just introduce the changes through this
+optional parameter.
+
+In addition to the optional parameter for modifying the appearance of
+the text field, \cs{Score\-Field}, there is also a ``global'' mechanism for
+modifying the appearance of the button field. These are
+
+\newtopic\textbf{Global Modification:} \cs{everyeqTextField} and \cs{everyScoreField}
+
+\newtopic The first one modifies the appearance of every quiz text field, the second can be used
+to modify all \cs{ScoreField}s.
+
+\redpoint See the document \texttt{\href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}} for complete
+documentation on how to modify a field using the optional first argument, and
+how to use the ``every'' command.${}^{\text{\fnEFormi}}$\def\fnEFormi{\thefootnote}
+
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzTeXc} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Thomas Esser maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans1 te\TeX &\Ans0 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Fabrice Popineau maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans0 te\TeX &\Ans1 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Christian Schenk maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans0 te\TeX &\Ans0 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad%
+\ScoreField[\BC{0 0 1}]{qzTeXc}%
+ \CorrButton[\BC{0 0 1}% blue border color
+ \CA{TeX}% Button text
+ \RC{Users}% rollover text
+ \AC{Group}% pushed text
+ \textFont{TiRo}% text font: Times Roman
+ \textSize{10}% text size: 10 point
+ \textColor{0 0 1}% times roman, 10 pt, blue text
+ \W{1}\S{I}% border width 1, inset button
+ ]{qzTeXc}
+
+\noindent The new part is the customized scoring and correction button. Here
+is a verbatim listing of the \cs{ScoreField} and \cs{CorrButton}
+macros.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ScoreField[\BC{0 0 1}]{qz:TeXc}%
+ \CorrButton[\BC{0 0 1} % blue border color
+ \CA{TeX} % Button text
+ \RC{Users} % rollover text
+ \AC{Group} % pushed text
+ \textFont{TiRo} % text font: Times Roman
+ \textSize{10} % text size: 10 point
+ \textColor{0 0 1} % blue text
+ \W{1}\S{I} % border width 1, inset button
+ ]{qz:TeXc}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} This example---as well as others---appears in
+%\texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst}{webeqtst.tex}}, a
+%test file that accompanies the \cAcroB.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} This example---as well as others---appears in
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}}, a demo file from the
+{\AcroBlog}
+
+
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{titleQuiz}}{\CMD{titleQuiz}}
+ and \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{fancyQuizHeaders}}{\CMD{fancyQuizHeaders}}}\label{titleQuiz}
+
+%\exPDF{title_quiz} The demo file for these features is \texttt{title\_quiz.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=908} The demo file for these features is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=908}{title\_quiz.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{titleQuiz}}{\CMD{titleQuiz}}}
+
+To assign a title to your quiz use \Com{titleQuiz}. This title appears just after
+the `Begin Quiz' button
+
+\fancyQuizHeaders
+\titleQuiz{Two Question MC}
+\begin{quiz}{MyMCQuiz}\label{MyMCQuiz}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Math is fun.
+\begin{answers}*{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+ The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Statistics is fun.
+\begin{answers}*{4}
+\Ans0 True & \Ans1 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+ The answer is false, statistics is interesting but not fun.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\noindent The partial verbatim code for the above quiz follows:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\titleQuiz{Two Question MC}
+\begin{quiz}{MyMCQuiz}\label{MyMCQuiz}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+...
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\restoreDefaultQuizHeaders
+
+\noindent The format of the title is controlled by the command \Com{titleQuizfmt},
+the default definition is \verb!\newcommand\titleQuizfmt{\bfseries}!. The value
+of the \cs{titleQuiz} command can act as an argument for \cs{titleQuizfmt} if you redefine
+\cs{titleQuizfmt} to have an argument. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\titleQuizfmt[1]{\bfseries(#1)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Now, the title will appear in a set of parentheses. The title and formatting are enclosed
+in a \cs{mbox}, so font and style changes are localized to that \cs{mbox}.
+
+\newtopic If a quiz does not have a title, as defined by \cs{titleQuiz}, the title defaults to
+an empty title.
+
+\newtopic The definition of \cs{titleQuiz} is such that the command \cs{makeatletter} is executed
+before the argument for \cs{titleQuiz} is read. This means that the special character
+`\texttt{@}' can be used within the argument of \cs{titleQuiz}. For example, the \texttt{quiz}
+environment maintains a text macro \cs{\@quizCnt} which contains the current quiz
+count number. Thus you can say \verb!\titleQuiz{Quiz \@quizCnt}!, the title of
+the quiz will include a short quiz number as well.
+
+
+\newtopic The \cs{titleQuiz} is used for short quizzes as well as
+with quizzes. It is possible to have different formatting for each
+of these two environments by using the \Com{ifQuizType} command. The
+command takes two arguments:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\ifQuizType{!anglemeta(quiz_code)}{!anglemeta(shortquiz_code)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+For example, we could define \cs{titleQuizfmt} as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\titleQuizfmt{\ifQuizType{\bfseries}{\slshape}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+or with an argument, as mentioned above, you could define \cs{titleQuizfmt} with an argument,
+like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\titleQuizfmt}[1]{%
+ \ifQuizType{\bfseries(#1)}{\slshape[#1]}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{Cross-Referencing}
+
+Quizzes and short-quizzes conform to the cross-referencing system
+of {\LaTeX}. For example, we used the label \verb!\label{MyMCQuiz}! in the last quiz, the one
+on page~\pageref{MyMCQuiz}. The title of the quiz is \nameref{MyMCQuiz}. The code for the past
+two sentences is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+For example, we used the label \verb!\label{MyMCQuiz}! in the
+last quiz, the one on page~\pageref{MyMCQuiz}. The title of the
+quiz is \nameref{MyMCQuiz}.
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent If the quiz does not have a title, as defined by the \cs{titleQuiz} command, a generic label of
+`Quiz' is generated. The default label name is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\eq@defaultQuizLableName{Quiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This definition can be change using \cs{renewcommand}.
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{fancyQuizHeaders}}{\CMD{fancyQuizHeaders}}}\label{fancyQuizHeadersQ}
+
+The \Com{fancyQuizHeaders} command, a companion feature to \Com{titleQuiz}, enhances
+the labeling of the quiz in the solutions section of the document. If
+\cs{fancyQuizHeaders} is executed in the preamble, or prior to a quiz, the solution header has the
+following default format:
+
+\begin{quote}
+\newtopic{\color{blue}Two Question MC: Question 1.} The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\newtopic The above assumes the title of the quiz is the one given in the previous section.
+
+\newtopic When a quiz has no title, the header reverts to
+\textcolor{blue}{Solution to Quiz:} followed by the question number.
+
+\redpoint You can turn off fancy quiz headers by using
+\Com{restoreDefaultQuizHeaders}.
+
+\newtopic You can modify the fancy headers with a combination of setting \Com{setsolnspace}
+and/or redefining the command \Com{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt}. First
+\cs{setsolnspace}: This is a hook into the space immediately
+following the header. To insert a \cs{medskip} after the header, for example, you
+can say \verb!\setsolnspace{\par\medskip\noindent}! a
+\cs{medskip} is created after the solution header and the solution
+above appears as
+
+\begin{quote}
+\newtopic{\color{blue}Two Question MC: Question 1.}\par\medskip\noindent The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\newtopic The definition of \cs{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt} is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\def\eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt{{\protect\color{blue}\protect
+ \textbf{\ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty\ifnum\@eqquestiondepth>0
+ Solution to Quiz:\fi\else
+ \aebTitleQuiz:\protect\
+ \ifnum\@eqquestiondepth=0\else
+ Question\fi
+ \fi\space
+ \ifcase\@eqquestiondepth
+ \ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty Solution to Quiz:\fi\or
+ \arabic{eqquestionnoi}.\or
+ \arabic{eqquestionnoi}(\alph{eqquestionnoii})\or
+ \arabic{eqquestionnoi}(\alph{eqquestionnoii})%
+ (\roman{eqquestionnoiii})%
+ \fi}}%
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Ugly isn't it. We need to set the header in all cases: with or without a title;
+multiple questions within a \texttt{questions} environment, or a single question
+with no \texttt{questions} environment.
+
+\newtopic A simple re-definition might be
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\def\eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt{{\protect\color{blue}\protect
+ \textbf{\ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty
+ \ifnum\@eqquestiondepth>0
+ Solution to Quiz\fi\else
+ \aebTitleQuiz\protect\
+ \ifnum\@eqquestiondepth=0\else\\Question%
+ \fi\fi\space
+ \ifcase\@eqquestiondepth
+ \ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty Solution to Quiz\fi
+ \or\arabic{eqquestionnoi}.\or
+ \arabic{eqquestionnoi}(\alph{eqquestionnoii})\or
+ \arabic{eqquestionnoi}(\alph{eqquestionnoii})%
+ (\roman{eqquestionnoiii})%
+ \fi}}%
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The colons (\texttt{:}) are removed and a \verb!\\! inserted in the fourth
+line; that line now reads, in part, \verb!\else\\Question\fi!, instead of
+\verb!\else Question\fi!.
+
+\newtopic The results of these changes, in combination with the earlier
+change of
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\setsolnspace{\par\medskip\noindent}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent are
+
+\begin{quote}
+\newtopic{\color{blue}Two Question MC\\Question 1.}\par\medskip\noindent The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+\end{quote}
+
+\newtopic Other (minor) changes such as color, style, font can be done in this way.
+
+\newtopic As a reminder, you can use the web package's switch, \Com{ifeqforpaper} to further
+refine these headers. You can have one style of solution headers for paper, and another
+style for the screen.
+
+\subsection{Adding Points to a Quiz}\label{sss:asignPts}
+
+%The discussion of this topic can be found in \Nameref{sss:asignPts}.
+
+%\subsubsection{Assigning Points}\label{sss:asignPts}
+
+The questions on a quiz, especially a quiz meant for credit, may
+not have the same weight. A point scheme, therefore, has been
+created; several additional text fields in support have also been
+defined.
+
+Here is a simple two question example to illustrate:
+
+\begin{quiz*}{mathquiz} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.\hfill\smash{\GradeField[\rectH{30bp}\rectW{30bp}\textSize{0}]\currQuiz}
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+\PTsHook{($\eqPTs^{\text{pts}}$)}
+
+\item\PTs{4} If $\lim_{x\to a} f(x) = f(a)$, then we say that $f$ is\dots
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 differentiable &\Ans1 continuous &\Ans0 integrable
+\end{answers}
+
+\item\PTs{6} Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized as a founder of
+Calculus.\\[1ex]
+\RespBoxTxt{0}{0}{4}{Isaac Newton}{Newton}{Gottfried Leibniz}{Leibniz}%
+\CorrAnsButton{Isaac Newton or Gottfried Leibniz}
+
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\noindent
+Answers: \AnswerField\currQuiz
+
+\medskip\noindent
+Points: \PointsField\currQuiz\ Percent: \PercentField\currQuiz
+
+%\exPDF{quizpts} See the sample file
+%\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#quizpts}{quizpts.tex} for a more
+%elaborate version of this question, as well as the source code.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1054} See source file for the PDF
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1054}{quizpts.pdf}} for a more elaborate
+version of this question, as well as the source code.
+
+
+\begin{questions}
+\item \verb+\PTs#1+: This macro takes one argument, the number of
+points to be assigned to the current problem. Place this command
+immediately after the \cs{item} in the \textsf{questions} environment.
+For example, in the above quiz we had
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\item\PTs{6} Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized
+ as a founder of Calculus.
+\end{Verbatim}
+\item \verb+\PTsHook#1+: This macro, which takes one argument, can
+be used to typeset the points assigned. and is called by
+\cs{PTs}. The argument is what is to be typeset. The value
+assigned the current problem by \cs{PTs} is contained within the
+macro \cs{eqPTs}. In the quiz above, we had
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\PTsHook{($\eqPTs^{\text{pts}}$)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\item There are three other commands that create text fields to
+display results from a quiz with points assigned:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \verb+\PointsField[#1]#2+: The number of points earned for the quiz, the
+ total points are also reported. The parameter \texttt{\#2} is the base name
+ of the quiz.
+ \item \verb+\PercentField[#1]#2+: The percentage score for the
+ quiz. The parameter \texttt{\#1} is the base name of the quiz.
+ \item \verb+\GradeField[#1]#2+: The letter grade of the
+ performance on the quiz. The parameter \texttt{\#2} is the
+ base name of the quiz. The values placed in this field are determined
+ by the macro \cs{eqGradeScale}.
+\end{itemize}
+\item \cs{eqGradeScale}: This macro sets the grade scale of a quiz, the default
+definition is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\eqGradeScale{"A",[90, 100],"B",[80,90],
+ "C",[70,80],"D",[60,70],"F",[0,60]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The ways things are defined now, there can be only one grade scale
+per document. The value of \cs{eqGradeScale} is a matrix with an
+even number of elements. The odd numbered elements are the grades;
+the even number elements are intervals of percentages (percentages
+of the total number of points on the quiz). If the percentage of
+the score falls into a particular range, the corresponding grade
+is assigned.
+
+\item[] Note, obviously, you can redefine this command. The
+letter grades do not actually have to be grades, they can be little
+messages to the student upon completion of the quiz.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\eqGradeScale{%
+ "Excellent Work.",[90, 100],
+ "Solid Effort.",[80,90],
+ "Fair.",[70,80],
+ "Needs improvement, better work expected.",[60,70],
+ "Learning still in progress.",[0,60]
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{questions}
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{negPointsAllowed}}{\CMD{negPointsAllowed}}}\label{negPtsAllowed}
+
+The \texttt{answers} and \texttt{manswers} environments allow for partial credit,
+and even assigning of negative points for wrong answers (see \Nameref{manswersQuiz});
+consequently, it is possible for a student taking a quiz to get a
+negative points for the quiz. By default \textsf{exerquiz} reports a point score of zero
+to \cs{PointsField} if the points are negative.
+
+If you want exerquiz to report the true point score, use the command
+\cs{neg\-Points\-Allowed} in the preamble. This will allow the reporting
+of a negative point total.
+
+%\exPDF{manswers} See the example file for this feature \texttt{manswers.tex}.
+%Compare the results of when the default behavior is used, versus
+%the results when \cs{negPointsAllowed} is used in the preamble.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=903} See the source file for the PDF \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=903}{manswers.pdf}}.
+Compare the results of when the default behavior is used, versus
+the results when \cs{negPointsAllowed} is used in the preamble.
+
+\subsection{Floating a Quiz}\label{floatQuiz}
+
+The quiz structure is to have a `Begin Quiz' button or link at the
+beginning of the quiz and an `End Quiz' button or link at the end.
+In some settings, you might want to place the `Begin Quiz' button on
+another page, with, perhaps, some instructions. For this purpose
+\textsf{exerquiz} defines five commands \Com{DeclareQuiz},
+\Com{floatQuiz}, \Com{startQuizHere}, \Com{endQuizHere} and
+\Com{dockQuiz}.
+
+The \cs{DeclareQuiz} command takes one argument, which is the name
+of the quiz, for example \verb!\DeclareQuiz{myQuiz}!. This command
+takes it argument and creates a text macro \cs{currQuiz}, which
+expands to the quiz name. \cs{currQuiz} can then be used in the
+\texttt{quiz} environment command argument for the quiz name. This
+makes it easy to change the names without having to search through
+and make all changes.
+
+The command \cs{floatQuiz} declares the current quiz, as set by the
+\cs{DeclareQuiz} command, is floating, which means the `Begin Quiz' and
+`End Quiz' link-text or buttons are separated from their usual placement
+and are allowed to ``float.'' The third command \cs{startQuizHere}
+inserts the `Begin Quiz' link text or form button, while the
+\cs{endQuizHere} command inserts the `End Quiz' link or form button.
+
+\newtopic For example,
+
+\DeclareQuiz{myQuiz}
+\useBeginQuizButton[\CA{Start}\RC{the}\AC{Quiz}\BC{}\W0]
+\useEndQuizButton[\CA{End}\RC{the}\AC{Quiz}\BC{}\W0]
+\floatQuiz
+
+\begin{flushleft}
+\fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{\begin{minipage}{.67\linewidth}
+Solve each of the following problems. To begin the quiz,
+click on the \startQuizHere\space button.
+\end{minipage}}
+\end{flushleft}
+
+\begin{quiz}{\currQuiz}
+Answer these questions truthfully.
+\begin{questions}
+ \item Do you understanding the concept of \cs{floatQuiz}?
+ \begin{answers}{4}
+ \Ans1 Yes & \Ans0 No
+ \end{answers}
+ \item Do you understanding the concept of \cs{dockQuiz}?
+ \begin{answers}*{4}
+ \Ans0 Yes & \Ans1 No
+ \begin{solution}
+ You can't understand it until I explain it!
+ \end{solution}
+ \end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\begin{flushleft}
+\fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{\begin{minipage}{.67\linewidth}
+After you have finished the quiz, click on the
+\endQuizHere\space button. Click the\ \smash[b]{\CorrButton[\CA{Correct}\RC{the}\AC{Quiz}\S{S}\BC{}\W0]\currQuiz}\ button
+if you
+wish and your quiz will be marked. Click on the choice with
+the green border to jump to the solution.
+\end{minipage}}
+\end{flushleft}
+\dockQuiz
+
+\newtopic To return to the default behavior of the quiz environment
+place \cs{dockQuiz} following the quiz. Quizzes that come
+after the \cs{dockQuiz} will then have the standard quiz format.
+
+%\exPDF{floatquiz} See the example file \texttt{floatquiz.tex} for the {\LaTeX} code of the above example.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=897} See the source file for the PDF
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=897}{floatquiz.pdf}} for the {\LaTeX} code
+of the above example.
+
+
+\section{Objective Style Questions}\label{s:oQ}
+
+Beginning with version~2.0 of \textsf{exerquiz}, objective style
+questions can be posed. Single questions can be posed in the
+\texttt{\hyperref[ss:oquestion]{oQuestion}} environment,
+multiple questions can be placed in either the \texttt{shortquiz}
+or the \texttt{quiz} environments. This section discusses this
+type of question and all of its supporting commands.
+
+
+\subsection{Math and Text Questions}
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} distinguishes between two types of open ended or objective
+questions:
+\begin{questions}
+\item A mathematical question that requires a mathematical expression
+as the answer.
+\item A question that requires a text answer.
+\end{questions}
+
+\redpoint The demo file \texttt{jquiztst.tex} is an important
+source of examples and instruction for the mathematical type
+question; additionally, the file \texttt{jtxttst.tex} has many
+examples for the text type question.
+
+
+\subsubsection{The Mathematical Question}
+
+At this stage in the development of \textsf{exerquiz}, a
+(mathematical) question can be posed that requires an answer that
+is a function of one or more declared variables $x$, $y$, $z$, etc.
+Thus, when the declared variables $x$, $y$, $z$ are given a value,
+the answer is reduced to a number.
+%\begin{questions}
+%\item A question that has a numerical value.
+%\item A question that has a symbolic answer in one variable, $x$.
+%The symbolic answer must reduce, however, to a numerical value
+%when $x$ is given a numerical value.
+%\end{questions}
+%Thus, only questions whose answers can be reduced to numerical
+%values can be posed.
+
+For example, the answer to the question ``Differentiate $\frac
+d{dx} \sin^2(x)$'', is a function in one variable $x$, it can be
+evaluated numerically and can, therefore, be posed:
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{ex1}
+\redpoint Differentiate $\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =
+$\space\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\smallskip
+See \Nameref{ss:respbox} for details.
+
+In contrast, consider the question: ``Name the probability
+distribution popularly referred to as the `bell-shaped curve' ''.
+The answer to this question cannot be reduced to a numerical
+value. This question can be posed as an \hyperref[sss:oTxtQ]{text
+objective question}, or, it does lend itself to a multiple choice
+question, however.
+
+\subsubsection{The Text Question}\label{sss:oTxtQ}
+
+You can also pose questions that require a text answer:
+
+\redpoint\begin{oQuestion}{exTxt2}
+Name the probability
+distribution popularly referred to as the ``bell-shaped curve''.\\
+\RespBoxTxt{0}{0}{4}{Normal}{Normal Distribution}{Gaussian}{Gaussian Distribution}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+See \Nameref{ss:respboxtxt} for details.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{oQuestion} Environment}\label{ss:oquestion}
+
+The \texttt{oQuestion} environment is a very simple environment
+for posing a \textit{single} question and will be used in this
+section to discuss in detail the macros for posing mathematical
+and text open questions.
+
+The syntax for the \texttt{oQuestion} environment is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{oQuestion}{!ameta(field_name)}
+ !ameta(A math or text open ended question.)
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The environment takes one required argument, a unique name for the question.
+This name, \texttt{field\_name}, is used by other supporting
+macros.
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{RespBoxMath}}
+{\textbackslash RespBoxMath}: The Math Question}\label{ss:respbox}
+
+%\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{RespBox},
+%\protect\cs{Resp\-BoxNT}}{\textbackslash RespBox, \textbackslash
+%RespBoxNT}}
+
+The \cs{RespBoxMath} command is used for posing an objective
+question. This command must appear in the \texttt{oQuestion},
+\texttt{short\-quiz} or \texttt{quiz} environments. In this
+section we discuss only the \texttt{oQuestion} environment.
+
+The following is a \hypertarget{minExample}{minimal example}.
+Additional enhancements will be discussed in subsequent sections.
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine1}
+\redpoint Differentiate $\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{[0,1]}$
+\end{oQuestion}
+\par\medskip\noindent
+The code for the above example is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine1}
+\redpoint Differentiate $\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{[0,1]}$
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The \cs{RespBoxMath} need not appear in math mode. The definition
+of the \cs{redpoint} command, a command written for this document follows.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\redpoint{\par\removelastskip\vskip\medskipamount
+ \noindent\makebox[\parindent][l]{\large
+ \color{red}$\blacktriangleright$}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic You can also pose multivariate questions as well, for example
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{multivariate}
+\redpoint $\dfrac{\partial}{\partial y} {4 x^2 y^3 }
+ = \RespBoxMath{12*x^2*y^2}(xy){4}{.0001}{[0,1]x[0,1]}$
+\end{oQuestion}
+\par\medskip\noindent
+The code for the above example is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{multivariate}
+\redpoint $\dfrac{\partial}{\partial y} {4 x^2 y^3 }
+ = \RespBoxMath{12*x^2*y^2}(xy){4}{.0001}{[0,1]x[0,1]}$
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent See the file \texttt{multivar.tex} for more examples
+quizzes involving multivariate problems.
+
+The algorithm used for determining the correctness of the answer
+entered by the user is very simple: The user's answer and the
+correct answer are evaluated at randomly selected points in an
+interval, then compared. If any of the comparisons differ by more
+than a pre-selected amount, an $\epsilon$ value, if you will, the
+user's answer is declared incorrect; otherwise, it is considered
+correct.\footnote{The idea for evaluating user input in this way
+comes from Drs.\ Wlodzimierz Bryc and Stephan Pelikan of The
+University of Cincinnati.}
+
+\newtopic The command \cs{RespBoxMath} takes ten parameters,
+five optional and five required:%\hypertarget{respboxargs}{}
+\begin{dCmd}{.67\linewidth}
+\RespBoxMath[#1]#2(#3)[#4]#5#6#7#8[#9]*#10
+\end{dCmd}
+\paragraph*{Parameters:}\label{paraRespBox}
+\begin{description}
+\item[\ttfamily\#1 :] Optional parameter used to modify the appearance of the
+ text field. See the section entitled \nameref{sss:CorrButton} for examples, and \textsf{exerquiz.dtx}
+ for a listing of all controlling macros.
+\item[\ttfamily\#2 :] The correct answer to the question.
+ This must be a numerical value, or a function of one or more variable(s).
+
+\item[\ttfamily\hypertarget{paraRespBoxThree}{\#3} :] An optional parameter, \textit{delimited by
+parentheses}, that defines the independent variable; \texttt{x},
+is the default value. Note that this parameter is set off by
+parentheses. For a multivariate question, just list the variables
+in juxtaposition, \texttt{(xyz)}.
+
+Beginning with version 5.5 of \textsf{exerquiz}, an alternate
+method is to delimit with commas \texttt{(x,y,n)} and include the
+type of the variables \texttt{(r:x,r:y,i:n)}, where \texttt{"r"}
+means a real variable and \texttt{"i"} means an integer variable.
+When a type is not specified explicitly, \texttt{"r"} is assumed.
+The variables must be either of the old style (no commas, no
+typing) or the new style. Do not mix the styles.
+
+See the \hyperlink{exofT}{example} in \Nameref{enhancements}
+of the section below and see the demo file \texttt{integer\_test.tex} to
+demonstrate the new method for specifying variables, found in the
+\texttt{dljslib\_examples} folder.
+
+\textbf{Multi-letter variables.} Beginning with v8.0 (2017/08/08) support for
+multi-letter variables and appearance replacement is added. Within the
+\texttt{\#3}, use the following notation:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+(x\rpl{alpha}{y}z)
+\end{Verbatim}
+This declares three variables, \texttt{x}, \texttt{alpha}, and \texttt{z}.
+What in fact is taking place is that \texttt{alpha} is replaced by \texttt{y}
+and processing continues from there.
+
+\textbf{Alternate appearances.} Additionally, there is now a scheme for
+replacing the variables with alternate appearances.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+(x\rpl{alpha->\\u03B1}{y}z)
+\end{Verbatim}
+The arrow notation (\texttt{->}) tells \pkg{exerquiz} to replace
+\texttt{alpha} with the unicode character \verb~\u03B1~ (note the double
+backslash above), which is the Greek letter alpha ($\alpha$). You can
+separate the variables with commas and use the type specification as well.
+But as noted above, use either the old style (no commas) or the new style
+(with commas), \emph{never mix the two together in one argument.}
+
+Below is a simple example of multi-letter variables with appearance replacement. Enter
+\texttt{alpha} for $\alpha$ and \texttt{theta} for $\theta$.
+\begin{oQuestion}{oQ2}
+\begin{equation*}
+ \dfrac{\partial}{\partial\theta}\alpha \sin(\theta)=
+ \RespBoxMath[\rectW{1.5in}]{alpha cos(theta)}(\rpl{alpha->\\u03B1}{x}\rpl{theta->\\u03B8}{y})
+ {3}{0.0001}{[0,3.14]x[0,3.14]}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{oQuestion}
+The verbatim listing for this question follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\begin{oQuestion}{oQ2}
+\begin{equation*}
+ \dfrac{\partial}{\partial\theta}\alpha \sin(\theta)=
+ \RespBoxMath[\rectW{1.5in}]
+ {alpha cos(theta)}
+ (\rpl{alpha->\\u03B1}{x}\rpl{theta->\\u03B8}{y})
+ {3}{0.0001}{[0,3.14]*2}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1330} See the file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1330}{ml-vars.pdf}} for a demonstration of
+multi-letter variables and alternate appearances.
+
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#4 :] Optional, a named destination to the solution to the
+ question. There are two forms: the \texttt{[mydest]} an explicit
+ destination for the solution to the problem, or a `\texttt*', in which
+ case, the name is \texttt{[\string\curr@quiz.\string\thequestionno]} is
+ automatically assigned.
+
+If this parameter appears, a solution must follow the
+question, enclosed in a \texttt{solution} environment.
+
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#5 :] The number of samples points to be used, usually 3 or 4 is
+sufficient.
+\item[\ttfamily\#6 :] Precision required, a \emph{non-negative}
+ ``$\epsilon$'' value, if you will. If the precision is set to zero,
+ \texttt{reldiffCompare} is used as the default compare, and the precision
+ is set to a small positive value, \text{1E-14}, by default. The small
+ value is may reset with \cs{defaultRDPrecision}. The default definition,
+ \verb!\defaultRDPrecision{1E-14}!.
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#7 :] Parameters \#7 and \#8 are used to define the interval
+ from which to draw the sample points. There are two forms: (1) \#7 is the
+ left-hand endpoint of the interval and \#8 is the right-hand endpoint
+ (the use of \#7 and \#8 in this form is deprecated); (2) the interval is
+ defined by standard interval notation, \texttt{[a,b]}. For a multivariate
+ question---one where parameter \#2 lists more than one variable---separate
+ the intervals for each variable by a `\texttt{x}',
+ \texttt{[0,2]x[1,2]x[3,4]}.
+
+
+\textbf{Interval repetition.} Beginning with v8.0 (2017/08/08),
+\pkg{exerquiz} allows \emph{interval repetition}. It is not unusual that the
+cartesian product of the same interval is needed, eg,
+\texttt{[0,1]x[0,1]x[0,1]}; rather than typing those repetitive interval
+specifications, you can simple use the notation \texttt{[0,1]*3}. The general
+syntax for an interval is now \texttt{\ameta{interval}*\ameta{num}}; the
+`\texttt{*\ameta{num}}' portion is optional, \ameta{num} is an positive
+integer. Note that `\texttt{*\ameta{num}}' follows the interval
+specification, this is \emph{vitally important} for the correct parsing of
+the expression.
+
+The notation may be mixed in with additional interval
+ specifications; thus, for example, `\texttt{[0,1]*3x[1,2]x[2,3]*2}' expands to
+ `\texttt{[0,1]x[0,1]x[0,1]x[1,2]\penalty0x\penalty0[2,3]x[2,3]}'.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1330} See the file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1330}{ml-vars.pdf}} for a demonstration of
+interval repetition.
+
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#8 :] (1) \#8 is the right-hand endpoint of the interval (the
+ use of this parameter is deprecated); (2) in the second case, \#8 is not
+ used.
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#9 :]\label{paraRespBoxNine} This optional parameter is the name of a customized
+comparison function.
+
+Beginning with version 5.5 of \textsf{exerquiz}, this argument can also be
+a JavaScript object with at most two properties: \texttt{priorParse} and
+\texttt{comp}. \texttt{priorParse} is used to insert additional JavaScript
+into \texttt{ProcResp} prior to processing the user's answer; this allows
+additional ``filtering'' of the user's response. The value of
+\texttt{priorParse} can either be a single function, or an array of
+functions. These functions take \texttt{UserAns} as its argument and
+return either \texttt{null}, if \texttt{UserAns} is not acceptable, or
+\texttt{true}, if it is ok for processing. The value of \texttt{comp} is
+the name of the function to be used to compare answers.
+
+See the demo file \texttt{integer\_tst.tex} for examples of usage.
+
+%There is a built-in filter function, \texttt{requireForm}, that may be quite useful
+%for filtering out responses that that are not of a specified form. See
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#10:] (Only detected if following an asterisk, `\texttt*')
+The name of a JavaScript function that is to be used to process the user input.
+\end{description}
+
+\redpoint For the above example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent no optional parameter is specified. The correct answer written in
+valid JavaScript is given by \verb+2*sin(x)*cos(x)+; evaluation of the
+user's answer is done by randomly selecting 4 points from the
+interval $[\,0,1\,]$; if the evaluation at any of the 4 points
+differs from the evaluation of the correct answer at the same
+point by more than $\epsilon=0.0001$, the user's answer is
+considered wrong.
+
+Once you choose the question to ask, you must then select the
+values of the parameters for \cs{RespBoxMath}.
+
+\noindent\redpoint \textbf{Some Comments}:
+\begin{questions}
+\item The correct answer can be written either with valid JavaScript,
+or in the same syntax a user would enter the answer with. The
+functions and operators are pretty much as expected. See the
+demo file \textsf{jquiztst.tex} for some discussion how authors
+and users should enter their answers.
+
+\item The interval from which the sample points are taken
+needs to be chosen with care. The interval must, obviously, be a
+subset of the domain of the answer function. Choose an interval
+away from any singularities the answer may have.
+
+%\item The JavaScript of Acrobat 5.0 does have exception
+%handling, but this has not been incorporated into the code yet.
+%Taking advantage of this new capability will be my next project.
+%Exception handling will give the code protection against user's
+%entering spurious answers. For example, based on the correct
+%answer, the author chooses the interval $[\,0,1\,]$, but the user
+%enters a function whose domain does not contain the interval, such
+%as \verb=(x-1)^(1/2)=.
+\end{questions}
+
+%\exPDF{jquiztst} See the file \href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#jquiztst}
+%{jquiztst.pdf} for various examples of the math questions.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=810} See the PDF file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=810}{jquiztst.pdf}} for various examples of
+the math questions.
+
+\newtopic\indent
+By using the optional first parameter, you can modify the appearance
+of the field ``locally.'' There is also a ``global'' mechanism as well:
+
+\newtopic\textbf{Global Modification:} \cs{everyeqTextField}, \cs{everyRespBoxMath}
+
+\newtopic The first one modifies the appearance of every quiz text field,
+and the second can be used to modify all fields created using
+\cs{RespBoxMath}.
+
+\redpoint See the document \href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf} for complete
+documentation on how to modify a field using the optional first
+argument, and how to use the ``every'' command.\footnote{eforms manual on Web: \url{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}}
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{RespBoxTxt}}%
+ {\textbackslash RespBoxTxt}: The Text Question}\label{ss:respboxtxt}
+
+You can also pose a question that takes a simple text response. The
+basic command for posing this type of question is
+\cs{RespBoxTxt}. Consider the example given
+earlier:
+\begin{oQuestion}{exTxt1}
+\redpoint Name the probability
+distribution popularly referred to as the ``bell-shaped curve''.\\
+\mbox{\strut\RespBoxTxt{0}{0}{4}{Normal}{Normal Distribution}%
+{Gaussian}{Gaussian Distribution}}
+%\raisebox{-3bp}{\RespBoxTxt{0}{0}{4}{Normal}{Normal Distribution}%
+%{Gaussian}{Gaussian Distribution}}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+The underlying JavaScript compares the user's response against
+acceptable alternatives, as supplied by the author of the
+question. If there is a match, the response is deemed correct.
+
+The code for this example is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{exTxt1}
+\redpoint Name the probability distribution popularly
+referred to as the ``bell-shaped curve''.\\
+\RespBoxTxt{0}{0}{4}{Normal}{Normal Distribution}%
+{Gaussian}{Gaussian Distribution}
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The command \cs{RespBoxTxt} takes five or more parameters.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\RespBoxTxt[#1]#2#3[#4]#5!ameta(list of alternatives)
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent\textbf{\hypertarget{paraRespBoxTxt}{Parameters:}}
+\begin{description}
+\item[\ttfamily\#1 :] Optional parameter used to modify the appearance of the
+ text field. See the section entitled \nameref{sss:CorrButton},
+ page~\pageref*{sss:CorrButton} for examples, and
+ \textsf{exerquiz.dtx} for a listing of all controlling macros.
+\item[\ttfamily\#2 :] This required parameter is a number that indicates
+the filtering method to be used. Permissible values of this parameter are
+\begin{description}
+ \item[\ttfamily -1: ] (The default) The author's and user's answers are not filtered
+ in any way. (Spaces, case, and punctuation are preserved.)
+ \item[\ttfamily 0: ] The author's and user's answers are converted to
+ lower case, any white space and non-word characters are removed.
+ \item[\ttfamily 1: ] The author's and user's answers are converted to
+ lower case, any white space is removed.
+ \item[\ttfamily 2: ] The author's and user's answers are stripped of any
+ white space.
+\end{description}
+See the JavaScript function \texttt{eqFilter} in \texttt{exerquiz.dtx} for the
+program code details. Additional filtering options may be added.
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#3 :] This parameter a number that indicates the compare
+method to be used. Permissible values of this parameter are
+\begin{description}
+ \item[\ttfamily 0: ] (The default) The author's and user's answers are
+ compared for an exact match. (These answers are filtered before they are
+ compared.)
+ \item[\ttfamily 1: ] The user's response is searched in an attempt to
+ get a substring match with the author's alternatives. Additional comparison
+ methods may be added.
+\end{description}
+See the JavaScript function \texttt{compareTxt} in \texttt{exerquiz.dtx} for the
+program code details.
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#4 :] Optional, a named destination to the solution
+to the question. If this parameter appears, then a solution must
+follow the question, enclosed in a \texttt{solution} environment. If
+the fourth parameter is a `\texttt*', then an automatic naming scheme
+is used instead.
+\item[\ttfamily\#5 :] This required parameter is the number of alternative
+answers that are acceptable. The alternative answers are listed
+immediately after this parameter. (The example above specified
+that 4 alternatives follow.)
+\end{description}
+
+%\exPDF{jtxttst} See the file \href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#jtxttst}
+%{jtxttst.pdf} for examples of the differences between various combinations
+%of filtering rules and comparison methods.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=813} See the PDF file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=813}{jtxttst.pdf}} for examples of the
+differences between various combinations of filtering rules and comparison
+methods.
+
+
+\newtopic By using the optional first parameter, you can modify the appearance
+of the field ``locally''. There is also a ``global'' mechanism as well:
+
+\newtopic\textbf{Global Modification:} \cs{everyeqTextField} and \cs{everyRespBoxTxt}
+
+\newtopic The first mechanism modifies the appearance of every quiz text
+field, the second can be used to modify all fields created using
+\cs{RespBoxTxt}.
+
+\redpoint See the document \href{eformman.pdf}{eFormMan.pdf} on
+\textit{\href{eformman.pdf}{eForm Support}} for complete
+documentation on how to modify a field using the optional first
+argument, and how to use the ``every'' command.\footnote{eforms manual on Web: \url{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}}
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{RespBoxTxtPC}}%
+ {\textbackslash RespBoxTxtPC}: The Text Question with Partial Credit}\label{ss:respboxtxtpc}
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} can now create text fill-in questions that awards
+credit each time one of the key words are found in the student's input string.
+
+\newtopic The command \cs{RespBoxTxtPC} is the one that creates a text fill-in question. Its
+syntax is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small,commandchars=!()]
+\RespBoxTxtPC[#1]#2[#3]#4[!meta(num1)]{!meta(word1)}...[!meta(num_n)]{!meta(word_n)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The new command \cs{RespBoxTxtPC} behaves differently than \cs{RespBoxTxt}.
+JavaScript performs a regular expression search for each word listed (the word,
+can be a regular expression), if the word is found (the search is successful), the total credit
+for this problem is incremented by the amount associated with the word.
+
+\medskip\noindent\textbf{\hypertarget{paraRespBoxTxtPC}{Parameters:}}
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item[\ttfamily\#1:]Optional parameter used to modify the appearance of the
+ text field.
+\item[\ttfamily\#2:]This required parameter is a number indicating
+the filtering method to be used. Permissible values of this parameter are
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item[\ttfamily-1:] (The default) The author's and user's answers are not filtered
+ in any way. (Spaces, case, and punctuation are preserved.)
+ \item[\ttfamily0:] The author's and user's answers are converted to
+ lower case, any white space and non-word characters are removed.
+ \item[\ttfamily1:] The author's and user's answers are converted to
+ lower case, any white space is removed.
+ \item[\ttfamily2:] The author's and user's answers are stripped of
+ white space.
+ \item[\ttfamily 3:] Same as -1, but a case insensitive search is performed.
+ \emph{This is the recommended value for this function.}
+\end{enumerate}
+See the JavaScript function \texttt{eqFilter} in \texttt{exerquiz.dtx} for
+program code details. Additional filtering options may be added.
+
+\textbf{Recommendation:} For \cs{RespBoxTxtPC}, use either~-1
+(case sensitive search) or~3 (case insensitive search).
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#3:] Optional, a named destination to the
+solution to the question. If this parameter appears, then a
+solution must follow the question, enclosed in a \texttt{solution}
+environment. If the third parameter is a `\texttt*', then an automatic
+naming scheme is used instead.
+\item[\ttfamily\#4:] This required parameter is the
+number of alternative answers that are acceptable. The alternative
+answers are listed immediately after this parameter.
+\item[]The parameters that follow \texttt{\#4} are of the form
+\texttt{[\meta{num}]\darg{\meta{word}}}. The \texttt{[\meta{num}]} is the amount of credit
+the user gets if his answer contains \meta{word}. Actually,
+\texttt{\meta{word}} can be a regular expression so that a more sophisticated
+search criteria can be set up. This is illustrated in the examples above,
+and explained below.
+
+A \cs{RespBoxTxtPC} question is deemed correct (and marked with a green rectangle,
+in the case of a quiz) if at least one of the words is found.
+
+If a word does not have a partial credit \texttt{[\meta{num}]} before it, that word has a partial
+credit of zero, and may as well not be included in the list of words.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+%\exPDF{jtxttst_pc} The demo file for this section is \texttt{jtxttst\_pc.tex}.
+%The file contains extensive examples, and discusses techniques of searching
+%using regular expressions.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=296} The demo file for this section is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=296}{jtxttst\_pc.pdf}}. The file contains
+extensive examples, and discusses techniques of searching using regular
+expressions.
+
+
+
+\subsection{Some Enhancements}\label{enhancements}
+
+There are several enhancements to the math (using \cs{RespBoxMath})
+and text (using \cs{Resp\-Box\-Txt}) open-ended question beyond the
+minimal examples given earlier. These enhancements can be used
+within the \texttt{oQuestion}, the \texttt{shortquiz}, and the
+\texttt{quiz} environments.
+
+\subsubsection{Including an Answer Key with \texorpdfstring
+{\protect\cs{CorrAnsButton}}{\textbackslash CorrAnsButton}}
+
+The correct solution can be included in the question as well; just include
+the command \cs{Corr\-Ans\-Button}. This command takes one parameter, the correct
+answer that will be viewed when the user clicks on the button.
+
+The example below also illustrates the (optional) third parameter of
+\cs{RespBoxMath}. Here we pose the question in the variable $t$ rather
+than the default variable of $x$.
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine2}
+\redpoint Differentiate\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dt} \sin^2(t) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}(t){4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine2}\\[1ex]
+\redpoint Differentiate $\dfrac d{dt} \sin^2(t) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}(t){4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp
+\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The \cs{CorrAnsButton} takes one parameter, the correct answer.
+This answer is (usually) the same as the one given as the second
+argument (the optional argument is the first) in the \cs{RespBoxMath}
+command.
+
+\redpoint The \cs{CorrAnsButton} also controls access to the (optional) solution, see
+the next section.
+
+\subsubsection{Including a Solution}\label{inclsoln}
+
+In addition to a correct answer, you can also include a solution
+to the question. Insert the optional fourth parameter---fourth for both
+\cs{RespBoxMath} and \cs{RespBoxTxt}---into the parameter list giving the name of
+the destination to the solution. Follow the question by a \texttt{solution}
+environment containing the solution.
+
+The user \texttt{Shift-Click}s on the \cs{CorrAnsButton} button to jump
+to the solution.
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine3}
+\redpoint Differentiate\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dt} \sin^2(t) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}(t)[sine3]{4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}
+\begin{solution}
+\[
+ \frac d{dx}\sin^2(x) = 2\sin(x)\cos(x) = \sin(2x)
+\]
+\end{solution}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine3}\\[1ex]
+\redpoint Differentiate $\dfrac d{dt} \sin^2(t) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}(t)[sine3]{4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp
+\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}
+\begin{solution}
+\[
+ \frac d{dx}\sin^2(x) = 2\sin(x)\cos(x) = \sin(2x)
+\]
+\end{solution}
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint The \cs{CorrAnsButton} works the same way for the \texttt{shortquiz} and
+the \texttt{quiz} environments.
+
+\newtopic Actually, \cs{CorrAnsButton} has an optional argument. The full syntax is
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{CorrAnsButton\darg{\meta{display\_answer}}*\darg{\meta{JS\_function}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\CorrAnsButton{!meta(display_answer)}*{!meta(JS_function)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic When the \texttt* is detected following the \meta{display\_answer}, the \meta{JS\_function}
+is used to evaluate \meta{display\_answer}, before displaying it. There is
+one built-in function called \texttt{EvalCorrAnsButton}, the definition of
+which is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+function EvalCorrAnsButton(fieldname,theanswer)
+{
+ theanswer = eval(theanswer);
+ DisplayAnswer(fieldname,theanswer);
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Other JavaScript functions may be defined using the \texttt{insDLJS} environment, then
+passed to \cs{CorrAnsButton} with the optional argument.
+
+An example of this optional parameter is
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{add1}
+\redpoint Perform the indicated operation, and enter
+result into the box.\\[1ex]
+$ \text{9} + \text{8} =$
+\RespBoxMath{9 + 8}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{9 + 8}*{EvalCorrAnsButton}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{add1}
+\redpoint Perform the indicated operation, and enter
+result into the box.\\[1ex]
+$ 9 + 8 = $
+\RespBoxMath{9 + 8}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}\kern1bp
+ \CorrAnsButton{9 + 8}*{EvalCorrAnsButton}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\subsubsection{Including a Tally Box}
+
+The macro \cs{sqTallyBox} is used to keep a running total of the
+number of wrong answers a user has entered into the response box.
+
+For example,
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine4}
+\redpoint \hypertarget{exofT}{Differentiate}\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine4}
+\redpoint Differentiate\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp
+\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint The tally box can be used within the \texttt{oQuestion}
+and \texttt{shortquiz} environments; in the \texttt{quiz}
+environment, no tally box is used.
+
+\subsubsection{Clearing the Fields}
+
+For the \texttt{oQuestion} and the \texttt{shortquiz}
+environments, you can clear the response box fields by placing
+insert \cs{sqClearButton}.
+
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine5}
+\redpoint Differentiate\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox\kern1bp\sqClearButton
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine5}
+\redpoint Differentiate\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}%
+\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox\kern1bp\sqClearButton
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Notice that I've inserted a \cs{kern1bp} to separate the
+two fields \cs{sqTallyBox} and \cs{sq\-Clear\-Button}. This is to keep
+their borders from overlapping.
+
+\subsection{More on Math Fill-in Questions}\label{s:moremath}
+
+This section covers rules for author and user input into a math fill-in question.
+
+\subsubsection{Comments on Authoring}\label{s:mathauthoring}
+
+When authoring a math fill-in, that is, when using \cs{RespBoxMath} to
+construct a question, several things must be kept in mind.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The \hyperref[paraRespBox]{second parameter} of \cs{RespBoxMath},
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\RespBoxMath[#1]#2(#3)[#4]#5#6#7#8[#9]*#10
+\end{Verbatim}
+ is the correct answer parameter. You need not compute the
+ correct answer, you can let the JavaScript of exerquiz do that.
+ For example, if the answer is $\sqrt{2}$ you can enter
+ \texttt{sqrt(2)}. All the rules of entering user input outlined
+ in the next section on
+ \begin{NoHyper}`\nameref{ss:userinput}'\end{NoHyper} holds for
+ this second parameter as well.
+
+ \item[] If you choose to restrict user input in some way, perhaps using the \texttt{limitArith}
+ option of \textsf{dljslib}, these limitations only apply to the user input, not to the author's
+ input in parameter \texttt{\#2}. See \Nameref{limitArith} for more information on how to limit
+ arithmetic operations.
+
+ \item The question must posed so as to make it clear to the student what is expected
+ by way of input into the text field, an expression, an equation, and so on.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsubsection{Comments on User Input}\label{ss:userinput}
+
+When responding to a Math Fill-in question, the student responds by typing
+in an answer. The following notation is expected by \textsf{exerquiz}.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Use \texttt{*} to indicate multiplication: Type \texttt{4*x} for $4x$.
+
+\item[] If the \texttt{ImplMulti} option of the \textsf{dljslib} package is taken, then the
+ student need only type in \texttt{4x} for $4x$. Exerquiz attempts to
+ insert the multiplication symbol \texttt{*} by parsing the user input.
+ For information on, see the section on \Nameref{ImplMulti}.
+
+\item Use \verb|^| to indicate powers: Type \verb|4*x^3| for
+$4x^3$; \verb|12*x^-6| for $12x^{-6}$. Again, if the \texttt{ImplMulti} option is taken,
+entering \verb|12x^-6| is sufficient.
+
+\item Use parentheses to delimit the argument of a function; that is, type
+\texttt{sin(x)}, rather than \texttt{sin~x}.
+
+\item Use parentheses to define the \textit{scope} of an operation: Type \verb|4*x*(x^2+1)^3| for $4x(x^2+1)^3$;
+ \verb|4^(2*x+1)| for $4^{2x+1}$; \verb|(sin(x))^2| for $(\sin(x))^2$. \textit{Do not} type an expression like
+ \verb|sin^2(x)| for $\sin^2(x)$, type \verb|(sin(x))^2| instead.
+
+\item[] If the \texttt{ImplMulti} option of the \textsf{dljslib} package is taken,
+ the use of \texttt{*} is unnecessary, but also the simplified notation for powers
+ of functions is supported, now you can type \verb|sin^2(x)| for $\sin^2(x)$.
+
+\item Brackets \texttt{[ ]} or braces \texttt{\{ \}} can be used
+to delimit mathematical expressions.
+
+\item Functions that are recognized:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Trig: \texttt{sin}, \texttt{cos}, \texttt{tan}, \texttt{cot}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{csc}.
+ \item Inverse Trig: \texttt{arcsin} (or \texttt{asin}) , \texttt{arccos} (or \texttt{acos}),
+ \texttt{arctan} (or \texttt{atan}).
+ \item Logarithms: \texttt{ln} for natural logs, and \texttt{log} for common logs.
+ For example, \texttt{ln(x)} or \texttt{log(x)}.
+ \item Exponential: The natural exponential function, $e^x$,
+ can be entered as \texttt{exp(x)} or as \verb|e^x|.
+ \item The absolute function, \texttt{abs($\cdot$)} can also be written
+ in the usual way \texttt{|$\cdot$|}; thus, you can type either
+ \texttt{abs(x)} or \texttt{|x|}.
+ \item Misc.: \texttt{sqrt}, usage \texttt{sqrt(x)} for $\sqrt{x}$ (or, use
+ exponential notation: \verb|x^(1/2)|).
+ \item[] When the \texttt{combinatorics} option of \textsf{dljslib} is taken, the binomial coefficient function
+ \texttt{C(n,r)}, the permutation function \texttt{P(n,r)}, and the factorial function
+ \texttt{fact}, are defined. See \Nameref{combinatorics} for additional details.
+\end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+A variation of these listings should appear as instructions to the student on how to enter
+math fill-in questions.
+
+\newtopic When a user enters a response, some attempt is made to
+determine whether the response is a valid mathematical expression.
+For example, if \texttt{san(x)} is entered, the function `\texttt{san}' will
+not be recognized as a valid mathematical function; an error
+message is generated, and the user is not penalized for a possible
+typing error. The JavaScript routines will also check for
+unbalanced parentheses; thus, \verb|((x^4+1) + sin(x)^2| will be
+flagged as a syntax error.
+
+\Important The student must use the variables declared for the
+problem when entering mathematical expressions. If the problem
+statement involves the variable $x$, then \texttt{x} must be used;
+if the problem statement uses $t$, then \texttt{t} must be used.
+To enter an expression using $t$ when an expression with variable $x$ is expected will,
+no doubt, result in missed problem.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{shortquiz} Environment}\label{s:oQsq}
+
+The objective question (with or without the presence of a
+correction box, \cs{corr\-Ans\-Button} or a tally box \cs{sqTallyBox})
+can be mixed in with multiple choice questions.
+
+Solutions to the questions can also be included using a
+\texttt{solution} environment. Click on the ``Ans'' button to get
+the answer to a question; shift-click on the ``Ans'' button to get
+the solution.
+
+\begin{shortquiz}[oQsq]
+Answer each of the following. Passing is 100\%.
+
+\begin{questions}
+\item If $f$ is differentiable, then $f$ is continuous.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}\hfill\sqTallyBox
+
+\item $\displaystyle\frac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}[sinsqx]{4}{.0001}{0}{1}%
+\hfill\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}%
+\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\begin{solution}
+\[
+ \frac d{dx}\sin^2(x) = 2\sin(x)\cos(x) = \sin(2x)
+\]
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized as a founder of
+Calculus.\vadjust{\kern3pt}\newline
+\RespBoxTxt{2}{0}[newton]{5}%
+{Isaac Newton}{Newton}{I. Newton}{Gottfried Leibniz}{Leibniz}\hfill
+\CorrAnsButton{Isaac Newton or Gottfried Leibniz}\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\end{questions}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Isaac Newton and Gottfried Leibniz are considered founders of
+Calculus.
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}%\hfill
+%\begin{flushright}
+%\sqClearButton\kern1bp\sqTallyTotal
+%\end{flushright}
+
+\redpoint When using objective questions within a
+\texttt{shortquiz} environment, you must give a unique field name
+as an optional argument of the environment. The listing of this
+example follows:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{shortquiz}[oQsq] % <-- unique field name
+Answer each of the following. Passing is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item If $f$ is differentiable, then $f$ is continuous.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}\hfill\sqTallyBox
+
+\item $\displaystyle\frac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}[sinsqx]{4}{.0001}{0}{1}%
+\hfill\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}%
+\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\begin{solution}
+\[
+ \frac d{dx}\sin^2(x) = 2\sin(x)\cos(x) = \sin(2x)
+\]
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized
+as a founder of Calculus.\vadjust{\kern3pt}\newline
+\RespBoxTxt{2}{0}[newton]{5}{Isaac Newton}{Newton}{I. Newton}%
+{Gottfried Leibniz}{Leibniz}\hfill
+\CorrAnsButton{Isaac Newton or Gottfried Leibniz}%
+\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Isaac Newton and Gottfried Leibniz are considered
+founders of Calculus.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\begin{flushright}
+\sqClearButton\kern1bp\sqTallyTotal %<-- total tally
+\end{flushright}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent\textbf{Example Notes:}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Note the optional argument gives this collection of
+questions a common base name. All supporting macros use this name.
+\item The named destination to the solution is entered with parameter
+\texttt{\#5} of the command \hyperref[paraRespBox]{\cs{RespBoxMath}}, and with parameter
+\texttt{\#4} of \hyperlink{paraRespBoxTxt}{\cs{RespBoxTxt}}.
+\item In this example, another built-in macro,
+\cs{sqTallyTotal} was used. This macro creates a text field that
+accumulates the totals of all the tally boxes.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\redpoint The \texttt{shortquiz} environment can also be used for
+a single objective question. Just don't use the
+\texttt{questions} environment within.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{shortquiz}[anExample]
+ !ameta(an objective style question)
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{quiz} Environment}\label{s:oQquiz}
+
+Objective questions can be mixed in with multiple choice questions
+within the \texttt{quiz} environment. When posing an objective
+style question in the \texttt{quiz} environment, use
+\cs{RespBoxMath} and \cs{RespBoxTxt}, and optionally include
+the \cs{CorrAnsButton} button and the \cs{AnswerField} text field.
+
+Since the evaluation of the quiz is delayed until the user has
+finished the quiz, the \cs{sqTally\-Box} macro is not applicable here.
+
+\begin{quiz*}{oQq}
+Answer each of the following. Passing is 100\%.
+
+\begin{questions}
+\item If $f$ is differentiable, then $f$ is continuous.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+
+\item $\displaystyle\frac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}[sinsqx2]{4}{.0001}{0}{1}%
+\hfill\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}%
+\begin{solution}
+\[
+ \frac d{dx}\sin^2(x) = 2\sin(x)\cos(x) = \sin(2x)
+\]
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized as a founder of
+Calculus.\vadjust{\kern3pt}\newline
+\RespBoxTxt{2}{0}[leibniz]{5}{Isaac Newton}{Newton}{I. Newton}{Gottfried Leibniz}{Leibniz}\hfill
+\CorrAnsButton{Isaac Newton or Gottfried Leibniz}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Isaac Newton and Gottfried Leibniz are considered
+founders of Calculus.
+\end{solution}
+
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField{oQq}\CorrButton{oQq}
+
+\noindent Answers: \AnswerField{oQq}
+
+\redpoint The buttons created by \cs{CorrAnsButton} are hidden
+until the user ends the quiz (and gets scored) and clicks on the
+corrections button (\cs{CorrButton}). The \cs{Corr\-Ans\-Button} should
+not be included if there is no \cs{CorrButton}.
+
+\redpoint Pressing on the ``Ans'' button populates the text
+field created by \cs{AnswerField} with the author's correct answer.
+If there is a solution to the problem, the ``Ans'' button
+is outlined in green. Shift-click on the ``Ans'' button to jump to
+the solution.
+
+\redpoint The \texttt{quiz} environment requires a field name.
+This same name is used by the objective style question as well.
+
+\medbreak
+
+The listing for the above example follows.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz*}{oQq}
+Answer each of the following. Passing is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item If $f$ is differentiable, then $f$ is continuous.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+
+\item $\displaystyle\frac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}%
+\hfill\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}%
+
+\item Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized
+as a founder of Calculus.\vadjust{\kern3pt}\newline
+\RespBoxTxt{2}{0}[leibniz]{5}{Isaac Newton}{Newton}{I. Newton}%
+{Gottfried Leibniz}{Leibniz}\hfill
+\CorrAnsButton{Isaac Newton or Gottfried Leibniz}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Isaac Newton and Gottfried Leibniz are considered
+founders of Calculus.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField{oQq}\CorrButton{oQq}
+
+\noindent Answers: \AnswerField{oQq}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The \cs{AnswerField} has the following syntax:
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{AnswerField[\anglemeta{field\_opts}]\darg{\meta{base\_name}}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\AnswerField[!anglemeta(field_opts)]{!meta(base_name)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\noindent The parameter \anglemeta{field\_opts} is the typical optional
+parameter for all \textsf{eform} fields; it is used to change the appearance
+of the field. The parameter \meta{base\_name} is the (base) name of the quiz
+this field will hold the answers for.
+
+You may have \cs{AnswerField} commands on several pages---possibly for
+different quizzes. By using the command \cs{resetAnsFieldOnClose}, the
+answer field for the current quiz will be cleared when the page containing
+it closes. You can revert back to the default behavior (answer fields not cleared) by executing
+\cs{noResetAnsFieldOnClose}.
+
+\redpoint There are some additional grade reporting and statistical fields
+defined: \textsf{exerquiz} defines \cs{PointsField}, \cs{PercentField}, and \cs{GradeField}.
+The demo file \texttt{quizpts.tex} illustrates these commands; see also
+the section below entitled \nameref{sss:asignPts}.
+
+\subsubsection{The Prompt Button}
+
+In addition to the \cs{CorrAnsButton}, the document author can
+provide a prompt button (probably not the best descriptive term).
+
+For some quizzes, the author might want to ask a series of
+questions where the answer to one question depends on the correct
+answer of a previous question. In this situation, you'd like to
+provide the correct answer so the student can make a good run at
+the next question. The \cs{@PromptButton} not only provides the
+answer to the question but it also makes the corresponding math
+fill-in read only, so that the student cannot change the answer
+already provided.
+
+Ideally, the student first enters an answer, and once satisfied
+with the answer, can then get the correct answer for future
+questions.
+
+%\redpoint See the demo file \texttt{prompt\_tst.tex} for an example of usage.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=888} See the demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=888}{prompt\_tst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+for an example of usage.
+
+\subsubsection{Grouped Math/Text Fill-in Questions}\label{grouped}
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} defines a grouping environment, \texttt{mathGrp},
+for math fill-in and \emph{text fill-in} questions where the response to the question
+might require entering text into multiple math fill-in fields.
+
+When you use the \texttt{mathGrp} environment to enclose a set of
+related math questions, you need to use the \cs{CorrAnsButtonGrp}
+button, instead of the \cs{CorrAnsButton} button. The required
+argument for this button is a comma delimited list of the answers
+that appear within the grouped questions. The answers should be
+listed in the same order {\TeX} processes the math (or text)
+questions. The group of questions is processed as if it were a
+single question.
+
+\redpoint For example\dots
+
+\noindent \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+\useBeginQuizButton[\textColor{0 0 1}\CA{Begin}\AC{}\RC{}\rectW{}]
+\useEndQuizButton[\textColor{0 0 1}\CA{End}\AC{}\RC{}\rectW{}]
+\begin{quiz*}{grpExample}\PTsHook{($\eqPTs^{\text{pts}}$)}\PTs{3}
+Compute the following cross product:
+\begin{equation*}
+\def\vi#1{\setlength{\fboxrule}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxsep}{1bp}
+\fbox{\RespBoxMath[\rectW{11bp}\Q{1}\textSize{0}]{#1}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}}}
+%
+ (3\vec i - 2\vec j) \times (\vec i + 5\vec k) = \begin{mathGrp}\PTs*{1}
+ \vi{-10}\,\vec i + \vi{-15}\, \vec j + \vi{2}\,\vec k
+ \end{mathGrp}\tag*{\CorrAnsButtonGrp{-10,-15,2}}
+%
+\end{equation*}
+\end{quiz*}\ $\underset{\text{ScoreField}}{\underbrace{\ScoreField[\DV{}\V{}\rectW{1in}]\currQuiz}}$%
+ \kern1bp$\underset{\text{PointsField}}{\underbrace{\PointsField[\rectW{1in}]\currQuiz}}$\CorrButton[\CA{Correct}\AC{}\RC{}]\currQuiz
+ \hfill Ans: \AnswerField[\rectW{.5in}]\currQuiz
+\end{minipage}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+\textbf{Notes:}
+\begin{questions}
+\item[\color{blue}\ding{042}] If you miss any one of the three
+answers, the \texttt{ScoreField} reports back `\texttt{Score: 0
+out of 1}'. There is only one question there, to get it correct,
+you must answer all three inputs correctly.
+
+\item[\color{blue}\ding{042}] Points can be assigned to the individual
+ responses and a score is given based on the validity of the inputs and
+ the corresponding points. There is a default JavaScript function that
+ scores the results. The author can define a custom JavaScript function
+ to have a more ``exotic'' method of evaluating the group. See the
+ test file \texttt{grp\_test.tex} for details.
+
+\item[\color{blue}\ding{042}]Notice that after you take the quiz
+and click on ``Correct'' button, the ``Ans'' button appears (as
+usual). If you click repeatedly on this ``Ans'' button, you can
+cycle through all answers to this question; the response box is
+highlighted (or put in focus) and the answer appears in the answer
+field provided.
+\end{questions}
+
+\redpoint See the demo file \texttt{grp\_test.tex} for the source
+code of this example, as well as more technical details of the
+\texttt{mathGrp} environment.
+
+\subsection{Modifying Form Elements}
+
+All form elements have a first optional parameter for modifying their appearance,
+and they have an associated ``every'' command for global modifications as well.
+
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\extrarowheight}{1mm}
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{2mm}
+\begin{longtable}{|>{\ttfamily}l|>{\PBS\raggedright}p{.5\linewidth}|}
+\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{\bfseries Global Modification Commands} \\
+\hline
+\endfirsthead
+\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{\bfseries Global Modification Commands} \\
+\hline
+\endhead
+\hline
+\endfoot
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{For the \texttt{shortquiz} Environment} \\
+\hline
+\cs{Ans} & \cs{everysqRadioButton}\\
+\cs{sqTallyBox} &\cs{everysqTallyBox}\\
+\cs{sqTallyTotal}& \cs{everysqTallyTotal}\\
+\cs{sqClearButton}&\cs{everysqClearButton}\\\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{For the \texttt{quiz} Environment} \\ \hline
+\cs{useBeginQuizButton}&\cs{everyBeginQuizButton}\\
+\cs{useEndQuizButton}&\cs{everyEndQuizButton}\\
+\cs{Ans} & \cs{everyqRadioButton}\\
+\cs{ScoreField}&\cs{everyScoreField}\\
+\cs{CorrButton}&\cs{everyCorrButton}\\
+\cs{AnswerField}&\cs{everyAnswerField}\\
+\cs{PointsField}&\cs{everyPointsField}\\
+\cs{PercentField}&\cs{everyPercentField}\\
+\cs{GradeField}&\cs{everyGradeField}\\\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{For Both Environments} \\ \hline
+\cs{RespBoxMath}&\cs{everyRespBoxMath}\\
+\cs{RespBoxTxt}&\cs{everyRespBoxTxt}\\
+\cs{CorrAnsButton}&\cs{everyCorrAnsButton}
+\end{longtable}
+\end{center}
+
+\handpoint In additional to these, there are other ``every'' commands that effect
+the appearance of the various buttons and text fields. The two commands
+\cs{everyCorrButtonField} and \cs{every\-eqText\-Field} are executed before every
+\texttt{exerquiz} button and text field (respectfully). These can be used to give
+a general uniform appearance for all the short quiz or quiz form elements; use
+the more specific version, as listed in the above table, to make additional refinements
+in appearance.
+
+\redpoint See the document \href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf} (relative link
+\href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}) for complete documentation on how to
+modify a field using the optional first argument, and how to use the
+``every'' mechanism.
+
+\subsection{Inserting additional action and format scripts}\label{ss:AddActScripts}
+
+Global changes in \emph{appearance}, as just discussed, is accomplished using
+any of the \cs{every\ameta{cmdname}} family of commands; however, that device
+cannot, by design, change any of the actions \pkg{exerquiz} has defined.
+S everal key-value pairs are used to insert JavaScript code into response
+boxes, multiple choice, and multiple selection fields.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{addToAction*\darg{\ameta{key}}\darg{\ameta{code}}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\AddAAFormat{!ameta(code)}
+\AddAAKeystroke{!ameta(code)}
+\AddAAMouseUpMC{!ameta(code)}
+\AddAAMouseUpMS{!ameta(code)}
+\setActionKeys{!ameta(KV-pairs)}
+\addToAction*{!ameta(key)}{!ameta(code)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic
+The command \cs{setActionKeys} is a special command used to process the
+KV-pairs of the \pkg{eforms} package. It only accepts these four keys:
+\cs{AddAAFormat}, \cs{AddAAKeystroke}, \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC}, and
+\cs{AddAAMouseUpMC}.
+
+
+\begin{description}
+ \item[\cs{AddAAFormat\darg{\ameta{code}}}] This is an \pkg{eforms} KV,
+ discussed an some detail on page~\pageref{para:ProcRespSetNum} that can be
+ specified in the optional argument of any response boxes to affect the
+ field locally, or globally through the \cs{setActionKeys} command.
+ \item[\cs{AddAAKeystroke\darg{\ameta{code}}}] Text fields have a keystroke
+ event (or trigger) that executes JavaScript each time a keystroke is
+ made into the field. The \pkg{exerquiz} key \cs{AddAAKeystroke} adds
+ its argument (\ameta{code}) to the keystroke event of all response boxes
+ (\cs{RespBoxMath}, \cs{RespBoxTxt}, and \cs{RespBoxTxtPC}).
+
+ To distinguish between \env{shortquiz} (and \env{oQuestions}) and
+ \env{quiz} environments, use the methods explained below in the
+ description of the \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC} key.
+
+ Should you want code that is specialized to these individual types, you can use
+ some internal macros to distinguish these three cases.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!(),fontsize=\small]
+\setActionKeys{\AddAAKeystroke{%
+ \ifx\annot@subtype\annot@subtype@rbm!ameta(rbm-code)\else
+ \ifx\annot@subtype\annot@subtype@rbt!ameta(rbt-code)\else
+ \ifx\annot@subtype\annot@subtype@rbtpc!ameta(rbtpc-code)\fi
+ \fi\fi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ Within the argument of \cs{setActionKeys} the character `\texttt{@}' is an ordinary letter,
+ so it can be used freely.
+
+ Within this keystroke event, script executed prior this additional
+ \ameta{code} defines a JavaScript variable \texttt{retn}, which has a value
+ of \texttt{true} (if the response is judged correct), \texttt{false} (if
+ the response is judged incorrect), or \texttt{null} (if there is a syntax
+ error). The \ameta{code} may use this variable.
+
+ \item[\cs{AddAAMouseUpMC\darg{\ameta{code}}}] This key adds its
+ \ameta{code} to the mouse up event of items (\cs{Ans}) of a multiple
+ choice (MC) question. Both \env{shortquiz} and \env{quiz} environments
+ are affected.
+
+ You can distinguish between the \env{shortquiz} and \env{quiz}
+ environments by comparing \cs{eqQuizType} with \cs{isSQZ} or \cs{isQZ}.
+ For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\setActionKeys{\AddAAMouseUpMC{%
+ \if\eqQuizType\isQZ!ameta(qz-code)\else!ameta(sqz-code)\fi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+ \item[\cs{AddAAMouseUpMS\darg{\ameta{code}}}] This key adds its
+ \ameta{code} to the mouse up event of items (\cs{Ans}) of a multiple
+ selection (MS) question. Both \env{shortquiz} and \env{quiz}
+ environments are affected. As with \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC}, distinguish
+ between the environments \env{shortquiz} and \env{quiz} by comparing
+ \cs{eqQuizType} with \cs{isSQZ} or \cs{isQZ}, as shown above.
+\end{description}
+ In the case of both \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC} and \cs{AddAAMouseUpMS}, you
+ can distinguish between a correct response and an incorrect response
+ using the command \cs{Ans@choice}, which expands to 1 when correct
+ alternative (radio button or check box) is pressed, and expands to 0
+ otherwise. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\setActionKeys{\AddAAMouseUpMC{%
+ \if\Ans@choice1!ameta(true-code)\else!ameta(false-code)\fi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\cs{AddAAKeystroke}, \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC}, and \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC} don't work
+as local arguments of \cs{RespBoxMath}, \cs{RespBoxTxt}, and
+\cs{RespBoxTxtPC}; however, \cs{AddAAFormat} can be passed within the option
+list of these response box commands, the local option command over rights the
+global command.
+
+Remove any of the actions earlier declared by passing the empty argument,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\setActionKeys{\AddAAMouseUpMC{}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Now, there is no added code to the mouse up action of the multiple choice
+fields that appear afterwards.
+
+The only command yet to be discussed is \cs{addToAction*}. Suppose we earlier
+declared,
+\begin{quote}\ttfamily
+\cs{setActionKeys\darg{\string\AddAAFormat}\darg{\ameta{code\SUB1}}}
+\end{quote}
+and later in the document we want to \emph{append}
+additional script (\ameta{code\SUB2}). To accomplish this, expand the command,
+\begin{quote}\ttfamily
+\cs{addToAction\darg{\string\AddAAFormat}\darg{\ameta{code\SUB2}}}
+\end{quote}
+Now the code executed for each response box
+is \ameta{code\SUB1}\ameta{code\SUB2}. However, if you wish to \emph{prepend} the \ameta{code\SUB2}, then
+expand \cs{addToAction} using the star-option,
+\begin{quote}\ttfamily
+\cs{addToAction*\darg{\string\AddAAFormat}\darg{\ameta{code\SUB2}}}
+\end{quote}
+The code executed for any response box is \ameta{code\SUB2}\ameta{code\SUB1}.
+
+It should ever be kept in mind that changing the value of a key with
+\cs{setActionKeys} is \cs{addToAction} affects all response boxes thereafter,
+\emph{unless these changes occur in a group}. Thus, the following change,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{oQuestion}{oQ1}
+\addToAction{\AddAAFormat}{\r!ameta(code)}%
+It is well known that
+ $ 1 + 16 = \RespBoxMath{17}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}$
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+only affects that problem, and none other.
+
+\newtopic
+\textbf{Important/A little beg.} Any changes to the action script passed to
+the component elements of the \env{oQuestion}, \env{shortquiz}, and
+\env{quiz} environments \emph{should not impact} the basic functionality of the
+environments.
+
+\subsection{The correct-type math problem}
+
+The traditional way of posing a mathematical objective-style question is to use
+the \cs{RespBoxMath} command, which presents an empty text field for the student to enter
+the answer. However, an alternate approach is to pre-populate the field and ask the student
+to edit the expression provided to obtain a correct answer.
+\collectboxto{\aebbox}{}\bgroup
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth-\mathindent}
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,commandchars={!@$}]
+\RespBoxMath[!textbf@\DV{cos(4x)}\V{cos(4x)}$]
+ {4xcos(2x^2)}{2}{.001}{[0,1]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\egroup
+
+\medskip\noindent\begin{oQuestion}{}
+Edit the expression to obtain the correct answer:
+\begin{align*}
+ &\dfrac{d}{dx}\sin(2x^2)=\RespBoxMath[\DV{cos(4x)}\V{cos(4x)}]{4xcos(2x\string^2)}{2}{.001}{[0,1]}\\[3pt]
+ &\usebox{\aebbox}
+\end{align*}
+\end{oQuestion}
+The field is initially populated by an incorrect answer (a very common mistake), the student needs to
+correct the answer.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1335} Refer to the {\AcroTeX} Blog article
+\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1335}{Correcting a math problem} for additional
+examples. The article also discusses the use of multi-letter variables in
+this context of a correct-type question.
+
+\subsection{Evaluating Equivalent Expressions}
+
+The \hypertarget{EquivExpr}{\cs{RespBoxMath}} macro, and its underlying JavaScript code, is designed to
+determine the correctness of an answer, numerical or symbolic. We can pose
+such questions as ``find the derivative'' of this function or ``find the (definite or
+indefinite) integral'' of that function, and so on. This is all accomplished
+by randomly choosing numbers from a specified interval and evaluating both
+the user's and author's answer to the question; if they are close to each
+other, then the user's answer is called correct. The system works pretty well.
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} scheme does not perform well with such questions as
+``fully simplify the radical \verb!sqrt(72)!,'' or ``factor the polynomial
+\verb!2x^2-4x+2!;'' in both cases, the student can simply type in
+the given expression and \textsf{exerquiz} will call them equal. Indeed
+it is true that \verb!sqrt(72)! equates to \verb!sqrt(72)! and the polynomial \verb!2x^2-4x+2!
+equates to \verb!2x^2-4x+2!, as is shown by evaluating randomly
+selected numbers from an interval, \textsf{exerquiz}-style!
+
+\newtopic To illustrate, we use the problem of simplifying
+\verb!sqrt{72}!.
+
+\begin{shortquiz}[simplfyIllus]
+Simplify the following radial expression by factoring out all perfect squares.
+
+\newcommand{\Msgi}{"We are expecting a simplification of the radical."}
+\newcommand{\Msgii}{"Write the simplification in standard form, numerical constants first."}
+
+\begin{questions}
+\item Simplify $\sqrt{72}$ by factoring out all perfect squares.
+\begin{equation*}
+ \sqrt{72} = \RespBoxMath{6sqrt(2)}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{%
+ priorParse:\Array(nodec,%
+ \preDenyForm(%
+ /sqrt\refac{\reany+}\redigit+/,\Msgii),%
+ \preReqForm(%
+ /\rechrclass{+-}*\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}/,\Msgi)%
+ ),%
+ postParse:\Array(\postDenyForm(/sqrt(\refac{72}|\refac{8})/)%
+ )%
+ }]\CorrAnsButton{6sqrt(2)}\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\end{equation*}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\noindent\texttt{Exerquiz} performs its magic by a combination of the
+usual \textsf{exerquiz} processing and new pre- and post-parsing
+techniques, where appropriate code is passed through of the ninth
+parameter of \cs{RespBoxMath}.
+
+\newtopic The verbatim listing follows.\label{verbReqForm}
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\item Simplify $\sqrt{72}$ by factoring out all perfect squares.
+\begin{equation*}
+ \sqrt{72} = \RespBoxMath{6sqrt(2)}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{%
+ priorParse:\Array(nodec,%
+ \preDenyForm(%
+ /sqrt\refac{\reany+}\redigit+/,\Msgii),%
+ \preReqForm(%
+ /\rechrclass{+-}*\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}/,\Msgi)%
+ ),%
+ postParse:\Array(\postDenyForm(/sqrt(\refac{72}|\refac{8})/))%
+ }]\CorrAnsButton{6sqrt(2)}\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\end{equation*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+It becomes a bit complicated here. \verb!:-)! The ninth parameter can take a
+JavaScript object as its value (The object is opened on line~(3) with a left
+brace (\verb!{!) and is closed in line~(11) with a right brace (\verb!}!).
+This object has three properties: \texttt{comp} for defining the compare function
+(not used in this example); \texttt{priorParse}, which is used to inspect the
+user's input to filter out unwanted responses prior to evaluation; \texttt{postParse} is used
+to look at the user's answer \emph{after} the \textsf{exerquiz}
+evaluation of random points stage. At the \texttt{postParse} stage, it has already
+been determined if the user's answer is correct or incorrect, \texttt{postParse} only applies
+to answers that are \emph{correct}.
+
+\paragraph*{The \texttt{priorParse} property.} See also the (brief) description
+of \texttt{priorParse} as part of the \hyperref[paraRespBoxNine]{ninth parameter},
+page~\pageref*{paraRespBoxNine}. There are new two built-in filter functions which
+are accessed through the helper commands \cs{preDenyForm} and \cs{preReqForm}. As shown
+in the verbatim text, they are both enclosed in \cs{Array()}.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \cs{preDenyForm}: The idea behind this filter function is to define regular expressions
+ which if the pattern is present, processing would stop for the user input, and an alert
+ message would appear; that is, we \emph{deny} the user the use of certain defined patterns.
+ There is no penalty, the user has a chance to change his/her
+ answer. \cs{preDenyForm} takes up to two arguments, enclosed in parentheses:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\preDenyForm(regexp|array_regexps, cMsg)
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first argument is a regular expression or an array of regular expressions.
+The second argument, \texttt{cMsg}, is a string that will be displayed in the alert
+box if the pattern or patterns appear in the user's answer.
+
+When the first argument is an array of regular expressions, the same
+message (\texttt{cMsg}) will appear if any one of the patterns is present.
+The command may be repeated using additional regular expressions with different
+warning messages.
+
+Let's have a look at the above example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,firstnumber=4,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+priorParse:\Array(nodec,%
+ \preDenyForm(%
+ /sqrt\refac{\reany+}\redigit+/,\Msgii),%
+ \preReqForm(%
+ /\rechrclass{+-}*\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}/,\Msgi)%
+),%
+\end{Verbatim}
+In line~~(4) we begin with \cs{Array} followed by \textsf{dljslib} filter function
+\texttt{nodec}, this function denies the use of decimal numbers, it is important
+in this problem but not our central focus. In line~(5) we begin with \cs{preDenyForm},
+the arguments are on line~(6). The correct answer is \texttt{6sqrt(2)}, we want
+to force the student write the answer in this form, not, for example, as
+\texttt{sqrt(2)6} or \texttt{sqrt(2)*6}, while correct, it bad form. (We will deny them bad form!)
+This will deny them even if not correct, for example, if the student enters
+\texttt{sqrt(3)4}.
+
+To make it easier on the document author, I've defined a series of ``helper commands,''
+and oh, by the way, you should know how to use regular expressions. Let's now examine
+line~(6). First argument is a single regular expression, the second is a command that defines
+the string message to be exhibited if this pattern is found (try it on the working example above
+to see what the message is).
+
+Let's now look at the regular expression (\texttt{/.../} in line~(6).
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,firstnumber=6,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+/sqrt\refac{\reany+}\redigit+/
+\end{Verbatim}
+We take each in turn.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{sqrt\cs{refac(\cs{reany+)}}}: we search for the string \texttt{sqrt}
+ followed by the pattern \cs{refac(\cs{reany+)}}. \cs{refac} defines literal parentheses, within
+ these parentheses can by anything \cs{reany+}. The whole sequence expands
+ to the pattern `{\def\\{\eqbs\eqbs}\texttt{sqrt\refac{\reany+}}}'.
+ \item \cs{redigit+}: This command is a macro for one or more digits, it expands
+ to `{\def\\{\eqbs\eqbs}\texttt{\redigit+}}'.
+ \item Summarizing, we deny the student from typing in a square root of
+ anything followed by one or more digits.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\item \cs{preReqForm}: This is the positive version of \cs{preDenyForm}. It uses
+the same syntax
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\preReqForm(regexp|array_regexps, cMsg)
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first argument is a regular expression or an array of regular expressions, the patterns
+are ones that we wish to see in the user's answer. If the user's answer does not
+fit into any of the patterns, an alert is emitted using the optional string
+declared in the second argument, \texttt{cMsg}. The second argument is option, there
+is a default, generic string message that will be shown.
+
+As with \cs{preDenyForm}, let's take a close look at the regular expression.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\rechrclass{+-}*\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}/
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \cs{rechrclass(+-)*} defines a character class consisting of the characters
+ `\texttt{+-}' the \texttt{*} means zero or more occurrences. (Probably I should use \texttt{?} instead of
+ \texttt{*},
+ meaning 0 or 1 occurrences.) It expands to
+ `{\def\\{\eqbs\eqbs}\texttt{\rechrclass{+-}*}}'.
+ \item \cs{redigit+} describes one or more digits, this would expand to
+ `{\def\\{\eqbs\eqbs}\texttt{\redigit+}}'.
+ \item sqrt\cs{refac(\cs{reany+)}} is the same as before, it describes
+ the square root of anything expression.
+\end{itemize}
+\item[] The \cs{preReqForm} only searches for the specified patterns. For example,
+the responses \texttt{sin(PI/2)6sqrt(2)} and \texttt{6sqrt(2)x} pass both the
+\cs{preDenyForm} (no digits follow the square root),
+and pass the \cs{preReqForm} because both answers have (or do not have) the patterns;
+in the former case, the answer is judged correct, and in the latter case, incorrect.
+You can try to improve the pattern like so
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+/\rebstr\rechrclass{+-}*\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}\reestr/
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \cs{rebstr} (begin string anchor) expands to `\texttt{\^}' and
+represents the beginning of the line, while \cs{reestr} (end string anchor)
+expands to `\texttt{\$}' represents the end of the line. In this case, the user's answer
+is required to begin with an optional plus or minus, followed by one or
+more digits, followed by a square root, followed by the end of the line.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic Here is that same short quiz with the above changes (and \texttt{*} replaced by
+\texttt{?}).
+
+\begin{shortquiz}[simplfyIllus1]
+Simplify the following radial expression by factoring out all perfect squares.
+
+\newcommand{\Msgi}{"We are expecting a simplification of the radical."}
+\newcommand{\Msgii}{"Write the simplification in standard form, numerical constants first."}
+
+\begin{questions}
+\item $\sqrt{72}$
+\begin{equation*}
+ \sqrt{72} = \RespBoxMath{6sqrt(2)}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{%
+ priorParse:\Array(nodec,%
+ \preDenyForm(%
+ /sqrt\refac{\reany+}\redigit+/,\Msgii),%
+ \preReqForm(%
+ /\rebstr\rechrclass{+-}?\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}\reestr/,\Msgi)%
+ ),%
+ postParse:\Array(\postDenyForm(/sqrt(\refac{72}|\refac{8})/)%
+ )%
+ }]\CorrAnsButton{6sqrt(2)}\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\end{equation*}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+Now try \texttt{sin(PI/2)6sqrt(2)} or \texttt{6sqrt(2)x}, and other aberrant variations.
+
+\paragraph*{The \texttt{postParse} property.} After the
+\texttt{priorParse} stage, \texttt{exerquiz} checks the answer for correctness,
+against the author's answer, using randomly selected numbers. After that comes
+the \texttt{postParse} event. The syntax is the same except there is no warning
+message.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\preReqForm(regexp|array_regexps)
+\end{Verbatim}
+If the user's \emph{answer is correct} at this stage \textit{and} fits
+into one of the patterns as defined by the regular expressions, the answer
+will then be marked wrong.
+
+Let's look at the post parse code for this example, from line~(10)
+on page~\pageref*{verbReqForm}, we see,
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,firstnumber=10,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+postParse:\Array(\postDenyForm(/sqrt(\refac{72}|\refac{8})/))%
+\end{Verbatim}
+Even though there is not an array of filter functions, a filter function
+with arguments must always be enclosed in an array.
+
+Within the array, we execute our \cs{postDenyForm}, it has only one
+argument, a single regular expression:
+\verb!/sqrt(\refac{72}|\refac{8})/!.\footnote{The use of alternation here is
+not needed, an answer involving \texttt{sqrt(72)} would have been filtered out by the
+\cs{preReqForm} filter, do you know why?} There are three ``correct
+answers'' to this problem, they are \texttt{sqrt(72)}, \texttt{3sqrt(8)},
+and \texttt{6sqrt(2)}, this latter one being the only correct answer to
+this question, for the instructions were to factor out \emph{all} perfect
+squares. The regular expression here catches any answer containing
+\texttt{sqrt(72)} or \texttt{3sqrt(8)} and marks it wrong. \verb!:-(!
+
+\paragraph*{List of RegExp helper macros.}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\def\refac#1{\\(#1\\)}\def\rediv{\\/}\def\repow{\\^}
+\def\redigit{\\d}\def\rechrclass#1{[#1]}\def\reany{.}
+\def\remul{[\\*]}\def\rebstr{\\^}\def\reestr{\\$}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1020} Refer to the source file of
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1020}{equiv\_expr.pdf}} for working
+examples. Additional examples will (eventually) appear on the
+\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroTeX{} Blog}.
+
+
+\section{Randomizing the Multiple Choices}\label{s:random}
+
+Beginning with version~6.1 of \textsf{exerquiz}, the choices of a
+multiple choice question can be randomized. The \texttt{random.tex}
+macro file by Donald Arseneau is used for this purpose.
+
+%\exPDF{randomize} The demo file for this section is \texttt{randomize.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=901} The demo file for this section is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=901}{randomize.pdf}}.
+
+\newtopic The randomization is only allowed if the \texttt{allowrandomize}
+option of \textsf{exerquiz} is used; otherwise, no randomization
+can occur.
+
+The randomization is only defined for choices listed between the
+pair \cs{bChoices} and \cs{eChoices} (see \Nameref{bChoices}). The
+command \cs{bChoices} now takes two optional key-value arguments:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{nCols=\anglemeta{num}}: The number of columns to create, as described
+ on page~\pageref{bChoices}. You can also use the old style by specifying just
+ \anglemeta{num}. Thus, \cs{bChoices[nCols=2]} and \cs{bChoices[2]}
+ are equivalent.
+ \item \texttt{random=\anglemeta{\upshape true|false}}: Specify this option to randomize choices.
+ You can use the key word \texttt{random} instead of
+ \texttt{random=true}. For example, the following commands will randomize the
+ choices, \cs{bChoices[random]}, \cs{bChoices[nCols=2,random]}, or
+ \cs{bChoices[2,random]}. The default is to not randomize the
+ choices.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic The following is an example of the \texttt{random} option of \cs{bChoices}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{shortquiz}
+This is a quiz.
+\begin{questions}
+ \item Try to guess the correct answer.
+ \begin{answers}{3}
+ \bChoices[nCols=2,random]
+ \Ans0 1 a choice\eAns
+ \Ans1\label{eq} 2 another choice\eAns
+ \Ans0 3 still another choice\eAns
+ \Ans0 4 another\eAns
+ \Ans0 5 incoming\eAns
+ \Ans0 6 more choices\eAns
+ \Ans0 7 another still\eAns
+ \Ans0 8 too many\eAns
+ \Ans0 9 choices\eAns
+ \eFreeze
+ \Ans0 10 None of these\eAns
+ \eChoices
+ \end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Note the presence of the command \Com{eFreeze}. Any of
+the items listed after \cs{eFreeze} are not randomized, and are
+placed at the end of the list. So, for the example above, the first
+nine items will be randomized, whereas, the last item (None of
+these) will placed at the end of the list.
+
+\newtopic Additional, there are five other commands that support the
+randomization feature.\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily\string\saveRandomSeed\quad\string\inputRandomSeed}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\saveRandomSeed!quad\inputRandomSeed
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic A pseudo-random sequence of numbers requires an initial \emph{seed
+value}. The example file \texttt{random.tex} creates, by default, a
+seed value based on the date and time (the number of minutes since
+midnight); consequently, after every minute, the random sequence
+will change. By setting the value of the count register \cs{randomi},
+the document author can also set the initial seed of the pseudo-random
+sequence.
+
+The command \cs{saveRandomSeed} will write the last seed used in the
+source file to an auxiliary file (\cs{jobname\_rt.sav}), while the
+command \cs{inputRandomSeed} inputs the seed stored in the
+\cs{jobname\_rt.sav} back into the beginning of the source file.
+These two commands should be placed in the preamble.
+
+By invoking both of these commands, a new pseudo-random sequence will be generated
+each time the source file is compiled.
+
+Assuming a \cs{jobname\_rt.sav} has already been created, by
+invoking the command \cs{inputRandomSeed} only (and not
+\cs{saveRandomSeed}), the seed already saved will be used for every
+subsequent compiling of the source document. Using the same seed is
+necessary in two situations:
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item When the quiz contains one or more \cs{label} commands, using the same
+ seed gives you the same sequence every time you latex the document. This will
+ give the auxiliary files a chance to come up to date so that any referencing of the label
+ will be accurate.
+
+ \item When creating an online (or paper) quiz with randomization, which later you publish
+ the solutions to, it is important that the randomization for the
+ quiz document is the same as that for the solution document. By
+ using \cs{inputRandomSeed} (rather than \cs{save\-Ran\-dom\-Seed}), you
+ get the same sequence for the solution document (unless you modify the
+ source file, adding or removing questions that have randomization).
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\newtopic\textcolor{red}{Things to look for:} If \textsf{exerquiz} is not rearranging the order
+of the choices as you expect it to, it could be that
+\textsf{exerquiz} is reading an old \texttt{.sav} file. Either delete that file
+in your source folder, or comment out \cs{inputRandomSeed} in your document.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{useRandomSeed\darg{\meta{number}}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\useRandomSeed{!meta(number)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic\indent You may have several sections of the same class take a quiz with the
+questions rearranged for each. Save the seed value used by
+\textsf{exerquiz} to randomize the choices for the class by opening the
+\texttt{.sav} and by copying and pasting the line you see into your document;
+for example, it could read \cs{randomi=132088850}, then use
+\cs{useRandomSeed} with that seed value for that class as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\useRandomSeed{132088850} % 11:00 class
+% \useRandomSeed{634952429} % 12:30 class
+\end{Verbatim}
+Of course comment out \cs{inputRandomSeed}.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{obeyLocalRandomize}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\turnOnRandomize
+\obeyLocalRandomize
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic\indent The command \cs{turnOnRandomize} overrides all local settings of \cs{bChoices}
+and causes all choice lists to be randomized. While \cs{obeyLocalRandomize}
+returns control to the local settings. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\turnOnRandomize
+...
+\bChoices
+ \Ans...\eAns
+ \Ans...\eAns
+ ...
+\eChoices
+\end{Verbatim}
+will cause the choice list to be randomized, even though the
+\texttt{random} option was not specified. Whereas, in this code
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\turnOnRandomize
+...
+\obeyLocalRandomize
+...
+\bChoices
+ \Ans...\eAns
+ \Ans...\eAns
+ ...
+\eChoices
+\end{Verbatim}
+the choices will not be randomized, because the \texttt{random}
+option was not specified; or they will be randomized if the
+\texttt{random} option is used.
+
+\newtopic\textcolor{red}{Limitations:} There are natural limitations on the use
+of \cs{bChoices} and \cs{eChoices} and consequently, there are
+limitations on the randomization. The content between \cs{Ans} and
+\cs{eAns} cannot have any verbatim text. This is usually not a
+problem for mathematical content, but could be a limitation for
+computer science where questions about syntax may be posed. I have
+in mind a work-around, but haven't pursued the problem as of yet.
+
+\section{Creating a Quiz Summary Table}\label{s:sumrytbl}
+
+This feature is designed for a \texttt{quiz} (as opposed to a
+\texttt{shortquiz}) and is probably most useful for a long quiz, spanning
+several pages. The \cs{displaySumryTbl} command creates a table that summarizes
+the user's effort for the quiz; \cs{displaySumryTbl} must follow the final
+\verb!\end{questions}! and \emph{must be on a separate page} from the last question of the quiz.
+An example of the generated table is shown below in \hyperref[fig:qzSumryTbl]{Figure~\ref*{fig:qzSumryTbl}}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=377} The demo file for this section is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=377}{sumry\_tbl.pdf}}, found
+at the \href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroTeX{} Blog}.
+
+
+\Important The code for these commands are only input when the \textsf{exerquiz} option
+\texttt{usesumrytbls} is taken.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{quiz*}{!ameta(quiz_name)}
+Solve each of the following.
+\begin{questions}
+\item...
+...
+\item...
+\end{questions}
+
+\newpage %<--start new page
+Before you complete your quiz by pressing `End Quiz', review the
+list below. A check mark indicates that you responded to that
+question; otherwise, you did not respond to the question.
+
+\begin{center}
+\displaySumryTbl{\currQuiz}
+\end{center}
+
+If you are satisfied with your answers, press `End Quiz' to
+complete the quiz.\medskip
+
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\begin{figure}[htb]
+\begin{center}
+\includegraphics{figures/sumrytbl}
+\caption{Quiz Summary Table}\label{fig:qzSumryTbl}
+\end{center}
+\end{figure}
+
+
+The table (as seen in \hyperref[fig:qzSumryTbl]{Figure~\ref*{fig:qzSumryTbl}}) shows a check mark for each question to
+which the student gave a response. The student
+can review the table, and optionally return to questions that had no response.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{displaySumryTbl[\ameta{KV-pairs}]\darg{\ameta{quiz\_name}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\displaySumryTbl[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(quiz_name)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic\textbf{Parameter Description:} The second parameter is the quiz name of the quiz this table represents,
+in most cases, \cs{currQuiz} is used. The first parameter consists of key-value pairs, these
+are described below.
+
+\KVP The first parameter takes key-value pairs
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item\texttt{ntables} is a key that has a value of 1 or 2, the
+ default is determined by command \cs{smrytbl@ntables}, which is set to 2 in
+ this package. If \texttt{ntables=1} only one table is created, and
+ if \texttt{ntables=2} two tables are created, each containing half
+ the information, as seen in \hyperref[fig:qzSumryTbl]{Figure~\ref*{fig:qzSumryTbl}}.
+ \item \texttt{showmarkup}: If this switch is true, then markup fields are
+ created that will hold the number of points the student received for
+ each problem. The default is that there is no markup. Entering
+ \texttt{showmarkup} in the option list will generate the markup fields.
+ The code
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\displaySumryTbl[ntables=1,showmarkup]{\currQuiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ produces a single table with the points markup.
+ \item \texttt{nocorrections}: If this switch is true, corrections will not
+ be shown when the user presses the `End Quiz' button. Because of the
+ way this key is implemented, if \texttt{nocorrections} is true, then
+ it will be true for any ``duplicate table,'' that is, any table that
+ references the same quiz.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\newtopic When the user presses the `Corrections' button, the borders of the checkboxes
+are colored, and if \texttt{showmarkup} is used, the points earned for each
+problem are shown as well.
+
+When corrections are made, a red border indicates the answer is
+wrong, a green border means the answer is correct, and a
+blue border the question was answered incorrectly, but partial credit was
+given. The colors are determined by the commands \cs{correctColor}, \cs{wrongColor},
+and \cs{partialColor}. These are ``global color'' that need to set in the preamble;
+the quiz and shortquiz system uses the first two, change them will yield changes everywhere.
+However, you can change the \cs{partialColor} as this is the only place it is used.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\partialColor{color.blue}
+\end{Verbatim}
+This is a JavaScript color, if you redefined it to be a nonstandard color, for example,
+this redefinition makes the partial credit color yellow.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\partialColor{["RGB", 1, 1, 0]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\Important The table must be on a different page from the questions
+because there is an open page action that activates and populates the table
+based on the user's responses.
+
+\newtopic Other related commands are
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblQ}{Question}
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblR}{Responded}
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblP}{Page}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The above three commands form the column titles of the table.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\sumrytablesep}{\space}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Sets the separation between the tables, in the case that two tables are generated.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\sumryTblProbFmt}[1]{\textbf{\textcolor{blue}{#1}}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The above command sets the {\LaTeX} formatting of the problems, the
+default is bold and blue, but may be redefined.
+
+\subsection{Placing the Quiz Summary Table Elsewhere}
+
+You may want the Quiz Summary Table in a
+place other than the default location (after the final
+\verb!\end{questions}! and before the `End Quiz'). There is no problem
+putting it after the quiz and\emph{ before the next quiz};
+however, if you want to put the table up front (that is, in front of the quiz) for
+whatever reasons, you need additional commands.
+
+\newtopic In the area just after \cs{end\darg{questions}} and before `End
+Quiz,' place the command
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{writeProListAux}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\writeProListAux
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic\indent This command saves to the auxiliary file the two pieces of information the
+\cs{dis\-playSumryTbl} needs to build the table. Then, in the location of
+your choice---usually outside of any quiz environment---enclose
+\cs{displaySumryTbl} in the \texttt{sumryTblAux} environment.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{displaySumryTbl[\ameta{KV-keys}]\darg{\ameta{quiz\_name}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\begin{sumryTblAux}{!meta(quiz_name)}
+\displaySumryTbl[!ameta(KV-keys)]{!ameta(quiz_name)}
+\end{sumryTblAux}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic\indent Here, \ameta{quiz\_name} is the name of the quiz that this table represents. An example
+of this environment follows.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{sumryTblAux}{\currQuiz}\small %<--make a little smaller
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblQ}{\sffamily\bfseries Question}
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblR}{\sffamily\bfseries Answered}
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblP}{\sffamily\bfseries Page}
+\begin{center}
+ {\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries Quiz Summary Table}\\[3pt]
+ \displaySumryTbl[showmarkup]{\currQuiz}
+\end{center}
+\end{sumryTblAux}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+%sumryTblAux
+
+\section{Bookmarking Exercises and Quizzes}\label{bmExQz}
+
+It is unlikely that anyone would use this feature: Bookmarking exercises
+and quizzes.
+
+%\exPDF{bkmrk_eq} The demo file for this feature is \texttt{bkmrk\_eq.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=906} The demo file for this feature is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=906}{bkmrk\_eq.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsection{For Exercises}
+
+This ``intelligent'' bookmarking system requires
+the minimum of effort to use. For exercises, the command for bookmarking
+is \Com{expdfbookmark},
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{expdfbookmark\darg{\ameta{bookmark\_title}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\expdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic and should be placed immediately following the beginning of an
+exercise environment, like so,\def\OR{\hspace*{-\amtIndent}\normalfont or,}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{exercise}\expdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+!OR
+\begin{exercise*}\expdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+or, in the case of exercises with parts, and you want to bookmark an
+individual part to a question, place \cs{expdfbookmark} immediately
+after the \cs{item}, like so
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\item\expdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Every bookmark title, \ameta{bookmark\_title}, has a
+suffix defined with \Com{exbookmarkfmt} or
+\Com{partbookmarkfmt}, depending on whether
+the entry is for the top-level exercise, or one of its parts.
+The default definitions are
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\exbookmarkfmt}{\exlabel\space\theeqexno.\space}
+\newcommand{\partbookmarkfmt}{(\thepartno)\space}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The command \cs{exlabel} expands to the language
+dependent word for `Exercise', while \cs{theeqexno} expands to
+the exercise number, and \cs{thepartno} to the part
+letter. These commands can be redefined.
+
+\subsection{For Quizzes}
+
+To bookmark a \texttt{shortquiz} or \texttt{quiz}, use \Com{quizpdfbookmark}.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{quizpdfbookmark\darg{\ameta{bookmark\_title}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\quizpdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic\indent It should be placed immediately following the beginning of the environments,
+\def\OR{\hspace*{-\amtIndent}\normalfont or,}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{shortquiz}\quizpdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+!OR
+\begin{quiz}{!ameta(quiz_name)}\quizpdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Unlike bookmarking for exercises, the bookmark command for quizzes does not
+support bookmarking individual questions within the quiz.
+
+\newtopic Every bookmark title, \meta{bookmark\_title}, for a
+\texttt{shortquiz} environment has a suffix defined with the
+\Com{sqbookmarkfmt} command, the default definition is
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\sqbookmarkfmt}{Short Quiz \@shortquizCnt.\space}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The command \cs{@shortquizCnt} is a macro (not a counter)
+that contains the current short quiz count. This command can be redefined.
+
+\newtopic Every bookmark title, \ameta{bookmark\_title}, for a \texttt{quiz} environment has a
+suffix defined with the \Com{qzbookmarkfmt} command, the
+default definition is
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\qzbookmarkfmt}{Quiz \@quizCnt.\space}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The command \cs{@quizCnt} is a macro (not a counter)
+that contains the current quiz count. This command can be redefined.
+
+\redpoint \cs{quizpdfbookmark} interacts with the command \Com{titleQuiz}.
+(for more information on this, see \hyperref[titleQuiz]{Section~\ref*{titleQuiz}}
+and \hyperref[titleQuizSQ]{Section~\ref*{titleQuizSQ}}, pages~\pageref*{titleQuiz}
+and~\pageref*{titleQuizSQ}, to learn about \cs{title\-Quiz} for quizzes and short quizzes, respectively.) When a quiz has
+a defined title, as defined
+by the \cs{titleQuiz}, and the argument of \cs{quizpdfbookmark} is left empty,
+the value passed to \cs{titleQuiz} is used as the bookmark text. Thus, the code
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\titleQuiz{Differentiation Quiz}
+\begin{quiz}{MyDiffQuiz}\quizpdfbookmark{}
+...
+\end{quiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+will bookmark the quiz under the name ``Differentiation Quiz.''
+
+
+\subsection{Final Note}
+
+If the bookmarks for exercises, or parts of the exercises, or quizzes do not appear,
+you may have to increase the \texttt{tocdepth}. Exerquiz sets this at
+\verb!\setcounter{tocdepth}{5}!.
+
+\section{Extending \AcroT{} with \texttt{dljslib} and \texttt{insdljs}}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} Package, especially the math fill-in question, is quite
+programmable. In this section, we discuss two methods of extending the
+capabilities of the \AcroB: (1) through the use of the package \texttt{dljslib},
+which is a JavaScript library of extensions; (2) by writing your own custom
+extensions using the \texttt{insdljs} package for inserting JavaScripts into the
+PDF document.
+
+\subsection{Using the \texttt{dljslib} Package}\label{sss:dljslib}
+
+The \texttt{dljslib} Package is actually a ``library'' of JavaScript
+functions. At the time of this writing, the library has JavaScripts that can
+process answers to math fill-in questions where an \textit{equation}
+or a \textit{vector} answer is expected. There is also a JavaScript compare
+function that properly evaluates an answer when an indefinite integral is
+expected. See the documentation that accompanies the package (by latexing
+\texttt{dljslib.dtx}) for details of how to use the library.
+
+\redpoint For full documentation of \textsf{dljslib} package, see \Nameref{part:dljslib}.
+
+%\redpoint \textbf{Equation handling.} See the sample file \texttt{jqzequat.tex} for examples
+%of posing and evaluating questions that expect an equation as the response. Below is
+%a portion of the preamble of that file; basically, to use one or more of the JavaScripts in
+%the JavaScript library, you specify that option \cs{usepackage} command for \texttt{dljslib}
+%package. In this case, we want to process equations so type\dots
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%\documentclass{article}
+%\usepackage{amsmath,amscd}
+%\usepackage[tight,pdftex,designi,nodirectory]{web}
+%\usepackage{exerquiz}
+%\usepackage[equations]{dljslib} % <--choose equations
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%
+%\redpoint \textbf{Vector Handling} There are also JavaScript functions for processing
+%vector answers. See the sample file \texttt{jqzspec.tex}. Actually this file does not
+%use the JavaScript library, but is more of a tutorial on how to use \cs{insdljs} to
+%write custom JavaScripts to process \textsf{exerquiz} math fill-in questions.
+%
+%The preamble of that document could actually be replaced with\dots
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%\documentclass{article}
+%\usepackage{amsmath,amscd}
+%\usepackage[tight,dvipdfm,designi,nodirectory]{web}
+%\usepackage{exerquiz}
+%\usepackage[vectors,indefIntegral]{dljslib}
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\noindent The \texttt{vectors} option specifies JavaScripts for processing
+%vector questions. The option \texttt{in\-def\-In\-te\-gral} is also
+%specified. This is because that in the file \texttt{jqzspec.tex} a
+%comparison function is developed for properly evaluating questions
+%in which an indefinite integral is expected.
+%
+%\redpoint \textbf{Comma Delimited Answers and Sets} The
+%\texttt{setSupport} option of the \textsf{dljslib} Package
+%provides basic support for math fill-in questions requiring a
+%(unordered) list of comma delimited numerical or symbolic answers,
+%or for a set. The demo and tutorial file is
+%\texttt{set\_test.tex}. See that file for more details.
+%
+%\redpoint In addition to the two above mentioned sets of JavaScripts there are
+%a couple of comparison functions, one for processing indefinite integrals (see
+%\texttt{dljs\_ex.tex}), and the other for using relative absolute error rather
+%than absolute error. Again, see the documentation of \texttt{dljslib.dtx} and
+%the sample file \texttt{jqzspec.tex}.
+
+\subsection{Using the \texttt{insdljs} Package}
+
+With the \texttt{insdljs} package you can write your own JavaScript functions
+right in the \LaTeX{} source file. These custom JavaScripts are then inserted
+into the section of the PDF document where the document level JavaScripts
+reside. This package is a stand-alone package, and does not need \textsf{exerquiz},
+though \textsf{exerquiz} now uses this package to insert its JavaScripts into
+the document.
+
+\redpoint Refer to \href{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}
+(relative link \href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}) for the \textsf{insdljs} and the \textsf{eforms}
+documentation. Also, see the sample file \texttt{insdljs\_ex.tex}
+for examples that do not use \textsf{exerquiz}, and the file
+\texttt{jqzspec.tex}, for examples that does use \textsf{exerquiz}.
+
+\section{Submitting a \protect\texttt{quiz} to a Web Server}
+
+Quizzes created by the \texttt{quiz} environment are entirely self-contained.
+They function within the Web browser (or from within the Adobe Reader) and
+do not communicate with any server. This kind of quiz is ideal for a
+do-it-yourself tutorial system, read by a well-motivated student who has the
+discipline to read the material and to take the quizzes in the spirit in which
+they are given.
+
+However, some educators, myself included, may wish to use the quizzes created
+by the \texttt{quiz} environment for classroom credit. It is necessary,
+therefore, for the student to be able to submit quiz results to a Web server
+which, in turn, should store the results to a database.
+
+In this section we discuss techniques of turning the quiz into something that
+can be submitted to a server.
+
+\redpoint I have released the \textsf{eq2db} Package, a {\LaTeX} macro package and
+server-side script to process \textsf{exerquiz} quizzes. See \Nameref{eq2db}.
+
+\subsection{Technical Info for ``Do It Yourself''}\label{DIY}
+
+All one really has to do is to redefine the `End Quiz' link or button to
+submit the results of the quiz to the Web server and CGI of your choice. Since
+the quiz itself is scored, (optionally) marked, with (optional) answers and
+solutions provided, the CGI simply stores the quiz results to a database.
+
+\subsubsection{Redefining `End Quiz'}
+
+I've written the `End Quiz' link (button) to have various
+programming hooks available to the developer.
+The following code is common to both \cs{eq@EndQuizLink} and
+\cs{eq@EndQuizButton}, the macros that control the action of
+the end quiz link and button, respectively.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+if (\minQuizResp(\thequestionno)) {\r\t
+ var f = this.getField("ScoreField.\curr@quiz");\r\t\t
+ if ( f != null )\r\t\t\t
+ this.getField("ScoreField.\curr@quiz").value
+ =(\eq@QuizTotalMsg);\r\t\t
+ \eq@submitURL
+ resetQuiz("\curr@quiz")\r\t
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint The code is a mixture of \LaTeX{} macros and JavaScript.
+You can see from this code, that there is a submit hook macro
+provided, \cs{eq@submitURL}. Normally, this macro has a definition
+of \cs{@empty}. A developer needs only redefine this macro
+accordingly; one would use the Acrobat JavaScript method
+\texttt{this.submitForm()} to do this. See the \textit{Acrobat JavaScript
+Scripting Reference} \cite{tech:AcroJS} for more detail about this
+method.
+
+\redpoint The code flow above is as follows: (1) Execute this code if the
+threshold has been met. (See \nameref{threshold}.) The text macro
+\cs{curr@quiz} holds the base name of the current quiz.
+
+(2) If the field \texttt{"ScoreField.\cs{curr@quiz}"} exists, then
+write the student's score to that field. (This is the ``Score: 2
+out of 3'' that you see in the demo quizzes.)
+
+(3) We then submit with the macro \cs{eq@submitURL}. (This would
+do nothing if its value is \cs{empty}, the default value.) At this
+point we call a \texttt{resetQuiz("\cs{curr@quiz}")} which
+sets some values in an array to indicate the state of this quiz.
+
+\subsubsection{Gathering ID Information with
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{textField}}{\textbackslash textField}}
+
+\redpoint What kind of information would one submit to a CGI?
+Well, there is the usual information concerning the identity of
+the student (Name, SSN, etc.) and the course, section and so on.
+
+This basic information can be gathered from the student by
+inserting text fields into the document to be filled in. \textsf{Exerquiz}
+provides the macro \cs{textField}\footnote{You can also use hyperref's
+\cs{TextField} command for this purpose as well.} for this purpose.
+For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\FirstName[2]{\textField
+ [\DV{First Name}\textFont{TiRo}\textSize{10}\textColor{0 0 1}]
+ {IdInfo.Name.First}{#1}{#2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This defines a text field with a name of \texttt{"IdInfo.Name.First"}, the two
+arguments are the width and height of the field that you want to create. E.g.,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\FirstName{100pt}{10pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent creates a text field 100pt wide and 10pt high.
+
+The \cs{textField} macro takes four parameters.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField[#1]#2#3#4
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The first (optional) parameter can be used to custom
+design the field; the second is the name of the field; the third
+and fourth are the width and height of the field desired.
+
+\redpoint See the file \texttt{eqformman.tex} on {\cAcroT} \textsf{eForm}
+support for complete documentation on
+\cs{textField}.
+
+\subsubsection{Gathering Quiz Specific Information with
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{eqSubmit}}{\textbackslash eqSubmit}}
+
+In addition to ID information on the one taking the quiz,
+specific information about what quiz is being taken and where the
+results of the quiz are to be stored are needed as well.
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} provides a basic macro, called \cs{eqSubmit}
+that can be used to gather basic formation of this type. The definition
+of it and related commands are given below:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\databaseName[1]{\def\db@Name{#1}}\def\db@Name{}
+\newcommand\tableName[1]{\def\db@Table{#1}}\def\db@Table{}
+\newcommand\eqCGI[1]{\def\eq@CGI{#1}}\def\eq@CGI{}
+\newcommand\eqSubmit[3]
+ {\eqCGI{"#1"}\databaseName{#2}\tableName{#3}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The meaning of the parameters are self-explanatory.
+
+Just prior to the quiz you can type:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\eqSubmit{http://www.myschool.edu/cgi-bin/myCGI.cgi}%
+ {CalcIII}{Quizzes}
+\begin{quiz*}{Quiz3} Answer each of the following.
+\begin{questions}
+...
+...
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\noindent
+Answers: \AnswerField\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Any redefinition of \cs{eq@submitURL} would then
+include the values of some or all of these text parameters:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\eq@CGI, \db@Name, \db@Table, \curr@quiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The last text macro is not gathered by \cs{eqSubmit}, it
+is known, however, at the time \cs{eq@submit\-URL} is expanded.
+
+\subsubsection{Some Variables to Submit}
+
+When you submit a quiz to a server, the values of \textit{all}
+fields are also submitted, unless you define specifically which
+fields are to be submitted.
+
+In addition to the ID info, you would like also to submit the results
+of the quiz itself. The relevant variables are as follows:
+\begin{questions}
+ \item The JavaScript variable \texttt{Score} has the number of
+ correct responses as its value.
+ \item The \LaTeX{} counter variable \cs{thequestionno} has the count
+ of the total number of questions in the quiz.
+ \item The JavaScript array \texttt{Responses} contains the responses of
+ the student: multiple choice and fill-in responses. The contents of this
+ array can be converted to a comma-delimited string by using the
+ \texttt{toString()} method, \texttt{Responses.toString()}.
+\end{questions}
+
+\noindent Now, how does one submit these values? The \cs{eq@submitURL}
+command can be used not only to submit the data, but to also
+populate certain \textit{hidden} fields with this information. The
+hidden data is submitted along with the ID info to be processed.
+You can use the \cs{textField} to create hidden text fields for
+this purpose. See the next section for a discussion of how to create
+hidden text fields.
+
+\subsection{Features \protect\textit{apropos} to Submitting}
+
+%\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{RespBoxEssay}}
+%{\textbackslash RespBoxEssay}: The Essay Question}
+%
+%Some disciplines make heavy use of the essay question. In an effort to
+%expand \textsf{exerquiz} to this question type, the \cs{RespBoxEssay}
+%question has been defined.
+%
+%The syntax is
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%\RespBoxEssay[<commands to modify the appearance>]
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%The default width of is \cs{linewidth} and the default height is
+%\verb+6\baselineskip+. For example,
+%
+%\begin{oQuestion}{bioNewton}
+%\redpoint Sketch the biography of Isaac Newton:\par
+%\RespBoxEssay[\rectH{3\baselineskip}]\par\smallskip
+%\end{oQuestion}
+%
+%This type of question is not evaluated by JavaScript, but is meant
+%to be submitted to a CGI for storage in a database. Later, the
+%instructor can review the essay answer.
+
+\subsubsection{Assigning Points}
+
+See \Nameref{sss:asignPts} for information on this subject.
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{NoPeeking}}
+{\textbackslash NoPeeking}}\label{sss:nopeek}
+
+If you execute the command \cs{NoPeeking} in the preamble of your
+document, or prior to a \texttt{quiz}, then any quiz question with
+solution will be protected somewhat from prying eyes.
+
+In this case, an open page action is placed on the first page of
+each solution. If the user (student) tries to view a quiz solution
+before doing the quiz, the \textcolor{blue}{Adobe Reader} will
+automatically change the page to the page containing the quiz and
+place an alert box on the screen saying that viewing the solution
+before taking the quiz is not permitted.
+
+To resort to the default behavior, use the \cs{AllowPeeking}
+command.
+
+The previous \texttt{quiz} has been surrounded with a
+\cs{NoPeeking}/\-\cs{AllowPeeking} pair. If you go to one
+of the \hyperlink{knuth}{solutions} to that quiz, you will see
+what happens. If nothing interesting happens, read the next
+red point.
+
+\redpoint Protection is removed when you click on `End Quiz' and
+restored when you click on some `Begin Quiz'.
+
+\section{Functions and Syntax supported by \textsf{Exerquiz}}
+
+In addition to the JavaScript built in math functions, exerquiz defines a number
+of other functions useful in mathematical work. These functions are typically input
+in a math question created by \cs{RespBoxMath}, for example, or in the function input
+field of an {\AcroFLeX} document.\footnote{The {\AcroFLeX} Graphing Bundle,
+\url{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acroflex.html}}
+
+Exerquiz also has its own syntax for entering algebraic expression in the
+\cs{Resp\-Box\-Math} field, these are document here as well.
+
+\subsection{Functions supported by \textsf{Exerquiz}}
+
+The following functions are built-in to JavaScript:
+
+\setlength{\extrarowheight}{1mm}
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{2mm}
+
+\noindent\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}lp{2.8in}>{\PBS\raggedright}p{1.5in}}
+\hline
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}l}{Function}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Description}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Usage}\\
+\hline
+\endfirsthead
+\hline
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}l}{Function}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Description}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Usage}\\
+\hline
+\endhead
+\hline
+\endfoot
+abs\textrm{, }|$\cdot$| & absolute value function, preferred form, \texttt{|$\cdot$|} & \texttt{|-3|=3}, \texttt{|x|}\\
+sin & the sine function & \texttt{sin(pi/2)=1}, see the definition of \texttt{pi} below\\
+cos & the cosine function & \texttt{cos(1.5)}, \texttt{cos(2*x)}\\
+tan & the tangent function & \texttt{tan(pi/4)=1}\\
+asin& inverse sine function & \texttt{asin(x)}\\
+acos& inverse cosine function & \texttt{acos(.2)}\\
+atan& inverse tangent function& \texttt{atan(-4)}\\
+exp & the natural exponential function, this function is also implemented as a \verb!e^x!,
+ where \texttt{e} is the natural number & \texttt{exp(-.5)}, \texttt{exp(-x\string^2)}\\
+log & the common logarithm. In JavaScript log is the natural logarithm, \textsf{exerquiz}
+ redefines this to be the common logarithm, use \texttt{ln} for natural logarithm & \texttt{log(10)=1}\\
+sqrt & the square root function & \texttt{sqrt(4.5)}\\
+ceil & the \texttt{ceil} function, \texttt{ceil(x)} is the smallest integer greater than or equal to \texttt{x} &
+\texttt{ceil(4.5)=5}\\
+floor&the \texttt{floor} function, where \texttt{floor(x)} is the largest integer less than or equal to \texttt{x} &
+\texttt{floor(4.5)=4}\\
+max & the maximum between two numbers & \texttt{max(2, 3.4) = 3.4}\\
+min & the minimum between two numbers & \texttt{max(2, 3.4) = 2}\\
+random & a pseudo-random number generator, this function is used internally by \textsf{exerquiz}, and is
+ available to users, \texttt{random()} returns a number between 0.0 and 1.0 & \texttt{random()}\\
+round & a rounding function, rounds a number to the nearest integer
+ & \texttt{round(4.5)= 5}, \texttt{round(-3.3)=-3}
+\end{longtable}
+
+\bigskip
+
+\newtopic The next set of functions are defined by \textsf{exerquiz}.
+
+\noindent\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}lp{2.8in}>{\PBS\raggedright}p{1.5in}}
+\hline
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}l}{Function}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Description}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Usage}\\
+\hline
+\endfirsthead
+\hline
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}l}{Function}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Description}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Usage}\\
+\hline
+\endhead
+\hline
+\endfoot
+cot & the \texttt{cotangent} function & \texttt{cot(1)}\\
+sec & the secant function & \texttt{sec(2)}\\
+csc & the \texttt{cosecant} function & \texttt{csc(2)}\\
+arcsin & the inverse sine function, same as \texttt{asin} & \texttt{arcsin(.5)}\\
+arccos & the inverse cosine function, same as \texttt{acos} & \texttt{arccos(-.5)}\\
+arctan & the inverse tangent function, same as \texttt{atan} & \texttt{arctan(1)}\\
+ln & the natural logarithm & \texttt{ln(3.4)}\\
+sinh & the hyperbolic sine function & \texttt{sinh(0)}, \texttt{sinh(x)}\\
+cosh & the hyperbolic cosine function & \texttt{cosh(0)}, \texttt{cosh(x)}\\
+tanh & the hyperbolic tangent function & \texttt{tanh(x)}\\
+coth & the hyperbolic cotangent function & \texttt{coth(x)}\\
+sech & the hyperbolic secant function & \texttt{sech(x)}\\
+csch & the hyperbolic cosecant function & \texttt{csch(x)}\\
+asinh & the inverse hyperbolic sine function & \texttt{asinh(0)}, \texttt{asinh(x)}\\
+acosh & the inverse hyperbolic cosine function & \texttt{acosh(0)}, \texttt{acosh(x)}\\
+atanh & the inverse hyperbolic tangent function & \texttt{atanh(x)}\\
+acoth & the inverse hyperbolic cotangent function & \texttt{acoth(x)}\\
+asech & the inverse hyperbolic secant function & \texttt{asech(x)}\\
+acsch & the inverse hyperbolic cosecant function & \texttt{acsch(x)}\\
+sgn & the sign function, \texttt{sgn(x)} is -1 if \texttt{x} is negative, 1 if \texttt{x} is positive, and 0 of
+\texttt{x} is zero
+ & \texttt{sgn(-3.2) = -1} \\
+cis & the polar representation of a complex number,
+ $\operatorname{cis}(\theta)=\cos(\theta)+\imath\sin(\theta)$. This function
+ is only defined if the \texttt{complex} option of \textsf{dljslib} is used.
+ & \texttt{cis(pi/3)}
+\end{longtable}
+
+\bigskip
+
+\newtopic There are several other \textsf{exerquiz}-defined
+functions that are available through options of the
+\textsf{dljslib}, these are \texttt{C} (combinations), \texttt{P}
+(permutations), and \texttt{fact} (permutations). See the section
+titled \Nameref{extNumerFuncs} for details.
+
+\paragraph*{Recognized Constants.} \textsf{Exerquiz} recognizes
+\texttt{PI} and \texttt{pi} as symbols for the mathematical constant
+$\pi\approx \text{3.14159}$. The letter \texttt{e} is recognized as
+the natural number, which is approximately 2.7182818285.
+
+\subsection{Syntax supported by \textsf{Exerquiz}}
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} attempts to make entering mathematics as easy and
+as natural as using a modern calculator. The following paragraphs
+outline the syntax of \textsf{exerquiz}. Authors should reproduce
+some form of these rules to their students, and perhaps some
+practice documents for them to test themselves with.
+
+\paragraph*{Grouping.} Algebraic expressions are grouped with
+matching parentheses~\texttt{(\,)}, brackets~\texttt{[\,]}, or
+braces~\texttt{\{\,\}}.
+
+\paragraph*{Spaces.} When the user enters a math expression, all
+spaces are removed before parsing of the expression begins.
+Students can write \texttt{1+(2+3)} or \texttt{1 + ( 2 + 3 )}, these
+are the same.
+
+\paragraph*{Addition and Subtraction.} These operations are
+performed using \texttt{+} and \texttt{-}, as expected. For example,
+\texttt{(x+1)-(x-2)}, \texttt{x+sin(x-pi)}
+
+\paragraph*{Multiplication and Division.} These operations are
+performed using \texttt{*} and \texttt{/}, as expected. For example,
+\texttt{2*x*(3*x+1)} and \texttt{(2*x-1)/(2*x+1)}.
+
+The use of the multiplication (\texttt{*}), is required, by default,
+and its use can be very tedious to the student. If you include the
+\textsf{dljslib} package with the \texttt{ImplMulti} option,
+\texttt{exerquiz} automatically inserts the multiplication symbol
+(\texttt{*}). The examples above, can be written as
+\texttt{2x(3x+1)} and \texttt{(2x-1)/(2x+1)}; it is recommended,
+therefore, that the \texttt{ImplMulti} option should normally be
+used. (Note: The use of \texttt{*} is still correct even when
+\texttt{ImplMulti} option is in effect.)
+
+\paragraph*{Powers and Exponents.} \textsf{Exerquiz} uses
+\texttt{\string^} to indicate exponents, for example,
+\texttt{x\string^2} means $x^2$. Other examples are \verb!17^(x+1)!,
+\verb!(x^2+1)^3!, \verb!(sin(x))^3!, and \verb!(x+1)^(2x+1)!.
+
+Recall that the letter \texttt{e} is recognized as the natural
+number, so \verb!e^{-x^2}! is the same as \verb!exp(-x^2)!.
+Normally, the use of \texttt{e} is preferred by students over the
+use of \texttt{exp}. For work in elementary mathematics, the
+existence of \texttt{exp} need not be even mentioned to the
+students.
+
+The difficulty of entering powers of functions is another issue for
+students. As illustrated above, in entering \verb!(sin(x))^3! or
+more complex expression, students find a source of difficulty, pain,
+and anguish. \textsf{Exerquiz} allows entering powers in the
+calculator style, the student can enter \verb!sin(x)^3! for
+$(\sin(x))^3$ (often written as $\sin^3(x)$) or \verb!3^sin(x)! to
+mean $3^{\sin(x)}$. Expressions like \verb!2^2^3! are interpreted as
+\verb!(2^2)^3! (the typeset version is $(2^2)^3$), which evaluates
+to 64. The use of parentheses is needed if the desired expression is
+$2^{2^3}$; this expression needs to be typed as \verb!2^(2^3)!,
+which evaluates to 256.
+
+If the \texttt{ImplMulti} option of the \texttt{dljslib} package is
+in effect, powers of functions can be entered in a more
+mathematically traditional, for example \verb!sin^2(x)! is
+recognized as the same as \verb!sin(x)^2!, or \verb!(sin(x))^2!;
+consequently, \verb!sin^2(x)^2! is the same as \verb!sin(x)^4!!
+
+\part{The \protect\textsf{eq2db} Package}\chgCurrLblName{The \textsf{eq2db} Package}\label{eq2db}
+
+\newtopic
+As the name suggests, Converts a self-contained exerquiz quiz to one that is
+submitted to a server-side script. The {\LaTeX} package itself does very
+little other than to define some useful commands that make it easy to convert
+a self-contained quiz into one that is submitted to server-side script.
+
+The \texttt{eq2db} currently has several options, including \texttt{eqRecord}, \opt{eqText},
+\opt{eqEmail}, and \opt{submitAs}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[eqText,submitAs=!anglemeta(!upshape(FDF|HTML))]{eq2db}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The option \texttt{eqText} and \texttt{submitAs=FDF} sets up the quiz to use
+an ASP (Active Server Page) that I have written. This ASP, named naturally,
+\texttt{eqRecord.asp}, takes the data and stores it to a database, such as
+Microsoft Access.
+
+%You can also submit your form data as HTML, as the two websites
+%demonstrate.\footnote{These websites were prepared as a script demonstration
+%site that is referenced in my yet-to-be submitted book \AEBBook~\cite{book:AEBB}.}
+%\begin{quote}
+%\url{http://faculty.nwfsc.edu/web/math/storyd/dps/}
+%\end{quote}
+%The above web page is on a \app{Windows} server hosted by Northwest Florida State
+%College (NWFSC). The server-side
+%script is written as ASP pages using VBScript.
+
+There is a website that you can experience submitting form data from a
+PDF.\footnote{This website was prepared as a script demonstration site that
+is referenced in my yet-to-be submitted book \AEBBook~\cite{book:AEBB}.}
+\begin{quote}
+\url{http://www.acrotex.net/dps/}
+\end{quote}
+This web page is on a \app{Linux} server hosted by {\AcroTeX.Net}. The
+server-side script is written with PHP.
+
+\redpoint In recent years, the browser technology has evolved in an unwelcome
+direction. Most web browsers do not support the Adobe Reader plug-in, hence,
+Reader no longer appears in the browser window, so essential for a good user
+experience. Most browsers use their own `native' PDF viewer, which does
+respond to links, but knows nothing about JavaScript. The only browser, as of
+this writing, that still supports the Adobe Reader plug-in (or ActiveX) is
+Microsoft Internet Explorer~11. For online, interactive work with PDF, the
+document consumer must use Microsoft Internet Explorer~11.
+
+\redpoint For more details, see the package documentation,
+\texttt{eq2dbman.pdf}.\footnote{The absolute URL is
+\url{\bUrl/acrotex/eq2dbman.pdf}} The \textsf{eq2db} package is available
+from CTAN (\url{ctan.org/pkg/eq2db}).\endredpoint
+
+
+\part{{\AcroT} \protect\textsf{eForm} Support}
+
+\newtopic
+In this document, we describe the support for form elements in an
+{\cAcroT} document. The PDF Specifications indicate there are four
+different categories of fields for a total of seven types of
+fields.
+
+\begin{questions}
+\setbox0=\hbox{(d)}
+\def\I#1{\makebox[\wd0]{\color{blue}(\hfil#1\hfil)}\ }
+
+ \item \textbf{Button Fields}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\I{a}] \textbf{Push Button}
+ \item[\I{b}] \textbf{Check Box}
+ \item[\I{c}] \textbf{Radio Button}
+ \end{description}
+ \item \textbf{Choice Fields}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\I{a}] \textbf{List Box}
+ \item[\I{b}] \textbf{Combo Box}
+ \end{description}
+ \item \textbf{Text Fields}
+ \item \textbf{Signature Fields}
+
+\end{questions}
+The {\cAcroB} does not support \textit{signature fields}, this
+leaves six types of fields. Commands for creating each of the
+remaining six types will be discussed.
+
+The \pkg{hyperref} Package (Rahtz, Oberdiek \textit{et al})
+provides support for the same set of form fields; however, not all
+features of these fields can be accessed through the
+\pkg{hyperref} commands. I was determined to write my own set
+of commands which would be sufficiently comprehensive and
+extendable to suit all the needs of the \cAcroB. All the quiz
+environments have been modified to use this new set of form
+commands, in this way, there is a uniform treatment of all form
+fields in \cAcroB.
+
+\redpoint The documentation for \textsf{eForm} support is too voluminous
+to include in this already voluminous document. See
+\href{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf} (relative link
+\href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}) for complete details.
+
+
+\part{The AeB JavaScript Library}\label{part:dljslib}
+
+\newtopic
+The \textsf{dljslib} package---document level JavaScript
+library---is a companion to \textsf{exerquiz} and utilizes
+\textsf{insdljs} package. It is a library of JavaScript code that
+can be referenced in the preamble of a {\LaTeX} document, the code
+is then extracted from the package files, and inserted into the {\LaTeX}
+source using the \texttt{insDLJS} environment.
+
+The code belonging to the library supports the processing
+of the quizzes and short quizzes produced by \textsf{exerquiz}; they
+extend the capabilities of the core features of the
+\textsf{exerquiz} quizzes. Many of the JavaScript functions in the
+library were contributed by users of AeB.
+
+\newtopic My deep appreciation goes out to the contributors to the AeB JavaScript library.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The options \texttt{unordered}, \texttt{factors},
+ \texttt{point} and \texttt{intervals} were written by Dr. Bruce Wagner
+ for an online grading system developed by Drs.\ Bruce Wagner and David
+ Arnold, and Mr.~Jacob Miles-Prystowsky. Dr. Robert Marik contributed to the \texttt{intervals} option, as well.
+ \item The options \texttt{nodec}, \texttt{noBinFact} and \texttt{combinatorics} were contributed by
+ Ross Moore and Frances Griffin, and were developed for their
+ \href{http://rutherglen.ics.mq.edu.au/~macqtex/}{MacQ\TeX}
+ online testing system.\footnote{\url{http://rutherglen.ics.mq.edu.au/~macqtex/}}
+\end{itemize}
+The AeB JavaScript library continues to accept contributions from AeB developers.
+
+\section{Usage and Options}
+
+As with all {\LaTeX} package, you use \textsf{dljslib} as follows,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!ameta(options)]{dljslib}
+\end{Verbatim}
+where \ameta{options} is a comma-delimited list of options. With each of the
+\ameta{options}, the associated JavaScript code is brought into the {\LaTeX}
+source document. The JavaScript functions, then, are available to your
+\textsf{exerquiz} quizzes.
+
+A list of the \ameta{options} of the \textsf{dljslib} package are listed below,
+and each are described in detail in the sections that follow.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \texttt{ImplMulti}: Use this option to allow implied multiplication, e.g., the user can input
+ \texttt{2xsin(x)} instead of \texttt{2*x*sin(x)}. See \Nameref{ImplMulti}.
+\item \texttt{equations}: Use this option to process questions that take an equation as an answer.
+ See \Nameref{equations}.
+\item \texttt{vectors}: Use this option to process questions that take a vector as an answer.
+ See \Nameref{vectors}.
+\item \texttt{setSupport}: Use this option to process questions that take a set as an answer.
+ See \Nameref{setSupport}.
+\item \texttt{unordered}: Use this option to process questions that take an unordered list as an answer.
+ See \Nameref{unordered}.
+\item \texttt{factors}: Use this option to process questions that take a factored form of a polynomial.
+ See \Nameref{factors}.
+\item \texttt{point}: Use this option to process questions that take an ordered pair $(x,y)$ as an answer.
+ See \Nameref{point}.
+\item \texttt{intervals}: Use this option to process questions that take an interval, or a union of intervals
+ as an answer. See \Nameref{intervals}.
+\item \texttt{indefIntegral}: Use this compare function when evaluating the response to an indefinite integral.
+ See \Nameref{indefIntegral}.
+\item \texttt{nodec}: Use this filter function to deny the use of decimal numbers in an answer.
+ See \Nameref{nodec}.
+\item \texttt{noBinFac}: User this filter function to deny the use of \texttt{combinatorial} functions.
+ See \Nameref{noBinFac}.
+\item \texttt{limitArith}: Use any of this collection of filter functions to limit the use of arithmetic operations
+ in an answer. See \Nameref{limitArith}.
+\item \texttt{combinatorics}: Use this option to add combinatorial functions. The user may use these in an answer,
+ unless denied by the \texttt{noBinFact} filter.
+ See \Nameref{combinatorics}.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\newtopic For a document author that is building a system of quizzes and who regularly
+uses a subset of these options, sets of options can be grouped
+together into a custom option. Use the \texttt{libcusopt.opt} file
+to declare your own sets of options. These declarations should be a
+combination of existing options. For example, The declarations in the
+\texttt{libcusopt.opt} file
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\DeclareOption{procrespgrp}{\includeOptions{%
+ vectors,setSupport,equations,intervals,limitArith,%
+ unordered,point,factors,ImplMulti}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+creates a new option for \textsf{dljslib} called
+\texttt{procrespgrp} which bundles together all frequently used
+options. The file \texttt{libcusopt.opt} can be placed in the
+{\LaTeX} search path, but it's perhaps best to put it in your source
+file, so that the options are local to that folder. The command
+\cs{includeOptions} is defined in the \textsf{insdljs} package.
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_apw} A sample \texttt{libcusopt.opt} is distributed with the {\AEB},
+%this sample file consists of the example given above, and is used
+%by the sample file \texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}, which can be found in the folder \texttt{dljslib\_examples}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=959} A sample \texttt{libcusopt.opt} is distributed with the
+{\AEB}, this sample file consists of the example given above, and is used by
+the sample file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=959}{dljslib\_apw.pdf}}.
+
+
+
+
+\newtopic The JavaScript functions are organized into five categories:
+\begin{questions}
+ \item \nameref{piExt} are support functions whose capabilities are built
+ into the core \textsf{exerquiz} package. When \textsf{exerquiz} detects the presence of these
+ support functions, it utilizes them seamlessly.
+ \item \nameref{respfunc} are functions the take over the task of processing the user input. Discussion
+ of these functions begins on page~\pageref*{respfunc}.
+ \item \nameref{compareFuncs} are functions that perform the comparison between the author's answer
+ and the student's answer. Based on this comparison, the student's answer is judged correct or not.
+ Refer to page~\pageref*{compareFuncs} for the compare functions.
+ \item \nameref{filterUserResp} are functions that are called immediately after the user
+ commits the response. A filter function can examine the response before passing it on to
+ the response function. The filter function can cancel the user input if the input does not
+ meet certain criterion. The filter functions begin on page~\pageref*{filterUserResp}.
+ \item \nameref{extNumerFuncs} extend the collection of built-in functions that perform
+ numerical calculations. These numerical functions are discussed beginning on page~\pageref*{extNumerFuncs}.
+\end{questions}
+
+\def\respBoxPara{%
+\texttt{\hyperref[paraRespBox]{\string\RespBoxMath[\#1]\#2(\#3)[\#4]\#5\#6\#7\#8[\#9]*\#10}}}
+
+\subsection{Parse Input Extensions}\label{piExt}
+
+This type of JavaScript functions are support functions whose
+capabilities are built into the core \textsf{exerquiz} package.
+When \textsf{exerquiz} detects the presence of these support
+functions, it utilizes them seamlessly.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{ImplMulti}}\label{ImplMulti}
+
+The default behavior for processing a math fill-in question is to
+require the student to insert `\texttt*' for multiplication and to
+enclose any function being raised to a power in parentheses, e.g.
+\verb+x*(sin(x))^2+. This becomes quite tiresome if the expression to be entered
+is complicated. The \texttt{ImplMulti} option enables the student to use
+\emph{implied multiplication} and \emph{simplified exponentiation}.
+
+The \texttt{ImplMulti} option loads two JavaScript functions, \texttt{Ck4Products}
+and \texttt{Ck4Expo\-nents}. The latter implements the notation, \verb+sin^2(x)+
+for $\sin^2(x)$, and is equivalent to $(\sin(x))^2$. A more complex exponent must be enclosed enclosed
+in parentheses, for example \verb-ln^(x+1)(x)-. The former function, \texttt{Ck4Products},
+inserts the multiplication symbol, `\texttt{*}', wherever multiplication is implied. For example,
+\verb+xysin(xy)+ becomes \verb+x*y*sin(x*y)+.
+
+\newtopic\textcolor{red}{Important:} If loaded, \texttt{exerquiz}
+will automatically use these two functions in any math fill-in question, no further action is needed.
+
+%\exPDF{jquiztst} Many of the demo files that come with AeB use the \texttt{ImplMulti} option, one such
+%representative file is \texttt{jquiztst.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=810} Many of the demo files that come with AeB use the \texttt{ImplMulti} option, one such
+representative file is \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=810}{jquiztst.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsection{Response Functions} \label{respfunc}
+
+For fill-in questions, a response function is one that is called immediately after the user
+enters and commits an answer. The default response function that processes the user's response
+is \texttt{ProcResp}. The $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument of the \cs{RespBoxMath} command,
+\begin{equation*}
+ \text{\respBoxPara}
+\end{equation*}
+is used to specify another response function. This section discusses the alternate
+response functions available in the library, and gives examples of each.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{equations}} \label{equations}
+
+Use this option to process questions for which an equation is the
+expected answer. This option defines the JavaScript function
+\texttt{ProcRespEq}. When using a math fill-in question (the
+\cs{RespBoxMath} command), this function is placed in the optional
+$\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument, the one that follows \texttt{*}.
+See \Nameref{ss:respbox} for a description of the parameters of
+\cs{RespBoxMath}
+
+\newtopic The following question goes inside a \texttt{quiz} or
+\texttt{shortquiz} environment.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\RespBoxMath{y = 4 * x - 3}(xy){4}{.0001}{[0,1]x[0,1]}*{ProcRespEq}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{jqzequat} The demo file \texttt{jqzequat.tex} includes the
+%above example as well as other in the context of a working
+%\texttt{shortquiz}, found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples} folder.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=951} The demo file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=951}{jqzequat.pdf}} includes the above
+example as well as other in the context of a working \texttt{shortquiz}.
+
+\newtopic Alert box message: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\equationsAlertMsg{"An equation is expected"}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{vectors}}\label{vectors}
+
+Use this option to process questions for which a vector is the
+expected answer. This option defines the JavaScript function
+\texttt{ProcVec}. When using a math fill-in question (the
+\cs{RespBoxMath} command), this function is placed in the optional
+$\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument,
+the one that follows \texttt{*}. See \Nameref{ss:respbox} for a
+description of the parameters of \cs{RespBoxMath}.
+
+\newtopic The following question goes inside a \texttt{quiz} or
+\texttt{shortquiz} environment. The premise of these two questions
+is that the definitions of $\vec a$, $\vec b$ and $f(t)$ are given:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\item $\vec a + \vec b =
+ \RespBoxMath{<4, 4, 4>}{1}{.0001}{[2,4]}*{ProcVec}$
+\item $\vec f'(t) =
+ \RespBoxMath{<e^t, 2*t, cos(t)>}(t){3}{.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcVec}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first question takes a three component vector of numerical values, the second
+takes a three component vector of function values.
+
+%\exPDF{jqzvector} These two examples were taken from the demo file \texttt{jqzvector.tex},
+%which includes both \texttt{quiz} and \texttt{shortquiz} environments, found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples} folder.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=949} These two examples were taken from the demo file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=949}{jqzvector.pdf}},
+which includes both \texttt{quiz} and \texttt{shortquiz} environments.
+
+
+\newtopic Alert box messages: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\vectorsErrorMsgi{"I'm looking for a vector.
+ You need to use proper vector notation,
+ try using angle brackets <....>."}
+\newcommand\vectorsErrorMsgii{"Angle brackets are not balanced.
+ Check the expression you typed in."}
+\newcommand\vectorsErrorMsgiii{"Incorrect number of components.
+ The answer requires " + aCorrAns.length + " components."}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{setSupport}} \label{setSupport}
+
+We introduce three JavaScript (response) functions
+for handling a set of answers or a comma delimited list of answers, these
+are \texttt{ProcRespSetNum}, \texttt{ProcRespSetSym}, and
+\texttt{ProcRespListFormula}. The first function is for numerical
+answers, the second for simple symbolic answers. These JavaScript response
+functions are passed to \cs{RespBoxMath} as the $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument.
+
+%\exPDF{set_test} The demo file for these three
+%response functions is \texttt{set\_test.tex}; the examples below
+%were taken from that file, found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples}
+%folder.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=953} The demo file for these three
+response functions is \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=953}{set\_test.pdf}}.
+
+
+\newtopic\indent The functions \texttt{ProcRespSetNum}, \texttt{ProcRespSetSym} can
+handle (math fill-in) questions whose answers are a \textit{set of
+numbers (symbols)} or a comma delimited \emph{list of numbers
+(symbols)}.
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespSetNum:}\label{para:ProcRespSetNum} The function can handle (math fill-in)
+questions whose answers are a \textit{set of numbers} or a
+comma delimited \textit{list of numbers}.
+
+\newtopic This example takes a comma-delimited
+list as its expected response. After the student enters the
+response, the answer is formatted as a set, with enclosing braces,
+like so \verb!{ ... }!. The student does not enter the braces, the
+JavaScript does after the comma-delimited list is entered and
+committed.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+$(x+1)^2 (x+3) = 0$, $S = \RespBoxMath[\AddAAFormat{\formatAsSet}
+ \rectW{.75in}\textSize{0}]{-1,-3}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespSetNum}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The formatting of answer is accomplished by passing
+\verb!\AddAAFormat{\formatAsSet}! as an optional argument of
+\cs{RespBoxMath}. The command \cs{formatAsSet} expands to a
+JavaScript function that is defined when the \texttt{setSupport}
+option is taken. The little-known key \cs{AddAAFormat} is
+defined in \textsf{exerquiz} and is specifically designed for inserting
+special formatting into a math fill-in response. The use of the set
+formatting is optional.
+
+\newtopic This next example again uses \texttt{ProcRespSetNum}. The
+equation has repeated roots. To require the student to enter the
+repeated roots, just list them as part of the answer argument.
+%Here,the set notation is not used (since it would be incorrect
+%\verb~{-1, 1/2, 2, 2, 2} = {-1, 1/2, 2}~).
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+$(x+1)(2x-1)(x-2)^3 = 0$, $x = \RespBoxMath[\rectW{.75in}\textSize{0}]
+ {-1, 1/2, 2, 2, 2}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespSetNum}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespSetSym:} The function can handle (math fill-in)
+questions whose answers are a \textit{set of symbols}.
+
+This function can handle simple symbolic answers. The variable list should
+be the ``universal set'' of the problem.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\def\U{a,b,c,d,e,f,g} % define a universal set
+$A \cap B = \RespBoxMath[\AddAAFormat{\formatAsSet}
+ \rectW{.75in}\textSize{0}]{c,d}(\U){1}{.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespSetSym}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespListFormula:} This function can handle a (math fill-in)
+question whose answer is a comma-delimited list of expressions. Similar to
+\texttt{ProcVec}, but the angle brackets are not used to specify the vector.
+
+\newtopic In this example, taken from \texttt{set\_test.tex}, a
+vector response is required, but without the enclosing angle
+brackets.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$\vec f'(t) = \RespBoxMath{e^t, 2*t,cos(t)}(t){3}
+ {.0001}{0}{1}*{ProcRespListFormula}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+You can also define your own formatting function, to format
+the input.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{unordered}} \label{unordered}
+
+This option defines the JavaScript (response) function
+\texttt{ProcRespSetFormula} that will grade an \emph{unordered list} of
+formulas, such as \texttt{x}, \verb!x^2!, \verb!x^3!. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+Some question requiring an unordered list of responses.
+\RespBoxMath{x,x^2,x^3}{10}{.0001}{[1,2]}*{ProcRespSetFormula}
+\end{Verbatim}
+A correct answer is a list of the monomials \verb!x!,\verb!x^2!,\verb!x^3! in any order.
+As usual, this JavaScript response function is passed to
+\cs{RespBoxMath} as the $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument.
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_apw} The demo file that uses the \texttt{unordered} option is
+%\texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}, which can be found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples} folder
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=959} The demo file that uses the \texttt{unordered} option is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=959}{dljslib\_apw.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{factors}} \label{factors}
+
+The factors option defines \texttt{ProcRespFactors}, passed to
+\cs{RespBoxMath} as the $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument. The
+response function \texttt{ProcRespFactors} is used for grading
+polynomial factoring questions. For example, if a polynomial factors
+as \verb!-5x^2(x-4)(x+2)!, then the answer is only unique up to the
+order of factors and a change of sign on an even number of factors.
+The student could respond with \verb!-5x^2(x+2)(x-4)! or
+\verb!5x^2(-x+4)(x+2)! or \verb!-5(x-4)(x+2)x^2!. The function
+should grade all of these variations correctly; however, it will not
+grade \verb!-(x-4)(x+2)5x^2! as correct. The leading coefficient, if
+there is one, must be placed at the beginning, which conforms to our
+usual conventions.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+Completely factor the polynomial $x^3-4x^2 + 2x - 8$.
+\RespBoxMath{(x^2+2)(x-4)}{10}{0.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespFactors}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Note that \texttt{ProcRespFactors} is passed to
+\cs{RespBoxMath} as the $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument.
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_apw} The demo file that uses the \texttt{factors} option is
+%\texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}, which can be found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples} folder
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=959} The demo file that uses the \texttt{factors} option is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=959}{dljslib\_apw.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{point}} \label{point}
+
+The response function \texttt{ProcPoint} is an almost exact copy of your
+\texttt{ProcVec}, but uses parentheses instead of angle brackets as
+delimiters. Used with questions that have a point $(x,y)$ as the
+answer.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+Calculate the derivative of $\vec f(t) = (e^t,e^(t^2))$.
+\RespBoxMath{(e^t,2te^t)}(t){10}{0.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcPoint}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\texttt{ProcPoint} is passed to
+\cs{RespBoxMath} as the $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument.
+
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_apw}The demo file that uses the \texttt{point} option is
+%\texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=959} The demo file that uses the \texttt{point} option is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=959}{dljslib\_apw.pdf}}.
+
+
+\newtopic Alert box messages: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\pointErrorMsgi{"I'm looking for a point.
+ You need to use proper point notation."}
+\newcommand\pointErrorMsgii{"Parentheses are not balanced."}
+\newcommand\pointErrorMsgiii{"Incorrect number of components.
+ The answer requires " + aCorrAns.length+" components."}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{intervals}} \label{intervals}
+
+\texttt{ProcRespIntervals} is for grading questions that have an
+interval or union of intervals as the answer. Examples of answers
+supported by this function are listed below:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+(2,3)
+[2,3]
+(-inf,4)
+(-inf,4]
+(6,inf)
+[6,inf)
+(2,3)U[8,9)
+(-inf,6)U(9,inf)
+(-inf,6]U[7,8)U(9,inf)
+\end{Verbatim}
+Here \texttt{inf} for infinity and the capital letter \texttt{U} for
+the union symbol. Note also that intervals in a union can appear
+in any order.
+
+The \texttt{ProcRespIntervals} function has been modified by Robert Marik
+to allow intervals with end points \texttt{ln(2)}, \texttt{exp(4)} or \texttt{sqrt(3)}.
+Thus, intervals of the form
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+(ln(2),ln(3)]U(exp(10),inf)
+\end{Verbatim}
+are recognized by this procedure.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\RespBoxMath{(-inf,4]U[5,inf)}{10}
+ {.0001}{\viidna}*{ProcRespIntervals}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\Important Problems with unbalanced parentheses while
+authoring and building the PDF file. The code below
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\intervalbox{(-inf,4)U[5,inf)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+the right parenthesis of the second interval does not have a
+matching left parenthesis. This causes problems with Acrobat
+Distiller. As a work around, escape the odd parenthesis (using
+\cs{eqbs}), like so \verb!\intervalbox{(-inf,4)U[5,inf\eqbs)}!,
+ where \cs{eqbs} is defined in the \textsf{insdljs} package.
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_apw}The demo file that uses the \texttt{factors} option is
+%\texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=959} The demo file that uses the \texttt{factors} option is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=959}{dljslib\_apw.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{complex}}\label{complex}
+
+This option extends the ability of \textsf{exerquiz} to process questions
+that are expecting a complex number as an answer.
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespComplex:} The \texttt{complex} option defines
+the function \texttt{ProcRespComplex}, which is specified in the usual way, as seen below.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+$(3+3i)+(4+5i) = \RespBoxMath{7+8i}{3}{0.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespComplex}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \texttt{complex} option also defines the \texttt{cis} function,
+the definition of which is
+$\operatorname{cis}(x)=\cos(x)+\imath\sin(x)$. When \texttt{complex}
+is not loaded, this function is undefined, and will be caught by the
+parser of exerquiz as a syntax error. If \texttt{complex} is loaded
+and the user enters the \texttt{cis} function in a non-complex
+problem, the user's answer is not flagged as a syntax error and will
+most probably be scored as \emph{wrong}. The exerquiz implementation of the \texttt{cis}
+function, does not, at this time, support powers of the \texttt{cis} function, the parser
+attempts to find expressions of the form \texttt{cis\string^}, flag it, and emit
+an alert message, see below. This implementation does not detect powers of the form
+\texttt{(cis(x))\string^2}, however.
+
+The next two functions are due to Bruce Wagner, with modifications by D. P. Story.
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespListComplex:} This response function evaluates an \emph{ordered} list
+of comma-delimited complex numbers. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+If $z=4(\cos x+i\sin x)$, compute $z^2$ and $z^3$, in that order.
+\RespBoxMath{16*cis(2x),64*cis(3x)}{4}{0.0001}
+ {[0,1]}*{ProcRespListComplex}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespSetComplex:} This response function evaluates an \emph{unordered} list
+of comma-delimited complex numbers. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+ Find all real and complex solutions of the equation $x^2=-9$.
+ Express your answer(s) in rectangular form $a+bi$.
+ \RespBoxMath{3i,-3i}{4}{0.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespSetComplex}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_complex}The demo file that uses the \texttt{complex} option is
+%\texttt{dljslib\_complex.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1129} The demo file that uses the \texttt{complex} option is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1129}{dljslib\_complex.pdf}}.
+
+
+\newtopic Alert box messages: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\complexPowerAlertMsg}{%
+ "Powers of i (for example, i^2, i^3) are not supported,
+ replace powers of i with their complex equivalents."
+}
+\newcommand{\complexCisAlertMsg}{%
+ "The cis function does not support exponents. Write,
+ for example, cis^3(x) as cis(3*x), instead."}
+\newcommand{\alertNotComplexMsg}{%
+ "The expression is not in the form of a complex
+ number, a+bi"}
+\def\emptyCompComplexMsg(#1){%
+ "You entered nothing for the component "
+ +(#1+1)+" of your answer. Please enter a complex number."
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The latter definition takes a delimited argument, necessary since it executes
+within a verbatim environment where braces \texttt{\{} and \texttt{\}} are
+not grouping delimiters.
+
+\subsection{Compare Functions} \label{compareFuncs}
+
+Compare functions are used to compare the author's answer with the
+student's answer. Based on the comparison, the student's answer is
+judged correct, or not. The \textsf{exerquiz} package has two
+built-in compare functions: \texttt{diffCompare} (the default) and
+\texttt{reldiffCompare}. The former makes the comparison based on absolute differences
+\[
+ \texttt{diffCompare} = |\,\text{Author Ans} - \text{Student Ans}\,|
+\]
+while the latter uses absolute relative differences to make the comparison
+\[
+ \texttt{reldiffCompare} = \frac{|\,\text{Author Ans} - \text{Student Ans}\,|}
+ {|\text{Author Ans}|}
+\]
+Comparison functions are passed through the $\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument of \cs{RespBoxMath},
+if no such argument is passed, \texttt{diffCompare} is used.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{indefIntegral}}\label{indefIntegral}
+
+The answer to an indefinite integral is non-unique; however all
+answers differ by a constant. This compare function is used with
+indefinite integrals. Note the name of the function is
+\texttt{indef\-Com\-pare}, this is the name you use to call the
+function. To use this compare function, insert its name in optional
+$\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument,
+\begin{equation*}
+ \text{\respBoxPara}
+\end{equation*}
+that's the argument that follows the interval specification.
+
+
+An example of usage of this function is found in the sample file
+\texttt{dljslib\_ex.tex}, referenced below; from that file we have:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$\displaystyle\int\sin(x)\,dx =
+ \RespBoxMath{-cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{[0,1]}[indefCompare]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_ex} See the demo file
+%\texttt{dljslib\_ex.tex} for an example of indefinite integration
+%comparison. Numerous other files use indefinite integration as well.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=961} See the demo file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=961}{dljslib\_ex.pdf}} for an example of
+indefinite integration comparison.
+
+
+\subsubsection{satisfyEq}
+
+The \texttt{satisfyEq} library of procedures supports the type of question where
+the student is asked to enter one or more points that satisfy an equation.
+
+We pose a problem where the student is asked to enter an order pair or triple
+that satisfies an equation. For example
+
+\newtopic\makebox[0pt][r]{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$\enspace}%
+\begin{oQuestion}{satisfyEqQuiz}%
+Enter a point that lies on the line $2x+3y=6$, the answer is an
+ordered pair of numbers, for example $(1,2)$.
+\begin{equation*}
+ \text{A point is }\RespBoxMath[%
+ \rectW{1.5in}\textSize{0}]{2x+3y-6}(xy){1}{.0001}{\viidna}*{ProcRespEvalEq}\kern1bp
+ \CorrAnsButton{various, such as (0,2)}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{oQuestion}
+The verbatim listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\RespBoxMath[\rectW{1.5in}\textSize{0}]{2x+3y-6}(xy){1}
+ {.0001}{\viidna}*{ProcRespEvalEq}\kern1bp
+ \CorrAnsButton{various, such as (0,2)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Line~(2) shows the placement of one of the procedures, \texttt{ProcRespEvalEq},
+that is part of \texttt{satisfyEq}.
+
+\newtopic There are four procedures in this set:
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \texttt{ProcRespEvalEq}: Supports a single equation, the answer
+ is a single ordered $n$-tuple, the entries are allowed to be zero.
+ \item \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqNonZero}: Supports a single equation, the
+ answer is a single ordered n-tuple, the entries are \emph{not
+ allowed} to be zero.
+ \item \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqList}: Supports a single equation, the
+ answer consists of $k$, $n$-tuples, the components of the
+ $n$-tuples are allowed to be zero. Each $n$-tuple is separated
+ by a semi-colon (;).
+ \item \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqListNonZero}: Supports a single equation,
+ the answer consists of $k$, ordered $n$-tuples, the components of the
+ $n$-tuples are \emph{not allowed} to be zero. Each $n$-tuple is separated
+ by a semi-colon (;).
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph*{Some Technical Details.} Recall the parameter list for
+\cs{RespBoxMath},
+\begin{equation*}
+ \text{\respBoxPara}
+\end{equation*}
+
+
+\noindent\texttt{ProcRespEvalEq}, \textsl{et al}, are not based on random
+point generation, as are all the other \textsf{exerquiz} functions. Here,
+the user enters numerical data, the function then verifies the data
+entered satisfies the given equation. The role of one of the parameters
+has changed, others are ignored:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The role of parameter \texttt{\#2} (the correct answer) has
+ changed. Suppose the equation presented to the user is $ F = G $.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item For \texttt{ProcRespEvalEq} and \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqNonZero},
+ pass \texttt{F - G} as parameter \texttt{\#2}.
+ \item For \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqList} and \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqListNonZero},
+ pass \texttt{k;F-G} as the parameter \texttt{\#2}. For this type of
+ problem, the author is asking the user to enter \texttt{k}, $n$-tuples
+ that satisfy the equation. Note \texttt{k} and \texttt{F-G} are delimited
+ by a semicolon (\texttt{;}).
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item The value of \texttt{epsilon} (parameter \texttt{\#6}) is obeyed.
+ \item Parameter \texttt{\#5}, the number of iterations, is not used.
+ Though this parameter is not used, \texttt{\#5} is required by the
+ macro, so just use \texttt{1} as the number of iterations.
+ \item Parameter \texttt{\#7}, the domain of the variables, is not
+ used. Again, since this is a required parameter, use \cs{viidna};
+ \cs{viidna} is a special command that can be used for this
+ parameter, in this context only.
+ \item The optional parameter \texttt{\#9} is not used and is ignored if present.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=} Additional examples will (eventually) appear
+on the \href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroTeX{} Blog}.
+
+
+\subsection{Filter User's Responses} \label{filterUserResp}
+
+Filters are JavaScript functions that process the user input before being passed to the response function.
+Filters are passed to \cs{RespBoxMath} through the $\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$\displaystyle\int\sin(x)\,dx =
+ \RespBoxMath{-cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{[0,1]}[indefCompare]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+This $\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument can take on two formats: (1) the name of the compare function,
+as illustrated in `\nameref{indefIntegral}' above; (2) a JavaScript object. Use a JavaScript object
+as the $\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument to specify a filter.
+
+The JavaScript object that can be passed in the $\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument has two properties
+\texttt{comp} and \texttt{priorParse}. The object has the form
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+{ comp: !ameta(compare), priorParse: !ameta(JS_func) | !ameta(array_JS_funcs) }
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first property is used to specify a compare function, the second
+property specifies a filter or filters. The value of
+\texttt{priorParse} may be a JavaScript function to filter the
+user's response, or an array of JavaScript functions to filter the
+user input. (The array must be specified using the \Com{Array}
+command, illustrated below, see the paragraph
+`\nameref{NoProducts}', on page~\pageref*{NoProducts}.)
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{nodec}} \label{nodec}
+
+The \texttt{nodec} option defines the JavaScript function
+\texttt{nodec} that attempts to prohibit the use of decimal numbers
+in the response. The function simply searches the user response for
+any occurrence of the decimal point. (The German language uses
+the comma as a decimal point, you can set the decimal point to some
+other symbol that \texttt{nodec} searches for through the command
+\Com{setdecimalpoint}, the default definition is
+\verb!\setdecimalpoint{.}!.)
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+$ 0.75 = \RespBoxMath{3/4}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{priorParse: nodec }] $
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Alert box message: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\nodecAlertMsg{%
+ "A decimal answer is not acceptable here
+ Please express your answer using fractions, square roots,
+ e, log, etc."}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{noBinFac}} \label{noBinFac}
+
+The \texttt{noBinFac} option defines the JavaScript filter function
+\texttt{noBinFac}, that disallows binomial coefficients and
+factorials in math fill-in questions. Binomial and factorial
+functions are defined through the \texttt{combinatorics} option,
+page~\pageref*{combinatorics}.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+The number of ways to choose four object from a set of ten is
+ \RespBoxMath{C(10,4)}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{priorParse: noBinFac}]
+ \CorrAnsButton{C(10,4)}*{EvalCorrAnsButton}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \texttt{noBinFac} filter is used, so the student is not allowed
+to enter binomial coefficients; however, the document author can use
+binomial coefficients, note the use in the answer (first argument)
+and in the \cs{CorrAnsButton}. The special syntax used for
+\cs{CorrAnsButton}, \Nameref{inclsoln}.
+
+%\exPDF{dljs_comb} Illustrations of this filter can be
+%found in the \texttt{dljs\_comb.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=963} Illustrations of this filter can be found in
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=963}{dljs\_comb.pdf}}.
+
+
+\newtopic Alert box messages: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\noBinFactBinCoeffAlertMsg{%
+ "You may not use this notation here.
+ Please evaluate the binomial coefficient.
+ You may present your answer as a product rather
+ than calculating a very large number."}
+\newcommand\noBinFactPermAlertMsg{%
+ "You may not use this notation here.
+ Please evaluate the permutation.
+ You may present your answer as a product rather
+ than calculating a very large number."}
+\newcommand\noBinFactFactAlertMsg{%
+ "You may not use this notation here.
+ Please evaluate the factorial.
+ You may present your answer as a product rather
+ than calculating a very large number."}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{limitArith}} \label{limitArith}
+
+The \texttt{limitArith} option defines a number of filter functions:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+DecimalsOnly, NoProducts, NoDivision, NoAddOrSub,
+NoArithAllowed,NoExpAllowed,NoTrigAllowed, NoTrigLogAllowed
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{limarth} Examples of these filtering functions
+%can be found in the demo file \texttt{limarth.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=947} Examples of these filtering functions
+can be found in the demo file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=947}{limarth.pdf}}.
+
+
+\paragraph*{DecimalsOnly} The \texttt{DecimalsOnly} is a function
+that takes only numbers, either integer or decimal. Usage
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+ $ 2.3 + 4.5 = \RespBoxMath{6.8}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+ [{priorParse: DecimalsOnly }]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{NoProducts}\label{NoProducts} The function
+\texttt{NoProducts} requires that \texttt{ImplMulti} is taken. An
+example of usage is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ 3/4 = \RespBoxMath{.75}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+ [{priorParse: \Array(NoDivision, NoProducts) }]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+In the above example, we first call \texttt{NoDivision} then \texttt{NoProducts}. Several
+filtering functions can be executed by putting them into an array, using the \cs{Array}
+command.\footnote{The \cs{Array} command was originally named \cs{array}, it has been renamed
+to avoid clashing with the \texttt{amsmath} package.}
+
+\paragraph*{NoAddOrSub} This function, as the name implies, denies the use of both addition and subtraction.
+The algorithm I use here is that if a plus or minus follows anything but a left parenthesis,
+we assume it is a binary operation of addition or subtraction, respectively.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ 5.1 - 3.2 =
+ \RespBoxMath{1.9}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{priorParse: NoAddOrSub}]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{NoArithAllowed} Deny user the use of all arithmetic functions, including exponents.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ 6/5 = \RespBoxMath{1.25}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+ [{priorParse: NoArithAllowed}]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{NoExpAllowed} Deny user the use of exponents.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ 25^2 = \RespBoxMath{625}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+ [{priorParse: NoExpAllowed}]
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{NoTrigAllowed} Deny user the use all trig functions, as
+well as the constants \texttt{PI} and \texttt{pi}, which are aliases
+for $\pi$. Example:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ \sin(\pi/4) = \RespBoxMath{sqrt(2)/2}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+ [{priorParse: NoTrigAllowed }]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{NoTrigLogAllowed} Deny the use of trig and log functions.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ \ln(e^2)\sin(\pi/4) = \RespBoxMath{sqrt(2)}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+ [{priorParse: NoTrigLogAllowed }]\CorrAnsButton{sqrt(2)}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{sciNotResp} Allow only a response in \emph{normalized} scientific notation:
+\texttt{aE([+]|-)d}, where $1\le|\texttt{a}|\le9$, and \texttt{d} is one or more digits
+(0-9) prefixed by a \texttt{-}, or an optional \texttt{+}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+Convert 123.4 to scientific notation.
+\begin{equation*}
+ 123.4 = \RespBoxMath{1.234E+2}*{1}{0}{[0,1]}[%
+ {priorParse: sciNotResp }]\CorrAnsButton{1.234E+2}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{noNegExp} Does not allow negative exponents. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\item Simplify $\displaystyle\frac{4}{r^4}\cdot\frac{r^3}{12}=
+ \RespBoxMath{1/(3r)}(r)*{3}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{%
+ priorParse:\Array( nodec, noNegExp )
+ }]\CorrAnsButton{1/(3r)}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Alert box messages:} May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\DecimalsOnlyErrorMsg{"Enter only an integer,
+ e.g., 17, or a decimal number, e.g. 12.4.
+ Using arithmetic operations or built in function is
+ not acceptable for this problem."}
+\newcommand\NoProductsErrorMsg{"Multiplication is not allowed
+ for this problem."}
+\newcommand\NoDivisionErrorMsg{"Division is not allowed
+ for this problem."}
+\newcommand\NoAddOrSubErrorMsg{"Neither addition nor subtraction
+ is not allowed for this problem."}
+\newcommand\NoExpAllowedErrorMsg{"The use of exponents is not
+ allowed for this problem."}
+\newcommand\NoTrigAllowedErrorMsg{"The use of trig functions
+ in this problem is not allowed."}
+\newcommand\NoTrigLogAllowedErrorMsg{"The use of trig and log
+ functions is not allowed in this problem."}
+\newcommand{\sciNotSyntaxError}{"Enter the answer in scientific
+ notation."}
+\newcommand{\sciNotNormalForm}{"The scientific notation entered
+ is not in normalized form."}
+\newcommand{\NoNegExpMsg}{"No negative exponents permitted,
+ keep working!"}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Extending Numerical Functions} \label{extNumerFuncs}
+
+These JavaScript functions extend the collection of built-in
+functions that perform numerical calculations.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{combinatorics}}\label{combinatorics}
+
+This option defines three JavaScript functions: a binomial
+coefficient function \texttt{ch(n,r)}; a number of permutations
+function \texttt{perm(n,r)}, and a factorial function
+\texttt{fact(n)}.
+
+\paragraph*{User Accessible Functions} The user should use the names \texttt{C}, \texttt{P} and \texttt{fact}
+to access the functions \texttt{ch}, \texttt{perm} and \texttt{fact}, respectively:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item $ \texttt{C(n,r)} = \texttt{ch(n,r)} = \dbinom{n}{r} = \dfrac{n\,!}{r\,!(n-r)\,!}$
+ \item $ \texttt{P(n,r)} = \texttt{perm(n,r)} = n\cdot(n-1)\cdots(n-r)$
+ \item $ \texttt{fact(n)} = n\cdot(n-1)\cdots3\cdot2\cdot1$
+\end{itemize}
+\textbf{Note: }If you place \verb!\replaceExclPt{true}! in the preamble, the user is allowed to enter factorials using
+the
+traditional exclamation notation: for example, \texttt{17!} is the same as fact(17), and \texttt{(17)!}, \texttt{[17]!}
+or \verb|{17}!|
+are all interpreted as \texttt{fact(17)}.
+
+%\exPDF{dljs_comb} Illustrations of the \texttt{combinatorics} option can be
+%found in the \texttt{dljs\_comb.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=963} Illustrations of the \texttt{combinatorics} option can be
+found in \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=963}{dljs\_comb.pdf}}.
+
+
+%------------------------ List of Options ------------------------------------
+\newpage
+\section{List of Options}\label{s:ListofOpts}
+
+%\begin{tabular}{|>{\bfseries\color{red}}l|>{\PBS\raggedright}p{.5\linewidth}|}\hline
+% \multicolumn1{|>{\bfseries\columncolor{light-blue}}c|}{Component} &
+% \multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\columncolor{light-blue}}c|}{Brief Description}\\ \hline \rowcolor[gray]{.9}
+
+\def\currentPackage{Web}
+
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\extrarowheight}{1mm}
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{2mm}
+\begin{longtable}{|>{\ttfamily}l|>{\PBS\raggedright}p{.5\linewidth}|}
+\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{Options of the Web/Exerquiz Packages} \\
+\hline
+\endfirsthead
+\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{Options of the Web/Exerquiz Packages (cont.)} \\
+\hline
+\endhead
+\hline
+\endfoot
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{Options of the Web Package} \\
+\hline
+\hyperref[sss:driver]{dvipsone} & dvi-to-ps driver by {\Y&Y}, Inc. \\
+\hyperref[sss:driver]{dvips} & dvi-to-ps driver \\
+\hyperref[sss:driver]{pdftex} & tex-to-pdf application \\
+\hyperref[sss:driver]{dvipdfm} & dvi-to-pdf application \\
+\hyperref[sss:driver]{textures} & the Textures System for Mac \\
+\hyperref[sss:designoptions]
+ {\parbox[t]{.75in+4pt}{designi,\newline
+ designii,\newline designiii,\newline
+ designiv,\newline designv}} & these set screen design parameters \\
+\hyperref[ss:templates]{usetemplates} & this option activates mechanism for
+ creating colored backgrounds and overlays\\
+\hyperref[ss:templates]{leftpanel} & creates a left navigation panel\\
+\hyperref[ss:templates]{rightpanel} & creates a right navigation panel\\
+\hyperref[sss:navibar]{navibar} & inserts a menu bar at the bottom or each
+ page\\
+\hyperref[sss:latextoc]{latextoc} & displays the standard toc \\
+%\hyperref[sss:nodir]{nodirectory} & eliminates the directory listing on the title page\\
+\hyperref[sss:nodir]{usedirectory} & causes the title page directory to appear on the title page\\
+\hyperref[sss:webforpaper]{forpaper} & this turns off color, and does not put solutions on
+ separate pages. \\
+\hyperref[forcolorpaper]{forcolorpaper} & Same as \texttt{forpaper}, but
+ does not turn off color, useful for color printers.\\
+\hyperref[sss:weblatexlayout]%
+ {latexlayout} & \texttt{web} uses page
+ layout for \texttt{article} class.
+ For use with \texttt{forpaper}.\\
+\hyperref[sss:webtight]{tight} & Redefines list environment parameters so
+ lists don't take up so much space \\
+\hyperref[webpro]{pro} & Causes web to input enhanced control
+ over various web elements\\
+\hyperref[nobullets]{nobullets} & Forces the use of numbers for subsubsections, also executes the
+\texttt{latextoc} option\\
+\hyperref[usesf]{usesf} & switches to sans serif as the default font, good for presentations\\
+\hyperref[web:unicode]{unicode} & Passes the \texttt{unicode} option to \pkg{hyperref}.\\
+\hyperref[web:useui]{useui} & Passes the \texttt{useui} option to \textsf{eforms}.\\
+\hyperref[web:xhyperref]{xhyperref} & Causes web not to include the hyperref package.\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{dutch} & Dutch for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Henny Wilbrink)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{french} & French for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Jean-Michel Sarlat)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{german} & German for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Michael Wiedmann)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{italian} & Italian for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to PierLuigi Zezza)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{norsk} & Norwegian for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Hans Fredrik Nordhaug)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{russian} & Russian for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Sergei V. Znamenskii)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{spanish} & Spanish for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Pedro Luis Luque)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{polish} & Polish for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Jerzy Mycielski)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{finnish} & Finnish for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to P\"aivi Porras)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{catalan} & Catalan for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Ramon Ballester)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{czech} & Czech for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Robert Marik)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{brazil} & Brazilian Portuguese for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Koichi
+Sameshima)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{turkish} & Turkish for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Mahmut Ko\c{c}ak)\\
+\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{Options of the Exerquiz Package\gdef\currentPackage{Exerquiz}} \\ \hline
+%\hyperref[ss:pdftexerquiz]{pdftex} & tex-to-pdf application \\
+%\hyperref[ss:exbasicusage]{dvipdfm} & dvi-to-pdf application \\
+\hyperref[sss:nosolutions]{nosolutions} & removes the solutions to the exercises \\
+\hyperref[sss:noquizsolutions]%
+ {noquizsolutions} & removes the solutions to the quizzes \\
+\hyperref[sss:nohideopt]%
+ {nohiddensolutions} & overrides the `\texttt{h}' (hidden)
+ option for the exercises.\\
+\hyperref[sss:noHideopt]%
+ {noHiddensolutions} & overrides the `\texttt{h}' and `\texttt{H}'
+ (hidden) options for the exercises.\\
+\hyperref[sss:nocorrections]%
+ {nocorrections} & removes the ability to correct the quizzes\\
+\hyperref[sss:solutionsafter]%
+ {solutionsafter} & solutions to exercises are typeset just after the question\\
+\hyperref[sss:exquizforpaper]{forpaper} & same function as in \pkg{web}.
+ Needed when \textsf{exerquiz} is not
+ used with \pkg{web}\\
+\hyperref[sss:exquizforpaper]%
+ {forcolorpaper} & same function as in \pkg{web}.
+ Needed when \textsf{exerquiz} is not
+ used with \pkg{web}\\
+\hyperref[sss:preview]{preview} & shows the outline of all form fields
+ in the dvi previewer \\
+\hyperref[sss:nodljs]{nodljs} & turns off the insertion of DLJS \\
+%\hyperref[sss:acrobativ]{acrobativ} & equivalent to \texttt{nodljs}\\
+\hyperref[sss:noquizzes]{exercisesonly} & if document has only exercises, no doc level JS needed\\
+%\hyperref[sss:debug]{debug} & this option is passed on to the \texttt{insdljs} package\\
+\hyperref[sss:proofing]{proofing} & mark the correct answers for
+ \texttt{shortquiz} \&
+ \texttt{quiz} for
+ proof reading. \\
+\hyperref[showgraylettersOpt]%
+ {showgrayletters} & Show gray letters under check boxes\\
+\hyperref[ss:allowrandomize]%
+ {allowrandomize} & Allow the randomization of choices in multiple choie questions\\
+\hyperref[eq:unicode]{unicode} & Passes the \texttt{unicode} option to \pkg{hyperref}.\\
+\hyperref[eq:useui]{useui} & Passes the \texttt{useui} option to \textsf{eforms}.\\
+\hyperref[eq:usesumrytbls]{usesumrytbls}& Inputs the code used to create quiz summary tables,
+ \hyperref[s:sumrytbl]{Section~\ref*{s:sumrytbl}}, page~\pageref*{s:sumrytbl}.\\
+\hyperref[eq:contsolns]{contsolns} & Places a `continued' message in the right footer on a solution page.\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{dutch} & JavaScript messages in Dutch (Thanks to Henny Wilbrink)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{french} & JavaScript messages in French (Thanks to Jean-Michel Sarlat)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{german} & JavaScript messages in German (Thanks to Michael Wiedmann)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{italian}& JavaScript messages in Italian (Thanks to PierLuigi Zezza)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{norsk} & JavaScript messages in Noregian (Thanks to Hans Fredrik Nordhaug)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{russian}& JavaScript messages in Russian (Thanks to Sergei V. Znamenskii)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{spanish}& JavaScript messages in Spanish (Thanks to Pedro Luis Luque)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{polish} & JavaScript messages in Polish (Thanks to Jerzy Mycielski)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{finnish}& JavaScript messages in Finnish. (Thanks to P\"aivi Porras)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{catalan}& JavaScript messages in Catalan. (Thanks to Ramon Ballester)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{czech} & JavaScript messages in Czech. (Thanks to Robert Marik)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{brazil} & JavaScript messages in Brazilian Portuguese. (Thanks to Koichi Sameshima)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{turkish}& JavaScript messages in Turkish. (Thanks to Mahmut Ko\c{c}ak)\\
+\hline
+\end{longtable}
+\end{center}
+
+\includeexersolutions
+
+\includequizsolutions
+
+\newpage
+\markright{References}
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{[1]}\label{references}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}References}
+\backrefparscanfalse
+\def\srtln{\vskip-\baselineskip\vskip-\parsep}
+\def\lngln{\vskip-\parsep}
+
+\item[] We list cited referenced documents, articles, and webpages, as well as
+ recommended reading. Cited material has the page number where that entry
+ was referenced.
+
+\bibitem{tech:AcroJS}\hypertarget{references}{}%
+ Acrobat JavaScript Scripting Refernce, Technical Note \#5431, Version~6.0.,
+ Adobe Systems, Inc. \backrefprint
+ \srtln\hfill{\small\url{http://partners.adobe.com/asn/acrobat/docs.jsp}}
+
+\bibitem{book:Lamport}
+ Leslie Lamport, \textit{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation}
+ System (2nd ed.), Addison-Wesley Publishing Company,
+ 1994, ISBN 0-201-52983-1. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens1}
+ Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander
+ Samarin, \textit{The \LaTeX{} Companion}, second ed., Addison-Wesley
+ Publishing Company, 2004, ISBN 0-201-36299-6. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens2}
+ Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank
+ Mittelbach, \textit{The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion},
+ Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1997, ISBN
+ 0-201-85469-4. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens3} Michel Goossens, and Rahtz, Sebastian,
+ with Gurari, Eitan, Moore, Ross, and Sutor, Robert,
+ \textit{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion},
+ Addison Wesley Longman, Reading, Massachusetts, USA, 1999.
+ ISBN: 0-201-43311-7. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{book:Kopka}
+ Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. Daly, \textit{A Guide to
+ \LaTeX2e} (2nd ed.), Addison-Wesley Publishing Company,
+ 1995, ISBN 0-201-43777-X.
+
+\bibitem{book:Knuth}
+ Donald E. Knuth, \textit{The \TeX book}, Addison-Wesley
+ Publishing Company, 1987, ISBN 0-201-13448-9. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{book:Merz}
+ Thomas Merz, \textit{Web Publishing with Acrobat/PDF},
+ Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York, 1998,
+ ISBN 3-540-63762-1. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{article:Story:Pdfmarks}
+ D.P. Story, \textit{Pdfmarks: Links and Forms}, AcroTeX Web
+ Site, 1998. \backrefprint
+ \lngln\hfill{\small\url{www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex.html}}
+
+\bibitem{article:Story:LaTeX}
+ D.P. Story, \textit{Using \LaTeX\ to Create Quality PDF Documents for the
+ WWW}, Acro\!\TeX\ Web Site, 1998. \backrefprint
+ \srtln\hfill{\small\url{www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex.html}}
+
+\bibitem{book:AEBB}
+ D. P. Story, \textsl{\AEBBook}, in preparation. \backrefprint
+
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+
+% \printindex
+\end{document}
+
+\newpage
+
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\section}{%
+ \renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{}%
+ \@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}%
+ {-3ex\@plus -1ex \@minus-.2ex}%
+ {1ex\@plus .2ex}% 6pt
+ {\noindent\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries\color{aeb}}}%
+\renewcommand\subsection{%
+ \renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\textbullet\enspace}%
+ \@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
+ {-2.5ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {1ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\noindent\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries\color{aeb}}}
+\renewcommand\subsubsection{%
+ \renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\color{aeb}\large$\bullet$\enspace}
+ \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
+ {-2ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\noindent\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}
+\renewcommand*\thesection{}
+\renewcommand*\thesubsection{\textbullet}
+%\renewcommand*{\thesubsubsection}{\textbullet}
+\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.8em}{1.2em}}
+%\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{3.8em}{1.2em}}
+\makeatother
+
+\addtocontents{toc}{\string\renewcommand*\string\l@subsection{\string\@dottedtocline{2}{2.8em}{1.2em}}}
+
+\section{What's New}
+
+The following is a brief enumeration of some of the major new
+features of the \pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} packages.
+
+\subsection{Web}
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+ \item (Version 4.1) Added the option \texttt{useui}, which is passed
+ \textsf{eforms}. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded,
+ \textsf{eforms} loads the xkeyval package, and key-value pairs are
+ defined for use in the optional argument of form and link commands.
+ See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.
+
+ \item (Version 4.1) Added a unicode option. This option is passed to hyperref, if eforms
+ is subsequently loaded, eforms (and exerquiz) will accept {\LaTeX} markup in the optional
+ argument of the form fields. See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.
+
+ \item (Version 4.1) Added the \texttt{turkish} language option. I extend my appreciation
+ to Mahmut Ko\c{c}ak for this translation.
+
+ \item (Version 4.0g) Added the command \cs{useFullWidthForPaper}, see the discussion
+ in \Nameref{paperoptions}.
+ \item (Version 4.0f) Added \cs{setScreensizeFromGraphic}, see
+ \hyperref[setScreensizeFromGraphic]{Section~\ref*{setScreensizeFromGraphic}},
+ page~\pageref*{setScreensizeFromGraphic}.
+ \item (Version 4.0d) \cs{makeinlinetitle}, see \Nameref{inlinetitle}.
+ \item (Version 4.0c) Added \cs{aboveTopTitleSkip}, the amount of skip above the first
+ line on the title page, so the whole title can be move downwards, if
+ desired. See the section \Nameref{top}.
+ \item (Version 4.0) The pro option with many user-convenient features,
+ see \Nameref{webpro}.
+ \item (Version 4.0) New \Web{} options of \texttt{usesf},
+ \hyperref[usesf]{page~\pageref*{usesf}} and \texttt{center\-title\-page},
+ \hyperref[centertitle]{page~\pageref*{centertitle}}.
+
+\item[] \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt} Older New Stuff \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt}
+
+ \item (Version 3.3) Made many internal changes for my new package, the
+ \textsf{\textcolor{blue}{Acro\!\TeX{} Presentation Bundle}} (\cAPB), yet
+ to be released, but see \url{http://www.acrotex.net} for details and demos.
+ \item (Version 3.3) Added some commands for running headers
+ and footers, these are \cs{lheader}, \cs{cheader}, \cs{rheader},
+ \cs{lfooter}, \cs{cfooter}, \cs{rfooter}, \cs{clearHeaders} and \cs{re\-store\-Head\-ers}.
+ \item (Version 3.2) Added support for the Dr. Uwe Kern's \textsf{xcolor}
+ package. Unrecognized options are passed to the color package,
+ in particular, the \textsf{(x)color} option \texttt{dvipsnames} is passed
+ from \Web{} to the color package.
+ \item[] If available, \textsf{xcolor} is used, otherwise
+ \pkg{web} uses the standard \textsf{color} package.
+ \item[] There is a \texttt{noxcolor} which should be used as a
+ global option, that is passed as an option of the class. Thus,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass[noxcolor]{article}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ will cause \pkg{web} (and other packages such as
+ \textsf{PSTricks}) to use the \textsf{color} package, even
+ though \textsf{xcolor} may be present.
+ \item (Version 3.2) Added a \texttt{nobullets} option. When taken, the bullets
+ that traditionally appear for the \cs{subsubection} now appear
+ with subsubsection numbers.
+
+ \item (Version 3.2) Added a \texttt{draft} option: When you take this option,
+ graphic overlays are not allowed. This is useful when you rely
+ heavily on graphic overlays, but during the development phase,
+ don't need to read and re-read your overlays. The defined
+ background colors will be used instead. Remove this option to
+ build the final version of your document.
+
+ \item (Version 3.2) Defined macros for conveniently
+ setting the color of some of the title page elements:
+ \cs{titleColor}, \cs{authorColor} and \cs{universityColor}.
+ Each takes a single argument, a named color. The defaults are
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\universityColor{blue}
+\titleColor{black}
+\authorColor{black}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+ \item (Version 3.2) Changed optional argument for the template commands
+ \cs{template} and \cs{panel\-template}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\template[<includegraphics\_opts>]{<path\_to\_template>}
+\paneltemplate[<includegraphics\_opts>]{<path\_to\_template>}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ The optional argument \texttt{[<includegraphics\_opts>]} can be used
+ to pass options to the underlying \cs{includegraphics} command. Do
+ not use the \texttt{width} and \texttt{height} keys; probably, it is
+ safest to use only the Boolean keys. The Boolean key
+ \texttt{hiresbb} is quite useful when stretching a small graphic to
+ fit over a larger area. The one required argument is the path to the
+ graphic file.
+
+ \item (Version 3.2) Added a number of new commands to improve template management. See
+ the \texttt{web.dtx} for documentation.
+ \item (Version 3.2) Added language option \texttt{czech}, the translation due
+ to Robert Marik.
+ \item (Version 3.2) Added language option \texttt{catalan}, the translation due
+ to Ramon Ballester.
+ \item (Version 3.2) Added language option \texttt{brazil}, the translation due to
+ Koichi Sameshima.
+ \item Added language \texttt{finnish} Options. Translation due
+ to Paivi Porras.
+ \item Added a \texttt{\hyperref[forcolorpaper]{forcolorpaper}} option. This is the same as \texttt{forpaper}
+ but the color operators are not turned off.
+ \item Added three new options for creating color backgrounds
+ and overlays, \texttt{usetemplates}. \texttt{rightpanel} and
+ \texttt{leftpanel}, see the section \Nameref{ss:templates}.
+ The various template options requires the \textsf{eso-pic}
+ package by Rolf Niepraschk and the \textsf{everyshi} package
+ by Martin Schr\"oder. The \textsf{web package} supports graphics overlays
+ for the \texttt{dvipsone}, \texttt{dvips}, \texttt{pdftex} and
+ \texttt{dvipdfm} options.
+ \item Added a command to create navigation icons,
+ \nameref{ss:newnaviicon}, page~\pageref{ss:newnaviicon}.
+ \item Added a \texttt{textures} option, due to Ross Moore.
+ \item Made some minor changes to make \pkg{web} work better
+ with the \texttt{book} document class.
+ \item The introduction of the \textsf{polish} option. This
+ makes a total of nine localizations of \textsf{web/exerquiz}:
+ french, german, norsk, dutch, spanish, italian, russian,
+ dansk and polish.
+ \item Set an alias between \cs{marginsize} and \cs{margins}.
+ The latter is used by pdfscreen. This will make it easier for
+ people to switch between using web and pdfscreen. The use of
+ \cs{marginsize} is now deprecated.
+\end{questions}
+
+\normalcolor
+
+\subsection{Exerquiz}
+
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+ \item (Version 6.3) Added the option \texttt{useui}, which is passed
+ \textsf{eforms}. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded,
+ \textsf{eforms} loads the xkeyval package, and key-value pairs are
+ defined for use in the optional argument of form and link commands.
+ See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.
+
+ \item (Version 6.3) Added a unicode option. This option is passed to hyperref, if eforms
+ is subsequently loaded, eforms (and exerquiz) will accept {\LaTeX} markup in the optional
+ argument of the form fields. See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.
+
+ \item (Version 6.3) Added the \texttt{turkish} language option. I extend my appreciation
+ to Mahmut Ko\c{c}ak for this translation.
+
+ \item (Version 6.2d) Added \cs{titleQuiz} and \cs{fancyQuizHeaders},
+ see \hyperref[titleQuiz]{Section~\ref*{titleQuiz}}, page~\pageref*{titleQuiz}
+ and \hyperref[titleQuizSQ]{Section~\ref*{titleQuizSQ}}, page~\pageref*{titleQuizSQ}.
+ \item (Version 6.2c) Added a feature that I have used for years to \textsf{exerquiz}:
+ see the section titled \Nameref{showcreditmarkup}.
+ \item (Version 6.2a) Added a feature for bookmarking exercises and quizzes,
+ see \hyperref[bmExQz]{Section~\ref*{bmExQz}} on page~\pageref*{bmExQz}.
+ \item (Version 6.2) Added the manswers environment for multiple answer
+ questions, that is, multiple choice questions that have several correct
+ answers. Multiple selection is permitted. See the \Nameref{manswersQuiz}.
+ \item (Version 6.1) Added the ability to randomize the multiple
+ choice alternatives, see the two sections \Nameref{ss:allowrandomize} and
+ \Nameref{s:random} for details.
+ \item (Version 6.05f) For inputting math fill-in responses. \texttt{log} now means common log,
+ and as before \texttt{ln} means natural log. Also,
+ re-engineered things so that math fill-in now accepts, and
+ correctly interprets, scientific notation (using E-notation)
+ $\texttt{<decimal\_number>}\text{E}\texttt{<integer>}$. The
+ capital letter E represents ``times ten raised to the power'',
+ the lower case e is reserved for use as the natural number.
+ \item (Version 6.05d) Added option \texttt{showgrayletters},
+ see \Nameref{showgraylettersOpt}.
+ \item (Version 6.05e) Added \cs{setMClabelsep} and
+ \cs{resetMClabelsep} to adjust the horizontal distance between
+ the label and text for multiple choice questions. See the
+ discussion in \Nameref{BasicUsage}.
+
+ \item (Version 6.05g) Added \cs{renameSolnAfterTo} for conveniently
+ changing the solution after label, and
+ \cs{resetSolnAfterToDefault} for resetting back to the default.
+ These two commands are available for use in \textsf{exerquiz} or
+ in \textsf{eqexam}. There is a brief discussion of these
+ commands in \Nameref{sss:solutionsafter}.
+
+ \item (Version 6.05c) Added the commands \Com{DeclareQuiz}, \Com{floatQuiz},
+ \Com{startQuizHere}, \Com{endQuizHere}, and \Com{dockQuiz}. to
+ start a quiz in an arbitrary place prior to the beginning of the
+ quiz. See \Nameref{floatQuiz}.
+
+\item[] \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt} Older New Stuff \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt}
+
+\item (Version 6.03) Added the \hyperref[bChoices]{\cs{bChoices}}/\cs{eChoices} command
+ pair, this makes it easy to lay out multiple choice alternatives.
+
+\item (Version 6.0) Improved the \texttt{mathGrp} environment so
+ that it treats grouped question truly as a unit. Added two
+ optional parameters to the environment. The document author
+ can specify a JavaScript function to grade the grouped
+ questions. Despite its name, \texttt{mathGrp} environment
+ works for text fill-in as well as math fill-ins (but not for
+ multiple choice). The \texttt{mathGrp} environment also now
+ works for the \texttt{shortquiz} environment (in addition to
+ the \texttt{quiz} environment). See \Nameref{grouped}.
+
+ \item Separated the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms} support from
+ the \textsf{exerquiz} package. \textsf{eforms} is now a
+ stand-alone package that can be used by people who may want to
+ use PDF forms outside the context of a document that contains
+ quizzes. See the demo file \texttt{eforms\_tst.tex}.
+
+ \item \textcolor{red}{Important:} There is one required
+ parameter for the \texttt{quiz} environment, a base name used
+ to build the names of the form fields used in the quiz, e.g.,
+ \verb+\begin{quiz}{qzQuiz1}+. Now this base name of the quiz
+ should only contain ascii characters or numbers. This name is
+ now used to construct a JavaScript object, so it must be a
+ valid JavaScript object name. For example \texttt{qzQuiz1} is
+ correct, but \texttt{qz:Quiz-1} is not.
+
+ \item Created \cs{@PromptButton} a new correct answer button for quizzes. Quiz
+ questions might have a series of parts in which the answer
+ to one part depends on the answer to the previous part.
+ With \cs{@PromptButton}, the answer can be optionally
+ provided while the student is taking the quiz. See the section on the
+ Prompt Button for details.
+
+ \item Created a grouping environment for math fill-in questions. See the section
+ entitled Grouping Math Fill-in Questions.
+
+ \item Added a \texttt{noquizsolutions} option -- mostly for online quizzing --
+ see page~\pageref{sss:noquizsolutions}.
+ \item Changed the behavior of \cs{CorrButton}: If \hyperref[sss:nocorrections]{\texttt{nocorrections}}
+ is used, the \cs{CorrButton} does not appear. This is reasonable,
+ \cs{CorrButton} is used to display corrections to the quiz.
+ \item Modified the \texttt{questions} environment so that it behaves more like
+ standard {\LaTeX} list environments. You can now nest the \texttt{questions}
+ environment three deep. See \texttt{pc\_test.tex} for examples.
+ \item Added an optional argument to the \cs{Ans} command for multiple-choice questions
+ for assigning \textit{partial credit}. See the demo file \texttt{pc\_test.tex}.
+ \item Modified the behavior of the link-type multiple choice questions When you select
+ an alternative, a check appears superimposed over the letter. I've removed the
+ alert dialog informing the user that he has change his selection. The file
+ \texttt{pc\_test.tex} illustrates this.
+ \item The \hyperref[paraRespBoxNine]{ninth parameter} of \cs{RespBoxMath} has been modified to take an JS object.
+ This object can have two properties:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+{ [ priorParse: <js function> | <array of js functions> ],
+ [ comp: <compare function> ] }
+\end{Verbatim}
+ The \texttt{priorParse} property is used to filter the user's answer prior to be fully parsed,
+ while the \texttt{comp} property is used to specify a custom compare function.
+ See the demo file \texttt{integer\_tst.tex} for examples.
+ \item Again for the math fill-in (\cs{RespBoxMath}), the way in which you specify variables (the
+ \hyperlink{paraRespBoxThree}{third parameter})
+ has changed: Specify the variables using a comma-delimited list, for example, \texttt{(r:x,i:n,y)}.
+ Typing the variables has been introduced: \texttt{r:x} means that \texttt{x} is a real variable (the default)
+ and \texttt{i:n} means that \texttt{n} is an integer variable. See the demo file \texttt{integer\_tst.tex}.
+
+ \item Added complete support with \textsf{eForms}. Integrated
+ this support into the quiz environments. See the \texttt{\href{eformman.pdf}{eForms Manual}}
+ documentation file for complete details.
+ \item Documented the use of form check boxes with the \texttt{shortquiz}
+ environment and introduced the commands
+ \begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+ \sqTurnOffAlerts,\sqTurnOnAlerts,\sqNoCorrections,\sqNoCorrections
+ \end{Verbatim}
+ to control response feedback.
+ \item Added language \texttt{finnish} Options. Translation due
+ to Paivi Porras.
+ \item Eliminated the need for the \cs{ifforAcroV} switch in the
+ \texttt{*.ins} files. I've written new code that detects whether Acro4 or
+ Acro5 is being used; in the latter case, a \texttt{try/catch} strategy is
+ used to catch exceptions.
+ \item Added a \texttt{textures} option, due to Ross Moore.
+ \item Wrote same JavaScripts and placed them in the \texttt{dljslib} to
+ process questions in which an equation is the expected answer. See the
+ sample file \texttt{jqzequat.tex}.
+ \item Wrote the \texttt{dljslib} Package, this is a library of JavaScript
+ functions that extends the capabilities of \textsf{exerquiz}.
+ \item Extended math fill-in questions to include arbitrary multivariate
+ questions. See the sample file \texttt{multivar.tex}.
+ \item Added several macros: \cs{defaultquiztype} and
+ \cs{quiztype}. The first command takes no arguments, the
+ second on takes one: either l or f; e.g. \verb+quiztype{f}+
+ (\verb+quiztype{l}+) causes the quiz environment to ignore the
+ optional `quiztype' parameter (\texttt* or no \texttt*) and to
+ use a form-type (resp.\ link-type). Placing
+ \cs{defaultquiztype} reverts the quiz environment back to its
+ default behavior (obeying the first optional parameter).
+ \item Added the convenience commands for the \texttt{quiz} environment: \cs{useBeginQuizButton},
+ \cs{use\-EndQuizButton}, \cs{useBeginQuizLink} and \cs{useEndQuizLink}.
+ See \mlNameref{sss:FormButton} for details.\footnote{This link requires Adobe Reader 7.0 or later.}
+ \item Added the \texttt{noHiddensolutions} for \textsf{exerquiz}, and
+ added an `\texttt{H}' option for exercises to hide solutions, see
+ \nameref{sss:hide} and \nameref{sss:noHideopt}, for details.
+ \item Added a method of assigning points to a quiz question. Useful
+ for submitting questions to a CGI for recording in a database.
+ \item Added a \texttt{noPeeking()} JS function and supporting macros.
+ When the \cs{NoPeeking} command is executed, the student cannot
+ see the solutions to the quizzes (not shortquizzes) by browsing
+ through the file. See \Nameref{sss:nopeek}.
+ \item Added new JS functions \texttt{lowThreshold()} and
+ \texttt{highThreshold()}. I modified the end of quiz macros to
+ incorporate the calling of one of these two (or calling a
+ document author defined routine). See \Nameref{threshold}.
+ \item Added a `\texttt{debug}' option, which gets passed on
+ to \texttt{insdljs} package. This can be used to write some
+ debugging commands within your JS. (\Nameref{sss:debug})
+ \item For math fill-ins, the author does not use the
+ JavaScript syntax; the author can use simplified notation, e.g,
+ \verb+2*x*e^(x^2)+ instead of \texttt{2*x*exp(pow(x,2))}.
+ Author's answer now passes through the ParseInput JS routine.
+ \item Now the document author can define a custom
+ JS function to process an answer. Also, when writing
+ Math fill-in questions, you can also define your
+ own variable (no longer restricted to just `$x$').
+ \item Added in a \texttt{solutions} environment to
+ \texttt{quiz} environment. Added additional optional parameter
+ into the \cs{RespBox}, \cs{RespBoxTxt} macros to indicate the
+ presence of a solution. The solution is viewed by
+ shift-clicking on the ``Ans'' Button (\cs{CorrAnsButton}). A
+ button or checkbox that has a solution has a boundary color of
+ \cs{solutionColor}.
+ \item \texttt{Exerquiz} now uses the package \texttt{insDLSJ} to
+ insert document level JavaScripts; this gives the document author
+ a chance to write custom JavaScripts. I've also modified many macros
+ that enable the document author to ``hook'' into.
+ \item New command \cs{RespBoxEssay} that can be used to pose
+ Essay-type questions. The question is not evaluated by JavaScript
+ within the document; rather, this question should be submitted
+ to a CGI for later review by the instructor.
+ \item \cs{RespBoxMath} has been defined to be the same as
+ \cs{RespBox} to give a little more consistency in naming.
+ \item The use of \cs{RespBoxNT} has been deprecated. Added in
+ feature to customize the comparison of two answers.
+ \item Added a text fill-in question type that can be used in the
+ \texttt{short\-quiz} and \texttt{quiz} environments.
+ (\Nameref{sss:oTxtQ})
+ \item A \texttt{preview} option has been added. When this
+ option is used, the bounding rectangles of all form fields
+ are framed so their positions can be seen in a dvi previewer.
+ See \mlNameref{sss:preview}.\footnote{This link requires Adobe Reader 7.0 or later.}
+ \end{questions}
+
+ \subsection{insdljs}
+
+ The \texttt{insdljs} Package is a general purpose \LaTeX{} package
+ for inserting Acrobat JavaScript into the document level section
+ of a PDF document. The package features the \texttt{insDLJS}
+ environment. This environment typically goes in the preamble of a
+ \LaTeX{} source file, or in the style files of a \LaTeX{} package.
+ See the documentation contained within the \texttt{insdljs.dtx}
+ file for additional details. There is a sample file,
+ \texttt{insdljs\_ex.tex} that can be used as a startup test file.
+
+\begin{questions}
+ \item (Version 2.0f) Added a command \cs{previewMiKTeX} which redefines \cs{jsR} and
+ \cs{jsT} that enables, I hope, the \textsf{yap} previewer to preview
+ an \textsf{AeB} document.
+ \item Added the \texttt{defineJS} environment. Use this environment to
+ write JavaScript for buttons and other form fields.
+ \item Added the \texttt{execJS} environment. Use this environment to write
+ ``discardable'' JavaScript that will execute when the newly created document is opened
+ in the Acrobat Viewer. (The Acrobat Viewer, not the Reader, is required.)
+ See the demo file \texttt{execjstst.tex}.
+\end{questions}
+
+\subsection{dljslib}
+
+The \texttt{dljslib} Package acts as a library of JavaScript
+functions. Due to the increased programmability of
+\texttt{exerquiz} and its new-found flexibility, it is possible to
+write a number of different routines to handle various kinds of
+math fill-in questions. These JavaScript functions can be stored
+in the library and retrieved when needed. This package requires
+the \texttt{insdljs} package.
+ \begin{questions}
+
+ \item There are some major user-contributed JavaScript routines.
+ The following functions, which are \texttt{ProcResp}-types, were
+ written for an online grading system being developed by Drs.\
+ Bruce Wagner and David Arnold, and Mr. Jacob Miles-Prystowsky.
+ The descriptions given below were provided by the authors.
+ I want to extend my deep thanks for their contribution! See the
+ documentation of \textsf{dljslib.dtx} for extended details.
+ \begin{questions}
+ \item The JS function \texttt{ProcRespSetFormula} grades an
+ unordered list of formulas, such as \texttt{x}, \verb!x^2!, \verb!x^3!.
+ \item \texttt{ProcRespFactors} is for grading polynomial factoring
+ questions. If a polynomial factors as
+ \verb!-5x^2(x-4)(x+2)!, the answer is only unique
+ up to the order of factors and a change of sign on an
+ even number of factors. For example, it could also be
+ written as \verb!-5x^2(x+2)(x-4)! or
+ \verb!5x^2(-x+4)(x+2)! or \verb!-5(x-4)(x+2)x^2!, etc.
+ This script should grade all of these correctly.
+ \item The JS function \texttt{ProcPoint} is almost an exact copy of
+ the JS function \texttt{ProcVec}, but uses parentheses instead of angle brackets as
+ delimiters. This is for questions that have a point $(x,y)$ as the
+ answer.
+ \item \texttt{ProcRespIntervals} is for grading questions that have an
+ interval or union of intervals as the answer.
+ \end{questions}
+ \item[] The sample file for this contribution is \texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}.
+
+ \item Added a feature whereby you can create a file
+ \texttt{libcusopt.opt} to declare your own options for this
+ package. These declarations should be a combination of existing options.
+ For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\DeclareOption{procrespgrp}{\includeOptions{%
+ vectors,setSupport,equations,intervals,%
+ unordered,point,factors,ImplMulti}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ creates a new option for \textsf{dljslib} called \texttt{procrespgrp} which bundles
+ together all frequently used JS functions frequently used. The file
+ \texttt{libcusopt.opt} can be placed in the {\LaTeX} search path, but it's perhaps
+ best to put it in your source file, so that the options are local to that folder.
+ The command \cs{includeOptions} is defined in \texttt{dljslit.dtx}.
+
+ \item[] A sample \texttt{libcusopt.opt} is distributed with the
+ {\AEB}, this sample file consists of the example given above,
+ and is used by the sample file \texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}.
+
+\item[] \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt} Older New Stuff \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt}
+
+ \item Added an option \texttt{limitArith} to the
+ \textsf{dljslib}, which limits the use of arithmetic operations
+ and built-in functions. The demo file is
+ \texttt{limarth.tex}, found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples}
+ folder. \item Added \texttt{setSupport} option to
+ \textsf{dljslib}. This gives support to math fill-in questions
+ for processing (1) a set of numerical answers or a comma
+ delimited list of answers; (2) a symbolic set of answers. The
+ demo file is \texttt{set\_test.tex}.
+
+ \item Added \texttt{combinatorics}, \texttt{nodec} and
+ \texttt{noBinFac} to the JavaScript library. These additions
+ are due to Ross Moore and Frances Griffin and were developed
+ for their
+ \href{http://rutherglen.ics.mq.edu.au/~macqtex/}{MacQ{\TeX}}
+ online testing system. Some of the changes listed in the
+ \textsf{exerquiz} section above were to accommodate these new
+ functions (for example, having integer variables). Many, many
+ thanks for generously sharing their JavaScript with the
+ \TeX/PDF community. The test file for these features is
+ \texttt{integer\_tst.tex}.
+\end{questions}
+% See the documentation contained within the \texttt{dljslib.dtx} document, and
+% see \Nameref{sss:dljslib}.
+
+\section{What's Old}
+
+\paragraph*{History.} The \pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} packages were written in
+preparation for a two-day workshop on \LaTeX/PDF that I gave at
+the \textcolor{red}{College of the Redwoods}, April~30-May~1,
+1999, at the invitation of David Arnold. The workshop forced me
+to take many of the basic macros that I had developed in plain
+\TeX\ and convert them to \LaTeX.
+
+Significant additions to the \textsf{exerquiz} were made immediately
+following the $\text{20}^{\text{th}}$ Annual Conference of the \TeX\
+User's Group (\textsf{tug}), in August, 1999, Vancouver, British
+Columbia, which I attended.
+
+The \textsf{insdljs} package was written for the $\text{22}^{\text{nd}}$
+Annual Conference of the \TeX\ User's Group (\textsf{tug}), in
+August 2001, at the University of Delaware, Newark, Delaware.
+
+The \texttt{execJS} environment was created as a result of some
+work I did for the Seybold SF Convention, 2002 (see article at
+\href{http://www.planetpdf.com/mainpage.asp?webpageid=2130}{planetPDF});
+the techniques were first presented to the PDF public at this
+convention. My complete presentation from that conference is
+again available from
+\href{http://www.planetpdf.com/mainpage.asp?webpageid=2310}{planetPDF}.
+
+\paragraph*{Acknowledgements.} Noel Vaillant, \url{www.probability.net}, deserves my thanks for
+his enthusiasm for the \pkg{web} style file and his initial
+work on it inspired me to make a serious effort at writing a
+\LaTeX\ package.
+
+Thanks also goes out to Jean-Michel Sarlat for writing a French
+version of the \pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} packages. See
+his \href{http://melusine.eu.org/syracuse/}{Syracuse} Web site. He
+urged me to include a language option. Thanks also goes to
+Michael Wiedmann who suggested a language option many months
+earlier, but I'm afraid it landed on deaf ears at the time.
+These two provided the translations for the \texttt{french} and
+\texttt{german} options. (January 1, 2000)
+
+My thanks to Heiko Oberdiek, who took a close look at
+\textsf{insdljs}. He made several suggestions, and urged me to
+make some significant improvements to this package.
+
+\medbreak\noindent
+Now, I really must get back to retirement.\enspace\dps
+
+\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace{2ex}}
+\includeexersolutions
+\includequizsolutions
+
+
+\newpage
+\markright{References}
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{[1]}\label{references}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}References}
+
+\bibitem{tech:AcroJS}\hypertarget{references}{}%
+ Acrobat JavaScript Scripting Refernce, Technical Note \#5431, Version~6.0.,
+ Adobe Systems, Inc., 200\\ \url{http://partners.adobe.com/asn/acrobat/docs.jsp}
+
+\bibitem{book:Lamport}
+ Leslie Lamport, \textit{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation}
+ System (2nd ed.), Addison-Wesley Publishing Company,
+ 1994, ISBN 0-201-52983-1.
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens1}
+ Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander
+ Samarin, \textit{The \LaTeX{} Companion}, Addison-Wesley
+ Publishing Company, 1994, ISBN 0-201-54199-8.
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens2}
+ Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank
+ Mittelbach, \textit{The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion},
+ Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1997, ISBN
+ 0-201-85469-4.
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens3} Michel Goossens, and Rahtz, Sebastian,
+ with Gurari, Eitan, Moore, Ross, and Sutor, Robert,
+ \textit{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion},
+ Addison Wesley Longman, Reading, Massachusetts, USA, 1999.
+ ISBN: 0-201-43311-7.
+
+\bibitem{book:Kopka}
+ Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. Daly, \textit{A Guide to
+ \LaTeX2e} (2nd ed.), Addison-Wesley Publishing Company,
+ 1995, ISBN 0-201-43777-X.
+
+\bibitem{book:Knuth}
+ Donald E. Knuth, \textit{The \TeX book}, Addison-Wesley
+ Publishing Company, 1987, ISBN 0-201-13448-9.
+
+\bibitem{book:Merz}
+ Thomas Merz, \textit{Web Publishing with Acrobat/PDF},
+ Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York, 1998,
+ ISBN 3-540-63762-1.
+
+\bibitem{article:Story:Pdfmarks}
+ D.P. Story, \textit{Pdfmarks: Links and Forms}, AcroTeX Web
+ Site, 1998,\\\url{www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex.html}
+
+\bibitem{article:Story:LaTeX}
+ D.P. Story, \textit{Using \LaTeX\ to Create Quality PDF Documents for the
+ WWW}, Acro\!\TeX\ Web Site, 1998,\\
+ \url{www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex.html}
+
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+
+% \printindex
+\end{document}
+
+I copied the file amsfonts.map from texmf/dvips/ams
+to texmf/pdftex/base. I then edited the file
+pdftex.cfg and included the line
+map +amsfonts.map.
+map standard.map % to get dings
+
+output_format 1
+compress_level 9
+decimal_digits 2
+page_width 210mm
+page_height 297mm
+horigin 1in
+vorigin 1in
+map standard.map
+map +cm.map
+map +amsfonts.map
+% map +logo.map
+% map +lucida.map
+% map +misc.map
+% map +cs.map
+% map +cmttf.map
+% map +test.map
+% map +ttftest.map
+% map +mono.map
+
+
+\subsubsection{An Example}\label{sss:quizexample}
+
+
+%\renewcommand\bqlabel{Begin Quiz}
+%\renewcommand\eqlabel{End Quiz}
+
+The following example is used at the Acro\!\TeX\ Web Site in a
+demonstration program on how to use \emph{Adobe's FDF Toolkit} to
+process form data from a pdf file. (Form data exported from a pdf
+file is in the \emph{Forms Data Format}, or FDF.) The url for
+this demonstration program is \url{\bUrl/demo/quiz1_q.pdf}.
+
+
+\symbolchoice{diamond}
+
+\begin{quiz*}{QuizTotal} Answer each of the following. Passing is 100\%.
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item Calculate the limit, if it exists, otherwise, state that it does not
+exist (d.n.e.).
+\[
+ \lim_{x\to3}\frac{\sqrt{3x}(x^2-4)^2}{x^2-2x-1}.
+\]
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 $75$ &\Ans1 $\dfrac{75}2$ &\Ans0 $25$ &\Ans0 d.n.e.
+\end{answers}
+
+\item Calculate the limit, if it exists, otherwise, state that it does not
+exist (d.n.e.).
+\[
+ \lim_{t\to2}\frac{t^2-4}{t-2}.
+\]
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 $2$ &\Ans0 $+\infty$ &\Ans1 4 &\Ans0 d.n.e.
+\end{answers}
+
+\item Calculate the limit,
+$\displaystyle\lim_{t\to2^-}\frac{t^2}{t-2}$, if it exists, otherwise,
+state that it does not exist (d.n.e.).
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 $-\infty$ &\Ans0 $+\infty$ &\Ans0 $4$ &\Ans0 d.n.e.
+\end{answers}
+
+\item Using one-sided limit techniques, determine whether the limit
+$\lim_{x\to2}f(x)$ exists and state its value, where
+\[
+ f(x) = \begin{cases}
+ |x^2-5| & \text{for }x\le2 \\
+ \dfrac{x-2}{x-2} & \text{for }x>2
+ \end{cases}
+\]
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 $-1$& \Ans0 0 &\Ans1 1 &\Ans0 d.n.e.
+\end{answers}
+
+\item Calculate the limit,
+$\displaystyle\lim_{x\to-2}\frac{\sqrt{x+8}-\sqrt6}{x+2}$,
+if it exists, otherwise, state that it does not
+exist (d.n.e.).
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 $\dfrac1{\sqrt6}$ &\Ans1 $\dfrac{\sqrt6}{12}$ &
+ \Ans0 $\dfrac12$ &\Ans0 d.n.e.
+\end{answers}
+
+\item There is some function $f$ and some number $a$ in the domain of
+$f$ such that
+\[
+ f'(a)=\lim_{x\to-2}\frac{\sqrt{x+8}-\sqrt6}{x+2}
+\]
+Name the function $f$ and the number $a$.
+\begin{answers}2
+\Ans1 \strut$f(x)=\sqrt{x+8}$; $a=-2$ &\Ans0 $f(x)=\sqrt{x}$; $a=-2$\\[3pt]
+\Ans0 \strut$f(x)=\sqrt{x+8}$; $a=0$ &\Ans0 $f(x)=\sqrt{x+8}$; $a=2$
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\raisebox{-3pt}
+{\TextField[width=3in,name=QuizTotal,bordercolor=0 0 1,default=\eqScore]{}}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The partial code for this quiz looks like this.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\symbolchoice{diamond} % change to diamond `check'
+\begin{quiz*}{QuizTotal} Answer each of the following....
+\begin{questions}
+.........
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\raisebox{-3pt}{\TextField[name=QuizTotal,
+ default=\eqScore,bordercolor=0 0 1,width=3in]{}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzTeXc} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Thomas Esser maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans1 te\TeX &\Ans0 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Fabrice Popineau maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans0 te\TeX &\Ans1 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Christian Schenk maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans0 te\TeX &\Ans0 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad
+\raisebox{-2pt}{\renewcommand\LayoutTextField[2]{% label, field
+\medskip\noindent#2}%
+\TextField[name=qzTeXc,width=1.25in,align={0 /Ff 1},
+ default=\eqScore]{}\raisebox{3.5pt}{%
+ \CorrButton[\BC{0 0 1}% blue border color
+ \CA{TeX}% Button text
+ \RC{Users}% rollover text
+ \AC{Group}% pushed text
+ \DA{/TiRo 10 Tf 0 0 1 rg}% times roman, 10 pt, blue text
+% \W{1}\S{I}%
+ \BS{/W 1 /S /I}% % border width 1, inset button
+ ]{qzTeXc}}}
+
+
+%\noindent\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+\begin{quiz}*{qzTeX} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Who created \TeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Knuth &\Ans0 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\item Who originally wrote \LaTeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Knuth &\Ans1 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}
+
+
+\subsection{Greater Customization with
+ \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{TextField}}
+ {\textbackslash TextField}}\label{ss:modoutputfield}
+
+The \cs{ScoreField} macro is defined as
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\ScoreField}[2][width=1.5in]{%
+ \TextField[name=#2,default=\eqScore,align={0 /Ff 1},#1]{}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent You can see the command takes one required argument and one
+optional argument (the required one is label \texttt{\#2} and the
+optional one is \texttt{\#1}). The required argument becomes the
+\texttt{name} of the field, and the optional parameter is just
+added into the parameter list of \cs{TextField}. You can also see
+the \texttt{value} of the field is set to \cs{eqScore}, which
+expands to `Score:' in English.
+
+More sophisticated score fields can be obtained by manipulating
+\cs{TextField} directly.
+
+We can modify the appearance of the text field in a couple of
+ways: (1) by changing some of the options in \cs{TextField}; (2)
+changing the macro definition of \cs{LayoutTextField}.
+
+\subsubsection{Admissible key-value pairs of
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{TextField}}
+ {\textbackslash TextField}}\label{sss:modtextfield}
+
+In this section we will outline methods of modifying the
+appearance of \cs{TextField} text box, which is a macro defined in
+the \pkg{hyperref} package.
+
+The following table lists several useful options for
+\cs{TextField}.
+
+%Numerous examples on how to use these options
+%follow the table.
+
+
+\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}lll>{\PBS\raggedright}p{1.5in}}
+\multicolumn{4}{l}{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$
+\color{blue} \cs{TextField} Options: Dimension Related} \\ [3pt]
+height & dimen & & height of box \\
+width & dimen & & width of field box \\ [12pt]
+%
+\multicolumn{4}{l}{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$
+\color{blue} \cs{TextField} Options: Text Related} \\ [3pt] align
+&name &0 & $0=\text{left-aligned}$,\newline
+ $1=\text{centered}$\newline
+ $2=\text{right-aligned}$ \\
+charsize & dimen & 10pt & Font size of text \\ [12pt]
+%
+\multicolumn{4}{l}{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$
+\color{blue} \cs{TextField} Options: Color Related} \\ [3pt]
+backgroundcolor & RGB &1 1 1& Color of background color.\\
+bordercolor & RGB & 1 0 0 & Color of the border.\\ [12pt]
+color & RGB & 0 0 0 & Color of text within field\\
+borderstyle & name &S& S (solid), B (beveled),
+ I (insert), U (underlined) \\ [12pt]
+%
+\multicolumn{4}{l}{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$
+\color{blue} \cs{TextField} Options: Style Related} \\ [3pt]
+borderwidth & number & 1 & Width of the border of the
+ box (in points)\\[12pt]
+%
+\multicolumn{4}{l}{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$
+\color{blue} \cs{TextField} Options: Field Related} \\ [3pt]
+default & & & default value of the field \\
+name & name & & name of the field\\
+readonly & Boolean& false & set read-only switch
+\end{longtable}
+%\end{flushleft}
+
+A complete list of options comes with the \pkg{hyperref}
+documentation; or see Michel Goossens \textit{et
+al}~\cite{book:Goossens3}, entitled \textit{The \LaTeX\ Web
+Companion}
+
+We next present several examples that illustrate the use of these
+options.
+
+\subsubsection{Some Examples of
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{Textfield}}
+ {\textbackslash Textfield}}\label{sss:exampltextfield}
+
+\def\LayoutTextField#1#2{\redpoint\raisebox{-3pt}{#2}}
+
+\TextField[width=2in,name=QuizTotal,bordercolor=0 0 1,
+ default=\eqScore]{}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\TextField[width=2in,name=QuizTotal,
+ bordercolor=0 0 1,default=\eqScore]{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The \texttt{readonly} is an important attribute to have---the
+students cannot modify their score. Unfortunately,
+\texttt{readonly} \emph{does not work} with \pkg{hyperref}. To
+overcome this ``bug'' in \pkg{hyperref}, you have to be a
+little sneaky.
+
+\TextField[width=2in,name=Example,bordercolor=0 0 1,
+ backgroundcolor=0.98 0.92 0.73,color=1 0 0,align={0 /Ff 1},
+ default=Text Field with Various Options]{}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\TextField[width=2in,name=Example,bordercolor=0 0 1,
+ backgroundcolor=0.98 0.92 0.73,color=1 0 0,
+ align={0 /Ff 1}, % realonly is /Ff 1 in pdf code
+ default=Text Field with Various Options]{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The read only key-value (\texttt{/Ff 1}) can ``ride'' into the
+code on the ``back'' of the \texttt{align} parameter.
+(\texttt{align=0} means left-aligned in the text field.)
+
+\TextField[width=2in,name=Example,bordercolor=1 1 1,color=0 0 1,
+ backgroundcolor=.753 .753 .753,borderstyle=B,align={1 /Ff 1},
+ default=Your Score goes here]{}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\TextField[width=1.25in,name=Example,bordercolor=1 1 1,
+ backgroundcolor=.753 .753 .753,color=0 0 1,
+ borderstyle=B,align={1 /Ff 1}, % /Ff 1 = readonly
+ default=Your Score goes here]{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{Modifying
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{LayoutTextField}} {\textbackslash
+LayoutTextField}}\label{sss:modlayout}
+
+\renewcommand\LayoutTextField[2]{#1 #2}
+
+The macro \cs{LayoutTextField} allows you to design how your text
+box is formated by \TeX. The default definition for
+\pkg{hyperref} is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+ \newcommand\LayoutTextField[2]{#1 #2}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The first argument is the \textsf{label}, the second is the
+textfield. For example, above definition yields:\\
+\TextField[width=2.4in,name=Name]{\bfseries Enter your name: }
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+ \TextField[width=2.5in,name=Name]{Enter your name: }
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\medskip
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package redefines this to
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\LayoutTextField[2]{% label, field
+ \medskip\noindent#2}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+Finally, the field examples given earlier had the following
+definition for \cs{LayoutTextField}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\redpoint{\par\medskip\noindent
+ \makebox[\parindent][l]{\large\textcolor{red}
+ {$\blacktriangleright$}}}
+\renewcommand\LayoutTextField[2]{\redpoint
+ \raisebox{-3pt}{#2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent I lowered the text field to line up better with the
+\texttt{amssymb} symbol \cs{blacktriangleright}
+($\blacktriangleright$), which is painted red. In this way we
+obtain
+
+\def\LayoutTextField#1#2{\redpoint\raisebox{-3pt}{#2}}
+\TextField[width=2in,name=QuizTotal,bordercolor=0 0 1,
+ default=\eqScore]{}
+\begin{comment}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\TextField[width=2in,name=QuizTotal,bordercolor=0 0 1,
+ default=\eqScore]{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{comment}
+
+\subsubsection{Custom Comparisons}\label{cusComp}
+
+This section is devoted to customizing the method of comparison
+for the math type objective question using \cs{RespBoxMath} command.
+
+When the user enters an answer into the response box, a
+document level JavaScript function, \texttt{ProcResp}, is called.
+As discussed earlier, the value of the expression entered by the
+user is compared the corresponding value of the answer given by
+the document author. The key word in the last sentence is ``compared''. There
+is a compare function that compares the author's answer with the user's answer.
+
+In general, the \texttt{ProcResp} passes five parameters to a compare function.
+The compare function can be be customized by the document author; there is, however,
+a standard, or default, compare function. It is defined as follows:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+function diffCompare(a,b,c,F,G) {
+ var x;
+ with(Math) {
+ x = c;
+ F = eval(F);
+ G = eval(G);
+ return abs ( F - G );
+ }
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The meaning of these five parameters of this comparison function are
+
+\begin{description}
+ \item[\ttfamily a:] The left-hand endpoint of the interval.
+ \item[\ttfamily b:] The right-hand endpoint of the interval.
+ \item[\ttfamily c:] The point at which both the user and author answers are to
+ be evaluated.
+ \item[\ttfamily F:] The author's answer, a function in $x$.
+ \item[\ttfamily G:] The user's answer, a function in $x$.
+\end{description}
+
+The function \texttt{diffCompare} evaluates each of the two
+functions \texttt F and \texttt G at \texttt{x = c}, and returns
+the absolute difference in the two. For this simple comparison, the parameters
+\texttt a and \texttt b are not used.
+
+The \texttt{diffCompare} will be sufficient for most, but not
+all mathematical questions. For example, consider the following question:
+
+\medskip
+\begin{oQuestion}{indefInt1}
+$\displaystyle\int \sin(x)\,dx = $\space
+\RespBoxMath{-cos(x)}{4}{.0001}01\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{-cos(x)}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+There are infinitely many answers, all of them of the form $-\cos(x)+C$. Note that
+the only input that is marked as correct is $-\cos(x)$, the JavaScript does not judge
+$-\cos(x)+1$, to be correct, for example. The problem is, of course, the method of
+comparison, \texttt{diffCompare}, is not appropriate to this particular problem.
+
+The above question needs a specialized method of comparison. Consider
+the compare function:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{insDLJS}[indefCompare]{compare}{Comparisons}
+function indefCompare(a,b,c,F,G) {
+ var C, eqx;
+ with(Math) {
+ eqx = a;
+ C = eval(F)-eval(G);
+ eqx = c;
+ F = eval(F);
+ G = eval(G);
+ return abs( F - G - C );
+ }
+}
+\end{insDLJS}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This environment was placed in the preamble of this document, and uses the
+\texttt{insdljs} package, which comes with the \texttt{exerquiz} distribution.
+This will add the function \texttt{indefCompare} function to the document level
+JavaScript section of the PDF file when it is created.
+
+\redpoint It is \emph{important} to note that when you are writing your
+own compare functions, the independent variable must be named
+`\texttt{eqx}'. The functions \texttt F and \texttt G have been
+searched and their original independent variable has been replaced with
+`\texttt{eqx}'. To get a correct evaluation, therefore, any compare functions
+must use the `\texttt{eqx}' to evaluate the functions.
+
+Let's try that same question, but with this compare function instead of the
+default compare function
+
+\medskip
+\begin{oQuestion}{indefInt2}
+$\displaystyle\int \sin(x)\,dx = $\space
+\RespBoxMath{-cos(x)}{4}{.0001}01[indefCompare]\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{-cos(x)}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+Now, if you enter $-\cos(x) + 10$, for example, that answer will be judged as
+correct by \texttt{ProcResp}.
+
+The code for the above response box is
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{indefInt2}
+$\displaystyle\int \sin(x)\,dx = $\space
+\RespBoxMath{-cos(x)}{4}{.0001}01[indefCompare]\kern1bp
+\CorrAnsButton{-cos(x)}
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The optional ninth parameter is present in the
+\cs{\hyperlink{paraRespBox}{RespBoxMath}}. Use this parameter to
+pass the name of the compare function that is to process the
+question. Here, we specify \texttt{indefCompare}, which was
+defined in the preamble of this document using the
+\texttt{insDLJS} environment.
diff --git a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/eformman.pdf b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/eformman.pdf
index ae903f9b..17818148 100644
--- a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/eformman.pdf
+++ b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/eformman.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/eformman.tex b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/eformman.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..84b8b8ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/eformman.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,3647 @@
+% makeindex < aebpro_man.idx > aebpro_man.ind
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[fleqn]{amsmath}
+\usepackage[%
+ web={centertitlepage,designv,
+ forcolorpaper,latextoc,pro,useui},
+ exerquiz,aebxmp
+]{aeb_pro}
+\usepackage[dblevel=0]{aeb_mlink}
+\usepackage[altbullet]{lucidbry}
+%\usepackage{myriadpro}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx,array,longtable}
+%\usepackage[usecmtt]{myriadpro}
+
+\usepackage{xbmks}
+\DeclareInitView{layoutmag={navitab:UseOutlines}}
+\xbmksetup{colors={int=red},styles={intbf}}
+
+%\addtolength{\marginparwidth}{20pt}
+
+
+%\makeatletter
+%\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.5em}{3.5em}}
+%\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{4}{5em}{1em}}
+%\def\numberline#1{\hb@xt@2.5em{#1\hfil}}
+%\makeatother
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2em}{3.5em}}
+\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{4}{5.5em}{1.5em}}
+\renewcommand\@pnumwidth{2.55em}
+\renewcommand*\l@section[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\z@
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty
+ \addvspace{1.0em \@plus\p@}%
+ \setlength\@tempdima{2em}%{1.5em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \bfseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+\makeatother
+
+\hfuzz=1pt
+
+\setlongtables
+
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+\makeindex
+\usepackage{acroman}
+
+\usepackage[active]{srcltx}
+
+\urlstyle{rm}
+
+\def\tutpath{doc/tutorial}
+\def\tutpathi{tutorial}
+\def\expath{../examples}
+
+\DeclareDocInfo
+{
+ university={\AcroTeX.Net\protect\\[1ex]eforms and insdljs Documentation},
+ title={Support for AcroForms and Links, and for\texorpdfstring{\protect\\[2ex]}{ }Document JavaScript and Open Page Events},
+ author={D. P. Story},
+ email={dpstory@acrotex.net},
+ subject={Documentation for the eforms and insdljs packages},
+ talksite={\url{www.acrotex.net}},
+ version={2.0},
+ prepared={2018/08/16},
+ preparedLabel={Distribution Dated:},
+ keywords={LaTeX, hyperref, PDF, exercises, quizzes},
+ copyrightStatus=True,
+ copyrightNotice={Copyright (C) \the\year, D. P. Story},
+ copyrightInfoURL={http://www.acrotex.net}
+}
+%\revisionLabel{Distribution Dated:}
+\def\AEBBook{\textsl{{Acro\!\TeX} eDucation System Tools: {\LaTeX} for interactive PDF documents}}
+
+\setlength{\marginparwidth}{31.25pt}
+
+\renewcommand\hproportionwebtitle{.75}
+\universityLayout{fontsize=Large,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\titleLayout{fontsize=LARGE,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\authorLayout{fontsize=Large,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\tocLayout{fontsize=Large,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\sectionLayout{indent=-62.5pt,fontsize=large,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\subsectionLayout{indent=-31.25pt,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\subsubsectionLayout{indent=0pt,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\subsubDefaultDing{\texorpdfstring{$\bullet$}{\textrm\textbullet}}
+
+\def\verygoodbreak{%
+\vskip0pt plus1in\goodbreak\vskip0pt plus-1in}
+
+\hyphenation{Java-Script}
+
+\def\AcroT{Acro\!\TeX}\def\cAcroT{{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroT}}}
+\def\AcroEB{\AcroT{} eDucation Bundle}\def\cAcroEB{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroEB}}
+\def\AcroB{\AcroT{} Bundle}\def\cAcroB{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroB}}
+\def\bUrl{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory}
+\definePath{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{http://www.acrotex.net/blog}
+
+
+\makeatletter
+\let\bslash=\@backslashchar
+\renewcommand{\paragraph}{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{0pt}{6pt}{-3pt}{\bfseries}}
+
+% Begin definition of \appendixsubsection
+\newcounter{appendixsubsection} %\setcounter{appendixsubsection}{0}
+\def\theappendixsubsection{\Alph{appendixsubsection}}
+\def\theHappendixsubsection{\Alph{appendixsubsection}}
+\newcommand\appendixsubsection{%
+ \renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\csname the##1\endcsname.\enspace}%
+ \@startsection{appendixsubsection}{1}{\z@}%
+ {-2.5ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {1ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries\color{blue}}}
+\let\appendixsubsectionmark=\@gobble
+\expandafter\def\csname toclevel@appendixsubsection\endcsname{1}
+
+\let\l@appendixsubsection=\l@section
+\def\web@appendixsubsection#1#2#3{\web@parse#1\\\par\penalty-50 \hspace*{\@tempdima}\mbox{}%
+ \textbf{\makebox[0pt][r]{\makebox[\@tempdima][r]{\hyperlink{#3}{\numberline.\enspace}}}\web@title}\endgraf}
+% end definition of appendixsubsection
+
+\newcommand{\aebDescriptionlabel}[1]{%
+ \setlength\dimen@{\amtIndent+\labelsep}%
+ {\hspace*{\dimen@}#1}}
+\newenvironment{aebDescript}
+ {\begin{list}{}{\setlength{\labelwidth}{0pt}%
+% \setlength{\leftmargin}{\leftmargin}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{\leftmargin+\amtIndent}%
+ \setlength\itemindent{-\leftmargin}%
+ \let\makelabel\aebDescriptionlabel
+ }}{\end{list}}
+
+\def\hardspace{{\fontfamily{cmtt}\selectfont\symbol{32}}}
+\def\AcroBlog{{Acro\!\TeX} Blog}
+%\newlength{\aebdimen}
+\def\anglemeta#1{$\langle\textit{\texttt{#1}}\rangle$}
+\def\meta#1{\textit{\texttt{#1}}}
+\let\pkg\textsf
+\let\env\texttt
+\let\opt\texttt
+\let\app\textsf
+\def\AEB{\textsf{AeB}}
+\def\AcroTeX{Acro\!\TeX}
+\def\HTML{HTML}\def\FDF{FDF}
+\def\PDF{PDF}\def\URL{URL}
+\let\amtIndent\leftmargini
+\def\bNH{\begin{NoHyper}}\def\eNH{\end{NoHyper}}
+\def\nhnameref#1{\bNH\nameref{#1}\eNH}
+\def\nhNameref#1{\bNH\Nameref{#1}\eNH}
+\def\nhurl#1{\bNH\url{#1}\eNH}
+\def\grayV#1{\textcolor{gray}{#1}}
+\def\darg#1{\{#1\}}
+\def\parboxValign{t}
+\renewcommand*{\backrefalt}[4]{%
+ \ifcase #1\or
+ See page~#2.\else See pages~#2.\fi
+}
+\newenvironment{aebQuote}
+ {\list{}{\leftmargin\amtIndent}%
+ \item\relax}{\endlist}
+\newcommand{\FmtMP}[2][0pt]{\mbox{}\marginpar{%
+ \raisebox{.5\baselineskip+#1}{%
+ \expandafter\parbox\expandafter[\parboxValign]%
+ {\marginparwidth}{\aebbkFmtMp#2}}}}
+\def\aebbkFmtMp{\kern0pt\itshape\small
+ \ifusebw\color{gray}\else\color{blue}\fi
+ \raggedleft\hspace{0pt}}
+\def\dps{$\mbox{$\mathfrak D$\kern-.3em\mbox{$\mathfrak P$}%
+ \kern-.6em \hbox{$\mathcal S$}}$}
+\def\FitItIn{\eq@fititin}
+\def\endredpoint{\FitItIn{{\large\ifusebw\color{black}\else\color{red}\fi$\blacktriangleleft$}}}
+
+\advance\marginparwidth16pt
+
+\makeatother
+
+\hypersetup{linktocpage}
+
+%\newenvironment{sverbatim}
+%{\par\footnotesize\verbatim}{\endverbatim}
+
+%\newcommand\redpoint{\par\ifdim\lastskip>0pt\relax\vskip-\lastskip\fi
+%\vskip\medskipamount\noindent
+% \makebox[\parindent][l]{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$}}
+%\newcommand\handpoint{\par\ifdim\lastskip>0pt\relax\vskip-\lastskip\fi
+%\vskip\medskipamount\noindent
+% \makebox[\parindent][l]{\large\color{blue}\ding{042}}}
+%\newcommand\newtopic{\par\ifdim\lastskip>0pt\relax\vskip-\lastskip\fi
+%\vskip\medskipamount\noindent
+%}
+
+\def\cs#1{\texttt{\bslash#1}}
+\def\Cs#1{\hyperlink{#1}{\cs{#1}}}
+\def\tableCs#1{\hyperlink{table#1}{\cs{#1}}}
+\def\targ#1#2?{\hypertarget{#2}{\bslash#2}#1}
+
+\def\dps{$\mbox{$\mathfrak D$\kern-.3em\mbox{$\mathfrak P$}%
+ \kern-.6em \hbox{$\mathcal S$}}$}
+
+\def\eForm{\textsf{eForm}}
+
+
+\def\OpenToHere{\OpenAction{\JS{this.gotoNamedDest("Here")}}}
+\def\OpenHere{\hypertarget{Here}{\strut}}%\OpenToHere
+
+\makeatletter
+\let\web@copyright\@gobble
+%\let\web@revision\@gobble
+\renewcommand\webdirectory
+{%
+ \par\ifeqforpaper\else\minimumskip\fi\vspace{\stretch{1}}%
+ \begin{flushleft}\textbf{\large\web@directory}%
+ \vspace{-3pt}
+ \begin{itemize}\setlength{\itemsep}{-3pt}%
+ \bfseries
+ \item \leavevmode\hyperlink{webtoc}{\web@toc}%
+ \item \web@article
+ \item[] \rule[2pt]{2.25in}{.4pt}
+ \item \textsf{\href{apb_man.pdf}{APB}} Documentation
+ \item \href{webeqman.pdf}{\AcroEB} Documentation
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{flushleft}
+}
+%\renewcommand\titlepageTrailer
+%{%
+% \web@copyright\ \copyright\ \webcopyrightyears\ \webversion
+% \hfill\url{http://www.acrotex.net}\\
+% \web@revision\ \@date \hfill\href{mailto:\webemail}{\webemail}
+%}
+\DesignTitlePageTrailer
+{%
+ ul=Copyright \copyright\ \webcopyrightyears,
+ ur=\thewebemail,
+ lr=\url{http://www.acrotex.net},
+ ll={\web@revision\ \aeb@prepared},
+ raise=-25pt
+}
+
+\makeatother
+
+\newcounter{exampleno}
+\def\theexampleno{\arabic{exampleno}}
+\newcommand\Example{\refstepcounter{exampleno}%
+\paragraph*{Example~\arabic{exampleno}.}}
+
+\definecolor{aeb}{rgb}{0.24,0.38,0.68}%bleu
+\universityColor{aeb}
+\tocColor{aeb}
+
+\everyCheckBox{\BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}\textColor{1 0 0}}
+\everyRadioButton{\BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}\textColor{0 0 1}\symbolchoice{star}}
+
+\reversemarginpar
+\mlMarksOff
+
+\chngDocObjectTo{\newDO}{doc}
+\begin{docassembly}
+var titleOfManual="The AeB eforms MANUAL";
+var manualfilename="Manual_BG_Print_eforms.pdf";
+var manualtemplate="Manual_BG_Blue.pdf"; // Blue, Green, Brown
+var _pathToBlank="C:/Users/Public/Documents/ManualBGs/"+manualtemplate;
+var doc;
+var buildIt=false;
+if ( buildIt ) {
+ console.println("Creating new " + manualfilename + " file.");
+ doc = \appopenDoc({cPath: _pathToBlank, bHidden: true});
+ var _path=this.path;
+ var pos=_path.lastIndexOf("/");
+ _path=_path.substring(0,pos)+"/"+manualfilename;
+ \docSaveAs\newDO({ cPath: _path });
+ doc.closeDoc();
+ doc = \appopenDoc({cPath: manualfilename, oDoc:this, bHidden: true});
+ f=doc.getField("ManualTitle");
+ f.value=titleOfManual;
+ doc.flattenPages();
+ \docSaveAs\newDO({ cPath: manualfilename });
+ doc.closeDoc();
+} else {
+ console.println("Using the current "+manualfilename+" file.");
+}
+var _path=this.path;
+var pos=_path.lastIndexOf("/");
+_path=_path.substring(0,pos)+"/"+manualfilename;
+\addWatermarkFromFile({
+ bOnTop:false,
+ bOnPrint:false,
+ cDIPath:_path
+});
+\executeSave();
+\end{docassembly}
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\pdfbookmarkx[1]{Title Page}[action={\Named{FirstPage}}]{TitlePage}
+\pdfbookmarkx[1]{AeB Manual}[action={\GoToR/F(aeb_man.pdf)/D[0 /Fit]},color=blue,style={bf}]{AEB}
+\pdfbookmarkx[1]{Links to AcroTeX.Net}[action={/S/GoTo/D(undefined)},%
+ color=magenta,style={bf}]{acrotex}
+\belowpdfbookmarkx{http://www.acrotex.net}[action={\URI{http://www.acrotex.net}},%
+ color=magenta,style={bf}]{home}
+\belowpdfbookmarkx{http://blog.acrotex.net}[action={\URI{http://blog.acrotex.net}},%
+ color=magenta,style={bf}]{blog}
+
+\selectColors{linkColor=black}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\selectColors{linkColor=webgreen}
+
+\part{PDF Links and Forms}
+
+%\section{Introduction}
+
+In \hypertarget{eformsPkg}{this} document we describe the support for \app{Acrobat} form elements
+in an {\cAcroT} document. The \textit{PDF Reference} indicates there
+are four different categories of fields for a total of seven types
+of fields.
+\begin{questions}
+
+\setbox0=\hbox{(d)}
+\def\I#1{\makebox[\wd0]{\color{blue}(\hfil#1\hfil)}\ }
+
+ \item \textbf{Button Fields}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\I{a}] \textbf{Push Button}
+ \item[\I{b}] \textbf{Check Box}
+ \item[\I{c}] \textbf{Radio Button}
+ \end{description}
+ \item \textbf{Choice Fields}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\I{a}] \textbf{List Box}
+ \item[\I{b}] \textbf{Combo Box}
+ \end{description}
+ \item \textbf{Text Fields}
+ \item \textbf{Signature Fields}
+
+\end{questions}
+The {\cAcroB} now supports \textit{signature fields}. Using the
+command \cs{sigField}, an unsigned signature field is created.
+The field can be signed, either by using \app{Acrobat}, or programmatically
+from a {\LaTeX} source, but you need to use \textsf{aeb\_pro} and to
+create the PDF using \app{Acrobat} Distiller.
+
+The \textsf{hyperref} Package (Rahtz, Oberdiek \textit{et al})
+provides support for the same set of form fields; however, not all
+features of these fields can be accessed through the
+\textsf{hyperref} commands. I was determined to write my own set
+of commands which would be sufficiently comprehensive and
+extendable to suit all the needs of the \cAcroB. All the quiz
+environments have been modified to use this new set of form
+commands, in this way, there is a uniform treatment of all form
+fields in the \cAcroB.
+
+\redpoint The demo files for {\eForm} support are
+\texttt{eqform.tex}, for those using the \textsf{\app{Acrobat}
+Distiller} to create a PDF document, and \texttt{eqform\_pd.tex},
+for those who use \textsf{pdftex} or \textsf{dvipdfm}.
+
+\newtopic\textbf{\textcolor{red}{Online Resources:}} The following online
+resources are recommended:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \href{https://developer.mozilla.org/en/JavaScript}{Core JavaScript Reference} at
+ Mozilla Developer Center.
+ \item \href{http://livedocs.adobe.com/acrobat_sdk/9/Acrobat9_HTMLHelp/wwhelp/wwhimpl/js/html/wwhelp.htm?&accessible=true}
+ {\emph{JavaScript for \app{Acrobat} API Reference}} at the \app{Acrobat} Developer Center. In the navigation panel
+ on the left, select JavaScript.
+ \item \href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?cat=5}{PDF Blog},
+ by D. P. Story.
+ \item \href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?cat=24}{AeB Blog},
+ by D. P. Story.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Package Requirement and Options}
+
+Prior to \textsf{Exerquiz} version 5.9, \textsf{eforms} was
+an integral part of \textsf{Exerquiz}. I've now separated the two, making
+\textsf{eforms} into a stand-alone package that is called by
+\textsf{Exerquiz}.
+
+\subsection{Package Requirements}
+
+The \textsf{eforms} package requires \textsf{hyperref} (a newer version)
+and \textsf{insdljs}, a package that is part of the {\cAcroB}.
+
+\subsection{Package Options}
+
+The \textsf{eforms} package has the usual driver options:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+dvipsone, dvips, pdftex, dvipdfm, dvipdfmx, xetex
+\end{Verbatim}
+The package also works correctly with the \textsf{luatex} executable.
+Informing the package what driver you are using is important, because each
+driver has its own code that needs to be used to create form fields. For
+dvips, you should use
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[dvips]{eforms}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \textsf{eforms} package now does automatic detection of
+\textsf{pdftex} (including luatex) and \textsf{xetex}. If the \textsf{web}
+or \textsf{exerquiz} package is used, \textsf{eforms} will use the driver
+defined in these earlier included packages.
+
+\newtopic A minimal document is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{eforms} % <-- the driver is pdftex or xetex
+\begin{document}
+ % Content containing form fields, such as...
+ Don't \pushButton[\CA{Push Me}]{myButton}{}{12bp},
+ I fall down easily.
+\end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The \textsf{eforms} package brings in the \textsf{hyperref} package
+and passes it the driver, so there is no need to specify
+\textsf{hyperref}, usually. If you wish to introduce \textsf{hyperref}
+yourself with specific options, place it before \textsf{eforms}.
+
+If you use the \textsf{exerquiz} package, \textsf{exerquiz} brings
+in the \textsf{eforms} package and passes it to the driver.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{preview} option}
+
+Use the \texttt{preview} option if you use a \texttt{dvi} previewer
+to view your document. When \texttt{preview} is taken, a frame box
+is drawn around any form field created by \textsf{eforms}, making
+the position of the field visible in the previewer. This makes it
+easy to make any additional adjustments for the position of the
+field. Turn off this option when you build a PDF file.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{useui} option}
+
+The \texttt{useui} option includes the \textsf{xkeyval} package, and
+defines a number of key-value pairs that are used in the optional
+arguments of the form fields and links. These key-value pairs are
+more ``user-friendly'' to use. See
+\hyperref[useui]{Section~\ref*{useui}}, page~\pageref*{useui}, for a
+description of these key-value pairs.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{unicode} option of \textsf{hyperref}}
+
+The \textsf{eforms} package will obey the \texttt{unicode} option of
+\textsf{hyperref}. Whenever this option is taken in hyperref, for
+certain keys (namely, \cs{V}, \cs{DV}, \cs{TU}, \cs{CA}, \cs{RC}, and
+\cs{AC}), standard latex markup may be used to enter the values of
+these keys, for example, in a text field, you might set
+\verb!\V{J\"{u}rgen}!. This key-value pair will produce a field
+value of ``J\"{u}rgen'' in that text field.
+
+
+\section{Form Fields}
+
+The \texttt{eforms} support for {\eForm} defines seven basic (and internal)
+commands for creating the seven types of form elements. These seven are used
+as ``building blocks'' for defining all buttons, check boxes, radio buttons
+and text fields used in the \texttt{exerquiz} quizzes; and for defining seven
+user-commands: \cs{listBox}, \cs{comboBox}, \cs{pushButton}, \cs{checkBox},
+\cs{radioButton}, \cs{textField}, and \cs{sigField}. These user commands are
+the topic of the subsequent sections.
+
+Each of the above listed field commands has an optional first
+parameter that is used to modify the appearance of the field,
+and/or to add actions to the field. This is a ``local''
+capability, i.e., a way of modifying an individual field. There is
+also a ``global'' mechanism. Each field type has its own
+\cs{every\anglemeta{FieldTypeName}} command. For example, all buttons
+created by \cs{pushButton} can be modified using the
+\cs{everyPushButton} command. See the sections on
+\nameref{CheckBoxes} and \nameref{RadioButtons} for examples and
+additional comments.
+
+\redpoint The local modifications (the ones inserted into the
+field by the first parameter) are read \textit{after} the global
+modifications, in this way, the local modifications overwrite the
+global ones.
+
+\paragraph*{Key-value Pairs.} The optional first parameter of each of the form and link commands take
+two styles of key-values:
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \textsf{eforms} KVP: This is the key-value system originally developed, each KVP has the form
+ \cs{\anglemeta{key}\darg{\meta{val}}}. Through these keys, you can set the appearance of a form or link, and
+ set the actions as well.
+
+ \item[] The \cs{presets} key is useful for developing collections of pre-defined
+ key-value pairs for insertion into the optional parameter list. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\def\myFavFive{%
+ \BC{1 0 0}\BG{0 1 0}\textColor{1 0 0}\Q{2}\CA{Push Me}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Later, a button can be created using these preset values:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\presets{\myFavFive}
+ \A{\JS{app.alert("AcroTeX rocks!")}}]{pb1}{}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+ \item[] The \textsf{eforms} KVP system is explained throughout the manual, a complete listing
+ of all supported KVPs is found in the \hyperref[appendix]{Appendices}, page~\pageref{appendix}.
+
+ \item \textsf{xkeyval} KVP: When the \texttt{useui} option is taken, key-value pairs are
+ defined of the form \texttt{\anglemeta{key}[=\anglemeta{value}]}. The key-value pairs are actually a value of
+ a special \textsf{eforms} key, \cs{ui}. The value of \cs{ui} consists of a comma-delimited list of
+ \textsf{xkeyval} key-value pairs.
+
+ \item[] This style of key-value pairs also has
+ a \texttt{presets} key, useful for developing collections of pre-defined
+ key-value pairs for insertion into the optional parameter list. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\def\myFavFive{%
+ bordercolor={1 0 0},bgcolor={0 1 0},
+ textcolor={1 0 0},align={right},uptxt={Push Me}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Later, a button can be created using these preset values:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\ui{presets=\myFavFive,
+ js={app.alert("AcroTeX rocks!")}}]{pb1}{}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+ \item[] The \textsf{xkeyval} KVP system is described in \mlNameref{useui}.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+\redpoint The first (optional) parameter is read in first, but only after ``sanitizing'' certain
+characters that have special meaning to {\LaTeX}, these are \texttt{\string~}, \texttt{\#},
+and \texttt{\&}; each of these may appear as part of a URL, or may appear in JavaScript code.
+Within the first parameter, these three character can be used freely, without escaping them.
+
+\subsection{Button Fields}
+
+Buttons are form elements that the user interacts with using only a
+mouse. There are three types of buttons: push buttons, check boxes
+and radio buttons.
+
+\subsubsection{Push Buttons}
+
+The push button is a button field that has no
+value, it is neither on nor off. Generally, push buttons are used
+to initiate some action, such as JavaScript action.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{pushButton[\#1]\darg{\#2}\darg{\#3}\darg{\#4}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\pushButton[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\PD
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item[\texttt{\#1}:] optional, used to enter any modification of appearance/actions
+\item[\texttt{\#2}:] the title of the button field
+\item[\texttt{\#3}:] the width of the bounding rectangle
+\item[\texttt{\#4}:] the height of the bounding rectangle
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph*{Default Appearance:} The default appearance of
+a push button is determined by the following:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\W{1}\S{B}\F{\FPrint}\BC{0 0 0}
+\H{P}\BG{.7529 .7529 .7529}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Key Variables:} The first (optional) parameter can be
+used to modify the default appearance of a button field and to add
+some actions. Following is a list of the variables used within the
+brackets of this optional argument for the pushbutton: \tableCs{Ff},
+\tableCs{F}, \Cs{H}, \Cs{TU}, \Cs{W}, \Cs{S}, \Cs{R}, \Cs{BC},
+\Cs{BG}, \Cs{CA}, \Cs{RC}, \Cs{AC}, \Cs{mkIns}, \Cs{textFont},
+\Cs{textSize}, \Cs{textColor}, \Cs{A}, \Cs{AA} and \Cs{rawPDF}.
+See the \hyperlink{kv}{Support Key Variables} table for
+descriptions and notes on each of these variables.
+
+\handpoint If the \textit{width} argument (\texttt{\#3}) is left
+empty, the {\LaTeX} code attempts to determine the appropriate
+width based on the width of the text given by \Cs{CA}, \Cs{RC} and
+\Cs{AC}. See \textbf{Example~2}, below.
+
+\paragraph*{Global Modification:} \cs{everyPushButton\darg{\anglemeta{KV-pairs}}}
+
+\Example This example resets all forms in this document:
+ \pushButton[\CA{Push}\AC{Me}\RC{Reset}\A{/S/ResetForm}]{myButton}{36bp}{12bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\CA{Push}\AC{Me}\RC{Reset}\A{/S/ResetForm}]
+ {myButton}{36bp}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\Example Button with empty \textit{width} argument:
+ \pushButton[\CA{Push}\AC{Me}\RC{Reset}\A{/S/ResetForm}]{myButton}{}{12bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\CA{Push}\AC{Me}\RC{Reset}\A{/S/ResetForm}]
+ {myButton}{}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{Check Boxes}\label{CheckBoxes}
+
+A check box is a type of button that has one of two values,
+``off'' or ``on''. The value of the field when the field is
+``off'' is \texttt{Off}; the value of the ``on'' state can be
+defined by the user.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{checkBox[\#1]\darg{\#2}\darg{\#3}\darg{\#4}\darg{\#5}}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\checkBox[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\PD
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item[\texttt{\#1}:] optional, used to enter any modification of appearance/actions
+\item[\texttt{\#2}:] the title of the check box button
+\item[\texttt{\#3}:] the width of the bounding rectangle
+\item[\texttt{\#4}:] the height of the bounding rectangle
+\item[\texttt{\#5}:] the name of the ``on'' state (the export value)
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph*{Default Appearance:} The default appearance of
+a standard check box is determined by the following:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\W{1}\S{S}\BC{0 0 0}\F{\FPrint}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Key Variables:} The first (optional) parameter can be
+used to modify the default appearance of a check box and to add
+some actions. Following is a list of the variables used within the
+brackets of this optional argument for the check box: \tableCs{Ff},
+\tableCs{F}, \Cs{TU}, \Cs{W}, \Cs{S}, \Cs{MK}, \Cs{DA}, \Cs{AP},
+\Cs{AS}, \Cs{R}, \Cs{textFont}, \Cs{textSize}, \Cs{textColor},
+\Cs{DV}, \Cs{V}, \Cs{A}, \Cs{AA} and \Cs{rawPDF}. See the
+\hyperlink{kv}{Supported Key Variables} table for descriptions and
+notes on each of these variables.
+
+\paragraph*{Global Modification:} \cs{everyCheckBox\darg{\anglemeta{KV-pairs}}}
+
+\Example Are you married? Yes: \checkBox[\symbolchoice{circle}]{myCheck}{10bp}{10bp}{On}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\checkBox[\symbolchoice{circle}]{myCheck}{10bp}{10bp}{On}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent In the example, the appearance of this check box was
+modified through the global modification scheme. The following
+command appears in the preamble of this document:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\everyCheckBox{
+ \BC{.690 .769 .871} % border color
+ \BG{.941 1 .941} % background color
+ \textColor{1 0 0} % text color
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{Radio Buttons}\label{RadioButtons}
+
+A radio button field is similar to a check box, but is meant to be
+used in unison with one or more additional radio buttons.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{radioButton[\#1]\darg{\#2}\darg{\#3}\darg{\#4}\darg{\#5}}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\radioButton[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\PD
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item[\texttt{\#1}:] optional, used to enter any modification of appearance/actions
+\item[\texttt{\#2}:] the title of the radio button
+\item[\texttt{\#3}:] the width of the bounding rectangle
+\item[\texttt{\#4}:] the height of the bounding rectangle
+\item[\texttt{\#5}:] the name of the ``on'' state (the export value)
+\end{enumerate}
+\redpoint A collection of radio buttons meant to be used in unison
+need to all have the same title (parameter~\texttt{\#2}) but
+different export values (parameter~\texttt{\#5)}.
+
+\paragraph*{Default Appearance:} The default appearance of
+a standard radio button is determined by the following:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\W{1}\S{S}\BC{0 0 0}\F{\FPrint}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Key Variables:} The first (optional) parameter can be
+used to modify the default appearance of a radio button and to add
+some actions. Following is a list of the variables used within the
+brackets of this optional argument for the radio button: \tableCs{Ff},
+\tableCs{F}, \Cs{TU}, \Cs{W}, \Cs{S}, \Cs{MK}, \Cs{DA}, \Cs{AP},
+\Cs{AS}, \Cs{R}, \Cs{textFont}, \Cs{textSize}, \Cs{textColor},
+\Cs{DV}, \Cs{V}, \Cs{A}, \Cs{AA} and \Cs{rawPDF}. See the
+\hyperlink{kv}{Supported Key Variables} table for descriptions and
+notes on each of these variables.
+
+%\redpoint \cs{Ff} \textbf{Field flags.} The values
+%{250606175054} appropriate to a radio button are \Cs{FfNoToggleToOff} (if set,
+%one radio button must be set at all times) and
+%\Cs{FfRadiosInUnison} (if set, radio buttons with the same value
+%will be turned on or off in unison, PDF 1.5).
+
+\paragraph*{Global Modification:} \cs{everyRadioButton\darg{\anglemeta{KV-pairs}}}
+
+\Example What is your gender? Male: \radioButton{myRadio}{10bp}{10bp}{Male} %[\Ff{\FfNoToggleToOff}]
+ Female: \radioButton{myRadio}{10bp}{10bp}{Female}
+ Neither: \radioButton[\A{\JS{app.alert("You can't be 'neither'! I'm resetting the field, guess again!");\r
+ this.resetForm(["myRadio"])}}]{myRadio}{10bp}{10bp}{Neither}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+Male: \radioButton{myRadio}{10bp}{10bp}{Male}
+Female: \radioButton{myRadio}{10bp}{10bp}{Female}
+Neither: \radioButton[\A{\JS{app.alert("You can't be 'neither'!
+ I'm resetting the field, guess again!");\r
+ this.resetForm(["myRadio"])}}]{myRadio}{10bp}{10bp}{Neither}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent In the example, the appearance of these radio button fields was
+modified through the global modification scheme. The following
+command appears in the preamble of this document:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\everyRadioButton{
+ \BC{.690 .769 .871} % border color
+ \BG{.941 1 .941} % background color
+ \textColor{0 0 1} % text color
+ \symbolchoice{star} % check symbol
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Choice Fields}
+
+A choice field is a list of text items, one or more of which can
+be selected by the user.
+
+\subsubsection{List Boxes}
+
+A scrollable list box is a type of choice field in which several
+of the choices are visible in a rectangle. A scroll bar becomes
+available if any of the items in the list are not visible in the
+rectangle provided.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{listBox[\#1]\darg{\#2}\darg{\#3}\darg{\#4}\darg{\#5}}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\listBox[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\PD
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item[\texttt{\#1}:] optional, used to enter any modification of appearance/actions
+\item[\texttt{\#2}:] the title of the list box
+\item[\texttt{\#3}:] the width of the bounding rectangle
+\item[\texttt{\#4}:] the height of the bounding rectangle
+\item[\texttt{\#5}:] an array of appearance/values of list.
+\end{enumerate}
+\newtopic The fifth parameter needs more explanation. The value of this
+parameter which defines the items in the list---their appearance
+text and their export values---take two forms:
+\begin{questions}
+ \item An array of arrays:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+[(v1)(item1)][(v2)(item2)]...[(vn)(itemn)]
+\end{Verbatim}
+ The first entry in the two member array is the export value of the item, the second
+ is the appearance text of that item.
+ \item An array of strings:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+(item1)(item2)...(itemn)
+\end{Verbatim}
+ In this case, the export value is the same as the appearance text.
+\end{questions}
+
+\paragraph*{Default Appearance:} The default appearance of
+a standard list box is determined by the following:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\W{1}\S{I}\F{\FPrint}\BC{0 0 0}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Key Variables:} The first (optional) parameter can be
+used to modify the default appearance of a list and to add some
+actions. Following is a list of the variables used within the
+brackets of this optional argument for the list box: \tableCs{Ff},
+\tableCs{F}, \Cs{TU}, \Cs{W}, \Cs{S}, \Cs{R}, \Cs{BC}, \Cs{BG},
+\Cs{mkIns}, \Cs{textFont}, \Cs{textSize}, \Cs{textColor}, \Cs{DV},
+\Cs{V}, \Cs{A} and \Cs{AA}. See the \hyperlink{kv}{Supported Key
+Variables} table for descriptions and notes on each of these
+variables.
+
+\redpoint \cs{Ff} \textbf{Field flags.} Values appropriate to a
+list box are \Cs{FfCommitOnSelChange} (commits
+immediately after selection, PDF 1.5); \Cs{FfSort} (sorts\footnote
+{This flag really is not useful unless you have the full \app{Acrobat} application, the
+\texttt{Sort} \texttt{items} check box is checked in the Options
+tab of the Fields Properties dialog for the field.
+Initially, the items are listed in the same order as listed in the
+\texttt{\#5} argument; the \app{Acrobat} application will sort the list
+if you view the \textit{Fields Properties} for the field and click
+\texttt{OK}. Be sure to save the changes.\label{FfSortfoot}}the
+items); \Cs{FfMultiSelect} (allows more than one value to be
+selected, PDF 1.4). It is important to note
+that the flags \Cs{FfMultiSelect} and \Cs{FfCommitOnSelChange}
+cannot both be in effect. See the \hyperref[appendix]{Appendix}
+for a complete list of values for the
+\hyperlink{tableFf}{\textsf{Ff} flag}.
+
+\paragraph*{Global Modification:} \cs{everyListBox\darg{\anglemeta{KV-pairs}}}
+
+\Example List Box (Version 5.0 Required):
+\hfill\smash[b]{\raisebox{-45bp}{\listBox[\autoCenter{n}\DV{1}\V{1}\BG{0.98 0.92 0.73}\BC{0 .6 0}
+ \Ff\FfSort
+ \AA{\AAKeystroke{%
+ if(!event.willCommit)app.alert(%
+ "You chose \\"" + event.change\r
+ + "\\""+", which has an export value of "
+ + event.changeEx);}}]
+ {myList}{1in}{55bp}{[(1)(Socks)][(2)(Shoes)][(3)(Pants)][(4)(Shirt)][(5)(Tie)]}}}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\listBox[\autoCenter{n}\DV{1}\V{1}
+ \BG{0.98 0.92 0.73}\BC{0 .6 0}
+ \AA{\AAKeystroke{%
+ if(!event.willCommit)app.alert(%
+ "You chose \\"" + event.change\r
+ + "\\""+", which has an export value of "
+ + event.changeEx);}}]{myList}{1in}{55bp}
+ {[(1)(Socks)][(2)(Shoes)][(3)(Pants)][(4)(Shirt)][(5)(Tie)]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\subsubsection{Combo Boxes}
+
+A combo box is a drop down list of items that can optionally have
+an editable text box for the user to type in a value other than
+the predefined choices.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{comboBox[\#1]\darg{\#2}\darg{\#3}\darg{\#4}\darg{\#5}}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\comboBox[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\PD
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item[\texttt{\#1}:] optional, used to enter any modification of appearance/actions
+\item[\texttt{\#2}:] the title of the combo box
+\item[\texttt{\#3}:] the width of the bounding rectangle
+\item[\texttt{\#4}:] the height of the bounding rectangle
+\item[\texttt{\#5}:] an array of appearance/values of list
+\end{enumerate}
+\newtopic The fifth parameter needs more explanation. The value of this
+parameter which defines the items in the list---their appearance text
+and their export values---take two forms:
+\begin{questions}
+ \item An array of arrays:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+[(v1)(item1)][(v2)(item2)]...[(vn)(itemn)]
+\end{Verbatim}
+ The first entry in the two member array is the export value of the item, the second
+ is the appearance text of that item.
+ \item An array of strings:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+(item1)(item2)...(itemn)
+\end{Verbatim}
+ In this case, the export value is the same as the appearance text.
+\end{questions}
+
+\paragraph*{Default Appearance:} The default appearance of
+a standard combo box is determined by the following:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\W{1}\S{I}\F{\FPrint}\BC{0 0 0}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Key Variables:} The first (optional) parameter can be
+used to modify the default appearance of a list and to add some
+actions. Following is a list of the variables used within the
+brackets of this optional argument for the list box: \tableCs{Ff},
+\tableCs{F}, \Cs{TU}, \Cs{W}, \Cs{S}, \Cs{R}, \Cs{BC}, \Cs{BG},
+\Cs{mkIns}, \Cs{textFont}, \Cs{textSize}, \Cs{textColor}, \Cs{DV}
+and \Cs{V}, \Cs{A} and \Cs{AA}. See the \hyperlink{kv}{Support Key
+Variables} table for descriptions and notes on each of these
+variables.
+
+\redpoint \cs{Ff} \textbf{Field flags.} Values appropriate to a
+combo box are \Cs{FfEdit} (allows the user to type in a choice);
+\Cs{FfDoNotSpellCheck} (turn spell check off, applicable only if
+\Cs{FfEdit} is set);
+\Cs{FfCommitOnSelChange} (commits immediately after selection);
+ and \Cs{FfSort} (sorts the
+items, see~\hyperref[FfSortfoot]{footnote~\ref*{FfSortfoot}}, page~\pageref*{FfSortfoot}).
+See the \hyperref[appendix]{Appendix} for a complete list of values
+for the \hyperlink{tableFf}{\textsf{Ff} flag}.
+
+\paragraph*{Global Modification:} \cs{everyComboBox\darg{\anglemeta{KV-pairs}}}
+
+\begin{defineJS}{\getComboJS}
+var f = this.getField("myCombo");
+var a = f.currentValueIndices;
+if ( a == -1 )
+ app.alert("You've typed in \\"" + f.value +"\\".");
+else
+ app.alert("Selection: " + f.getItemAt(a, false)
+ + " (export value: " + f.getItemAt(a, true)+").");
+\end{defineJS}
+
+\Example \label{defineJSEx} Editable combo box (Version 5.0):
+ \comboBox[\Ff\FfEdit\DV{1}\V{1}\BG{0.98 0.92 0.73}\BC{0 .6 0}]
+ {myCombo}{.8in}{11bp}{[(1)(Socks)][(2)(Shoes)][(3)(Pants)][(4)(Shirt)][(5)(Tie)]}\kern1bp%
+ \pushButton[\BC{0 .6 0}\CA{Get}\RC{Combo}\AC{Box}\A{\JS{\getComboJS}}]
+ {myComboButton}{33bp}{11bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\comboBox[\Ff\FfEdit\DV{1}\V{1}
+\BG{0.98 0.92 0.73}\BC{0 .6 0}]{myCombo}{1in}{11bp}
+{[(1)(Socks)][(2)(Shoes)][(3)(Pants)][(4)(Shirt)][(5)(Tie)]}\kern1bp%
+% Follow up with a pushbutton
+\pushButton[\BC{0 .6 0}\CA{Get}\AC{Combo}\RC{Box}\A{\JS{\getComboJS}}]
+{myComboButton}{33bp}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic The JavaScript action for the button is given below:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{defineJS}{\getComboJS}
+var f = this.getField("myCombo");
+var a = f.currentValueIndices;
+if ( a == -1 )
+ app.alert("You've typed in \\"" + f.value +"\\".");
+else
+ app.alert("Selection: " + f.getItemAt(a, false)
+ + " (export value: " + f.getItemAt(a, true)+").");
+\end{defineJS}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Text Fields}
+
+A text field is the way a user can enter text into a form.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{textField[\#1]\darg{\#2}\darg{\#3}\darg{\#4}}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\textField[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\PD
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item[\texttt{\#1}:] optional, used to enter any modification of appearance/actions
+\item[\texttt{\#2}:] the title of the text field
+\item[\texttt{\#3}:] the width of the bounding rectangle
+\item[\texttt{\#4}:] the height of the bounding rectangle
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph*{Default Appearance:} The default appearance of
+a standard text field is determined by the following:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\F{\FPrint}\BC{0 0 0}\W{1}\S{S}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Key Variables:} The first (optional) parameter can be
+used to modify the default appearance of a text field and to add some
+actions. Following is a list of the variables used within the
+brackets of this optional argument for the text field: \tableCs{Ff},
+\tableCs{F}, \Cs{TU}, \Cs{Q}, \Cs{W}, \Cs{S}, \Cs{MaxLen}, \Cs{R},
+\Cs{BC}, \Cs{BG}, \Cs{mkIns}, \Cs{textFont}, \Cs{textSize},
+\Cs{textColor}, \Cs{DV}, \Cs{V}, \Cs{A}, \Cs{AA} and \Cs{rawPDF}.
+See the \hyperlink{kv}{Supported Key Variables} table for
+descriptions and notes on each of these variables.
+
+\redpoint \cs{Ff} \textbf{Field flags.} There are several values
+appropriate to a text field:\ \Cs{FfMultiline} (create a multiline
+text field); \Cs{FfPassword} (create a password field);
+\Cs{FfFileSelect} (select a file from the local hard drive as the
+value of the text field, PDF 1.4); \Cs{FfComb} (if set, the text field
+becomes a comb field, the number of combs is determined by the
+value of \Cs{MaxLen}, PDF 1.5); \Cs{FfDoNotSpellCheck}
+(automatic spell check is not performed, PDF 1.4);
+\Cs{FfDoNotScroll} (disable the scrolling of long text, this
+limits the amount of text that can be entered to the width of the
+text field provided, PDF 1.4); \Cs{FfRichText} (allows rich text
+to be entered into the text field, PDF 1.5).
+
+\paragraph*{Global Modification:} \cs{everyTextField\darg{\anglemeta{KV-pairs}}}
+
+\Example Enter Name:
+ \textField
+ [\BC{0 0 1}
+ \BG{0.98 0.92 0.73}
+ \textColor{1 0 0}
+ ]{myText}{1.5in}{12bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField
+ [\BC{0 0 1}\BG{0.98 0.92 0.73}
+ \textColor{1 0 0}
+ ]{myText}{1.5in}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\Example An example of a calculation using a Calculate script. (Calculate works correctly
+with drivers \texttt{dvips}, \texttt{dvipsone}, or \texttt{dvipdfm} are used.)
+
+\newtopic\begin{tabular}{@{\hspace{20pt}}rl}
+Number 1: & \textField[\AA{%
+ \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(1,1,0,0,"",true)}
+ \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(1,1,0,0,"",true)}}]{num.1}{1in}{11bp} \\[6pt]
+%
+Number 2: & \textField[\AA{%
+ \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(1,1,0,0,"",true)}
+ \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(1,1,0,0,"",true)}}]{num.2}{1in}{11bp}\\[6pt]
+%
+Total: & \textField[\AA{%
+ \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(1,1,0,0,"",true)}
+ \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(1,1,0,0,"",true)}
+ \AACalculate{AFSimple_Calculate("SUM", new Array("num"))}
+}]{totalNum}{1in}{11bp}
+\end{tabular}
+
+\newtopic The listing for this list of three text fields is\medskip
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField[\AA{%
+ \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(1,1,0,0,"",true)}
+ \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(1,1,0,0,"",true)}}
+]{num.1}{1in}{11bp}
+\textField[\AA{%
+ \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(1,1,0,0,"",true)}
+ \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(1,1,0,0,"",true)}}
+]{num.2}{1in}{11bp}
+\textField[\AA{%
+ \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(1,1,0,0,"",true)}
+ \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(1,1,0,0,"",true)}
+ \AACalculate{AFSimple_Calculate("SUM", new Array("num"))}
+]{sum}{1in}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Signature Fields}\label{sigfields}
+
+A signature field is a field that can be digitally signed.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{sigField[\#1]\darg{\#2}\darg{\#3}\darg{\#4}}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\sigField[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\PD
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item[\texttt{\#1}:] optional, used to enter any modification of appearance/actions
+\item[\texttt{\#2}:] the title of the signature field
+\item[\texttt{\#3}:] the width of the bounding rectangle
+\item[\texttt{\#4}:] the height of the bounding rectangle
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph*{Default Appearance:} The default appearance of
+a standard signature field is determined by the following:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\F{\FPrint}\BC{}\BG{}\W{1}\S{S}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Key Variables:} The first (optional) parameter can be
+used to modify the default appearance of a signature field and to add some
+actions. Following is a list of the variables used within the
+brackets of this optional argument for the signature field:
+\tableCs{F}, \Cs{TU}, \Cs{W}, \Cs{S}, \Cs{R}, \Cs{Lock},
+\Cs{BC}, \Cs{BG}, \Cs{mkIns}, \Cs{textFont}, \Cs{textSize},
+\Cs{textColor}, \Cs{DV}, \Cs{A}, \Cs{AA} and \Cs{rawPDF}.
+See the \hyperlink{kv}{Supported Key Variables} table for
+descriptions and notes on each of these variables.
+
+\paragraph*{Global Modification:} \cs{everySigField\darg{\anglemeta{KV-pairs}}}
+
+\Example Sign here:\\[3pt]
+ \sigField[\BC{0 0 0}]{mySig}{2in}{4\baselineskip}\hfill
+ \begin{minipage}{\linewidth-2in-10bp}
+ \verb!\sigField[\BC{0 0 0}]!\\
+ \verb! {mySig}{2in}{4\baselineskip}!
+ \end{minipage}
+
+\newtopic To sign this field, use the \app{Acrobat} user interface, or use the
+package \textsf{aeb\_pro}, and the following \texttt{docassembly} code:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{docassembly}
+\signInfo{
+ cSigFieldName: "mySig", ohandler: security.PPKLiteHandler,
+ cert: "D_P_Story.pfx", password: "dps017",
+ oInfo: { location: "Niceville, FL",
+ reason: "I am approving this document",
+ contactInfo: "dpstory@acrotex.net",
+ appearance: "My Signature" }
+};
+\signatureSign
+\end{docassembly}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{cSigFieldName} is the name of the field to be signed.
+ \item \texttt{ohandler} is the name of the security handler to be
+ used to sign the field, usually, this is \texttt{security.PPKLiteHandler};
+ \texttt{security.PPKLiteHandler} is used if \texttt{ohandler} is not listed in the property list.
+ \item \texttt{cert} is the name of the Digital ID certificate file to be used.
+ The extension for this file is \texttt{.pfx} (Windows) and \texttt{.p12} (Mac OS).
+ These files reside in the folder,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+app.getPath( {cCategory:"user"})/Security
+\end{Verbatim}
+However, just enter the file name, such as \texttt{cert:} \texttt{"D\_P\_Story.pfx"}.
+\item \texttt{password}: The Digital ID requires a password to access and to use.
+For example: \texttt{password:} \texttt{"dps017"}.
+\item \texttt{oInfo} is a JavaScript object with various properties to be filled in,
+\texttt{location}, \texttt{reason}, \texttt{contactInfo}, and \texttt{appearance}.
+The \texttt{appearance} is important, through it, you can choose a particular appearance
+for the digital signature, including a custom signature that you've created. In the example
+above, we have \texttt{appearance: "My Signature"}. \texttt{My Signature} is the name I've
+given a particular digital ID of mine. If the \texttt{appearance} property is not
+included in \texttt{oInfo}, \app{Acrobat} will use the one named \texttt{"Standard Text"}.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\Important Additional information on signatures can be found
+at the \mlhref{http://www.adobe.com/go/acrobat_developer}{\mbox{\app{Acrobat}} Developer Center};
+or go to the \href{http://www.adobe.com/go/acrobat_security}{Security page};
+in particular, see the document \textit{Digital Signature User Guide for \app{Acrobat} 9.0
+and Adobe Reader 9.0}. Other comments on the topic of signature fields:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item The open key \cs{textSize} is recognized, but is change to 0.
+\item The Signed tab of the Digital Signatures Properties dialog box, lists
+an entry titled ``This script executes when the field is signed.'' This
+JavaScript is implemented through the format script of the \texttt{AA} key.
+Thus,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\AA{\AAFormat{console.println("Signed!");}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+places message in the console when the field is signed.
+
+\item The \cs{Lock} key can be used to lock various fields when the document
+is signed.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,numbers=left]
+\Lock{/Action/All}
+\Lock{/Action/Include/Fields [(field1)(field2)...]}
+\Lock{/Action/Exclude/Fields [(field1)(field2)...]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item In (1), all fields are locked when the signature field is signed.
+ \item In (2), only the listed fields are locked when the signature
+ field is signed.
+ \item In (3), all fields, except the ones listed, are locked when the
+ signature field is signed.
+\end{itemize}
+The \texttt{/Fields} key is required when the action is either \texttt{/Include} or \texttt{/Exclude}.
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\verygoodbreak
+
+
+\section{Link Annotations}\label{linkAnnots}
+
+The \textsf{eforms} package has several link commands that are
+sufficiently general that they can be given arbitrary appearances,
+and can perform a wide range of actions.
+
+The borders of the link commands can be controlled through optional
+parameter, their default appearance follow the same pattern of
+hyperref: If the \texttt{colorlinks} option is used (in
+\textsf{hyperref}) then the border is invisible by default;
+otherwise, there is a visible border.
+
+When the \texttt{colorlinks} option is chosen (in hyperref), the
+link text is colored using the command \cs{defaultlinkcolor}, this
+is a named color. \cs{defaultlinkcolor} has a definition of
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\defaultlinkcolor}{\@linkcolor}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent where \cs{@linkcolor} is a command defined in
+\textsf{hyperref}, and is defined to be \texttt{red}. This can be
+redefined as desired.\footnote{The {\Web} package redefines
+\cs{@linkcolor} to be a flavor of green.}
+
+The first link command is a general link for text, or any
+{\LaTeX} content. It is used, for example, by the \textsf{aeb\_mlink}
+package to create multiple-line links.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{setLinkText[\meta{options}]\darg{\meta{link\_text}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\setLink[!meta(options)]{!meta(link_text)}
+!grayV(\setLinkText[!meta(options)]{!meta(link_text)})
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic Both link commands are the same, the use of the second one, \cs{setLinkText} (grayed out), is
+discouraged in favor of the use of \cs{setLink}.
+
+\PD The command has two arguments, the first is optional. The first
+parameter takes key-value pairs to change appearance and define
+actions. The default appearance of this link is \verb!\S{S}\Border{0 0 0}!,
+an invisible yet solid border line. (The visibility of the border is
+actually controlled by the \texttt{colorlinks} option of
+\textsf{hyperref}, as explained above.) The second parameter is the
+link text. This argument does not have to be text, it can be
+anything that takes up space, such as a graphic or \cs{parbox}.
+
+\Example \setLink[\A{\JS{app.alert("AcroTeX rocks!")}}
+ \linktxtcolor{blue}\Color{0 0 1}\W1\S{U}\H{P}]{Push me!}
+\begingroup\obeyspaces\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily%
+ \string\linktxtcolor\darg{blue}\string\Color\darg{0 0 1}\string\W1\string\S\darg{U}\string\H\darg{P}]\darg{Push me!}%
+}%
+\begin{dCmd*}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\setLink[\A{\JS{app.alert("AcroTeX rocks!")}}
+ \linktxtcolor{blue}\Color{0 0 1}\W1\S{U}\H{P}]{Push me!}
+\end{dCmd*}
+\endgroup
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=371} Additional examples of \cs{setLink} may be found in the
+rather comprehensive article \textit{Support for Links in AeB/eForms},
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=371}{aeb\_links.pdf}}, found on the
+{\AcroBlog} website.
+
+\newtopic\indent The next link command is a convenience command to put the link content into a parbox,
+the parameters enable you to set the width, height and position of material in the box.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{setLinkBbox[\meta{options}]\darg{\meta{width}}\darg{\meta{height}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\setLinkBbox[!meta(options)]{!meta(width)}{!meta(height)}
+ [!meta(position)]{!meta(link_content)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\PD The command has five arguments, the first is optional.
+\begin{aebDescript}
+\item [\meta{options}] are optional key-value pairs to change the appearance or action
+ of this link.
+\item [\meta{width}] is the width of the \cs{parbox}.
+\item [\meta{height}] is the height of the \cs{parbox}.
+\item [\meta{position}] is the positioning parameter of the \cs{parbox} (\texttt{b}, \texttt{c}, \texttt{t}).
+\item [\meta{link\_content}] is the text or object to be enclosed in a \cs{parbox}
+\end{aebDescript}
+
+\Example \setLinkBbox[\W{1}\Color{1 0 0}\A{\JS{app.alert("Thank you for using AcroTeX!")}}]{50bp}{30bp}[c]{\centering Press Me!}
+\begingroup\obeyspaces%
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily%
+ \string\A\darg{\string\JS\darg{app.alert("Thank you for using AcroTeX!")}}%
+}%
+\begin{dCmd*}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\setLinkBbox[\W{1}\Color{1 0 0}
+ \A{\JS{app.alert("Thank you for using AcroTeX!")}}
+]{50bp}{30bp}[c]{\centering Press Me!}
+\end{dCmd*}
+\endgroup
+
+\section{Actions}\label{Actions}
+
+A form field may simply gather data from the user; additionally,
+it may perform one or more \textit{actions}. Actions include
+execute JavaScript code, going to a particular page in a document,
+open a file, execute a menu item, reset a form, play media or a
+sound, and so on. Beginning with \app{Acrobat}~5.0, most actions can be
+performed using JavaScript methods.
+
+An action is initiated by a \textit{trigger}, a field may have
+many actions, each with a separate trigger. The different triggers
+are discussed in \nameref{triggers}, and the various types of
+actions available are covered in the
+section~\nameref{actiontypes}.
+
+\subsection{Trigger Events}\label{triggers}
+
+Event actions are initiated by \textit{triggers}. For fields,
+there are ten different triggers.
+\begin{questions}
+ \item \textbf{Mouse Enter:} The event is triggered when mouse
+ enters the region defined by the bounding rectangle. The
+ \cs{AAMouseEnter} key is used within the argument of \Cs{AA}
+ to define a mouse enter event:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField[\AA{\AAMouseEnter{%
+ \JS{app.alert("You've entered my text field, get out!")}}}]
+ {myText}{1.5in}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \textbf{Mouse Exit:} The event is triggered when mouse
+ exits the region defined by the bounding rectangle. The
+ \cs{AAMouseExit} key is used within the argument \Cs{AA} to
+ define a mouse exit event:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField[\AA{\AAMouseExit{%
+ \JS{app.alert("You've exited my domain, never return!")}}}]
+ {myText}{1.5in}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \textbf{Mouse Down:} The event is triggered when the
+ (left) mouse button is pushed down while the mouse is within the
+ bounding rectangle of the field. The \cs{AAMouseDown} key is
+ used within the argument of \Cs{AA} to define a mouse down
+ event:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\AA{\AAMouseDown{\JS{app.alert("Mouse Down!")}}}]
+ {myButton}{30bp}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \textbf{Mouse Up:} The event is triggered when the
+ (left) mouse button is released while the mouse is within the
+ bounding rectangle of the field. The \Cs{A} key (or
+ \cs{AAMouseUp} key is used within the argument of \Cs{AA}) is
+ used to define a mouse up event:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\A{\JS{app.alert("Mouse Up!")}}]
+ {myButton}{30bp}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The same code can be performed as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\AA{\AAMouseUp{\JS{app.alert("Mouse Up!")}}}]
+ {myButton}{30bp}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+When both types of mouse up actions are defined for the same
+field, the one defined by \Cs{A} is the one that is executed.
+
+ \item \textbf{On Focus:} The event is triggered when the field
+ comes into focus (either by tabbing from another field, or
+ clicking the mouse within the bounding rectangle. The \cs{AAOnFocus}
+ key is used within the argument of \Cs{AA} to define an `on focus'
+ event:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField[\AA{\AAOnFocus{\JS{%
+ app.alert("Please enter some data!")}}}]
+{myText}{1.5in}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+ \item \textbf{On Blur:} The event is triggered when the field
+ loses focus (either by tabbing to another field, by clicking
+ somewhere outside the field, or (in the case of a text field,
+ for example) pressing the \texttt{Enter} button. The \cs{AAOnBlur}
+ key is used within the argument of \Cs{AA} to define an `on blur'
+ event:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField[\AA{\AAOnBlur{%
+ \JS{app.alert("Thanks for the data, I think!")}}}]
+{myText}{1.5in}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+ \item \textbf{Format:}\label{format} The format event is the event that
+ occurs when text is entered into a text or combo box; during
+ this event, optionally defined JavaScript code is executed to
+ format the appearance of the text within the field. The
+ \cs{AAFormat} key is used within the argument of \Cs{AA} to
+ define a format event:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField[\AA{%
+ \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(2,0,1,0,"\\u0024",true);}
+ \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(2,0,1,0,"\\u0024",true);}}]
+{myText}{1.5in}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The above example creates a text field which will accept only a
+number into it and which will format the number into U.S.
+currency.
+
+ \item \textbf{Keystroke:} This keystroke event is the event
+ that occurs when individual keystroke is entered into a choice
+ field (list or combo) or a text field; during this event,
+ optionally defined JavaScript can be used to process the
+ keystroke. The \cs{AAKeystroke} key is used within the
+ argument of \Cs{AA} to define a keystroke event; see the format
+ example above.
+
+ \item \textbf{Validate:} The validate event is an event for
+ which JavaScript code can be defined to validate the data that
+ has been entered (text and combo fields only). The
+ \cs{AAVali\-date} key is used within the argument of \Cs{AA} to
+ define a validate event:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField[\AA{%
+ \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(2,0,1,0,"\\u0024",true);}
+ \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(2,0,1,0,"\\u0024",true);}
+ \AAValidate{%
+ if (event.value > 1000 || event.value < -1000) {\r\t
+ app.alert("Invalid value, rejecting your value!");\r\t
+ event.rc = false;\r
+ }}
+}]{myText}{1.5in}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+ \item \textbf{Calculate:} The calculate event is an event for
+ which JavaScript code can be defined to make automatic
+ calculations based on entries of one or more fields (text and
+ combo fields only). The \cs{AACalculate} key is used within the
+ argument of \Cs{AA} to define a calculate event:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField[\AA{%
+ \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(2,0,1,0,"\\u0024",true);}
+ \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(2,0,1,0,"\\u0024",true);}
+ \AACalculate{AFSimple_Calculate("SUM",new Array("Prices"));}
+}]{myText}{1.5in}{12bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ \item \textbf{PageOpen:} (The \textbf{PO} key, Table 8.10, PDF 1.5) An
+ action to be performed when the page containing the annotation
+ is opened (for example, when the user navigates to it from the
+ next or previous page or by means of a link annotation or outline
+ item). The action is executed after the page's open action. The
+ \cs{AAPageOpen} key is used within the argument of \Cs{AA} to
+ define an annotation page open event:
+ \item \textbf{PageClose:} (The \textbf{PC} key, Table 8.10, PDF 1.5) An
+ action to be performed when the page containing the annotation
+ is closed (for example, when the user navigates to the next or
+ previous page, or follows a link annotation or outline item).
+ The action is executed before the page's close action.
+ \cs{AAPageClose} key is used within the argument of \Cs{AA} to
+ define an annotation page close event.
+ \item \textbf{PageVisible:} (The \textbf{PV} key, Table 8.10,
+ PDF 1.5) An action to be performed when the page containing the
+ annotation becomes visible in the viewer application's user
+ interface. \cs{AAPageVisible} key is used within the
+ argument of \Cs{AA} to define an annotation page visible event.
+ \item \textbf{PageInvisible:} (The \textbf{PI} key, Table 8.10,
+ PDF 1.5) An action to be performed when the page containing
+ the annotation is no longer visible in the viewer
+ application's user interface. \cs{AAPageInvisible} key is used
+ within the argument of \Cs{AA} to define an annotation page
+ invisible event.
+ \item[] Below is a simple example of usage. The actions write to the console.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField[\AA{%
+ \AAPageOpen{console.println("Page \thepage: PO");}
+ \AAPageClose{console.println("Page \thepage: PC");}
+ \AAPageVisible{console.println("Page \thepage: PV");}
+ \AAPageInvisible{console.println("Page \thepage: PI");}
+ }]{tf\thepage}{2in}{11bp}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{questions}
+Additional examples appear in the file \texttt{eqforms.tex}.
+
+\subsection{Action Types}\label{actiontypes}
+
+The following is only a partial listing of the action types, as
+given in \textsf{Table~8.36} of the \textit{PDF
+Reference}~\cite{tech:PDFRef}. The entire list and the details of
+usage can be obtained from the \textit{PDF Reference}.
+
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{>{\ttfamily\small}l>{\small}l}
+\multicolumn{1}{>{\bfseries}l}{Action Type} & \multicolumn{1}{>{\bfseries}l}{Description}\\\hline
+GoTo & Go to a destination in the current document\\
+GoToR& Go to a destination in another document\\
+Launch& Launch an application, usually to open a file\\
+URI&Resolve a uniform resource identifier\\
+Named & Execute an action predefined by the viewer\\
+SubmitForm & Send data to a uniform resource locator\\
+JavaScript & Execute a JavaScript script (PDF 1.3)\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Examples of each type of action follow.
+
+\redpoint{\texttt{GoTo}:} Go to a (named or explicit) destination
+within the current document. In this example, we `go to' the named
+destination \texttt{toc.1}, which references the table of contents
+pages. This button goes to a \textit{named destination}:
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Now!}\RC{to TOC}\A{/S/GoTo/D(toc.1)}]{myButton1}{}{10bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Now!}\RC{to TOC}
+ \A{/S/GoTo/D(toc.1)}]{myButton1}{}{10bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent For a named destination, the value of the \texttt{/D} key is a string, \texttt{(toc.1)}
+in the above example, that specifies the destination name.
+
+The following is an example of an \textit{explicit destination}:
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Now!}\RC{to Page 3}\A{/S/GoTo/D[{Page3}/Fit]}]{myButton1}{}{10bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Now!}\RC{to Page 3}
+\A{/S/GoTo/D[{Page3}/Fit]}]{myButton1}{}{10bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The value of the destination key \texttt{/D} is an array
+referencing a page number (\verb+{Page3}+) and a view
+(\texttt{/Fit}).
+
+For a \texttt{GoTo} action, the first entry in the destination
+array, \texttt{\char123Page3\char125}, is an indirect reference to
+a page, the notation \texttt{\char123Page3\char125} is understood
+by the \textsf{distiller}. For \textsf{dvipdfm}, use the \texttt{@page}
+primitive:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\makeatletter\def\Page#1{@page#1}\makeatother
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Now!}\RC{to Page 3}
+\A{/S/GoTo/D[\Page3/Fit]}]{myButton1}{}{10bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent \textsf{pdftex} has no mechanism for inserting
+indirect page references.
+
+See section~8.5.3, `Go-To Actions', of the \textit{PDF
+Reference}~\cite{tech:PDFRef} for details of the syntax of
+\texttt{GoTo}, and section~8.2.1 for documentation on explicit and
+named destinations.
+
+\redpoint{\texttt{GoToR}:} Go to a (named or explicit) destination in a remote
+document. In this example, we `go to a remote' destination, a
+\textit{named destination} in another document.
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Now!}\RC{to TOC}\A{/S/GoToR/F(webeqtst.pdf)/D(webtoc)}]{myButton2}{}{10bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Now!}\RC{to TOC}
+ \pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Now!}\RC{to TOC}
+ \A{/S/GoToR/F(webeqtst.pdf)/D(webtoc)]{myButton2}{}{10bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This example illustrates an \textit{explicit destination};
+the following button jumps to page~3 in another document:
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Now!}\RC{to Page 3}\A{/S/GoToR/F(webeqtst.pdf)/D[2/Fit]}]{myButton2}{}{10bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Now!}\RC{to Page 3}
+\A{/S/GoToR/F(webeqtst.pdf)/D[2/Fit]}]{myButton2}{}{10bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The value of the destination key \texttt{/D} is an array
+referencing a page number and a view (\texttt{/Fit}).
+
+For an \textit{explicit destination}, the \textit{PDF
+Reference}~\cite{tech:PDFRef} specifies that the first entry in
+the destination array should be a page number (as contrasted with
+an indirect reference to a page number, for the case of
+\texttt{GoTo}). The destination, \texttt{/D[2/Fit]} would correctly work
+for \textsf{distiller}, \textsf{dvipdfm} and \textsf{pdftex}.
+
+See section~8.5.3, `Remote Go-To Actions', of the \textit{PDF
+Reference}~\cite{tech:PDFRef} for details of the syntax of
+\texttt{GoToR}, and section~8.2.1 for documentation on explicit
+and named destinations.
+
+\redpoint{\texttt{Launch}:} Launch an application (`Open a file').
+In this example, we open a {\TeX} file using the application
+associated with the \texttt{.tex} extension:
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{TeX Doc!}\RC{to a}\A{/S/Launch/F(webeqtst.tex)}]{myButton3}{}{10bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Now!}\RC{to TOC}
+\A{/S/Launch/F(webeqtst.tex)}]{myButton3}{}{10bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent See section~8.5.3, `Launch Actions', of the \textit{PDF Reference}~\cite{tech:PDFRef}
+for details of the syntax.
+
+\redpoint{\texttt{URI}:} Open a web link. In this example, we go to the Adobe web site:
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Adobe!}\RC{To}\A{/S/URI/URI(http://www.adobe.com/)}]{myButton4}{}{10bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Adobe!}\RC{To}
+\A{/S/URI/URI(http://www.adobe.com/)}]{myButton4}{}{10bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent See section~8.5.3, `URI Actions', of the \textit{PDF
+Reference}~\cite{tech:PDFRef} for details of the syntax.
+
+\app{Acrobat} (Adobe Reader) also support open parameters, using these key-value pairs,
+we can go to a specific page in a PDF on the web, and even search for words, for example
+\pushButton[\CA{Go & Search}\A{/S/URI/URI(http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex/aeb_man.pdf#page=8&search=AcroTeX web exerquiz)}]{myButton4a}{}{10bp}
+opens the AeB Manual on the Internet, goes to page 8, and searches for the words
+AcroTeX, web, and exerquiz.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\CA{Go & Search}
+\A{/S/URI/URI(http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/
+ acrotex/aeb_man.pdf#page=8&search=AcroTeX web exerquiz)}]
+ {myButton4a}{}{10bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The same can be accomplished using \cs{setLink}.
+
+\redpoint{\texttt{Named}:} Execute a `named' action (i.e., a menu
+item). Named actions listed in the \textit{PDF Reference} are
+\texttt{NextPage}, \texttt{PrevPage}, \texttt{FirstPage} and
+\texttt{LastPage}. A complete list of named actions can be
+obtained by executing the code \texttt{app.listMenuItems()} in
+the JavaScript console of \app{Acrobat} (Pro).
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Previous!}\RC{To}\A{/S/Named/N/PrevPage}]{myButton5}{}{10bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\CA{Go}\AC{Previous!}\RC{To}
+\A{/S/Named/N/PrevPage}]{myButton5}{}{10bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic See section~8.5.3, `Named Actions,' of the \textit{PDF
+Reference}~\cite{tech:PDFRef} for details of the syntax. The named
+actions listed in the PDF Reference are \texttt{NextPage},
+\texttt{PrevPage}, \texttt{FirstPage}, and \texttt{LastPage}.
+
+In theory, any menu item can be executed as a named actions; there
+are several factors to be taken into consideration: (1) Not all menu
+items available to \app{Acrobat} are listed on the menu bar of Adobe
+Reader, when choosing a name event to use, you should decide if the
+application executing the named action supports that action; (2) In
+recent versions, starting with version 7, there have been security
+restrictions on the execution of menu items, the so-called ``white
+list.'' Only named actions listed on the white list are allowed to
+execute. The white list for version 8.0 is
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\small\ttfamily}l>{\small}l>{\small}l@{}}
+\multicolumn{3}{>{\bfseries}c}{Named Actions on Whitelist}\\\hline
+\endfirsthead
+\multicolumn{3}{>{\bfseries}c}{Named Actions on Whitelist}\\\hline
+\endhead
+AcroSendMail:SendMail & LastPage & ShowHideToolbarCommenting \\
+ActualSize & NextPage & ShowHideToolbarData \\
+AddFileAttachment & OneColumn & ShowHideToolbarEdit \\
+BookmarkShowLocation & OpenOrganizer & ShowHideToolbarEditing \\
+Close & PageSetup & ShowHideToolbarFile \\
+CropPages & PrevPage & ShowHideToolbarFind \\
+DeletePages & Print & ShowHideToolbarForms \\
+ExtractPages & PropertyToolbar & ShowHideToolbarMeasuring \\
+Find & Quit & ShowHideToolbarNavigation \\
+FindCurrentBookmark & ReplacePages & ShowHideToolbarPageDisplay \\
+FindSearch & RotatePages & ShowHideToolbarPrintProduction \\
+FirstPage & SaveAs & ShowHideToolbarRedaction \\
+FitHeight & Scan & ShowHideToolbarTasks \\
+FitPage & ShowHideAnnotManager & ShowHideToolbarTypewriter \\
+FitVisible & ShowHideArticles & SinglePage \\
+FitWidth & ShowHideBookmarks & Spelling \\
+FullScreen & ShowHideFields & Spelling:Check \\
+GeneralInfo & ShowHideFileAttachment & TwoColumns \\
+GeneralPrefs & ShowHideModelTree & TwoPages \\
+GoBack & ShowHideOptCont & Web2PDF:OpenURL \\
+GoForward & ShowHideSignatures & ZoomTo \\
+GoToPage & ShowHideThumbnails & ZoomViewIn \\
+InsertPages & ShowHideToolbarBasicTools & ZoomViewOut
+\end{longtable}
+\end{small}
+In addition to the Whitelist for version 8, the following menu items are added for version 9.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{longtable}{>{\small\ttfamily}l>{\small}l>{\small}l}
+\multicolumn{3}{>{\bfseries}c}{Named Actions on Whitelist}\\\hline
+\endfirsthead
+\multicolumn{3}{>{\bfseries}c}{Named Actions on Whitelist}\\\hline
+\endhead
+Annots:Tool:InkMenuItem & CollectionShowRoot & HandMenuItem\\
+CollectionDetails & DocHelpUserGuide & HelpReader\\
+CollectionHome & GoBackDoc & rolReadPage\\
+CollectionPreview & GoForwardDoc & ZoomDragMenuItem\\
+\end{longtable}
+\end{small}
+\newtopic As mentioned before, some of these are for \app{Acrobat} only, others are available for Adobe Reader. I'll
+let you sort them out. If you try to execute a named action that is not on the white list, the action will
+silently fail.
+
+\definePath{\URL}{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory}
+
+\redpoint{\texttt{SubmitForm}:} Submit forms Action. In this example, we submit
+a URL to a CGI, which then sends the requested file back to the browser:\\[1ex]
+\comboBox[\DV{\URL}\V{\URL}\BG{webyellow}\BC{webgreen}]
+{dest}{1.75in}{11bp}{%
+ [(\URL)( Homepage of D. P. Story)]
+ [(\URL/acrotex.html)( AcroTeX Homepage)]
+ [(\URL/webeq.html)( AcroTeX Bundle)]
+ [(\URL/acrotex/examples/webeqtst.pdf)( Exerquiz Demo file {(PDF)})]
+}\kern1bp%
+\pushButton[\BC{webgreen}\CA{Go!}
+\A{\JS{app.alert("This example no longer works!");}}]{redirect}{33bp}{11bp}
+
+\newtopic\textbf{\textcolor{red}{Note:}} This script no longer works, server-side scripting
+at the \texttt{uakron.edu} server is no longer permitted (for security reasons). The
+verbatim lisiting of the code as it used to be when it worked.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\definePath{\URL}{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory}
+\comboBox[\DV{\URL}\V{\URL}\BG{webyellow}\BC{webgreen}]
+{dest}{1.75in}{11bp}{%
+ [(\URL)( Homepage of D. P. Story)]
+ [(\URL/acrotex.html)( AcroTeX Homepage)]
+ [(\URL/webeq.html)( AcroTeX Bundle)]
+ [(\URL/acrotex/examples/webeqtst.pdf)(Exerquiz Demo file {(PDF)})]
+}\kern1bp\pushButton[\BC{webgreen}\CA{Go!}
+\A{/S/SubmitForm/F(http://www.math.uakron.edu/cgi-bin/nph-cgiwrap/%
+dpstory/scripts/nph-redir.cgi)/Fields[(dest)]/Flags 4}]
+{redirect}{33bp}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent See section~8.6.4 of the \textit{PDF Reference}~\cite{tech:PDFRef}
+for details of the syntax for `Submit Actions'.
+
+\redpoint{\texttt{JavaScript}:} Execute a JavaScript action. This is perhaps
+the most important type of action. In this example,
+the previous example is duplicated using the \texttt{Doc.getURL()} method, we don't
+need to submit to a CGI.\\[1ex]
+\comboBox[\DV{\URL}\V{\URL}\BG{webyellow}\BC{webgreen}]
+{dest}{1.75in}{11bp}{%
+ [(\URL)( Homepage of D. P. Story)]
+ [(\URL/acrotex.html)( AcroTeX Homepage)]
+ [(\URL/webeq.html)( AcroTeX Bundle)]
+ [(\URL/acrotex/examples/webeqtst.pdf)( Exerquiz Demo file {(PDF)})]
+}\kern1bp%
+\pushButton[\BC{webgreen}\CA{Go!}
+\A{\JS{%
+ var f = this.getField("dest");\r
+ app.launchURL(f.value,false);
+}}]{redirect}{33bp}{11bp}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\definePath{\URL}{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory}
+\comboBox[\DV{\URL}\V{\URL}\BG{webyellow}\BC{webgreen}]
+{dest}{1.75in}{11bp}{%
+ [(\URL)( Homepage of D. P. Story)]
+ [(\URL/acrotex.html)( AcroTeX Homepage)]
+ [(\URL/webeq.html)( AcroTeX Bundle)]
+ [(\URL/acrotex/examples/webeqtst.pdf)(Exerquiz Demo file {(PDF)})]
+}\kern1bp\pushButton[\BC{webgreen}\CA{Go!}
+\A{\JS{%
+ var f = this.getField("dest");\r
+ app.launchURL(f.value,false);
+}}]{redirect}{33bp}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic\hypertarget{JSdefined}{Note} the use of the convenience
+command \cs{JS}, defined in the \textsf{insldjs} package, it expands to the correct syntax:
+\texttt{/S/JavaScript/JS(\#1)}, where \texttt{\#1} is the argument
+of \cs{JS}.
+
+Most all actions can be performed using JavaScript, the reader is
+referred to the \textit{JavaScript for \app{Acrobat} API
+Reference}~\cite{tech:AcroJSRef}.
+
+\section{JavaScript}
+
+\app{Acrobat} JavaScript is the cross-platform scripting language of the
+\app{Acrobat} suite of products. For \app{Acrobat} 5.0 or later, \app{Acrobat}
+JavaScript based on JavaScript version 1.5 of ISO-16262 (formerly
+known as ECMAScript), and adds extensions to the core language to
+manipulate \app{Acrobat} forms, pages, documents, and even the viewer
+application.
+
+Web-based references to core JavaScript are the \textit{Core
+JavaScript Guide}~\cite{tech:NetscapeJSGuide} and the \textit{Core
+JavaScript Reference}~\cite{tech:NetscapeJSReference}. For \app{Acrobat}
+JavaScript, we refer you to the \textit{Developing \app{Acrobat}
+Applications using JavaScript}~\cite{tech:AcroJSGuide} and the
+\textit{JavaScript for \app{Acrobat} API Reference}~\cite{tech:AcroJSRef}.
+
+\verygoodbreak
+
+\subsection{Support of JavaScript}
+
+The {\cAcroEB} has extensive support for JavaScript, not only for
+JavaScript executed in response to a field trigger, but for
+document level and open page actions as well. As the topic of this
+document is \textsf{eForm} support, the reader is referred to the
+documentation in the \textsf{insdljs} package, which is distributed with
+the {\cAcroB}.
+
+\subsubsection{The Convenience Command
+ \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{JS}}{\CMD{JS}}}\label{convienceJS}
+
+The syntax for writing JavaScript actions is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!~@]
+\pushButton[\A{/S/JavaScript/JS(!anglemeta~script@)}]
+ {jsEx}{22bp}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Notice the code is enclosed in matching parentheses.
+\hyperlink{JSdefined}{As noted earlier}, {\cAcroT} defines the command
+\cs{JS} as a convenience for this very common actions; the above example
+becomes:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\pushButton[\A{\JS{!anglemeta(script)}}]{jsEx}{22bp}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The code is now enclosed in matching braces.
+
+\subsubsection{Inserting Simple JavaScript}
+
+Actions are introduced into a field command through its optional
+first parameter. JavaScript actions, in particular, can be
+inserted by a mouse up\footnote{Other types of possible actions
+are discussed and illustrated in \Nameref{Actions}.} action, for
+example, using the \Cs{A} and \hyperref[convienceJS]{\cs{JS}}
+commands.
+
+The ``environment'' for entering JavaScript is not a verbatim
+environment: `\verb+\+' is the usual {\TeX} escape character and
+expandable commands are expanded; active characters are expanded
+(which is usually not what you want); and primitive commands
+appear verbatim (so you can use, for example, `\verb+{+' and
+`\verb+}+). Within the optional argument, the macro
+\cs{makeJSspecials}, which can be redefined, is expanded; the
+macro makes several special definitions: (1) it defines \verb+\\+ to be
+`\verb+\\+'; (2) defines \cs{r} to be the JavaScript escape
+sequence for new line; and (3) defines \cs{t} to be the JavaScript
+escape sequence for tab.
+
+\Example\label{ex:formattedBtn} \pushButton[\CA{Sum}\A{\JS{%
+ var n = app.response("Enter a positive integer", "Summing the first \\"n\\" integers");\r
+ if ( n != null ) {\r\t
+ var sum = 0;\r\t
+ for ( var i=1; i <= n; i++ ) {\r\t\t
+ sum += i;\r\t
+ }\r
+ app.alert("The sum of the first n = " + n + " integers is " + sum + ".", 3);
+ }
+ }}]{jsSum}{22bp}{11bp}
+
+\smallskip\noindent The verbatim listing for this button is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\CA{Sum}\A{\JS{%
+ var n = app.response("Enter a positive integer",
+ "Summing the first \\"n\\" integers");\r
+ if ( n != null ) {\r\t
+ var sum = 0;\r\t
+ for ( var i=1; i <= n; i++ ) {\r\t\t
+ sum += i;\r\t
+ }\r
+ app.alert("The sum of the first n = " + n
+ + " integers is " + sum + ".", 3);
+ }
+}}]{jsSum}{22bp}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Code Comments.} Within the JavaScript string, we want
+literal double quotes \texttt{"}, to avoid \texttt{"} being
+interpreted as the end of the string (or the beginning of a string)
+we have to double escape the double quotes, as in \verb+\\"+. (This
+is not necessary when entering code in the JavaScript editor if you
+have the \app{Acrobat} application.) I try to write JavaScript that I can easily
+read, edit, and debug in the JavaScript editor (available in
+the full \app{Acrobat} application); for this reason, I've added in new
+lines and tabbing (\cs{r} and \cs{t}). Many people, however, have
+only the Adobe Reader and cannot see their code to debug it; in this
+case, the formatting is really not needed.
+
+%\newtopic Consider the following code
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+% \pushButton[\A{\JS{var x = "~"}}]{jsTilde}{22bp}{11bp}
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\noindent In {\LaTeX}, `\texttt{\~}' is an active character. JavaScript above appears
+%within the JavaScript editor as
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%var x = "protect unhbox voidb@x penalty @M {}"
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\noindent Not good! Using `\verb+\~+' or `\verb+\\~+ fairs no better.
+%The work around is to use \verb!\string~!.
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+% \pushButton[\A{\JS{var x = "\jslit~"}}]{jsTilde}{22bp}{11bp}
+%\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Needless to say, the following sample will not compile because we do not have
+matching braces.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\A{\JS{var x = "{"}}]{jsBrace}{22bp}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The work around here is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\A{\JS{var x = "\jslit\{"}}]{jsBrace}{22bp}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic In the above work about, the \cs{jslit} command (for JavaScript literal) is used. This command is defined only within the optional arguments of a form field. The definition of \cs{jslit} is \verb!\let\jslit\string!
+
+
+\subsubsection{Inserting Complex or Lengthy JavaScript}\label{lengthyJS}
+
+For JavaScript that is more complex or lengthy, the
+\textsf{insdljs} Package, distributed with the \cAcroB, has the
+verbatim \texttt{defineJS} environment. Details and idiosyncracies of this
+environment are documented in \Nameref{defineJS}. The
+example given in \hyperref[defineJSEx]{Example~\ref*{defineJSEx}} will suffice; the verbatim listing
+is reproduced here for convenience.
+
+\redpoint First, we define the JavaScript action and name it
+\cs{getComboJS} for the button (prior to defining the field,
+possibly in the preamble, or in style files):
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{defineJS}{\getComboJS}
+ var f = this.getField("myCombo");
+ var a = f.currentValueIndices;
+ if ( a == -1 )
+ app.alert("You've typed in \\"" + f.value +"\\".");
+ else
+ app.alert("Selection: " + f.getItemAt(a, false)
+ + " (export value: " + f.getItemAt(a, true)+").");
+\end{defineJS}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent There is no need for the \cs{r} and \cs{t} commands to format the JavaScript;
+the environment obeys lines and spaces; contrast this example with \textbf{Example~\ref*{ex:formattedBtn}},
+page~\pageref{ex:formattedBtn}.
+
+Now we can define our fields, a combo box (not shown) and button, in
+this example. It is the button that uses the JavaScript defined
+above.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\BC{0 .6 0}\CA{Get}\AC{Combo}\RC{Box}
+ \A{\JS{\getComboJS}}]{myComboButton}{33bp}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Within the argument of \cs{JS} we insert the macro
+command, \verb!\JS{\getComboJS}!
+for our JavaScript defined earlier in the
+\texttt{defineJS} environment
+
+%\redpoint The demo file \href{examples/definejs.pdf}{definejs.pdf}
+%(source \texttt{definejs.tex}) has additional examples of this
+%environment.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=875} The demo file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=875}{aeb\_links.pdf}}, with source attached,
+is found on the {\AcroBlog} website.
+
+
+\subsection{Defining JavaScript Strings with
+ \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{defineJSStr}}{\CMD{defineJSStr}}}
+
+The command \Com{defineJSStr} is used to define JavaScript strings, such as in dialog boxes.
+The syntax for this command is
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{defineJSStr\darg{\cs{\anglemeta{CMD}}}\darg{\anglemeta{JS\_string}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\defineJSStr{\!anglemeta(CMD)}{!anglemeta(JS_string)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\PD Where \cs{\anglemeta{CMD}} is a command to be defined by
+\cs{defineJSStr}, for example, \cs{myMessage}, and \anglemeta{JS\_string} is
+the JavaScript string to be defined as the expansion of the
+\cs{\anglemeta{CMD}}.
+
+\CmdDescription \cs{defineJSStr} executes \verb!\xdef#1{"#2"}!, so
+the JavaScript is expanded at the time of definition. (Note the
+enclosing double quotes) Before the expansion occurs, however, there
+are a number of definitions that occur locally:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \cs{uXXXX} is recognized as a unicode escape sequence. So, within the JavaScript string,
+ unicode can be entered directly, for example, \cs{u00FC} is the u-umlaut.
+
+ \item Backslash is still the tex escape character, so any commands
+ in the JavaScript string get expanded. You can delay the expansion
+ by using \cs{protect}. Expansion occurs when the tex compiler
+ actually expands \cs{\anglemeta{CMD}}.
+
+ \item \cs{r} (carriage return), \cs{n} (line feed) and, \cs{t}
+ (tab) can be used to format the message, as desired.
+
+ \item Use the \cs{cs} command to write a word containing a literal backslash in it;
+ for example, to get \cs{LaTeX} to appear in a JavaScript string, you must type \verb!\cs{LaTeX}!
+ in the JavaScript string.
+ \item The JavaScript string is enclosed in double quotes (\texttt{"}), if you want
+ a literal double quote, use \verb!\\"! to get a literal double quote
+ to appear in a JavaScript string. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\defineJSStr{\myMessage}
+ {My name is \\"Stan\\" and I'm \\"the man.\\"}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+ \item The command \cs{jslit} is recognized within the JavaScript string. Using \cs{jslit}
+ (short for JavaScript literal), you can insert, for example, unbalanced braces:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\defineJSStr{\myMessage}
+ {You forgot the left brace \\"\jslit\{\\",
+ please insert it.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The definition of \cs{jslit} is \verb!\let\jslit\string!.
+
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic The design decision to automatically insert the double
+quotes in the definition of the string has its faults. When you want
+to break the string to insert dynamic content, you must always be
+aware of the definition \verb!\xdef#1{"#2"}! contained with the
+definition of \cs{defineJSStr}. To illustrate, we return to an
+earlier example presented in \nameref{lengthyJS}, on
+page~\pageref*{lengthyJS}.
+
+We begin by defining some JavaScript strings. Note that in each of
+these two definitions, the leading and trailing double quote
+(\texttt{"}) is missing (these are the ones inserted automatically).
+The definitions look a bit strange because we break the string to
+insert dynamic content (\texttt{f.value}, \texttt{f.getItemAt(a,
+false)}, etc.), then continue on with the string from there.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\defineJSStr\myAlerti{You've typed in \\"" + f.value +"\\".}
+\defineJSStr\myAlertii{Selection: " + f.getItemAt(a, false)
+ + " (export value: " + f.getItemAt(a, true)+").}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic We use the \texttt{defineJS} environment, after setting the escape code to \texttt{@}. The \texttt{defineJS}
+is a fully verbatim environment, the escape character cannot be changed to \verb!\!, but it
+may be changed to another character, such as \texttt{@}.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{defineJS}[\catcode`\@=0\relax]{\getComboJS}
+var f = this.getField("myCombo");
+var a = f.currentValueIndices;
+if ( a == -1 )
+ app.alert(@myAlerti);
+else
+ app.alert(@myAlertii);
+\end{defineJS}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Then again, the use of \cs{defineJSStr} is not required, it is a convenience for creating
+JavaScript strings, especially ones with embedded Unicode. The previous example could have been
+done by defining \cs{myAlerti} and \cs{myAlertii} by
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\myAlerti{"You've typed in \\"" + f.value +"\\"."}
+\newcommand\myAlertii{"Selection: " + f.getItemAt(a, false)
+ + " (export value: " + f.getItemAt(a, true)+")."}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Note the \emph{presence} of the leading and trailing double quotes.
+
+\section{The \texttt{useui} option: A User-Friendly Interface}\label{useui}
+
+\def\myFavFive{%
+bordercolor={1 0 0},bgcolor={0 1 0},
+textcolor={1 0 0},align={right},
+uptxt={Push Me}}
+
+
+To use the ``user-friendly'' interface, the \texttt{useui} option must be taken. The key-value pairs
+described below are enclosed as the argument of the special \cs{ui} key. For example,
+\bgroup\obeyspaces\ttfamily%
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{ bordercolor=\darg{1 0 0},bgcolor=\darg{0 1 0},}%
+\begin{dCmd*}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\pushButton[\ui{%
+ bordercolor={1 0 0},bgcolor={0 1 0},
+ textcolor={1 0 0},align={right},
+ uptxt={Push Me},
+ js={app.alert("AcroTeX rocks!")}
+}]{pb1}{}{11bp}
+\end{dCmd*}
+\egroup\newtopic You can develop your own set of appearances and use the \texttt{presets} key to conveniently set these.
+For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\def\myFavFive{%
+ bordercolor={1 0 0},bgcolor={0 1 0},
+ textcolor={1 0 0},align={right},
+ uptxt={Push Me}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Later, a push button can use this preset, like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\ui{presets=\myFavFive,
+ js={app.alert("AcroTeX rocks!")}}]{pb1}{}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic which produces \pushButton[\ui{presets=\myFavFive, js={app.alert("AcroTeX rocks!")}}]{pb1}{}{11bp}\,
+\footnote{The reader is reminded once again that the author has no understanding of colors.}
+
+\newtopic You can mix your \cs{myFavFive} with different key-value pairs, such as a JavaScript action.
+
+\handpoint In each of the subsequent subsections, the \pkg{eforms} key to its user-friendly counterpart is
+displayed in the margin. Some of the user-friendly are a combination of
+\pkg{eforms} KVs and are not represented in the margin in this case.
+
+\subsection{The Appearance Tab}
+
+We present these key-value pairs to model the user-interface of \app{Acrobat}.
+
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily border=visible|invisible}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+border=visible|invisible
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription Used with link annotations and determines whether the border
+surrounding the bounding box of the link is visible. In the case of a link,
+this is the Link Type: \textsf{Visible Rectangle} or \textsf{Invisible
+Rectangle}. If you set border equal to \texttt{invisible}, that will set
+border line width to zero \verb!\W{0}!. For forms, this key has no
+counterpart in the user interface.
+
+If this key is not specified, the \textsf{eforms}
+follows the rule: If \texttt{colorlinks} option of \textsf{hyperref} is used, the border is invisible;
+otherwise, it is visible (and the default \texttt{linewidth} is 1). Use the border key to override
+this behavior.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily linewidth=thin|medium|thick}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{W}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1linewidth=thin|medium|thick
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription The \texttt{linewidth} of the border around a link
+or a form. The user interface choices are \texttt{thin},
+\texttt{medium}, and \texttt{thick}. This key-value is ignored if the
+document author has set the border to \texttt{invisible}.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily highlight=none|invert|outline|inset|push}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{H}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1highlight=none|invert|outline|inset|push
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription The highlight type for links and forms, choices are
+\texttt{none}, \texttt{invert}, \texttt{outline}, \texttt{inset} and
+\texttt{push}. The term \texttt{inset} is used with links, and
+\texttt{push} is used with forms. They each have the same key value pair.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily bordercolor=\anglemeta{num}\hardspace\anglemeta{num}\hardspace\anglemeta{num}}%
+\def\1{\llap{\smash{\parbox[c]{2\marginparwidth}{\raggedright\hfill\shortstack[l]{\Cs{BC}\,(forms) or\\\Cs{Color}\,(links)}}}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1bordercolor=!anglemeta(num)!hardspace!anglemeta(num)!hardspace!anglemeta(num)
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription The color of the border, when visible, in RGB color space.
+For example, \texttt{bordercolor=1 0 0}, is the color red.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily linestyle=solid|dashed|underlined|beveled|inset}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{S}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1linestyle=solid|dashed|underlined|beveled|inset
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription The line style of the border, possible values are \texttt{solid},\texttt{dashed},
+\texttt{underlined}, \texttt{beveled},and \texttt{inset}. Links do not support
+the \texttt{beveled} option.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily dasharray=\anglemeta{num}[\hardspace\anglemeta{num}]}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{D}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1dasharray=!anglemeta(num)[!hardspace!anglemeta(num)]
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription When a line style of \texttt{dashed} is chosen, you can specify a dash array.
+The default is 3.0, which means a repeating pattern of 3 points of line, followed by 3 points of space.
+A value of \texttt{dasharray=3~2} means three points of line, followed
+by two points of space. When this key is used without a value, the value is 3.0.
+When the \texttt{dashed} key is not present, 3.0 is used.
+
+linktxtcolor
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily linktxtcolor=\anglemeta{named\_color}}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{linktxtcolor}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1linktxtcolor=!anglemeta(named_color)
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription Set the color of the link text. Ignored if the
+\texttt{colorlinks} option of hyperref has not been taken. The
+value of \texttt{linktxtcolor} is a named color. For example,
+\texttt{linktxtcolor=red}. The default is \verb|\@linkcolor| from hyperref.
+This default can be changed by redefining \cs{@linkcolor}, or
+redefining \cs{defaultlinkcolor}. If \verb!linktxtcolor={}! (an
+empty argument), or simply \texttt{linktxtcolor}, no color is
+applied to the text, the color of the text will be whatever the current color is.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily annotflags=hidden|print|-print|noview|lock}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{F}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1annotflags=hidden|print|-print|noview|lock
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdDescription This is a bit field, possible values are \texttt{hidden}, \texttt{print},
+\texttt{-print}, \texttt{noview}, and \texttt{lock}. \textit{Multiple values can
+be specified}. The values are ``or-ed'' together. Most all forms are printable
+by default. If you don't want a form field to print specify \texttt{-print}.
+For example, \verb|annotflags={-print,lock}| makes the field not printable and is
+locked, so the field cannot be moved through the UI.
+
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily fieldflags=readonly|required|noexport|multiline|password|}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{Ff}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1fieldflags=readonly|required|noexport|multiline|password|
+ notoggleoff|radio|pushbutton|combo|edit|
+ sort|fileselect|multiselect|nospellcheck|
+ noscrolling|comb|radiosinunison|commitonchange|
+ richtext
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription There are a large number of field flags (\texttt{Ff}) that set a
+number of properties of a field. This is a multiple-selection key as well. The
+values are ``or-ed'' together.
+
+Normally, a document author would not specify \texttt{radio},
+\texttt{pushbutton} or \texttt{combo}. These properties are used by
+\textsf{eforms} to construct a radio button field, a push button and a combo
+box. The others can be used as appropriate.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily maxlength=\anglemeta{num}}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{MaxLen}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1maxlength=!anglemeta(num)
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription Use \texttt{maxlength} to limit the number of characters input into a text field.
+Example: \texttt{maxlength=12}. When the \texttt{fieldflags} is set to \texttt{comb}, the value
+of \texttt{maxlength} determines the number of combs in the field.
+
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily tooltip=\anglemeta{string}}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{TU}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1tooltip=!anglemeta(string)
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription Enter a text value to appear as a tool tip. A tool
+tip is text that appears in a frame when the user hovers the mouse
+over the field. The link annotation does not have a tool tip
+feature. Enclose in parentheses if the text string contains a comma;
+for example, \verb|tooltip={Hi, press me and see what happens!}|.
+The \texttt{tooltip} key obeys the \texttt{unicode} option. If the
+unicode option of hyperref is in effect, then setting
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+tooltip = {J\"{u}rgen, press me and see what happens!}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent yields a tool tip of ``J\"{u}rgen, press me and see what happens!''
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily default=\anglemeta{string}}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{DV}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\def\2{\llap{\Cs{V}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1default=!anglemeta(string)
+!2value=!anglemeta(string)
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription Set default value of a field (text, list, combobox)
+using the \texttt{default} key. The default value is the value used
+for the field when the field is reset. Example:
+\texttt{default=Name}.
+
+The \texttt{value} key is used to set the current value of a
+field (text, list, combobox). Example: \texttt{value=AcroTeX}. % unicode
+
+These two keys obey the \texttt{unicode} option.
+If the unicode option of hyperref is in effect, then setting
+\verb|value = \texteuro\ 1 000 000| sets the (initial) value of this field to
+``\char1 \ 1 000 000''.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily rotate=0|90|180|270}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{R}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1rotate=0|90|180|270
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription Set the orientation of the field, values are 0, 90, 180 and 270. If 90 or 270
+are chosen, the height and width of the field need to be reversed. This is not
+done automatically by \textsf{eforms}
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily bgcolor=\anglemeta{num}\hardspace\anglemeta{num}\hardspace\anglemeta{num}}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{BG}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1bgcolor=!anglemeta(num)!hardspace!anglemeta(num)!hardspace!anglemeta(num)
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription The background color of a form field. This is a RGB color value.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily rollovertxt=\anglemeta{string}}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{CA}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\def\2{\llap{\Cs{AC}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\def\3{\llap{\Cs{RC}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1uptxt=!anglemeta(string)
+!2downtxt=!anglemeta(string)
+!3rollovertxt=!anglemeta(string)
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription The normal (mouse up), mouse down and rollover text
+for a button field. All three of these keys obey the \texttt{unicode} option.
+If the \opt{unicode} option of \pkg{hyperref} is in effect, then setting
+\verb!uptxt = J\"{u}rgen! yields a normal caption of ``J\"{u}rgen'' on the button.
+
+% \texttt{eqforms\_pro.tex}
+
+
+\newtopic \textbf{Push buttons only.} The following list of keys are used for
+creating custom appearances on button faces. \app{Acrobat} Distiller required for
+this set. The example files
+\marginpar{\mbox{\makebox[0pt][l]{\textcolor{blue}{\Pisymbol{webd}{254}}}\raisebox{-2pt}{\color{red}{{\zqacr
+b\hspace{9.5pt}}}}}}\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=879}{eqforms.pdf}} and
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1291}{eqforms\_pro.pdf}} illustrate the
+creation of icons as button appearances. In the latter PDF,
+\texttt{eqforms\_pro.pdf}, \textsf{\app{Acrobat} Distiller} is required to be the
+PDF creator.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[]
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily normappr=\anglemeta{string}}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{I}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\def\2{\llap{\Cs{RI}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\def\3{\llap{\Cs{IX}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1normappr=!anglemeta(string)
+!2rollappr=!anglemeta(string)
+!3downappr=!anglemeta(string)
+\end{dCmd}
+\item[]\CmdDescription The normal, rollover, and down appearances of the button face icon. The value of each
+key is an indirect reference to a form XObject. Normally, you can use the \texttt{graphicxsp} package
+to embed graphics and give a symbolic name which is used as the value of these keys.
+
+\item[]
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily layout=labelonly|icononly|icontop|iconbottom|}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{TP}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1layout=labelonly|icononly|icontop|iconbottom|
+ iconleft|iconright|labelover
+\end{dCmd}
+\item[]\CmdDescription The value of this key determines the layout of the icon relative to the label (or caption).
+ The default is \texttt{labelonly}, if if you define icons, you need to set layout to something
+ other than \texttt{labelonly}.
+
+\item[]
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily scalewhen=always|never|iconbig|iconsmall}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{SW}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1scalewhen=always|never|iconbig|iconsmall
+\end{dCmd}
+\item[]\CmdDescription The value of this key tells when to scale the icon. The \texttt{iconbig}
+ scales the icon when it is too big for the bounding rectangle; while
+ \texttt{iconsmsll} scales the icon when it is too small for the bounding rectangle.
+ The default is \texttt{always}.
+
+\item[]
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily scale=proportional|nonproportional}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{ST}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1scale=proportional|nonproportional
+\end{dCmd}
+\item[]\CmdDescription This parameter sets the scale type, either \texttt{proportional} scaling, where
+the aspect ratio of the icon is preserved; or \texttt{nonproportional} scaling is used. The
+default is \texttt{proportional}.
+
+\item[]
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily position=\anglemeta{x}\hardspace\anglemeta{y})}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{PA}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1position=!anglemeta(x)!hardspace!anglemeta(y)
+\end{dCmd}
+\item[]\CmdDescription Both \anglemeta{x} and \anglemeta{y} are numbers
+ between 0 and 1, inclusive, and separated by a space (not a comma). They
+ indicate the fraction of the left over space to allocate at the left
+ and bottom of the icon. A value of \verb!{0.0 0.0}! positions the
+ icon at the bottom-left corner; a value of \verb!{0.5 0.5}! centers
+ it within the rectangle. This entry is only used of the icon is
+ scaled proportionally. The default is \verb!{0.5 0.5}!.
+
+\item[]
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily fitbounds=true|false}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{FB}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1fitbounds=true|false
+\end{dCmd}
+\item[]\CmdDescription A Boolean value, if \texttt{true}, indicates
+ that the button appearance should be scaled to fit fully
+ within the bounds of the field's bounding rectangle without
+ taking into consideration the line width of the border. The
+ default is \texttt{false}. \texttt{fitbounds} is the same as \texttt{fitbounds=true}.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic \textbf{Check boxes and Radio Buttons Only.} The following
+list of keys are used for creating custom appearances on check boxes and
+radio buttons. \app{Acrobat} Distiller required for this set. The example files
+\marginpar{\mbox{\makebox[0pt][l]{\textcolor{blue}{\Pisymbol{webd}{254}}}\raisebox{-2pt}{\color{red}{{\zqacr
+b\hspace{9.5pt}}}}}}\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=879}{eqforms.pdf}} and
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1291}{eqforms\_pro.pdf}} illustrate the
+creation of these appearances. In the latter PDF, \texttt{eqforms\_pro.pdf},
+\textsf{\app{Acrobat} Distiller} is required to be the PDF creator.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item[]
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily appr=\darg{ norm=\darg{on=\darg\anglemeta{normOnAppr}},off=\darg{\anglemeta{normOffAppr}}},}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{AP}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1appr={ norm={on={!anglemeta(normOnAppr)},off={!anglemeta(normOffAppr)}},
+ down={on={!anglemeta(downOnAppr)},off={!anglemeta(downOffAppr)}},
+ roll={on={!anglemeta(rollOnAppr)},off={!anglemeta(rollOffAppr)}}}
+\end{dCmd}
+\item[] \CmdDescription The \texttt{norm} key is the normal appearance of the button;
+ it has two appearances, the \texttt{on} and the \texttt{off} appearances. The
+ \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} are indirect references to a form XObject. The other
+ two keys, down and roll, are the down and rollover appearances, respectively; they
+ have the same structure as \texttt{norm} does.
+
+\item[] If \texttt{appr} is not specified, then, by default, the usual appearances of the
+ buttons are used, as provided by \app{Acrobat}/AR.
+
+\item[] The \texttt{down} and \texttt{roll} are optional, if you use \texttt{appr} at all, you should
+ specify the norm appearance, both \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} appearances.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily align=left|centered|right}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{Q}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1align=left|centered|right
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription The type of alignment of a text field. Permitted values are
+\texttt{left}, \texttt{centered}, and \texttt{right}.
+
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily textcolor=\anglemeta{num}[\hardspace\anglemeta{num}\hardspace\anglemeta{num}[\hardspace\anglemeta{num}]]}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{textFont}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\def\2{\llap{\Cs{textSize}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\def\3{\llap{\Cs{textColor}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1textfont=!anglemeta(font_name)
+!2textsize=!anglemeta(num)
+!3textcolor=!anglemeta(num)[!hardspace!anglemeta(num)!hardspace!anglemeta(num)[!hardspace!anglemeta(num)]]
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription
+The key \texttt{textfont} is the text font to be used with the text of the field,
+while \texttt{textsize} is the text size to be used. A value of 0 means auto size.
+The color of the text in the field. This can be in \textsf{G}, \textsf{RGB} or \textsf{CMYK} color
+space by specifying 1, 3 or 4 numbers between 0 and 1.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily autocenter=yes|no}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{autoCenter}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1autocenter=yes|no
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription This is a feature of \textsf{eforms}. Use
+\texttt{autocenter=yes} (the default) to moderately center the bounding box,
+and use \texttt{autocenter=no} otherwise.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily inline=yes|no}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{inline}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1inline=yes|no
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription Same as \cs{autoCenter} (\texttt{autocenter}), but the algorithm
+for positioning the field is more sophisticated. The default is \verb|autocenter=no|
+
+To compare the last two (\texttt{autocenter} and \texttt{inline}), we present the following example:
+\begin{quote}\settowidth{\dimen0}{Enter your first name:\ }%
+\underbar{Enter your name:\ \textField[\V{D. P. Story}\DV{D. P. Story}\inline{y}]{ILtxt}{1.25in}{14bp}}\cgBdry[3bp](\texttt{inline=yes})\\[6bp]
+\underbar{Enter your name:\ \textField[\V{D. P. Story}\DV{D. P. Story}]{ACtxt}{1.25in}{14bp}}\cgBdry[3bp](\texttt{autoCenter=yes})
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily presets=\meta{\string\CMD}}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{presets}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1presets=!meta(\CMD)
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription Set presets from inside a \cs{ui} argument. The value of \cs{ui} must be a user defined
+command, which expands to a comma-delimited list of ui-key-value pairs.
+
+\Example Use the presets key to place pre-defined key-value pairs into the option
+argument of a link. Define a command,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\def\myUIOpts{%
+ border=visible,linktxtcolor=blue,
+ linewidth=medium,highlight=outline,
+ linestyle=dashed,bordercolor={1 0 0},
+ js={app.alert("AcroTeX rocks!")}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Later, we can type,
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily \string\setLink[\string\ui\darg{presets=\darg{\string\myUIOpts}}]\darg{Press Me Again!!}}
+\begin{dCmd*}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\setLink[\ui{presets={\myUIOpts}}]{Press Me Again!!}
+\end{dCmd*}
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily symbolchoice=check|circle|cross|diamond|square|star}%
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{symbolchoice}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1symbolchoice=check|circle|cross|diamond|square|star
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription Used with a checkbox or radio button field. This sets the symbol
+that appears in the field when the box is checked. Choices are
+\texttt{check}, \texttt{circle}, \texttt{cross}, \texttt{diamond},
+\texttt{square}, and \texttt{star}.
+
+
+\subsection{The Action Tab}
+
+There are several common actions that are supported through the user-friendly interface, these
+are \texttt{goto} actions, and JavaScript actions.
+
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily goto=\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+goto={!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription This key incorporates jumps to pages and destinations within the current PDF file,
+and to pages and destinations to another PDF file. these are
+\KVP There are a number of key-value pairs that are recognized,
+\texttt{file}, \texttt{targetdest}, \texttt{labeldest}, \texttt{page},
+\texttt{view}, and \texttt{open}. A brief description of each follows.
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \texttt{file}: Specify a relative path to the PDF file. This will work on the Web if
+ the position is the same relative to the calling file. If the \texttt{file} key is not present,
+ the jump is to a page or destination in the current file.
+ \item \texttt{url}: This key is used to create a weblink, similar to what \cs{href} does.
+ The value of this key is a url (\texttt{http}, \texttt{https}, \texttt{mailto}, etc.).
+ If the \texttt{url} key is present, only the \texttt{openparams} key is recognized.
+ \item \texttt{openparams}: Open parameters that should be included with the URL, as passed by
+ the \texttt{url} key. These parameters are key value pairs \texttt{key=value} and are separated
+ by an ampersand (\texttt{\&}).
+ See \emph{\href{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/?view=documentation}{Parameters for Opening PDF Files}} for more information, examples are found below.
+ \item \texttt{targetdest}: Jump to a target, perhaps created by \verb|\hypertarget|. For example,
+ if we say \verb|\hypertarget{acrotex}{Welcome!}|, we jump to the
+ \texttt{acrotex} named destination by specifying \texttt{targetdest=acrotex}.
+ \item \texttt{labeldest}: Same as \texttt{targetdest}, but we jump to a destination specified by
+ a latex label. For example, if we type \verb|\section{AcroTeX}\label{acrotex}|,
+ we can jump to this section by specifying \texttt{labeldest=acrotex}.
+
+ \item \texttt{page}: The page number to which the \texttt{goto}
+ action is to jump. If we set \texttt{page=1}, we will jump to the
+ first page of the document.
+
+ \item \texttt{view}: The view can be set when the \texttt{page} key is used.
+ Possible values are \texttt{fitpage}, \texttt{actualsize},
+ \texttt{fitwidth}, \texttt{fitvisible}, and \texttt{inheritzoom}.
+ These terms correspond to \app{Acrobat}'s UI. When jumping to a
+ destination, the view is set by the destination code.
+
+ \item \texttt{open}: This key is used when you specify the \texttt{file} key. The
+ \texttt{open} key determines if a new window is opened or not when the PDF viewer
+ jumps to the file. Possible values are \texttt{userpref} (use user preferences),
+ \texttt{new} (open new window), \texttt{existing} (use the existing window).
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\Example The following are examples of the \texttt{goto} key.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \setLink[\ui{goto={file=aeb_man.pdf,page=8,view=fitwidth}}]{AeB Manual}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\setLink[\ui{goto={file=aeb_man.pdf,page=8,%
+ view=fitwidth}}]{AeB Manual}
+\end{Verbatim}
+This link should work on your local hard drive and it should work on
+the web, from within a web browser, assuming \texttt{aeb\_man.pdf} is
+in the same folder as \texttt{eformman.pdf}.
+
+\item \setLink[\ui{goto={url=http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex/aeb_man.pdf,
+ openparams={page=8&search=AcroTeX web exerquiz}}}]{AeB Manual on Web}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\setLink[\ui{%
+ goto={url=http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/%
+ acrotex/aeb_man.pdf,%
+ openparams={page=8&search=AcroTeX web exerquiz}}}
+ ]{AeB Manual on Web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Here, we open the AeB Manual that is on the web, go to page 8, and search for the words
+\texttt{AcroTeX}, \texttt{web}, and \texttt{exerquiz}. Notice that we don't have to
+do anything special with the tilde (\texttt{\string~}) or the sharp (\texttt{\#}), both of
+these are handled by the \textsf{eforms} package.
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily js=\darg{\anglemeta{script}}}%
+\def\1{\llap{\ttfamily\Cs{A}\darg{\Cs{JS}\darg{\anglemeta{script}}}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1js={!anglemeta(script)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription A general purpose key to execute JavaScript actions on a mouse up trigger.
+The argument is a JavaScript text string, for example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+js={app.alert("Hello World!")}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The value of \texttt{js} may be a macro containing JavaScript, which would include
+a macro created by the \texttt{defineJS} environment of \textsf{insdljs}.
+
+% Next up are additional actions, and there are a lot of them. All these
+% take JavaScript code as their values.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily pageinvisible=\darg{\anglemeta{script}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+mouseup={!anglemeta(script)}
+mousedown={!anglemeta(script)}
+onenter={!anglemeta(script)}
+onexit={!anglemeta(script)}
+onfocus={!anglemeta(script)}
+onblur={!anglemeta(script)}
+format={!anglemeta(script)}
+keystroke={!anglemeta(script)}
+validate={!anglemeta(script)}
+calculate={!anglemeta(script)}
+pageopen={!anglemeta(script)}
+pageclose={!anglemeta(script)}
+pagevisible={!anglemeta(script)}
+pageinvisible={!anglemeta(script)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription These are all additional actions (\texttt{AA}) of a form field, which take as their values
+JavaScript code (\anglemeta{script}).
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{mouseup}: Executes its code with a mouse up event. If there is a JavaScript
+ action defined by the \texttt{js} key (or the \verb|\A| key), the \texttt{js} (\verb|\A|) action is executed.
+ \item \texttt{mousedown}: Executes its when the mouse is hovering over the field and the user clicks
+ on the mouse.
+ \item \texttt{onenter}: Executes its code when the user moves the mouse into the form field (the bounding rectangle).
+ \item \texttt{onexit}: Executes its code when the user moves the mouse out of the form field (the bounding rectangle).
+ \item \texttt{onfocus}: Executes its code when the user brings the field into focus.
+ \item \texttt{onblur}: Executes its code when the user brings the field loses focus (the user tabs away from
+ the field, or click outside the field).
+ \item \texttt{format}: JavaScript to format the text that appears to
+ the user in a text field or editable combo box.
+ \item \texttt{keystroke}: JavaScript to process each keystroke in a text field or editable combo box.
+ \item \texttt{validate}: JavaScript to validate the committed data input into a text field or editable combo box.
+ \item \texttt{calculate}: JavaScript to make calculations based on the values of other fields.
+ \item \texttt{pageopen}: JavaScript that executes when the page containing the field is opened.
+ \item \texttt{pageclose}: JavaScript that executes when the page containing the field is closed.
+ \item \texttt{pagevisible}: JavaScript that executes when the page containing the field first becomes visible to the user.
+ \item \texttt{pageinvisible}: JavaScript that executes when the page containing the field is no longer visible to the user.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ \subsection{The Signed Tab}
+
+ A signature field has a Signed tab. On that tab is an option to mark a set of fields
+ as readonly (locked). The locked key controls that option.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily lock=\darg{\anglemeta{PDF KV-pairs}}}
+\def\1{\llap{\Cs{Lock}\hspace{\marginparsep}}}%Lock
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+!1lock={!anglemeta(PDF KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdDescription The \texttt{lock} key is used with signature fields, currently, there is
+ no nice user interface to this key. Typical entries are
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+lock={/Action/All} % lock all fields in the doc
+lock={/Action/Include % lock all fields listed in Fields
+ /Fields [(field1)(field2)...]}
+lock={/Action/Exclude % lock all fields not listed in Fields
+ /Fields [(field1)(field2)...]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Another option that is included in the Signed tab is titled ``This script executes
+when field is signed.''
+
+This is an option that, through the user interface, is mutually exclusive from
+locking fields. This option is implemented through the format event;
+thus, to populate this option with JavaScript use the \texttt{format} key. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+format={app.alert("Thank you for signing this field.");}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\part{Setting the Tab Order}
+
+The \hypertarget{\pkg{taborder}}{taborderPkg} package is an internal AeB package that is called by
+both the \textsf{eforms} and the \texttt{annot\_pro packages}. The
+\texttt{taborder} package sets the tab order for form fields and link
+annotations (when the link is created by the command \cs{setLink}, defined
+in the \textsf{eforms} package. The package works for all drivers when
+setting tab order by column, row, or widget order. For setting tabbing
+order by structure, only documents generated using the \textbf{pdfmark}
+are supported; those using the \textsf{dvips} or \textsf{dvipsone} driver along with Adobe
+Distiller.
+
+\section{Setting the Tab Order}
+
+The tabbing order of the fields is usually the order in which the fields were created. In rare cases, it may be desirable to set the order to one of the orders defined by the PDF Reference.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily \string\setTabOrder\darg{c|C|r|R|s|S|w|W|a|A|unspecified}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\setTabOrder{c|C|r|R|s|S|w|W|a|A|unspecified}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdDescription Command Description: This command is page oriented, it sets to the tab order of fields on
+the page the TEX compiler executes this command. The permissible values of the parameter are
+described below, taken verbatim from the \emph{PDF Reference}, the cross-references that appear in the
+descriptions are references to the \emph{PDF Reference} document.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \texttt{c|C} (column order): ``Annotations are visited in columns running vertically up and down
+the page. Columns are ordered by the Direction entry in the viewer preferences dictionary
+(see Section 8.1, `Viewer Preferences'). The first annotation visited is the one at the top of
+the first column. When the end of a column is encountered, the first annotation in the next
+column is visited.''
+\item \texttt{r|R} (row order): ``Annotations are visited in rows running horizontally across the page.
+The direction within a row is determined by the Direction entry in the viewer preferences
+dictionary (see Section 8.1, `Viewer Preferences'). The first annotation visited is the first
+annotation in the topmost row. When the end of a row is encountered, the first annotation
+in the next row is visited.''
+\item \texttt{s|S} (structure order): ``Annotations are visited in the order in which they appear in the
+structure tree (see Section 10.6, ``Logical Structure''). The order for annotations that are not
+included in the structure tree is application-dependent.''
+\item \texttt{w|W} (version 9.0, widget order): ``Widget annotations are visited in the order in which they
+appear in the page Annots array, followed by other annotation types in row order.''
+\item \texttt{a|A} (version 9.0, annotations array order): ``All annotations are visited in the order in which
+they appear in the page Annots array.'' (In version 9.0, this key is not implemented.)
+\item \texttt{unspecified|empty} The tab order follows the order of the annotations as listed in the
+Annots array. For LATEX, this is the order in which the annotations were created. You get
+the same result if the argument is left empty \verb!\setTabOrder{}!, or if \cs{setTabOrder} is
+not used at all. If an unrecognized argument is passed to \cs{setTabOrder}, \texttt{unspecified}
+is used.
+\end{itemize}
+The behavior of tabbing has changed over the years; documentation of tabbing behavior is given
+in the \emph{Adobe Supplement to the ISO 32000, BaseVersion 1.7, ExtensionLevel 3}.\footnote{\url{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/pdfs/PDF3200_2008.pdf}} See the section
+Errors and Implementation Notes. Annotations include things like form fields (widget annotations), links (link annotations) and
+the various types of comment annotations. See section 8.4.5 of the PDF Reference.
+
+The \cs{setTabOrder} command is available for users of pdftex and dvipdfm, as well as users of dvipsone and dvips (with distiller); for row, column, and widget (version 9 or later), the PDF viewer does all the work on tabbing, for tabbing using structure, one necessarily needs structure, otherwise, the tabbing follows row order. For users of Adobe Distiller, the \texttt{taborder} package provides two ways for defining the structure order; on any page in which structure order is used, use only one of the following commands:
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily\string\setTabOrderByNumber}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\setTabOrderByList
+\setTabOrderByNumber
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\subsection{Using \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{setTabOrderByList}}{\CMD{setTabOrderByList}}}
+
+We illustrate with a simple example, followed by a verbatim listing of the code, and a discussion
+afterward. We begin by placing two text fields in a row; normally,we would tab from the first one created
+by the {\TeX} compiler to the next one created. We use structure to reverse the order of tabbing.
+
+\setTabOrder{s} % set tab order to structure
+\setTabOrderByList % the default initially
+
+\textField[\V{text1}\objdef{otext1}]{text1}{1.25in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\textField[\V{text2}\objdef{otext2}]{text2}{1.25in}{11bp}
+
+\setStructTabOrder{% The list of the fields in the desired order
+ {otext2}
+ {otext1}
+}
+\newtopic The verbatim listing of the above form fields follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\setTabOrder{s} % set tab order to structure
+\setTabOrderByList % the default initially
+
+\textField[\V{text1}\objdef{otext1}]{text1}{1.25in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\textField[\V{text2}\objdef{otext2}]{text2}{1.25in}{11bp}
+
+\setStructTabOrder{% The list of the fields in the desired order
+ {otext2}
+ {otext1}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic We begin by specifying \verb!\setTabOrder{s}! structure tab order. In the optional argument of the two text fields, we specify an object name for each. These names must be unique throughout the whole document; they are used to reference the fields when setting up the tabbing order.
+
+The \cs{setStructTabOrder} is used to set up the tabbing order, its arguments (enclosed in
+braces) consists of a list of object names (which must exist on the current page). The order of
+the object names is the order of visitation when you tab. PDF objects not referenced are visited
+last after the structure tabbing is complete.
+
+After all annotations have been created on a page, we use the \cs{setStructTabOrder} to
+actually set the tab order; this is none by simply listing the object names, in the desired order, of
+the annotations you want included in the tabbing order. These annotations can be fields, links,
+and markup comments, like sticky notes.
+
+The syntax for \cs{setStructTabOrder} is
+
+\bgroup\obeyspaces%
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily [type=\anglemeta{type},title=\anglemeta{title}]\darg{\anglemeta{oRef\_n}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\setStructTabOrder{%
+ [type=!anglemeta(type),title=!anglemeta(title)]{!anglemeta(oRef_1)}
+ [type=!anglemeta(type),title=!anglemeta(title)]{!anglemeta(oRef_1)}
+ ...
+ [type=!anglemeta(type),title=!anglemeta(title)]{!anglemeta(oRef_n)}
+}
+\end{dCmd}
+\egroup\newtopic Each argument has an optional argument, the required argument (\anglemeta{<oRef\_i>}) is an object name
+of a previously defined PDF object, such as a form field (widget), a link, or an annotation. The
+optional argument takes two optional key-value pairs: (1) The type is a declaration of the type
+the PDF object is, the default is \texttt{Form} (you can use \texttt{Link} if its a link, and \texttt{Annot} if its a comment);
+(2) \texttt{title} is the title of the structure, the value of title appears in the Tags panel of the \app{Acrobat}
+user interface. The default title is to have no title.
+
+\newtopic The demo file is \marginpar{\mbox{\makebox[0pt][l]{\textcolor{blue}{\Pisymbol{webd}{254}}}\raisebox{-2pt}{\color{red}{{\zqacr
+b\hspace{9.5pt}}}}}}\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=320}{settaborder.pdf}} for these tabbing features,
+including tabbing using structure, has its source file attached to the PDF file.
+The file is posted one the \href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{AeB Blog}.
+
+\subsection{Using \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{setTabOrderByNumber}}{\CMD{setTabOrderByNumber}}}
+
+An alternate method for setting tab order by structure is to directly enter the tab order into the
+optional argument of the field, link, or comment annotation.
+
+\setTabOrder{s} % set tab order to structure
+\setTabOrderByNumber
+
+\textField[\V{text3}\objdef{otext3}\taborder{1}]{text3}{1.25in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\textField[\V{text3}\objdef{otext4}\taborder{0}]{text4}{1.25in}{11bp}
+
+\newtopic The verbatim listing of the above form fields follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,]
+\setTabOrder{s} % set tab order to structure
+\setTabOrderByNumber
+
+\textField[\V{text3}\objdef{otext3}\taborder{1}]
+ {text3}{1.25in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\textField[\V{text3}\objdef{otext4}\taborder{0}]
+ {text4}{1.25in}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic Note the user of the \cs{objdef} and \cs{taborder} keys. The latter is used to set the order of tabbing.
+
+\newtopic\textcolor{red}{\textbf{Important:}} When setting tab order, there must be an object with \verb!\taborder{0}!; from what I've been able to observe, if no PDF object has tab order zero, the tabbing reverts to what is listed in the Annots array, which is the order the PDF objects were created. If you specify 0, 0, 1, 2, 3\dots, then the two PDF objects with tab order of 0 are visited in the order they were created. Similarly, for the other tab values. A tab order of 0, 2, 3, 4\dots seems to work as well. The object labeled 2 will be visited after the object labeled 0.
+
+%The demo file, \texttt{settaborder1.pdf}, for these tabbing features, including tabbing using structure, has its source file attached to the PDF file. The file is posted one the \href{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/aebblog.html}{AeB Blog}.
+
+\newtopic The demo file is \marginpar{\mbox{\makebox[0pt][l]{\textcolor{blue}{\Pisymbol{webd}{254}}}\raisebox{-2pt}{\color{red}{{\zqacr
+b\hspace{9.5pt}}}}}}\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=334}{settaborder1.pdf}} for these tabbing features, including tabbing using structure, has its source file attached to the PDF file. The file is posted one the \href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{AeB Blog}.
+
+
+%------------------ End PDF Forms and Link ----------------------------
+
+\part{Document and Page JavaScript}
+
+%\section{Introduction}
+
+The \hypertarget{\pkg{insdljs}}{insdljsPkg} package provides support to {\LaTeX} in four areas:
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item for embedding document level JavaScript into the PDF file created
+ from a {\LaTeX} source, the \texttt{insDLJS} environment.
+ \item for creating open page actions that are executed when the document
+ is first opened to the first page, the \cs{OpenAction} command.
+ \item for writing JavaScript code in an environment that preserves the
+ formatting of the code, this is the \texttt{defineJS} environment.
+ \item for executing JavaScript code once to perform post-distillation
+ tasks, this is the \texttt{execJS} environment. This environment
+ works only for document authors that use \app{Acrobat}/\app{Acrobat}
+ Distiller to create PDF files.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\newtopic This package defines a new environment, \texttt{insDLJS}, used
+for inserting \app{Acrobat} JavaScript into a PDF file created from a
+\LaTeX{} source. This package works correctly for users of \textsf{pdftex}
+(and \app{luatex}), \textsf{dvipdfm}, \textsf{dvipdfmx}, and \texttt{xetex}.
+For\marginpar{\small\raggedleft\app{Acrobat} required for
+\app{dvips}} those who use either \app{dvips} or
+\app{dvipsone} to produce a postscript file, which is then distilled, you are
+required to have \app{Acrobat}~5.0 (or later).
+
+\section{Package Options}
+
+The \textsf{insdljs} supports five common ``drivers'': \texttt{dvipsone},
+\texttt{dvips}, \texttt{pdftex} (including the executable \textsf{lu(la)tex}), \texttt{dvipdfm},
+\texttt{dvipdfmx}, \texttt{xetex}, and \texttt{tex\-tures}. When using
+\texttt{dvipsone} or \texttt{dvips}, \app{Acrobat} Distiller and \app{Acrobat}
+(version 5.0 or later) are required to embed the JavaScripts at the
+document level. The other drivers have primitives that allow the embedding
+of the JavaScripts.
+
+\newtopic Other options are discussed in the following paragraphs.
+\begin{description}\def\NH{\hspace{-\labelsep}}
+\item\NH\texttt{nodljs} turns off the embedding of the document level
+ JavaScript. This might be useful, for creating a paper document that is
+ not interactive. For a non-interactive paper document, no JS is needed.
+
+\item\NH\texttt{execJS} is a very useful option/feature if you know how to use
+ it. Any JavaScript that is written in an \env{execJS} environment is
+ executed once when the document is first opened in \app{Acrobat}, then
+ discarded. AeB uses this for post-distillation document processing. The
+ default is that the JavaScript in an \texttt{execJS} environment is not
+ executed; using this option turns on this feature.
+\end{description}
+
+\section{The \texttt{insDLJS} and \texttt{insDLJS*} Environments}
+
+These are the main environments defined by this package. There are
+two forms of the document level environment, the \texttt{insDLJS} and the
+\texttt{insDLJS*}. First, we discuss what a document JavaScript is.
+
+\subsection{What is Document Level JavaScript?}
+The document level is a location in the PDF document where scripts can be stored.
+When the PDF document is opened, the document level functions are scanned, and any
+``exposed script'' is executed.
+
+Normally, the type of scripts you would place at the document level are
+general purpose JavaScript functions, functions that are called repeatedly
+or large special purpose functions. Functions at the document level are
+known throughout the document, so they can be called by links, form
+buttons, page open actions, etc.
+
+Variables declared within a JavaScript function have local scope, they are
+not known outside that function. However, if you can declare variables and
+initialize them at the document level outside of a function, these
+variables will have document wide scope. Throughout the document, the
+values of these global variables are known. For example, suppose the
+following code is at the document level:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+var myVar = 17; // defined outside a function, global scope
+function HelloWorld()
+{
+ var x = 3; // defined inside a function, local scope
+ app.alert("AcroTeX, by Hech!", 3);
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Both the function \texttt{HelloWorld()} and the variable \texttt{myVar}
+are known throughout the document. The function \texttt{HelloWorld()} can
+be called by a mouse up button action; some form field, executing some
+JavaScript, may access the value of \texttt{myVar} and/or change its
+value. The variable \texttt{x} is not known outside of the
+\texttt{HelloWorld()} function.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{insDLJS} Environment}
+
+The \texttt{insDLJS} is the simplest of the two environments. Any material
+within the environment, eventually ends up in the \textsf{DLJS} section of the
+PDF document.
+
+The environment takes the \meta{base\_name} and writes the
+file \texttt{\anglemeta{base\_name}.djs}. This file contains a verbatim
+listing of the JavaScript within the environment, plus some lines
+that change catcodes. The file is then input into the document at
+\cs{AtBeginDocument}.
+
+The case of \textsf{dvipsone} and \textsf{dvips} is a little different. A
+\texttt{\anglemeta{base\_name}.djs} is written and input back, and a second file
+\texttt{\anglemeta{base\_name}.fdf} is written. The second file is later input
+into the PDF document after distillation.
+
+The syntax of usage for this environment, which takes three
+arguments, is given next.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{begin\darg{insDLJS}[\meta{js\_var}]\darg{\meta{base\_name}}\darg{\meta{script\_name}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\begin{insDLJS}[!meta(js_var)]{!meta(base_name)}{!meta(script_name)}
+...
+ !anglemeta(JavaScript functions or exposed code)
+...
+\end{insDLJS}
+\end{dCmd}
+\EnvDescription JavaScript code is written within the \texttt{insDLJS} environment.
+The code is stored as document-level JavaScript, and is global to the document. Functions
+and variables defined at the top-most level are known to other form elements in the document.
+
+The \texttt{insDLJS} is a verbatim environment, with backslash (\verb!\!)
+and percentage (\texttt{\%}) maintaining their usual {\LaTeX} meaning.
+Commands defined in the {\LaTeX} source file, therefore, are expanded
+before the JavaScript is embedded in the PDF file. The left and right
+braces are set to normal characters, so the commands can't have any
+argument, they should be just text macros.
+
+\PD The environment takes three parameters, the first is optional, but required
+when using the \app{Acrobat} Distiller.
+\begin{description}\def\NH{\hspace{-\labelsep}}%
+\item\NH\texttt{[\meta{js\_var}]} is an
+ optional parameter \emph{was required} for the \texttt{dvipsone}
+ and \texttt{dvips} options; otherwise it is ignored. Its value
+ must be the name of one of the functions or JavaScript variables
+ defined in the environment. This is used to detect whether the
+ \textsf{DLJS} has already been loaded by \app{Acrobat}.
+
+\handpoint The \texttt{[\meta{js\_var}]} is now optional even for
+ users of \textsf{dvipsone} and \textsf{dvips}. If one is not
+ provided, then appropriate code is automatically generated.
+
+\item\NH \meta{base\_name} is an alphabetic word with no spaces and limited
+ to eight characters.\footnote{There is actually no limitation on the
+ number of characters in the name, this is a legacy statement from the
+ days of DOS, you remember DOS, don't you?} It is used to build the
+ names of auxiliary files and to build the names of macros used by the
+ environment.
+
+\item\NH\meta{script\_name} is the name of the JavaScript that you are
+ embedding in the document. This title will appear in the document
+ JavaScript dialog in \app{Acrobat}; unless you use \app{Acrobat}, you can't
+ see this name in the user interface anyway. The
+ \meta{script\_name} should be a string that is descriptive of
+ the functionality of the code.
+\end{description}
+
+\paragraph*{Commenting.} Within the \texttt{insDLJS} environment, there
+are two types of comment characters: (1) a \TeX{} comment (\verb|%|) and
+(2) a JavaScript comment. The JavaScript comments are `\texttt{//}', a
+line comment, and `\texttt{/*...*/}' for more extensive commenting. These
+comments will survive and be placed into the PDF file. In JavaScript the
+`\verb|%|' is used as well, use \verb|\%| when you want to use the percent
+character in a JavaScript statement, for example \verb|app.alert("\%.2f", 3.14159);|,
+this statement will appear within your JavaScript code as \verb|app.alert("%.2f", 3.14159);|.
+
+
+\Example The following is a minimal illustration of the use of the
+new environment. Here we assume the document author is using pdftex,
+and is not using the wonderful packages of \textsf{web},
+\textsf{exerquiz} or \textsf{eforms}. In this case, the hyperref
+package with driver in the option must be introduced first, followed
+by \textsf{insdljs} with the same driver, of course. The optional argument
+of the \texttt{insDLJS} environment is not used in this example.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[pdftex]{insdljs}
+
+\newcommand\tugHello{Welcome to TUG 2001!}
+\begin{insDLJS}{mydljs}{My Private DLJS}
+function HelloWorld() { app.alert("\tugHello", 3); }
+\end{insDLJS}
+\begin{document}
+\begin{Form} % a hyperref environment, needed for \PushButton
+% use built in form button of hyperref
+Push \PushButton[name=myButton,onclick={HelloWorld();}]{Button}
+\end{Form}
+\end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The Form environment and the \cs{PushButton} command are defined
+in the hyperref package. The \textsf{insDLJS} uses the Form environment,
+the \textsf{eforms} package defines its own \cs{pushButton} command.
+
+\Example Here is the same example as above, but with \textsf{dvips} as the
+driver and using the \textsf{eforms} package, which calls
+\textsf{insdljs}. Note the use of the optional argument in the
+\texttt{insDLJS} environment, and the missing \textsf{hyperref} package
+statement and \texttt{Form} environment, the \textsf{eforms} package
+automatically inserts this code.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[dvips]{eforms}
+
+\newcommand\tugHello{Welcome to TUG 2001!}
+\begin{insDLJS}[HelloWorld]{mydljs}{My Private DLJS}
+function HelloWorld() { app.alert("\tugHello", 3); }
+\end{insDLJS}
+\begin{document}
+\pushButton[\CA{Push}\A{\JS{HelloWorld();}}]{Button}{}{11bp}
+\end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{insDLJS*} Environment}
+
+The \texttt{insDLJS*} environment can be used to better organize,
+edit and debug your JavaScript. It is suitable for package
+developers who write a large amount of code package application.
+
+If you have the full \app{Acrobat} product, you can open the DLJS edit
+dialog. There you will see a listing of all DLJS contained in the
+document. When you double click on one of the \textit{script names},
+you enter the edit window, where you can edit all JavaScript
+contained under that name.
+
+\bgroup\obeyspaces%
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily \anglemeta{JavaScript functions or exposed code}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\begin{insDLJS*}[!meta(js_var)]{!meta(base_name)}
+\begin{newsegment}{!meta(script_name_1)}
+ !anglemeta(JavaScript functions or exposed code)
+\end{newsegment}
+\begin{newsegment}{!meta(script_name_2)}
+ !anglemeta(JavaScript functions or exposed code)
+\end{newsegment}
+...
+...
+\begin{newsegment}{!meta(script_name_n)}
+ !anglemeta(JavaScript functions or exposed code)
+\end{newsegment}
+\end{insDLJS*}
+\end{dCmd}
+\egroup
+\PD The environment takes two parameters, the first is optional, but required
+when using the \app{Acrobat} Distiller. The nested environment \texttt{newsegment} takes
+one required parameter.
+\begin{description}\def\NH{\hspace{-\labelsep}}
+\item\NH\texttt{[\meta{js\_var}]} is an optional parameter, its use is discouraged.
+
+\item\NH\meta{base\_name} is an alphabetic word with no spaces and
+ limited to eight characters. It is used to build the names of auxiliary
+ files and to build the names of macros used by the environment.
+\item\NH\meta{script\_name\_i} is the script name (title) that appears in
+ the Document level JavaScript dialog of \app{Acrobat}.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Escaping}
+
+JavaScript uses the backslash as an escape character, just as does \TeX. The insdljs pacakge
+tries to make the transition from {\TeX} to JavaScript as easy as possible. In the table below,
+is a listing of the more useful characters represented by a backslash.
+
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+Sequence & Character represented \\
+\cs{t} & horizontal tab (\cs{u0009}) \\
+\cs{n} & newline (\cs{u000A}) \\
+\cs{r} & carriage return (\cs{u000D}) \\
+\cs{"} & double quote (\cs{u0022}) \\
+\cs{'} & apostrophe or single quote (\cs{u0027}) \\
+\verb|\\| & backslash (\cs{u005C})\\
+\cs{xXX} & the Latin-1 character specified by the two hexadecimal digits \texttt{XX} \\
+\cs{uXXXX}& the unicode character specified by the four hexadecimal digits \texttt{XXXX} \\
+\cs{XXX} & the Latin-1 character specified by the octal digits \texttt{XXX}, between \\
+ & 1 and 377. \\
+\end{tabular}
+
+\newtopic Within a JavaScript string, these special characters should be double escaped, \verb|\\|, like so:
+
+\newtopic \pushButton[\textFont{Arial}\CA{Push Me}\A{\JS{%
+ app.alert("The \\"cost\\" of this package is \\u20AC 0.\\rThis, \\"\\\\\\" is a backslash");
+}}]{demoEsc}{}{11bp}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\pushButton[\textFont{Arial}\CA{Push Me}\A{\JS{%
+ app.alert("The \\"cost\\" of this package is \\u20AC 0.\\rThis,
+ \\"\\\\\\" is a backslash");
+}}]{demoEsc}{}{11bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic Note the double backslash of backslash, which comes out to four, count them four backslashes,
+`'\verb|\\\\|''.
+
+Again, both JavaScript and \TeX, certain punctuation marks have special meaning; in the case of
+JavaScript, punctuation has a special meaning within regular expressions:
+\begin{flushleft}
+\textbf{Special Punctuation in Regular Expressions}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+ ^ $ . * + ? = ! : | \ / ( ) [ ] { }
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{flushleft}
+\noindent When these occur in a regular expression, within a string, they need to be double escaped, \verb|\\|.
+Outside of a sting, they need only be escaped.
+
+\Example The following code searches through the string \texttt{str} and
+replaces every occurrence of the period character with ``\verb|\.|''.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+str = "AcroTeX rocks. AcroTeX rolls."
+str = str.replace(/\./g, "\\.");
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent When this code is executed, the result is
+``AcroTeX rocks\verb|\.| AcroTeX rolls\verb|\.|''.
+
+\Example If one of these special characters appears outside a
+JavaScript string, within a regular expression pattern, for example,
+they need only be escaped. The code \verb|(/\)\^\(/.test(str))|
+searches the string \texttt{str} for any occurrence of ``\verb!)^(!''
+and returns \texttt{true} if such a pattern is found, \texttt{false}
+otherwise. If \verb!str="(x+1)^(3)"!, the search returns \texttt{true}.
+
+\subsection{Access and Debugging}
+For those who do not have \textsf{\app{Acrobat}}, the application,
+unless you are writing very simple code, writing and debugging
+JavaScript will be very difficult. From the \app{Acrobat} Reader,
+there is no access to the document JavaScript. You will be
+pretty much writing blind.
+
+Normally, I develop the JavaScript from within \app{Acrobat}. The GUI editor
+does check for syntax errors, giving you a chance to correct some simple
+errors as you go. After I am satisfied with my code, I copy it from the
+editor and paste it into a \texttt{insDLJS} environment. This is how the
+JavaScript code of \textsf{exerquiz} was developed.
+
+In my opinion, if you want to develop rather complicated code, having the
+full \app{Acrobat} product is a must. (This implies that the Windows or Mac
+platform is needed!)
+
+\subsection{JavaScript References}
+
+The JavaScript used by \app{Acrobat} consists of the core JavaScript plus \app{Acrobat}'s JavaScript extensions.
+The \textit{Core JavaScript Reference}~\cite{tech:NetscapeJSReference} may be found at
+\mlhref{http://developer.mozilla.org/en/docs/JavaScript}{Mozilla Developer Center}.
+The documentation for the \app{Acrobat} extensions may be found in the guides
+\textit{JavaScript for \app{Acrobat} API Reference}~\cite{tech:AcroJSRef}
+and \textit{Developing \app{Acrobat} Applications using JavaScript}~\cite{tech:AcroJSGuide}, both of which I've had a hand in writing. These
+are found at \href{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/}{\app{Acrobat} Developer Center}. (Click on \textbf{JavaScript for \app{Acrobat}} in the right-hand navigation panel.)
+
+\section{Open Action}
+
+This package also defines an \cs{OpenAction} command to introduce actions that are
+executed when the PDF document is opened on page~1. The open action command only
+applies to page~1.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily\string\OpenAction\darg{\meta{action\_code}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\OpenAction{!meta(action_code)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdLoc This command must appear in the preamble of the document.
+
+\CmdDescription Executes the action(s) each time page~1 is
+opened. The argument \texttt{<action\_code>} is any action subtype, as listed
+in Section 8.5.3 of the \emph{PDF Reference, sixth edition, PDF
+1.7}. Two common types are JavaScript and Named actions. The \cs{OpenAction}
+command may be repeated, which will add to the list of open actions
+to be executed at the opening of page~1.
+
+Special commands are defined in \textsf{insdljs}, \cs{JS} and \cs{Named}, that
+make it easy to specify these types of actions.
+
+\Example \verb|\OpenAction{\JS{app.alert("Hello World!");}}|
+
+\Example You can use \cs{r} and \cs{t}---carriage return and tab,
+respectively---to format multiple lines of JavaScript:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\OpenAction{\JS{%
+ app.alert("Hello World!");\r
+ app.alert("Good Day to You!");
+}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\Example Multiple \cs{OpenAction} can be entered. Code is executed in the same order.
+Here, we show an alert box with a message, then jump to the last page.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\OpenAction{\JS{app.alert("AcroTeX rocks the world!");}}
+\OpenAction{\Named{LastPage}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic For the other pages, beyond page~1, \cs{thisPageAction} can be used;
+the command can also be used for page~1 as well (it must go in the
+preamble).
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily\string\thisPageAction\darg{\meta{open\_script}}\darg{\meta{close\_script}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\thisPageAction{!meta(open_script)}{!meta(close_script)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdLoc For page~1, this command must go in the preamble, otherwise, it
+goes on the page for which it is intended.
+
+\CmdDescription \meta{open\_script} is an action that is to be
+executed when the current page is opened; \meta{close\_script} is an
+action to be executed when the current page is closed.
+
+\Example Below is a simple example of how to use \cs{thisPageAction}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+...
+\thisPageAction{\JS{console.println("Open: page 1");}}
+ {\JS{console.println("Close: page 1");}}
+\begin{document}
+page 1
+\newpage
+page 2
+\thisPageAction{\JS{console.println("Open: page 2");}}
+ {\JS{console.println("Close: page 2");}}
+...
+\end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+When \cs{thisPageAction} is executed in the preamble,
+the \texttt{<open\_action>} argument gets passed to
+the \cs{OpenAction} command.
+
+\section{The \textsf{execJS} Environment}
+
+This is an environment useful to PDF developers who want to tap into
+the power of JavaScript. To use this environment, the developer
+needs \app{Acrobat}~5.0 or higher. \textsf{pdftex} or \textsf{dvipdfm} can
+be used to produce the PDF document, but the developer needs
+the \app{Acrobat} product for this environment to do anything.
+
+The \texttt{execJS} is used primarily for post-distillation
+processing (post-creation processing, in the case of \textsf{pdftex}
+and \textsf{dvipdfm}). The \texttt{execJS} environment can be used,
+for example, to automatically import named icons into the document,
+which can, in turn, be used for an animation.
+
+The \textsf{execJS} is an environment in which you can write
+verbatim JavaScript code. This environment is a variation on
+\textsf{insdljs}, it writes a couple of auxiliary files to disk; in
+particular, the environment creates an \texttt{.fdf} file. When the
+newly produced PDF is loaded for the first time into the viewer
+(\app{Acrobat}, not Reader), the \texttt{.fdf} file generated
+by the \textsf{execJS} environment is imported, and the JavaScript
+executed. This JavaScript is \emph{not} saved with the document.
+The syntax of this environment is\dots
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily\string\begin\darg{execJS}\darg{\meta{name}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\begin{execJS}{!meta(name)}
+....
+!anglemeta(JavaScript code)
+....
+\end{execJS}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\PD The environment takes one required argument, the base name of the
+auxiliary files to be generated.
+
+Many of the more useful JavaScript methods have security restrictions,
+the developer must create folder JavaScript that can be used to \emph{raise
+the privilege} of the methods.
+
+\Example Here is an extensive example taken from the AeB Pro distribution.
+The following code is user folder JavaScript code, see the AeB Pro documentation
+on how to locate the user JavaScript folder. We define a function \texttt{aebTrustedFunctions}
+that is the interface to accessing the restricted methods.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+/*
+ AEB Pro Document Assembly Methods
+ Copyright (C) 2006 AcroTeX.Net
+ D. P. Story
+ http://www.acrotex.net
+ Version 1.0
+*/
+if ( typeof aebTrustedFunctions == "undefined") {
+ aebTrustedFunctions = app.trustedFunction(
+ function ( doc, oFunction, oArgs ) {
+ app.beginPriv();
+ var retn = oFunction( oArgs, doc )
+ app.endPriv();
+ return retn;
+ });
+}
+// Add a watermark background to a document
+aebAddWatermarkFromFile = app.trustPropagatorFunction (
+ function ( oArgs, doc ) {
+ app.beginPriv();
+ return retn = doc.addWatermarkFromFile(oArgs);
+ app.endPriv();
+});
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+Once this code is installed in the user JavaScript folder, and \app{Acrobat} is re-started, the code
+is ready to be used. The way the code is used is with the \texttt{execJS} environment.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\def\bgPath{"/C/acrotex/ManualBGs/Manual_AeB.pdf"}
+\begin{execJS}{execjs}
+ aebTrustedFunctions( this, aebAddWatermarkFromFile,
+ {bOnTop: false, cDIPath: \bgPath} )
+\end{execJS}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic This is the code used to prepare this manual. It places a
+background graphic on each page of the document. When the newly
+distilled document is first opened in \app{Acrobat}, (version 7.0 or
+higher, is when the privilege bit started to appear), the trusted
+function \texttt{aebTrustedFunctions} is executed with its
+arguments. Looking at the definition of
+\texttt{aebTrustedFunctions}, what is executed is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+app.beginPriv();
+ return retn = this.addWatermarkFromFile({bOnTop: false,
+ cDIPath: "/C/acrotex/ManualBGs/Manual_AeB.pdf"});
+app.endPriv();
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic AeB Pro, the {Acro\!\TeX} Presentation Bundle and @EASE use these execJS techniques.
+
+\section{The \textsf{defineJS} Environment}\label{defineJS}
+
+When you create a form element (button, text field, etc.), you
+sometimes want to attach JavaScript. The \texttt{defineJS}
+environment aids you in writing your field level JavaScript. It too
+is a verbatim environment, however, this environment does not write to an auxiliary
+file, but saves the contents in a token register. The contents of
+the register are used in defining a macro that expands to the
+verbatim listing.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily\string\begin\darg{defineJS}[\anglemeta{tex/latex\_cmds}]\darg{\meta{Cmd}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\begin{defineJS}[!anglemeta(tex/latex_cmds)]{!meta(Cmd)}
+...
+!anglemeta(JavaScript code)
+...
+\end{defineJS}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\PD The \texttt{defineJS} environment takes two parameters, the
+first optional. the required parameter is the command name to be
+defined. Use the optional first parameter to modify the verbatim
+environment, as illustrated in the example below. The
+\texttt{defineJS} is a complete verbatim environment: no escape, and
+no comment characters are defined. You can use the optional
+parameter to create an escape character. You can pretty much use
+any character you wish, \emph{except} the usual one `\verb+\+',
+backslash.
+
+\Example The following example illustrates the usage of the \texttt{defineJS} environment.
+\begin{dCmd*}{.67\linewidth}
+% Make @ the escape so we can
+% demonstrate the optional parameter.
+\def\HelloWorld{Hello World!}
+\begin{defineJS}[\catcode`\@=0\relax]{\JSA}
+var sum = 0;
+for (var i = 0; i < 10; i++)
+{
+ sum += i;
+ console.println("@HelloWorld i = " + i );
+}
+console.println("sum = "+sum);
+\end{defineJS}
+\begin{defineJS}{\JSAAE}
+console.println("Enter the button area");
+\end{defineJS}
+\begin{defineJS}{\JSAAX}
+console.println("Exiting the button area");
+\end{defineJS}
+\pushButton[\A {\JS{\JSA}}
+ \AA{\AAMouseEnter{\JS{\JSAAE}}
+ \AAMouseExit{\JS{\JSAAX}}}
+]{myButton}{30bp}{15bp}
+\end{dCmd*}
+\newtopic The code of \cs{JSAAE} and \cs{JSAAX} are so simple, the \texttt{defineJS} environment
+was really not needed. A simple \cs{newcommand} definition would have been sufficient.
+
+\newtopic See \Nameref{lengthyJS} for an additional example of the use of the \texttt{defineJS} environment.
+
+\newpage
+%\appendix
+\markright{Appendix}
+\part{Appendices}\label{appendix}
+%\section*{Appendix}\label{appendix}
+% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}Appendix}
+
+\appendixsubsection{The Annotation Flag \textsf{F}}
+%\addcontentsline{toc}{appendixsubsection}{\protect\numberline{}The Annotation Flag \textsf{F}}
+
+The annotation flag \textsf{F} is a bit field that is common to all
+annotations.
+
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{>{\small\ttfamily\bslash}l>{\small}l}
+\multicolumn{2}{>{\bfseries}l}{Annotation Flag \textsf{F}}\\\hline
+\multicolumn{1}{>{\bfseries\small}l}{\hypertarget{tableF}{Flag}} &\multicolumn{1}{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Description}\\
+FHidden & hidden field \\
+FPrint & print\\
+FNoView & no view\\
+FLock & locked field (PDF 1.4)\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+In the user interface for \app{Acrobat}, there are four visibility
+attributes for a form field. The table below is a list of these,
+and an indication of how each visibility attribute can be attained
+through the \textsf{F}.
+
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{>{\small}l>{\small}l}
+\bfseries \hypertarget{visibility}{UI Description}&\bfseries Use\\\hline
+ Visible (and printable) & \\
+ Hidden but printable & \verb+\F{\FNoView}+\\
+ Visible but doesn't print & \verb+\F{\FNoPrint}+\\
+ Hidden (and does not print) & \verb+\F{\FHidden}+ \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\redpoint All fields created by the \textsf{eForm} commands are
+printable by default.
+
+
+\newpage
+
+% Field Flags /Ff
+% Choice : Pushbuttons, Checkboxes, Radio Buttons
+% Text Fields
+% Choice Fields: list box, combo box
+% Signature fields
+\appendixsubsection{Annotation Field flags \textsf{Ff}}
+%\addcontentsline{toc}{appendixsubsection}{\protect\numberline{}Annotation Field flags \textsf{Ff}}
+
+The table below lists some convenience macros for setting the \textsf{Ff} bit field.
+
+\begin{longtable}{>{\small\ttfamily\targ}l>{\small}l>{\small}l}
+\multicolumn3{>{\bfseries}c}{\hypertarget{tableFf}{Annotation Field flags} \textsf{Ff}}\\\hline
+\multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Flag}& \multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Description}&\multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Fields}\\
+\endfirsthead
+\multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Flag}& \multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Description}&\multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Fields}\\
+\endhead
+FfReadOnly? & Read only field & all \\
+FfRequired? & Required field (Submit) & all \\
+FfNoExport? & Used with Submit Action & all \\
+FfMultiline? & For Multiline text field & text\\
+FfPassword? & Password field & text \\
+FfNoToggleToOff? & Used with Radio Buttons & Radio only\\
+FfRadio? & Radio Button Flag & Radio if set\\
+FfPushButton? & Push Button Flag & Push button\\
+FfCombo? & Combo Flag & choice\\
+FfEdit? & Edit/NoEdit & combo\\
+FfSort? & Sort List & choice\\
+FfFileSelect? & File Select (PDF 1.4) & text\\
+FfMultiSelect? & multiple select (PDF 1.4) & choice\\
+FfDoNotSpellCheck? & Do not spell check (PDF 1.4) & text, combo\\
+FfDoNotScroll? & do not scroll (PDF 1.4) & text\\
+FfComb? & comb field (PDF 1.5) & text\\
+FfRadiosInUnison? & radios in unison (PDF 1.5) & radio\\
+FfCommitOnSelChange? & commit on change (PDF 1.5) & choice\\
+FfRichText? & rich text (PDF 1.5) & text\\
+\end{longtable}
+
+\newpage
+
+\appendixsubsection{Supported Key Variables}
+%\addcontentsline{toc}{appendixsubsection}{\protect\numberline{}Supported Key Variables}
+
+Below is a list of the keys supported for modifying the appearance
+or for creating an action of a field. If the default value of a
+key is empty, e.g., \verb+\Ff{}+, then that key does not appear in
+the widget. The \app{Acrobat} viewer may have a default when any
+particular key does not appear, e.g. \verb+\W{}+ will be
+interpreted as \verb+\W{1}+ by the viewer.
+
+\newtopic In the past, the value of the \Cs{textColor} key must include the color model specification:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \texttt{g} (for gray scale): a single number between 0 and 1; example, \verb!\textColor{.5 g}!
+\item \texttt{rg}: Red Green Blue: a list of three numbers between 0 and 1 giving the components of color; for example \verb!\textColor{.1 .2 .3 rg}!
+\item \texttt{k} Cyan Magenta Yellow [K]Black: a list of four numbers between 0 and 1 giving the components of the color according to the subtractive model used in most printers; for example \verb!\textColor{.1 .2 .3 .4 k}!
+\end{itemize}
+In this current version of \textsf{eforms}, the color model can be optionally included. The \textsf{eforms} package will supply the correct specification as a function of the number of arguments provided. Thus, the examples above can now be written as \verb!\textColor{.5}!, \verb!\textColor{.1 .2 .3}!, and \verb!\textColor{.1 .2 .3 .4}!.
+
+\newtopic\textbf{\textcolor{red}{Note:}} Regarding the keys \Cs{textColor}, \Cs{BG}, \Cs{BC}, and \cs{Color}\footnote{Information regarding the \cs{Color}
+key may be found in \hyperref[linkAnnots]{Section~\ref*{linkAnnots}},
+page~\pageref*{linkAnnots}. The \cs{Color} key is more fully documented in
+the rather comprehensive article
+\textsl{\href{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/aebblog/aeb_links.pdf}{Support
+for Links in AeB/eForms}} posted on the
+\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{AeB Blog}.},
+beginning with \textsf{eforms} dated 2010/07/23 or later, \textsf{eforms}
+now uses the \textsf{hycolor} package to process all color keys (listed
+above); consequently, if the \textsf{xcolor} package is also loaded on
+your system, you can use \emph{named colors} to specify color for the
+\textsf{eforms} keys. For example, if the definition was made
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\definecolor{myBlue}{rgb}{0.24,0.38,0.68}
+\end{Verbatim}
+then each of the following is valid: \verb!\textColor{myBlue}! (for specifying text color for text fields), \verb!\BG{myBlue}! (for specifying the background color of a field), \verb!\BC{myBlue}! (for specifying the border color of a field), and \verb!\Color{myBlue}! (for specifying the border color of a link).
+
+\newpage
+\begingroup
+\setlength{\extrarowheight}{3mm}\setlength{\tabcolsep}{3pt}
+
+\begin{longtable}{>{\small\ttfamily\targ}r>{\small\PBS\raggedright}p{2.25in}>{\small}p{1.25in}}
+\multicolumn{3}{>{\bfseries}c}{Supported Key \hypertarget{kv}{Variables}}\\
+\multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Key}& \multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Description}&\multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Default}\\\hline
+\endfirsthead
+\multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Key}& \multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Description}&\multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\small}l}{Default}\\\hline
+\endhead
+%----------------------------------------------------------------
+\multicolumn{3}{l}{\color{blue}Entries common to all annotations:}\\
+F? & See the \hyperlink{tableF}{annotation \textsf{F} flag Table} &\verb+\F{}+\\
+\multicolumn{3}{>{\small\bfseries}l}{Border Style Dictionary (BS)}\\
+W? & Width in points around the boundary of the field,
+ for example, \verb+\W{1}+. &\verb+\W{}+\newline (same as \verb+\W{1})+\\
+S? & Line style, values are \texttt{S} (solid), \texttt{D} (dashed),
+ \texttt{B} (beveled), \texttt{I} (inset), \texttt{U} (underlined); \verb+\S{B}+ &\verb+\S{}+\\
+AA? & Additional actions, a dictionary. These actions are triggers by mouse up, mouse down,
+ mouse enter, mouse exit, on focus, on blur events; for text and editable combo boxes there is also
+ the format, keystroke, validate and calculate events. The various triggers are discussed in
+ \nameref{triggers}.
+ & \verb+\AA{}+ \newline(no actions)\\
+A? & Action dictionary, use this to define JavaScript actions, as well as other actions,
+ for mouse up events. See \nameref{triggers} for a discussion of the mouse up event.
+ & \verb+\A{}+\newline(no action)\\
+Border? & Used with link annotations, an array of three numbers and an optional dash array.
+ If all three numbers are 0, no border is drawn &\verb+\Border{0 0 0}+\newline (no border)\\
+D? & (link annotations) An array of two numbers that set the dash pattern of a link annotation.
+ The default is 3, which means 3 points of line, 3 points gap.
+ A value of \cs{D\darg{3 2}} means three points of line, followed
+ by two points of space.\\
+AP? & Appearance dictionary, used mostly in {\AcroT} with check boxes
+ to define the `On' value. &\verb+\AP{}+\\
+AS? & Appearance state, normally used with check boxes and radio buttons when there are
+ more than one appearance. Advanced techniques only. &\verb+\AS{}+\\\hline
+%--------------------------------------------------------------
+\multicolumn{3}{l}{\color{blue}Entries common to all fields:}\\
+TU? & Tool tip (PDF 1.3), for example, \verb+\TU{Address}+. Obeys \texttt{unicode} option.&\verb+\TU{}+\\
+Ff? & See the \hyperlink{tableFf}{Field flag \textsf{Ff} table}; e.g. \verb+\Ff{\FfReadOnly}+
+ makes the field read only. & \verb+\Ff{}+\\
+DV? & Default value of a field. This is the value that appears when the field is reset;
+ e.g., \verb+\DV{Name:}+. Obeys \texttt{unicode} option.&\verb+\DV{}+\\
+V? & Current value of the field; for example, \verb+\V{D. P. Story}+. Obeys \texttt{unicode} option.&\verb+\V{}+\\\hline
+%--------------------------------------------------------------
+\multicolumn{3}{l}{\color{blue}Entries specific to a widget annotation:}\\
+H? & Highlight, used in button fields and link annotations. Possible values
+ are \texttt{N} (None), \texttt{P} (Push), \texttt{O} (Outline), \texttt{I} (Invert); e.g.,
+ \verb+\H{P}+.&\verb+\H{}+\newline(same as \verb+\H{I}+)\\
+%\pagebreak
+\multicolumn{3}{>{\small\bfseries}l}{Appearance Characteristics Dictionary (MK)}\\
+MK?& A dictionary that contains the keys listed below. For all fields
+ the \texttt{MK} has a template that is filled in using the keys below; this key
+ is available only for check boxes and radio buttons. & various\\
+R? & Number of degrees the field is to be rotated counterclockwise.
+ Must be a multiple of 90 degrees; \verb+\R{90}+.&\verb+\R{}+\\
+BC?& The boundary color, a list of 0 (transparent), 1 (gray), 3 (RGB) or 4 (CMYK)
+ numbers between 0 and 1. For example, \verb+\BC{1 0 0}+ is a red border.
+ &\verb+\BC{}+\newline(transparent)\\
+BG?& Background color. Color specification same as \cs{BC}&\verb+\BG{}+\newline(transparent)\\
+CA?& Button fields (push, check, radio) The widget's normal caption; e.g. \verb+\CA{Push}+,
+ in the case of a push button. For check boxes and radio, the value of
+ \cs{CA} is a code that indicates whether a check, circle, square, star, etc.
+ is used. These codes are introduced through \cs{symbolchoice}. Obeys \texttt{unicode} option.&\verb+\CA{}+\\
+RC?& Push button fields only. The roll over text caption. Obeys \texttt{unicode} option.&\verb+\RC{}+\\
+AC?& Push button fields only. The down button caption. Obeys \texttt{unicode} option.&\verb+\AC{}+\\
+mkIns?& A variable for introducing into the \texttt{MK} dictionary any other key-value pairs not listed above.
+ Principle examples are \texttt{I}, \texttt{RI}, \texttt{IX}, \texttt{IF}, \texttt{TP},
+ which are used for displaying icons on a button field. See an
+ example in the demo file \textsf{eforms.tex} &\verb+\mkIns{}+\\
+I? & (push buttons only) an indirect reference to a form XObject defining the buttons's
+ \emph{normal icon}&\verb+\I{nIcon}+\newline(example)\\
+RI? & (push buttons only) an indirect reference to a form XObject
+ defining the buttons's \emph{rollover icon}&\verb+\RI{rIcon}+\newline(example)\\
+IX? & (push buttons only) an indirect reference to a form XObject
+ defining the buttons's \emph{down icon}&\verb+\I{dIcon}+\newline(example)\\
+TP? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{\upshape{0|1|2|3|4|5|6}}}} (push buttons only; optional)
+ A code indicating the \texttt{layout} of the text and icon; these codes are
+ 0~(label only); 1~(icon only); 2~(label below icon); 3~(label above icon); 4~(label to the right of icon);
+ 5~(label to the left of icon); 6~(label overlaid on the icon). The default is 0.&\verb+\TP{0}+\\
+SW? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{\upshape{A|B|S|N}}}} (push buttons only; optional) The \emph{scale when key}. Permissible values are \texttt{A} (always scale),
+ \texttt{B} (scale when icon is too big), \texttt{S} (scale when icon is too small), \texttt{N}
+ (never scale). The default is \texttt{A}. &\verb+\SW{A}+\\
+ST? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{\upshape{A|P}}}} (push buttons only; optional) The \emph{scaling type.} Permissible values are \texttt{A}
+ (anamorphic scaling); \texttt{P} (proportional scaling). The default is \texttt{P}.
+ &\verb+\ST{P}+\\
+PA? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{num\SUB1\space num\SUB2}}} (push buttons only; optional) The \textit{position array.} An array of two numbers, each
+ between 0 and 1 indicating the fraction of left-over space to allocate at the left and bottom
+ of the annotation rectangle. The two numbers should be separated by a space. The default value, \verb!\PA{.5 .5}!,
+ centers the icon in the rectangle. & \verb!\PA{.5 .5}!\\
+FB? & \texttt{\darg{true|false}} (push buttons only; optional) The \emph{fit bounds} Boolean. If \texttt{true}, the button appearance
+ is scaled to fit fully within the bounds of the annotation without taking into consideration
+ the line width of the border. &\verb+\FB{false}+\\\hline
+%--------------------------------------------------------------
+%\pagebreak
+\multicolumn{3}{l}{\color{blue}Entries common to fields containing variable text:}\\
+Q? & \texttt{\darg{0|1|2|empty}} Quadding for text fields. Values are \texttt{0} (left-justified),
+ \texttt{1} (centered), \texttt{2} (right-justified); e.g., \verb+\Q{1}+.
+ &\verb+Q{}+\newline(left justified)\\
+\multicolumn{3}{>{\small\bfseries}l}{Default Appearance (DA)}\\
+DA? & Default appearance string of the text in the widget. Normally, you just
+ specify text font, size and color. Can be redefined, advance techniques needed.&\\
+textFont? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{font-spec}}} Font to be used to display the text &\verb+\textFont{Helv}+\\
+textSize? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{num}}} The size in points of the text &\verb+\textSize{9}+\\
+textColor?& \texttt{\darg{\ameta{color-spec}}} The color of the text.
+ There are several color spaces, including
+ grayscale and RGB; for example, \verb+\textColor{1 0 0 rg}+,
+ gives a red font. Recent advances in parsing this command have eliminated the
+ need to include the color space specification. Thus, \verb+\textColor{1 0 0}+
+ also gives a red font.
+ &\verb+\textColor{0 g}+\\\hline
+%------------------------------------------------------------------
+%\pagebreak
+\multicolumn{3}{l}{\color{blue}Entries specific to text fields:}\\
+MaxLen? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{num{\upshape|empty}}}} The maximum length of the text string input into a text field.
+ Used also with comb fields to set the number of combs.
+ Example, \verb+\MaxLeng{15}+.&\verb+\MaxLen{}+\\\hline
+%------------------------------------------------------------------
+\multicolumn{3}{l}{\color{blue}Entries specific to signature fields:}\\
+Lock? & This key is used to lock fields after the signature field is
+ signed. Example, \verb+\Lock{/Actions/All}+. See
+ \autoref{sigfields}, page~\pageref*{sigfields} for more examples.
+ &\verb+\Lock{}+\\\hline
+%-------------------------------------------------------------------
+%\pagebreak
+\multicolumn{3}{l}{\color{blue}Specialized, non-PDF Spec, commands:}\\
+rawPDF? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{PDF-KVPs}}} If all else fails, you can always introduce key-value pairs
+ through this variable. &\verb+\rawPDF{}+\\
+autoCenter? &\texttt{\darg{y|n}} There is a centering code that attempts to give a pleasant
+ placement of the field. \verb+\autoCenter{n}+
+ turn auto centering off.&\\
+inline? & \texttt{\darg{y|n}} If \mlcs{inline\darg{y}}, an alternate method is used
+ get a better vertical positioning. Designed for inline form fields.
+ The default is \mlcs{inline\darg{n}}.\\
+presets? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{\cs{cmd}}}} This commands takes a macro as its argument, the text of the macro
+ are key-value pairs. This is useful for setting up a series of
+ presets for fields. Example, \verb|\presets{\myFavFive}|\\
+symbolchoice? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{symbol-choice}}} Use this variable to specify what symbol is to be used
+ with a check box or radio button. Possible values are
+ \texttt{check}, \texttt{circle}, \texttt{cross},
+ \texttt{diamond}, \texttt{square} and \texttt{star}. Can
+ be used to globally change the symbol choice as well; for
+ example, \verb+\symbolchoice{check}+, which is the
+ default value.\\
+linktxtcolor? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{named-color{\upshape|empty}}}} The value of this variable is a named color and is the
+ color of the link text. Only recognized
+ in link annotations. A value of
+ \verb!\linktxtcolor{}! paints the text the \cs{normalcolor}.&\cs{linktxtcolor}\newline\verb+ {\@linkcolor}+\\\hline
+\multicolumn{3}{l}{\color{blue}Special link key-values used by \pkg{aeb\_mlink} and \pkg{annot\_pro}}\\
+mlstrut? & \texttt{\darg{\ameta{strut}}} Adjusts the height of a multi-line link, e.g., \verb!\mlstrut{\large\strut}!
+ &\verb~\mlstrut{\strut}~\\
+mlcrackat?& \texttt{\darg{\ameta{num{\upshape|empty}}}} Used to break a multi-line link across a page boundary;
+ specifying \verb~\mlcrackat{3}~ breaks the link after the 3rd syllable. The \pkg{aeb\_mlink}
+ package then creates two links consisting of the text up to and including the crack-at value and
+ the second link consisting of the rest of the hypertext link (or url) string.
+ &\verb~\mlcrackat{}~\\
+mlhyph? & \texttt{\darg{y|n}} A key that takes `y' or `n' as its value. If `y' is passed, then a hyphen is inserted after
+ the break in a multi-line link that crosses a page boundary.
+ & \cs{mlhyph\darg{n}}\\
+mlignore? &\texttt{\darg{\upshape0|1}} An internal switch used in building multi-line links and text markup annotations
+that cross page boundaries. \emph{Do not use}.
+ &\cs{mlignore\darg{0}}\\
+mlcrackinsat? &\texttt{\cs{mlcrackinsat\darg{\ameta{latex-content}}}} This key inserts
+its argument after the hyphen (if there is one) at the point declared by the \cs{crackat} value.
+& \cs{mlcrackinsat\darg{}}
+\end{longtable}
+\endgroup
+
+%The JavaScript used by \app{Acrobat} consists of the core JavaScript plus \app{Acrobat}'s JavaScript extensions.
+%Core JavaScript can be found at \href{http://developer.mozilla.org/en/docs/JavaScript}{Mozilla Developer Center}.\footnote
+%{\url{http://developer.mozilla.org/en/docs/JavaScript}}
+%and documentation of the \app{Acrobat} extensions can be found in the guides \texttt{JavaScript for \app{Acrobat} API Reference}
+%and \emph{Developing \app{Acrobat} Applications using JavaScript}, both of which I've had a hand in writing. These
+%can be found at the \href{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/}{\app{Acrobat} Developer Center},\footnote
+%{\url{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/}}. Click on \textbf{JavaScript for \app{Acrobat}} in the right-hand navigation panel.
+
+
+\newpage
+\markright{References}
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{[1]}\label{references}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}References}
+
+\bibitem{tech:NetscapeJSGuide}
+ \textit{Core JavaScript Guide}, available from \href{http://developer.mozilla.org/en/docs/JavaScript}{Mozilla Developer Center}.
+
+\bibitem{tech:NetscapeJSReference}
+ \textit{Core JavaScript Reference} available from \href{http://developer.mozilla.org/en/docs/JavaScript}{Mozilla Developer Center}.
+
+\bibitem{tech:AcroJSGuide}
+ \textit{Developing \app{Acrobat} Applications using JavaScript}, available from
+ \mlhref{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/}{\mbox{\app{Acrobat}} Developer Center}.
+
+\bibitem{tech:AcroJSRef}\hypertarget{references}{}%
+ \textit{JavaScript for \app{Acrobat} API Reference},available from
+ \href{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/}{\app{Acrobat} Developer Center}.
+
+
+\bibitem{tech:PDFRef}
+ \textit{PDF Reference, sixth edition, PDF 1.7}, available from
+ \href{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/}{\app{Acrobat} Developer Center}.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+\def\@eqautoCenter#1{\let\autoCenter=#1}
+\let\autoCenter=y
+\def\@eqsymbolchoice#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname eq@#1\endcsname\relax
+ \typeout{exerquiz: `#1' is not an acceptable option
+ for \string\symbolechoice, inserting default, `check'.}
+ \edef\symbol@choice{\eq@check}\else
+ \edef\symbol@choice{\csname eq@#1\endcsname}\fi
+}
+\def\eq@protect#1{\let#1=\@empty}
+
+
+% \begin{localJS}
+% \begin{defineJS}{\validateJS}
+% if (event.value > 1000 || event.value < -1000) {
+% app.alert("Invalid value, rejecting your value!");
+% event.rc = false;
+% }
+% \end{defineJS}
+% \textField[\AA{
+% \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(2, 0, 1, 0, "\\u0024", true);}
+% \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(2, 0, 1, 0, "\\u0024", true);}
+% \AAValidate{\validateJS}}]{myTexta}{1.5in}{12bp}
+% \end{localJS}
+
+% \textField[\AA{
+% \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(2, 0, 1, 0, "\\u0024", true);}
+% \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(2, 0, 1, 0, "\\u0024", true);}
+% \AAValidate{%
+% if (event.value > 1000 || event.value < -1000) {\r\t
+% app.alert("Invalid value, rejecting your value!");\r\t
+% event.rc = false;\r
+% }
+% }
+% }]{myTexta}{1.5in}{12bp}
+
+9.0:Close|GeneralInfo|Quit|FirstPage|PrevPage|NextPage|LastPage|ActualSize|FitPage|FitWidth|FitHeight|SinglePage|OneColumn|TwoPages|TwoColumns|ZoomViewIn|ZoomViewOut|ShowHideBookmarks|ShowHideThumbnails|Print|GoToPage|ZoomTo|GeneralPrefs|SaveAs|FullScreen|OpenOrganizer|Scan|Web2PDF:OpnURL|AcroSendMail:SendMail|Spelling:CheckSpelling|PageSetup|Find|FindSearch|GoBack|GoForward|FitVisible| ShowHideToolbarCommenting|ShowHideToolbarEdit|ShowHideToolbarFile|ShowHideToolbarFind|ShowHideToolbarForms|ShowHideToolbarMeasuring|ShowHideToolbarData|ShowHideToolbarPageDisplay|ShowHideToolbarNavigation|ShowHideToolbarPrintProduction|ShowHideToolbarRedaction|ShowHideToolbarBasicTools|ShowHideToolbarTasks|ShowHideToolbarTypewriter|PropertyToolbar|ShowHideArticles|ShowHideFileAttachment|ShowHideAnnotManager|ShowHideFields|ShowHideOptCont|ShowHideModelTree|ShowHideSignatures|InsertPages|ExtractPages|ReplacePages|DeletePages|CropPages|RotatePages|AddFileAttachment|FindCurrentBookmark|BookmarkShowLocation|GoBackDoc|GoForward |DocHelpUserGuide|HelpReader|rolReadPage|HandMenuItem|ZoomDragMenuItem|ShowHideToolbarEditing|Annots:Tool:InkMenuItem
+9.2:Close|GeneralInfo|Quit|FirstPage|PrevPage|NextPage|LastPage|ActualSize|FitPage|FitWidth|FitHeight|SinglePage|OneColumn|TwoPages|TwoColumns|ZoomViewIn|ZoomViewOut|ShowHideBookmarks|ShowHideThumbnails|Print|GoToPage|ZoomTo|GeneralPrefs|SaveAs|FullScreen|OpenOrganizer|Scan|Web2PDF:OpnURL|AcroSendMail:SendMail|Spelling:CheckSpelling|PageSetup|Find|FindSearch|GoBack|GoForward|FitVisible|ShowHideToolbarEditing|ShowHideToolbarCommenting|ShowHideToolbarEdit|ShowHideToolbarFile|ShowHideToolbarFind|ShowHideToolbarForms|ShowHideToolbarMeasuring|ShowHideToolbarData|ShowHideToolbarPageDisplay|ShowHideToolbarNavigation|ShowHideToolbarPrintProduction|ShowHideToolbarRedaction|ShowHideToolbarBasicTools|ShowHideToolbarTasks|ShowHideToolbarTypewriter|PropertyToolbar|ShowHideArticles|ShowHideFileAttachment|ShowHideAnnotManager|ShowHideFields|ShowHideOptCont|ShowHideModelTree|ShowHideSignatures|InsertPages|ExtractPages|ReplacePages|DeletePages|CropPages|RotatePages|AddFileAttachment|FindCurrentBookmark|BookmarkShowLocation|GoBackDoc|GoForwardDoc|DocHelpUserGuide|HelpReader|rolReadPage|HandMenuItem|ZoomDragMenuItem| Annots:Tool:InkMenuItem|CollectionHome|CollectionDetails|CollectionPreview|CollectionShowRoot
diff --git a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/examples/webeqtst.pdf b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/examples/webeqtst.pdf
index b86521f4..f3a8c054 100644
--- a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/examples/webeqtst.pdf
+++ b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/examples/webeqtst.pdf
Binary files differ